penrice-1873

1 DICTIONARY AND GLOSSARY

THE KOR-AN, WITH

COPIOUS GRAMMATICAL REFERENCES AND EXPLANATIONS OF THE TEXT.

BY

J O H N P E N R I C E , B . A .

Adam Publishers & Distributors Shandar Market Chitli Qabar Delhi- 1 10006

First Edition 1873 Reprint in India 1991

Printed in India Published by S. Sajid Ali for Adam Publishers & Distributors Shandar Market Chitli Qabar Delhi-110006

1 Printed at : Shah Offset Printer 1614, Rodgran, LaJ Kuan, Delhi-6 Ph. :7522725 I -

P R E F A C E .

T HAT a competent knowledge of the Kor-&n is indispensable as an introduction to the study of Arabic literature will be admitted by all who have advanced beyond

the rudiments of the language. From the purity of its style and elegance of its diction it has come to be considered as the standard of Arabic even by those who have no belief in its pretensions to a divine origin, while so great is its authority among the followers of Mohammad, that it would be difficult to name a work by any Mussulman writer which does not abound in allusions to its precepts or in quotations from its pages.

I t is not to be expected that all the transcendant excellencies and miraculous beauties discovered in the Kor-an by its commentators and others should immediately unveil themselves to our cold and unsympathizing gaze ; beauties there are, many and great ; ideas highly poetical are clothed in rich and appropriate language, which not unfrequently rises to a sublimity far beyond the reach of any translation ; but it is unfortunately the case that many of those graces which present themselves to the admiration of the finished scholar are but so many stumbling-blocks in the way of the beginner; the marvellous conciseness which adds so greatly to the forco and energy of its expressions cannot fail to perplex him, while the frequent 1 : ~ of the ellipse leaves in his mind a feeling of vagueness not altogether out of char,! +or in a work of its oracular and soi-disant prophetic nature.

It has been the privilege of the Kor-&n rather to impose its own laws upon grammar than to accept them from other sources ; and as it was written originally without vowel points, it is not surprising that a good deal of difficulty has been experienced in framing rules to meet the various readings that have thence crept in.

The following pages have been compiled in the hope that they may prove of service to the beginner in mastering some of the difficulties to which I have referred; they will be found to contain much, which to the more advanced student may appear trivial or unnecessary, but which will not be without value if it lighten the labours of those for whose use the book is principally designed; it has no claim to originality, it merely presents to the reader in a succinct form that which the writer has culled for his benefit from the works of others.

I The edition of the Kor-&n which I have chogen for my text is that by Fluegel, 1 printed at Leipzig in 1834; the Concordance by the same author has been my I sheet-anchor throughout. Each word will be found under its verbal root ; where ,

none exists it must be looked for in its alphabetical place ; so also in the case of

PREFACE.

' words which have seemed likely to puzzle the beginner; many of these have been separately arranged in their alphabetical order, but withdrawn a little within the

"Ãˆ<- - marginal line ; thus for example the word &u may be looked for either under &or 'under its root '11. The vowel of the aorist has been given where it is known ; I have generally added the original meaning, and where such meaning is not to be found in the Kor-an the words are printed in Italics. I must here claim indulgence for the fault-if fault it be-of having given the English of the infinitive instead of the third person singular of the preterite, or grammatical root of the verb; it seems more convenient and less roundabout to say that <Ã‘',. means to strike, although no one would be likely to commence the study of the Kor-&n without being fully aware that the word should in strictness be rendered He struck" ; while upon this point I may observe that although there is no true infinitive in Arabic, the abstract noun :* noun of action frequently supplies its place ; the letters n.a. merely refer to the forms of the different' nouns of action, not necessarily to their meaning ; this also cpplies to the participles, written part. act. and pass. ; these names have been retained for convenience sake, and mark the form only of the verbal adjectives, which, h i n g constantly employed as substantives, are generally so rendered.

It is hardly necessary that I should offer any apology to my readers for the frequent references I have made to De Sacy's Grammaire Arabe; the study of the French language is now so universal, as almost to render a translation supeduous ; the letters D. 8. Gr. etc. refer to the second edition.

I have not, as a rule, thought it necessary to notice the various readings of disputed passages, nor the numerous interpretations of the same passage which abound in the Commentaries; those who may wish to extend their researches in this direction win find an ample field in the works of the two great authorities El ~eidawie aid Ez-Zamakhsharie; the Commentary of the former, as being the more grammatioal, is the one I have generally consulted. Free use has been made of the Dictionaries of Freytag and Johnson, principally the former ; to them, as well as to Sale's well-know! translation, my acknowledgmentsare especially due.

From the many careful revisions the work has undergone, both previously, and also in passing through the press, I have good grounds for hoping that but few typographical errors have escaped detection ; entire freedom from such is hardly to be expected, but the short table of errata will, I feel confident, comprise the greater part; for all other shortcomings I must seek the indulgence of my readers, trusting that my humble efforts may have provided for them in the words of my title 4 4 A clue of elucidation to the intricate passages of the For-ftn."

B~AMUTOM Lopom, NOIXICH, J. PENRICE. 3rd JWrMMy, 1873.

DICTIONARY

THE KOR-AN.

A prefixed particle answering to the Latin nut or an, Whether? Is i t ? When the first a two consecutive propositions begins with 1 and the second with ,3, both may frequent);

0 #A*.<, be taken in a dubitative aense ; aa 7 +d 0 b . b { 0' ft+ fI 2 v. 6, "Whether thou warn them or whether thou warn them not ;" 1 is oftel found prefixed to other particle*, u, Ã§_&Â " Art thou verily ? " ;= $7 &$ , 00

16 v. 73, " Do they then deny the beneficenci of God?" When this particle is followed bj another1 one of them is generally omitted aa iÃ§ for ; so likewise when followet by Wegla, in which case the alif of union ii uppreued, a* %I for 'All, etc. D. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 71 and 99. * % = Ã‡Â aor. i. and o. To mow. <- l ace. Irfl That which the earth produces as food.

*TJ plur. of &I for q. v.

&i5\ - . (2nd declension) pi. of $2~ (Pen- \ 6obleto.

4

wrl for J see &I for >I.

aor. i. and o. To be wild (an aaimal) ; aor. i.

To remain in a place. I Eternally, ever, for ever.

$1 Abraham ; a noon of the second declendon,, of Hebrew origin, D. 8. Gr. T. 1 , p. 404.

J/\ and 3 1 pen. sing, aor. iv. and ii. forms - Ã‡ * of \J q.v. 3 aor. a. and i. To flee (with a\), properly, as

a slave. J To be or have many camels. 3; and Ji

Camels ; generic noun like sheep, pl&. (J-Jq (2nd declension) Flocks (of birds).

Ibleei, Satan, ~ e e 3. y?l for > from -J q.v.

ilfI for y A father; when in connexion with a complement, nom. Ã§ ? gen. ->I, ace. fl; & 6 for Ã‘i 6 O! my ath her; D. 8. Or. ,

T. 2, p. 91 ; Dual ^y\ Parents, and in connexion I*JI, oblique sf. , as 321 and &? His two parents ; Plur. $T Fathers, ancestors, for xi? like Jlfl, the final , being changed into hamza after 1 quiescent ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 97 and 113.

s 4 plur. of q.v. )\ nor. a. and i. To dislike, diodain, refuse, to

be averse from (with 21, and also with q), as $ >\t 17 V, 101, "But the

1

wicked have rejected (the truth) or only (receive it) with ingratitude." -2, 0 00 ^u~, viii. f. of J q.v. 3,

0. $\ viii. f. of q.v. 3 0 S.y\ I pers. sing. aor. v. f. of ^Sy q.v.

- . 21 aor. i. To come, come to (with ace. or with J); to bring to (with u of thing and ace. 0

of pers.) ; to pass, come to pass, come upon (with &); to do, commit (an act, with ace. or with +). pi for >\I, fern, % f \ part. act. onewho comes to, as *yi\ s 0 0 c. +I,!* .yÃ 11 v. 78, " Verily theft is coming

upon them a punishment." &L< part. pass. with an actiye signification, That which if come to pass; at 19 v. 62 i t has a futurt

9 ? b 0 0 '"

signification, thus, &I i^. "His promise will come to pasd'-^JT IV. To causf to come, bring, produce, give (with doublt BCCUB.). a. a. The bestowing of gifts - 7' & plur. ^y* part. act. One who gives Pass. &;I, or with the omission of the secont hamia, &i D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 97; Ex G>3iT I;! , 'dT; A phrase which is exactlj rendered in colloquial English by "Those wh( have been given the Scripture;" D. 8. Qr T. 2, p. 125.

&I aor. a. i. and o. To be luxuriant. c->G Household stuff, any thing which constitute^ wealth. :S\m 3.

3' aor. o. and i. To relate ; to excite, raise (dust s-s

with ace. and u). Js\ A trace, footstep ; Plur s0 .i ,UT Traces, -. m&uments of antiquity. i,'G

A relic.->\ IV. To choose, prefer (with acc and &).

/I st-I [^\ nor. i: To befirmly rooted. $1 (generic noun)

Tamarisks. 1.1 0 I

51 nor, o. and a. To pronounce guilty, and $ nor. a. .Z

s " To sin. Ãˆ> n. a. A sin, guilt, iniquity. *U 5 ./Ã

Punishment ofwickedness. ^\ part. act. One 3 L who sins, an evil-doer, ->j A wicked person.

5 i-' - ,& n.a. 11. f. Accusation of crime. -1 aor. o. To bum. t\y\ Bitter, aalt (water). >\ viii. f. of q.v.

f ?l. 1 a 0

-I pass. viii. f. of iÃ‘ q.v. s 0 A\$ plur. of L_)+ A sepulchre.

-1 nor. o. and i. To pay wages, serve for hire. fl n.!. A reward; ~ l u r . s y a - \ Wages, doivcrs.

0 0 t-i, -3 is-il X. To hire. To& a, term. J?-? A cause, the sake, as

>- &I Lrf on that account.1p :>I A fixed term, predetermined period. - J l I I To appoint a fixed term (with ace. and J\ a r.# 0 AK part. pass. with act. signification, as ^ -

a l p 4 ,

\yyi 3 v. 139, "According to the Book which fixes the appointed term of all things." For this adverbial use of the accusative see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 67, et sea.

^.a 5 ' 0 0 plur. of u+ fr. q.v. ' s0 c . 1 - G 0 0 0 0 4

&?\ plur. of cL.Ã from q.v. 0 3 wages, P I U ~ . of'^. -

&,&1 plur. of iJL^G, Tales. LLs^ iv. f. of K. q.v.

s 0 0 " ST-f plur. of see -. 0 6 0 ' lft-1 One, any one; em. 6-1, see +,,

s ' ,&I plur. o f s F and ,XÃ see J .. , 0u 1 0 0

+I see w. 0 'fc s 0 ' 0

-1 iv. f. of i~-wisl. q.v. s , l , Ã a

<AS>-< plur. of ^A+ q.v. 9 , b 1 A pit, from iter q.v.

A>. aor. o. To take, receive (with ace. and also with u) ; to accept, take away, punish, afflict (with ucc. of pers. and +, dl or &I; to make a compact (with & of pers. or with ace.); to seize upon, seize (with ace. or with + , of thing) ; to take in hand and arrange, as

9 ' .,'1 x i - , I ' , JÃ ^y UyÃ§ LAa^ JJ 9 v. SO, "We had ? 'I ordered our affairs beforehand." JLÎ n.a.

s - The act of taking, punishment. noun of unity, A punishment. GT part. act. One

< 0 - who takes. - 6 1 ' or AÃˆ- aor. & . 111. To punish (with ace. of pers. and u of the

0 -Â¥ 0,,L . crime).- J^J for 4 D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 236, VIII. To take, take to one's-self; with 1.

Ãˆ^ ,0"Â¥

i t means to beget, as 14 &I Â-1 2 v. 110, "God hath begotten issue;" to receive, make,

t, "W , /., 4 ,/' make for one's-self, as c-Âa.^ J I-; 29 v. 40, " Like the spider (who) maheth

'I -Â¥(.-Â¥s

for heraelf a house ; " at 38 v. 63 *&'Jiiia ~9 ,b,a-tf~

is for pbA-a^l I , the alif of union being suppressed after the interrogative particle 1, D. 8.

f 2' Gr. T. 1, p. 71 ; to hold or reckon, as J , 6 -0 0Li 09f p L - f

, <UJ 'I L& /^ 9 v. 100, " He con- eiders what he expends as a means of bringing

- 1 aor.Ja.2 To do a thing after another, do any-

s, -

thing last, defer, leave undone, put off (with . 8 . 4 /,<- /- .I.

ace. and >), at3 ^dl *yrf l j 1 3 11 0

v. 11, " And verily if we put off their punish-

I

I

ment;" to give a respite to any one (with

Fern. i,+ I Last, the last, the end, latter end ; , , -- f h L 4

& I I The last, the latest posterity ; GY I ,b ^ Lid

The next (life as opposed to Lid\ .->I 11.

- -a 0 ace. and &).-pt? V. To remain behind,

,,'-A

come after another.-_i-^_ij X. To stay be- A ^ i - r ^ ^

hind, delay, wish to delay. ,+ Lu part. act. One who tarries behind.

him nigh unto God;" to act, behave (with kindness), as at 18 v. 85 (with 2 of person). ? x t S 9 9

kAa n.a. Act of taking to one's-self. Aaev, .'b 0

part. act. One who takes. Â¡ No verbal root, the verb not being used in the

first form ; Latter, The last. for (2nd declension) Another, other, the latt ; Fern. ,a D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 351 ; Plur. 0 90,-

y,+I ; Fern, F1 for 3, the more form, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 359 and 407; p{ Jt 3 T. 147, " In your rear." 2 7 ,

0 ' -t. I 0 , - \ 2 pers. sing. pret. iv. f. of q.v. 0 * 1 0 , 0

s& } iv, f. of & q.v. s i U+l(2nd declen~ion) plur. of&.., rt. J>. q.v. 9 0 9 ~.^.1 aor. cond. 1 pers. sing. with affixed, from 'p q.v.

'; '* c \ for>1 ; when in connexion with a complement Â I n o . +I, gen. ace. a A brother;

Dual, ily, oblique and in construe 0 s - 6

tion I?\ and 2y-f ; Plur. and i,,lp}; the latter generally means companions or friends. Sl-1 for 9 A sister ; Plur. s 0, L-0 Li ~14 ; Dual @, oblique k t , , sea D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 358.

s 3 aor. a, i. and o. To fall on, oppress. 4 Stu- pendous, grievous.

L9 0 00 'Â¥^'\~ for $,I* 2 pew. plur. vi. f. of 5; q.v. î L5,Ial vi. f. of &: qqv- \,ST cauae to Come ; Ilnperat. ii. fe of^ qgv- *tz see i/.'l* 3 ,L

jk^m$* Imper8tive plural of TJ'J q.v*

5 s&S plur. of ,i<3 An adopted eon, rt. L-' q.v. j 3 iv. f. of 6 I.V.

/ I nor. a. To be tawny, f JT (2nd declension) Adam ; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 404. ^ Z ,p\ More vile, etc. fr. GJ q.v. ,' I

More grievous, fr. 3 3 q.v. >>;I nor. i. To become thick (milk). f\i\ for 3 2 '

Payment; the final 4 being converted intc hamzaafter \ quiescent; D.S.Gr. T. 1, p. 113.- .,-:I 11. To cause to come, to pay back

w 1 0 restore (with ace. and ; aor. ^yi as $3 "Then let him restore (it)."

and 121 Behold, if, when, then, at that time \j\ Then, in that case; These words are re- gardedby the Arab grammarians as indeclinabit nouns; They enter into composition with othei . Ãˆ L" words, as JÃ‘Ã and A^<-?/. Then, at that time,

^ 0 e, 0

on that day when; so also \iS\ after the in- Ã 0 2

terrogative particle \ as Id\ Is it then? etc, For the various effects produced by these particles upon the tenses of verbs the reader is referred to D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 171, et seq., and

L , also p. 522 : J\ and \J\ are constantly employed in the KorAn to commence a sentence

' 0 ' Â ¥

without any antecedent; the words 3 \^^\ "Remember what occurred," being then understood.

n -. 0 s e .

0

&\ plur. of y^ A chin, see 2.i. G J ~ 1 pen. plur. pret. iv. f. of JJ q.v, See also D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 246.

. f @ ? Ã‡ d+l plur. of a;, rt. Ji q.v. .s

0 . r .1 ^\ To give ear ; and (_,J 1 aor. a. To suffer, grani permisaion, permit (with J of pers. and (Ã‘ 01

thing, also with of the verb) ; to hearken tc (with J). Note. When the Imperative of thit

\ verb is preceded by <Ã‘ it is written $\s as a1 2 v. 279; see D. 8. Gr, T. 1, p. 232, note,

<J s '1 zi\ n. a. Permission. & Fcni. An ear; s ",- 5 / I 0 Ãˆ Plur. JJI . ^\^\ A declaration. - &\ 11.

t 1 To cry aloud, make a proclamation (with !. *.1. 1 or with <_J of thing). fi y part. act. A

0

public crier, a Muezzin.- ^jT IV. To make known to, proclaim to (with acc. of pers.);

$2,

to assure. - &b' V. To cause a proclama- tiort to be made, cause to be declared. -

0 ,<J> L e 1 L,' JL.1 X. To ask permission (with ,.,\ or with ace. of pers. and J of thing) ; at 9

0

VV. 44 and 45 it means to ask leave to be excused, to ask a dispensation ; see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 467, where this ellipse is explained,

ft <$ nor. a. To be hurt. i .s~ \ for .<;? D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 111 ; n.a. injury, ill-treatment, offence, annoyance, anything noxious, such as , illness or pollution. - IV. To injure, vex,

.\ 1 annoy, offend, afflict; aor. ; L*A&LJ 4 v. 20, " Then punish them both ; " properly, I ( do them both some injury" ; Commentators

differ as to what this injury should be; Pass. 0 .! i f .} 29 v. 9, for 9,1 for ~ . j f \ , see 3 v.134;

see also D. 8. Or; T. 1, p. 95, Â 187. hi? we &,la

air. i. To tie (a knot) tight, and aor. a. To want. n.a. want, a necessity, as u-. 4 ' 24 v. 31, " Who have no need UJV I* (of women)." <Ã‘Iil/ (2nd declen~ioo) plur. of $,k ~eceasi t ie; neccaaary uaea.

s A. - 3 . +k,l plur. of "J q.v. &I iv. f. of C; q.v.

viii. f. of "'J for ', q . ~ . ST>-. plur. of &- A side, rt. \y', q.v. &;(Put him off! See &;. , , 'V . , &,l iv. f. of ^L+, q.v.

C.3 for iv. f. of L; q.v. >? fern. The Earth, earth, land, a country. &"I Hor, i. and o. To feed on the tree &;I ( a

3 0 s camel). \ S\ (2nd declension) plur, of if-yl Thrones, couches. 'fl aor. i. To bite. 2 (2nd declension) Irem, the city of the tribe of 'Ad.

Ãˆ I perarsing. aor. of ^\, q.v. *,\ nor. o. and i. To make a loud crash, incite; d Ãk- 19 v, 86, " That they may incite them ;"

3 pers. fern. sing. aor. after the broken plural &&r; for the use of the aorist indicative when in dependnnce on another verb, see D. 8. Gr. T. I , p; 201. j f n.a. An instigation.

9 #I, pÂ¥y He 55 101' [J 00- ;,q To be strong. J-1 n.a. Back, loins.-i! IV.

To make strong. Ã j Azer (2nd declension), The name given to Abraham's father Terah ; derived from the Chaldean name of the .planet Mars.

LjI aor. a. To draw near. *S\\ The day of jndg- , 0

ment.

f a . S 6 0 4 4 '1 ~ I u T . of g~ j , rt. -9 q . ~ . ?I -f e* 4 5 s ^J To cry Is! Is! in driving sheep. - I/**""1\ 11.

To found, lay foundations (with ace. and A) ; a -

the logical root being uÃˆ Afoundation. (2nd declension) plur. probab/y of %y

w

from ,la-* q.v. > 0s

JÃ U (2nd declension) plur. of & A bracelet, - fr.,l-.q.v. 3 el. 5 -* Ã - p~ur . of v, rt. q.v.

gcTu lu r , of !& A tribe, rt. & q.v. 5 0 6 4 6 ,JÃˆ~>Ã Bilk of a thick texture, brocade ; possibly

derived from Â¥{Â to glitter.

0 0''. "l i_,i i. f of -f-'& for fÃ‘ q.v. 6 0 < 0 Ã‡ ' 4 x. f. of ( Ãˆ> q.v.

0. Lr 0 , i SL p. f. of ilÃ q.v. J j L j x. f. of Jj q.v. ? l x. f. of p q.v. ' Â 0 6

. +[ imperat, x, f. of i ' Ã q.v.

/<,^I# 4 0 JMJl X. f. of Jff. q.v. 0 t / b a ' . j p 1 imperat. X. f. of> q.v. iK-l x. f. of ;lS' q.v. 1-1 b <Â¥ s-i p w . x * f. of ^Ã q.v.

0 Li .fad6

t_i,+a\ fem. 3 pen. sing. x. f. of q.v. ' -:Lr00 ~ ~ t - r f j 1. f. of 3; q.v.

, b 0 . viii. f. of 6~ q.v. 0 f L 4 b x. f. of l/-i q.v. . .<.'-A y t ~ l x. f. of 3 q.v. s ' f a ,\ plur. of? The morning, r t . 7 q.v. Lrs Journey by night ! Imperat. iv. f. of & q v.

0 , s SL i< aor. i. To bind, make prisoner. A n.a. A l i p -

A s ment, a joint. A prisoner, captive; Plur. 63 and J'J, (2nd declenoion) ; the latter of these forms is restricted by De Sacy to words of the form 9 ; see his Grammar, T. 1, p. 369, 5 863.

bTSl(2nd declension) Israel ; a Hebrew word, . meaning Prince of Ood. Bee Genesis xxxii. 28.

iv. f. of i $ q.v., see ~loo>T. _6-i! aor. a. To be grieved. d grief, ao &f

for &f 12 v. 84, "Oh my grief! " or, "How great is my grief I I' D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 90, note. &? Indignant, or affected at the same time with grief and indipt ion.- -7 IV, To provoke to anger.

a 6 - . G S ?\ and 3 Ll , see l*->.

&\ (2nd declension) Islimoel, meaning in the Hebrew God shall hear.

0.9

,.,J aor. i. and o. To be putrid and stinging (water). Â¥ Ã - 6, - 8 0 Corrupt, putrid: p 0 I + l< 47 v. 16, " Of incorruptible water."

aor. o. T; be heated, sy A pattern, example worthy of imitation.

0 * &\ aor. a. To be sad, solicitous about (with &).

f -1.9 3 0 6 8 bLAl Separately; ace. plur. of LÃ‘ rt. L_-Ãˆ q.v, s'^* s - " < &?I plur. of s", rt. ^- q.v. f *'i$J (2nd declension) plur. of ^JJ, see A.

0.Ã 0 * ,A aor. o. To cut, saw; a n d 2 1 aor. a. To exult.

SI .M\ Insolent, an insolent person. $ Most wretched; comp. form of UL;* q.v. I&? I make my complaint; 1 pers. sing, aor.

^tff 1 pers. sing. aor. cond, of q.v. *,.t, AÃ§ To cover aver (ap t ) . - t b y * fern. part. pass

iv. f. Covered over, vaulted over. 08 Ã ,.d aor. i. To bind. , \ A covenant, burthen.

Ã§ s $0 + iv. f. of ,- q.v. &\ viii. f. of lt< q.v. f G0.0 0 00 &\ 1 pera. sing. pret. viii. f. of Ã§_ q.v. $7 iv. f. of L q.v. -

$7 plur. ^yA The lowest part, bottom, root ,U The evening ; Plur. $1 ; Plur. of Plur $7. 4 GÃ

"Ll plur, of doreal vertebr~, r t . 9 q . ~ Â¥\- i t . f. of 'X i for q.v.

e r Fi 1 pers. sing, aor. viii. f. of) q.v. ~1Ã iv. f. of fVi q . ~ .

fJS for 93, ? inlerrogttire, and viii. f. of iJt q.v.

090 -' *t,* l iv. f. of quadriliteral, rt. > q.v. ^ Ã 0<.s 1,1,1,1 Of different kinds; plur. ofJp, rt.;'i q.v.

0 f 0 JGJ iv. f. of u q.v. 0 0 ;\ viii. f. of l^c q.v.

00 ,,r J- viii. f. of \^e for,> q-v. * * 6- b+l see ^c. ,. 4 * 3 I M-\ p~ur . of.^^, rt. \AÂ q.v. s ^ ] - fi. ÃˆJ p ur. o f u , r t . 2 q.v. S ri, J\ \ A whirlwind, rt? q.v. f 1 0

AÃ§c 1 pers. aing. aor. iv. f. of J\C q.v. 00 G! 1 pen. plur. pret. iv. f. of l,i q.v. =.

plur. of Jc A collar, rt. Jc q.v. 06s , r &I iv. f. of ^yi q.v. &S

i_yf-\ iv. f. of ~ f ? q.v. 3 ~ o t a y 4 l F ~ ! aa^Â£st_> ~ ~ o n ~ o u both!

According to the author of the Kamoos there are forty different ways of spelling this word.

Â¥\ it. f. of 'Tj for "} q.v. ,Ãˆb iv. f. of GlS for ,j&i q.v. J$af "Do they then (believe) in that which i i 4 0

vain ?" 16 v. 74 and 29 v. 67 ; composed of the interrogative particle 7, the conjunction .Ã the preposition (_Ãˆ the article J, and the word Jk$ Vanity, or anything vain.

viii. f. of , iM q.v. $\ viii. f. of ~f} q.v. sf iv. f. of l~ q.v. G? '' Were we then exhau~ted ? " eomposed of

the interrogative the conjunction i_Ãˆ / <Â s r

and the first pen. plur. pret. $1 aor. i. To dress leather.

9 7 '" 53, v. 7, " And he (appeared) L? < ; in the highest point of the horizon," viz., the

Angel Gabriel. JUT plur. of ^\ Tracts or 0 . - l Ã *.

regions of the earth; ,jut,? k&l ~ J + J 0 . 0

41 v. 53, "We will show them our aigna in the regions of the earlh"; to wit, The con- quests of the true believers. ^Â¥ aor. i. To lie, cause to tell lies, or put on a false appearance, as at 7 v. 114 ; to turn aside (with 3); to fr~strate~render silly. &l Ã A falsehood, lying invention, lying, false; as , f f & . . . . ' h S U 3 7 v . 8 4 , "Do ye choose a falsehood (viz.5 gods, etc. ?" iS&jT is here put for 28 A great liar.-

s A ? l_ ',/* part, net. viii. f. which has a passive signification, That which is overthrown or . ^ ' s turned upside down; l The cities which were overthrown, viz. Sodom and Go- morrah.

3 aor. i. and o. To set (the sun). &\ part. act. That which sets.

s 0 c Y 01 plur, of > , rt. Ã£ q.v.

plur. of A mouth, see il> for iy. .6< &I I pera. sing. aor. of q.v.

s 0 iJW^T pinr. of $9, rt. A' q.v. (2nd declension) plur. of j'g plur, O!

j> A saying, discourse, see & for J;. . .. ^3 A definite time, for &&; rt. i._i, q.v.- c-5 11. (no 1st form) To fix a certain time. De Sacy, quoting El BeidMe, says in hie Grammar, T. 1, p. lG8,.note, that the word

which occan a t 77 v. 11 is for a;. i$i BOO G.

. 0 .. $1 fern. imperat. of Â¥Â¥ q.v.

+Ji. &(S pinr. of &tf Food, rt. i i q.v. ',/& 1 pen. sing. Â¥or of 3S for '.J q.v.

;3? iv. f. of \^S q.v. 5 n.a. iv. f. of is q.v. fÃˆ$ Clothe them ; Imperat. of l*S q.v.

$! aor. o. To eat, devour, consume (with acc. OF

with ^f, i ~ > , or 2.); to make use of, enjoy, as a t 4 v. 3; lkperat. 3, fern. 2. 3 n.a. The act of eating, a devouring; 87 In a greedy, devouricg manner. 31 Food, as fruit, or , *i Ã ˆ 0 ' . /K&. whatever is eaten; &\ \&-s- Q ~ I , 6 v. 142, "And corn, the food from which (is) various in kind ; " For the construction of this and similar sentences see D. 8. Or. T. 2, pp. 79 and 270. Jf\ part. act. One who eats. JB

s I",

Greedy, a great eater. J+t* part. pass. Eaten.

plur. of *( A bud, rt. 7 q.v. . s

and ,a1 plurs. of 3, rt. 3 q . ~ . f t The definite article, The; when not a t the he-

ginning of a sentence, it is always written with a Jrf, thus JT*; they then losea all sound and becomes mute. D. 8. Gr. T. 1 , p . 64.

s 3 aor. o. and i. To be shaken. i\ ace. of J\ Consanguinity, relationship. Freitag gives

as the root of this word. fl from 1 interrogative and f not ; Is it not ?

Are there not ? etc. JT for J,!, rt. JT for JJ q . ~ . Â¥U plur. of J1 , it. i1 for q.v. S1 for '.,1 That not ; u, that (I do) not, etc. I t

governs the aorist in the subjunctive mood. !\ for :\ Unlw, except, if not ; I t commonly

governs the accusative. For the rules of syntax connected with ?I see D. 9. Gr. T. 2, p. 403, et seq. * - A fern. form of q.v.

&T plur. of 4, see 4.

diminish, defraud with ace. of pen. [ b b , 0b.

and > of thing), Ã > ^_)I 1.; I f -

,

52 v. 21, l1 And we will not defraud them of any of their works."

k_tsll viii. f. of h_itl q.v. . $d\ n.a. iv. f. of i.2 q.v. *. t Ul n.a. iv, f. of ÃˆA^'-~.v

Ifb >I Join me; Imperat. iv. f. of 3 q.v. 4 - ~ j f (2nd declension) comparat. adjective fr. sq.v.

i f f l (He, the man) who, (him) whom, (the thing) 4 Ã ˆ 0 Ã

' which ; Fern. 2 1 ; Dual J j J l ; Plnr. &I; -&

fern. plur. and 3 ~ 1 ; De Sacy instead 4

of the l u t form gives and ; Bee his Grammar, T. 1, 1). 446 ; According to the rule given at 5 232, p. 113 of the same volume,

would seem to be the most correct way of spelling it ; see also his observations on these pronouns, or, as he calls them, conjunctive adjectives, vol. 1, p. 443, et seq., and vol. 2, p. 343, et sea. The antecedent is frequently omitted ; eee an instance a t 28 v. 14.

11 Lcttera placed at the commencement of the . 10th,-Utfr1-i2th, 14tb, and 15th chapten;

see -pJ-i. S L l

*\ plur. of ;tnJ , rt. .J q.v. dj aor, a. To lie accustomed (to a place), to join

together. A thousand ; considered by some as the root ; Dual oblique 27 ;

s r-l Plur. i^fi and &$I. - J l 11. To unite, join together, reconcile (with ,. I; aor. ^ ' Ã ˆ fern. pu t . p i u . Reconciled, a& Ã‡, P *.( ~ J J 9 v. 00, l1 And thow whoae heart8 are reconciled : " For the construction of this aentence see D. 8. Gr.T.2,p. 277.- 2fc.ln.1. iv.f, A compact, uniting together.

s -1.1 UUI see a. $7 iv. f. of la' q.v.

plur. of ^-fl A nickname. $7 iv. f. of 2' q.v. bf J! Am I not? Is it not? etc. from 1 interrogative ' and 7 not; used also in conjunction with otlier

b.01 b., particlea, u +\, +,I, 1 ;1, etc. 5 Letters found at the commencement of the

second and several other chapters of the Koran. Concerning the meaning of these and other letters found at the commencement of various chapters, differences of opinion have always existed among commentators ; but it is held by many of the ablest of the Mussulman Doctors that the true meaning has never been communicated to any mortal, Mohammad alone excepted. See Sale's Kodn, introduc- tory remarks, section iii. Note. These and similar letters are to be pronounced a t full length, alif, lam, meem, etc.

41 m. a. To su5er (pain). 2 1 painful. Ã‡f Letters a t the commencement of the thirteenth

chapter, aee 77. >**lT Letters at the commencement of the seventh

chapter, me Fi. 6 1 fl To ohm. dl; Dual oblique ; Plur. *yi'

A Deity, God. 31 God, he Ood, The only God; A word which embraces all the name0 by which the Mussulmans designate the Deity.

and $7 By God I 4 To God, belonging to God, as <Jj Â¥S 2 v. 151, " Verily we are God's." *91 A form of invocation, 0 God I The being added to compensate .the omhion of the particle 6 ; it is said to stand for,*: Â£S 27 $ " 0 God ! instruct u8 , ^ ' in righteousness I "

0 @f I t h u occupied you ; iv. f. of t ; q.v. and ,! 21 iv. f. of i.J q.v.

11 aor. o. To be wanting in duty, to fail (with ace c- / 0 /"/

of pen. and thing), a> $\-s- f 3 v. 114 'They will not fail to corrupt you." gy plur. of J? for 3, Benefib. -$ IV. fix

Ã * $7 (pouibly derived from an obsolete roo J) TO iwe8rJ vow abstinence from (wit}

, 1 r A), &a y^ 3 pers. plur. nor. at 2 v. 226.- *kt I, &\ VIII. To swear, aÃ & y1 . . . &S 24

v. 22, " Let not (the wealthy) swear that they will not give." Note. The ellipse of the negative is usual after an oath ; the oath itself implying a negation, unless there appear some precise indication to the contrary ; D. S. Qr. T. 2, p. 474.

',\y plur, of 3 A species, q.~. ^\ To, towardi, w fur w (but not including) ; For

the difference between $. and Ji see &; in ,on ,o ra t , a s&QT,+~& .Â¥Â£liu.a(^dv.8 "Verily he will gather you together on the day of resurrection;" with, or in addition to, aa, W J\ W \^ f 4 v. 2, 4 ' DO not devour their substance in addition to your own;" in this and similar instances there

0< * Ã ˆ Â appears to be an ellipse of the word + "by o(&/Ã it," or of some similarword ; 3 Ji Until. As a general role J\ indicates the term or limit beyond which an action does no1 extend.

(2nd declension) Eliu. && 37 v. Is0 I l y k n ; thia word is iupposed by wme to be the plur. of &ul and to mean Wu and his followem, but i t is probable that the temina- tion nrf is only added for the iake of the rhyme, and that both worde deeignate the Mme person ;

w -& and , Ã‘Ã are both names of Mount Sinai.

Or ; a conjuiiction generally wed in the aecond of two alternative propositions, the first of which is preceded by 7; both may frequently be rendered " whether ; " see I .

0 *- 7 aor. o. To seek, @end, propose. (J-<\ oblique plur. part. act. Those who seek, or are intend- ing (to visit). 7 A mother, Plur. ; origin, principle, a capital, place of abode, foundation, u L+W 3 v. 6, "The founda-

0

tion (or fundamental part) of the Book." Note. The contents of the Kodn are claaeed by Mohammad under two heads; the first, which is oiled t^w or the fundamental . part, contains those passages whose meaning is plain and obvious; the other portiona are metaphorical ; the words i-iqr at 13 T. 39 and 43 v. 3 mean " The original of the Book," and refer to the table on which God's decrees are recorded; it is also a name sometimes given to the opening chapter : The xnetnipolia, ~ e c c a : m. 149 for&T . Bon of my mother, D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 91, note; in some manuMriptc the words (< I;% at 20 v. 95 are written in one word c,, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 99. 21 Plur. I.! A people, nation, race, a party (especially of the Â¥am religion), a fixed and definite term, a certain time, a religion, u $1 & 43 vv. 21 and 22, " In the practice of a religion; " an Imam,

0 -Â¥ or model of religion. rlÃ§ Before; 76 . 5, " (For that which is) before him," i.e. "for the future." *G\ sing. and plur. ; the

s Plnr. of which ii ql A leader in religion, a

2

model, example, rule, pattern, or book for s -1

guidance or instruction. ^\ One who can neither read nor write, illiterate, an epithet of Mohammad, ignorant, Pagan, one who is ignorant of the Scriptures. \^\ As for; occasionally put for 7 Or that which, or what. cl Either, or whether, in which sense it requires to be repeated before each of the alternative propositions of a sentence ; D. S. Gr, T. 1, p. 573; instances however occur where instead of 1 1 being repeated, ii is substituted, thus, iÃ‡Ãˆfe' 1. sT'i-s'&y ,&[ 17 v. 24, " Whether one of them attain old age with thee or both of them :" when standing for lÃˆi If (the lÃ being expletive), no repetition is

->a/ - a , necessary, thus ,_;!Ã & *f_& LÃ 2 v. 36, * "And if a direction shall come to you from me."

iG\ plur. of Â£Ã A maid-servant, see l-7 forG7. , z zG A deposit, rt. & \ q.v.

Â¥ a. 0, &u plur. of AÃ‘< Desires, rt. ,,-Ã q.v. aor. i. To determine, to be curved. \1 \ A

curve, any thing which shows ups and downs. A A maid-servant, rt. l formT q.v. &\ viii. f. o f j c q.v.

,, , viii. f. of q.v. 3>Ã§ To be finished, and &I To be angry. a

Anger, the term of existence, a space, term, terminus.

$1 aor. o. To command, order, enjoin (with ,I oi J or with ace. of pera. and u of thing); '- " '( 0

0 ^ "0 &A 6 Ye order me," 89 v. 64,is f ~ r & , ~ \ i ; - 1mperat.y, when preceded by the conjunction

, ; it is writtenP1,, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p 2324 n.a, A command, decree, matter, thing,

business ; Plur. $1; 4 1 2 Of my owe

5 <- will. i\ A serious matter, a strange thing. 5 J-

11 part. act. One who commands. JC Prone. , A ' -*\ VIII, To take counsel together, de-

liberate about (with >Ã‘ ; lmperat.,^yl, and . - 0 <- \, with,, A.

y^\ gen. 21 A man, rt. \ < q.v. uJÃ Yesterday, (no verbal root).

plur. of $ An intestine. aor. o. To hope. n.a. Hope. jy iv. f. of i. q.v,

'yy\ am. a. To be secure, trust (with ace. of pera. and +* of thing), put trust in (with ace. of pers. and &), to be secure from (with ace.), as &TX; 'J i 6 7 v. 97, " For (no one) is secure from the stratagem of God." 21 n.a. Security; at2v.119 i t means a place of security. a - ^f\ part. act. One or that which is secure,

5 safe, secure. Faithful, trustworthy, secure. 1 1 Security. * i l~f A pledge, cove-

5 t - / nant, faith, a trust. i_ii * part. pass. Secured. A place of security.-ST IV. To make

sure or secure (with ace. of pers.) ; to have faith in, believe (with i_i). &l for yÂ£ D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 95, Â§18 and 187 n.a. A believing, faith, heartfelt belief, see :C). 5 2. . ,.t part. act. One who believes.- el P a s . $1 VIII. To be entrusted with the custody of anything.

t^fl Anything wished for, rt. ,Ã‘ q.v. 3 aor. o. To mem like a cat, to become a maid-

m m n t . 21 for 3 D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 358; A maid-servant ; Plur. %l.

>1 That, in order that, lest, that not; when fcUowcd by a verb in the aorist, such verb ia generally put in the subjunctive ; when put before a

noun or pronoun it governs it in the accusative, and is then written with the teshdeed Ã J. This conjunction is frequently used after j g or wmÃ similar verb, with an ellipse of

0 . ' the ward ''~ayVna,'~ thus, & i$; &A Jh &&T Ã§iS) l,-ti"d 26 v. 9, " And (remember) when thy Lord called unto Moses (flaying) go unto the wicked people;" when used in the sense of lest, for fear that, or in order that (it may) not, it is generally necessary as a rule that the preceding proposition should contain some word which carries with it the idea of prohibition, hindrance, or obstacle, M ; ~ y 1 Â £ $ 1 - ^ ~ i Â ¥ ~ u . c \ 1 8 v . 5 "Verily we put veils over their hearts that they should not understand it (the Kor&n)." The above rule however is by no means without exceptions, several of which occur in the KO& ; thus at 7 v. 171 \}& mint be rendered "lest ye should say," where there is an entire ellipse of the negative ; a similar ellipse is common in eau of an oath, we &, rt. $1.

l i d 3 That. 3 As though. fl That u, not, for YJ. -

'1 is uoed with every kind of prefix and affix, and may be rendered that, since, because ; when followed by the affixed pronouns M 21 etc. it loses its influence over the following noun; D. 0. Gr. T. 1, p. 667.

,',\ If, differs &om inasmuch M the former is limply mnditlond, u if (&) you are wim; while the latter supposes what is not the case, as if (^) you were wise ; this is made clear by - 40r ts:\

the following example : _, \i>aa"c Fs 36 v. 16, "If

you call upon them they will not hear your prayer, and if they heard they would not answer you? JJ gives a future ~ignification to verbs in the preterite, unleaa where ;>$ ia interposed, D. 0. Or. T. 1, p. 181, et uq. ; it has sometimes a negative meaning, as

J)" 3 2 11 v. 53, "My 0

reward is not (due) except from him who created me! "y and 7 for G11 and ' j. ,

6 ^ Ã

I like *,1 is b e d with almost every kind of u* prefix and affix ; when without an affixed pronoun it governs nouns in the accusative : i t has an affirmative meaning, and may generally be rendered verily, or indeed ; i t ia aometimea written without the teehdeed, and mast not then be confounded with the conjunction \ if.

called by the Arab 3 d,Ã. or particle of restriction, may frequently be rendered only ; the is occasionally a simple expletive, and the word has then the force of zl, but it no longer governs the accusative. De Bacy gives the rules for all these particles in his usual admirable manner, and to his Grammar I refer the reader for the fullest information on the subject.

iI I ; personal pronoun. (CT plor. of for >'I Hoar, ri. J\ q . ~ . $1 ace. piur. of $I, rt. e-fl q.v. Ã 5 ' phr. of dl, rt. _ j T q.v.

s " (collective noun) Creatures ; no verbal root. J \ (2nd declension) plur, ofAJ.^ Finger-ends.

rt. (LÃ q.v. *GI plur. of%, rt. L q.v. . .. 4 1 iv. f. of lu-u~ q.v.

0 0 'U yÃˆa vii. f. of ',Lg q.v.

+JI see 2. ii\ imperative of 2 q.v.

s 0 >m ,.. (2nd declension) plnr. of ^J or ..j A prophet, rt. q.v.

^+ 2 1 Thou ; personal pronoun masc. ; Plar. 4 ; Dual 1*2\. . &\ viii. f. of 4 q.v. ,'. 'f^\ viii, f. o f 2 q . ~ . ... ' \ viii. f. of,& q.v.

, . .I; ,,, viii. f. of+ q . ~ . ,..L

b + viii. f. of q.v. /, \) ,\ 3 pers. plur. viii. f. of & q.v.

, 9 ~1 To be soft (iron). $1 Plur. &Gl, A female; Oblique dual 3 1 .

5M plur. of 5 An idol, rt. 3 q . ~ . Ã &,I aor. a. To be familiar. 3 (collective noun)

s ^i-

Mankind, human beings, man. ,.iq common gender,.Man; Plur. fi (commonly contracted into &c). 21 A mm; Plur. (2nd

, <- declension); D, S. Gr. T. 1, p. 402.-, I IV. To render familiar, perceive (with acc. and \ ),-sw.' To be familiar, to ask per- uf1 5 '''6 * mission, beg pardon, ,,+.w* part. act. One who is familiar.

, ,, I 1 f s e O WL p ur. o 4, rt. +A q.v. tiGI iv. f. of LC q.v.

, ,( G I iv, f. of q.v. 3 aor. a. To turn up the nose at, togo before.

$7 Just now, lately : the logical root is iJi A nose.

JGl plur. of J*, rt, (.JJU q.v. .w } plur. of flu A soul, rt. Ju q.v. yAtiZ\ vii. f. of yli q.v. JGI plur. of & A fetter, rt. 3 q.v.

^\ aor. i. To arrive (the time, with J) ; to he boi&y hot. ^\ for 3 A fitting time, con-

Ãˆ , venient opportunity, as xq &^> 33 v.53, - '

"Without looking to his convenience." it for 3 part. act. Boiling hot (water); Fern. s 4,i. 3x7 plur. of JI for 21 D. S. Or. T. 1, p. Ill , A fitting time, a part of time; i'L'i

L

L

L

J

<Â

.C.3)T 20 v. 130, " The hours of the night." Time. &T plur. of 3x1 A vessel.

$ How, in what way, in what way soever, Where, whence, from whence ; D. 8. Gr. T, 1, pp. 185 and 205. i\ viii. f. of> q.v.

&'ti

People, a family or household ; 4 \ &f The people of the Book, i.e. Jews andChristians,

G - -6 /us also called,$$ \ JJ or, Those who have charge of the oracle8 of Ood ; &Y r&r Christians, , / * the people of the Ompel ; The inhabitants of Hell-fire ; worthy of (with genitive).

<Ã '3 AJAI plur. of $+, New moons, rt. 3 q.v. ^y plur. of & A desire, rt. ,_^Ã q.v.

1 Or, either, whether, unless ; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 571, and T. 2, p. 28.

S 6 , I Bee >i for ;;I. _/\I for aor. o. To return. Â¥Ã‘)\ n.a. The

ic t of returning. (-I'\JT A sincere penitent, one who frequently returns, one who turns ~eriously to God. (_^K A place of return.- - 6 Â¥- 1 11. To sing the praises of God by saying

4 , ,^1 Ãˆ $\ ub+; ,,9\ fern. imperative. a -t- s,, , , ~1 plur. of),, rt. $ q,v. S\iif pIur. of$;, rt. 2; q.v. &$I pass. viii. f. of &I q.v. s\<. A\ pint. of 3; An idol.

, , iv. f. of 3, q.v. ill for g, aor. Sf, for i,y' D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 104

To bend, oppress by its gravity. s G9Jf plur. of$\) A valley, rt. &) q.r. f+,1 pass. iv. f. of 241 q.v. S 't- s ,,, JbJf f i r . J rt.,j> q.va Lfl see L.y.

,, &I iv. f. of q.v. comparative and iv. f. of & q.v,

Ji iv. f. of 3) q.v, , (JT for J;l aor. o. To return, to be before. ST A

people, race, family, Jg, Fern. J',1 Fi& former, prior, the first beginning ; i j ^ f The ancients, those of former days.-,ffi 11. Tt briny back, explain. &k n.a. Interpretation, explanation, determination (of a dispute). -

d,1 These; plur. of 1.1 This; D. 8. Gr. T. 1,

&,I Those ; plur. of or &$ That; D.S.Gr.T. l ,p.440; &: )I, 1 Those of your's.

\A1 Oblique ; Fem. ^>g ; a plural adjective wanting the sing., unless, according to some, it is to be considered as a plural of;i Possessed of, endued with, as +mi' q.1 Those gifted with (understanding) hearts '"WjJ Those ' J^ in authority ; J*Ã 1 Women with child. Note. The 1 at the end of \},\ ia what is called i$,lrd,! or alif of precaution, to prevent

0

the final, being taken for the conjunction and. J\ comp. form of adj. fr. q.v. d Q J He &

s- $1 for 3 aor. o. To be tranquiI. y~ A time, moment ; 3 adv. Now, at this present time.

CJJW it Ah! alas / A compassionate person, one

who shows pity by frequently sighing, anv saying ah I or alas I aor. *\J (a verb hamzated and doubly imperfect), To betake one's-self for rest or shelter, have recourse to (with ^I); ,'L) 1 pers.

'$2, sing. aor. with the prefix & ; lylÃ " Then fly !" 2 pers. plur. imperat. D. 8. Or. T. 1, ,. p. 232 note. &T Plur. ST and <^p A sign, miracle, a name given to the verses of the Koran, each of which is held to be a miracle. ~J;<u A place of abode, mansion.- 4 IV. To care for, or receive as a guest, provide a refuge or abode for (with ace, and ^\) ; Aor. t, 9-

f\ Yea, verily ; uaed only in affirming by oath. s d pronoun of comm. geud. Whosoever, which-

ever, Who ? which ? What ? Whichever. a particle prefixed to pronouns in the accus. when "isolated" or not affixed ; i t is employed in cases where a verb governs two or more pronouns in the accus. one of which cannot be conveniently affixed ; D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 378 ; also where it is desired to place the pronoun

f t - ^ . <i before the verb, as JLixJ iÃ‡-5 in the opening chapter ; occasionally it is used in addition to

/*4- - a , the affixed pronoun, as &,G Li \A, 2 v. 38, i t And I, (or as for me), fear me ;" D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 461. a\ n.a. of. "11 for (_>;I q . ~ . i\ plur. of y, it. $1 for sJ\ q.v,

;fl When? fl^l n.a. iv. f. of JI q.v. l! for &I MI. i. To befirm. Â£ n.8. 8trength.-

*[! 11. To strengthen (with ace. and & or f-tf

v) ; aor. A;$ . .

I, I, d Their hands ; oblique plur. of J^, rt. r^ .. A>. q.v.

&,I and 8 (noun of unity) A wood ; &l l ,(Ã 4 GI The inhabitants of a wood near Midian,

to whom the prophet Sho'aib was sent. ^\ n.a. iv. f. of q.v.

"bO. for Ã i aor. i. To be unmarried. 2 6 1 (2nd declension) plur. of 7 An unmarried man or . - woman, whether single or widowed. U n.a. iv. f. of &I q.v. XI plur. of <-> " b

G . . .. - 1 see .

s 2,l p~ur. of ^\, rt. F l q.v. 21 Where ? whither? 6.1 Wherever, whither-

soever; D. 8. Qr. T. 1, pp. 185, 194, and 205. Art . thou verily? from 1 interrogative,

'1 and di' the affixed personal pronoun. qf or GI, Fem. an Interjection, 0 thou !

0 ye ! etc. ; it is followed by the substantive 0 t , Ã ‘

with the definite article JT, as (_w$ I -0 . I$

" 0 true believers I I 12 v. 70, " 0 ye of the Caravan 1 "

I * (Ã‘Â (2nd declension) Job.

u an inseparable preposition, prefixed to the word 0

it governs, which when a noun is put in the genitive; it has divers significations, as In, by, at, with, to, into, upon, for, or by reason of; from, (K ,1 &> 82 v. 6, "What hath educed thee from thy Lord? " 1 t is used with d, %, & and many other verbs to render them transitive, or join them to an in- direct complement, thua L J ~ " He brought . i t " ; literally, " he came with it." u is . frequently an expletive, when put before the complement of a negative proposition, as && aTlÃ 2 v. 69, l1 God is not negligentJJ ; Ã 0

it is also an expletive in some other cases, as \*+ 93 <S I 3 T. 43, " God is an all , sufficient witness." For the various usages of

see Do S.Gr. T. 1, p. 469, et seq. . J)\J Babel (2nd declension, D. S. Gr.T. l,p.404). . J J see 6 for^. 'sfirot/'. +k/'. Ã

,t? aor. a. To dig a well. 3 fern. A well. 0 s . ,9 aor. a. for &\i To be wretched, miserable;

, i . u. for 2 To be bad, miserable; the latter , is one of those anomalous verbs, named by the Arabs $T; -SM*IT Ju or " verbs of praise and blame," which are not conjugated, the only inflexion taken by $ being the feminine

0 % u "She was miserable; the vowel of 0

the first radical letter is suppressed, and that of the second is put in its place, see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 283, and T. 2, p. 221. 3 Severity,

5 #0 vengeance, valour, force. ( >Ã * Grievous. & part. act. Needy. (Bodily) misfortune.- s! VIII. To be grieved (with

b P " < . +) ; Y '' Be not grieved," 11 v. 38.

>or: 0. To cut cf the tail. 31 (2nd declension) Childless.

fi aor. i. and o. To cut, cut off,- i jSu 11. To cob off, with the idea of repetition ; . 4 v. 118, " Verily they shall cut off."

J aor. o. To cut off, separate.-J-SJJ n.a. I1 form,

A life of complete separation from the world and devotion to V. To devote one's- self wholly to Ood's service (with J\), as at 73 v. 8. aor. i. and o. To disperse, disseminate (with

5 , S *t-.

ace. and &. Sorrow. i_s+ Scat- s. ,>Â¥

tered, spread abroad.-+ part. pass. VII. f. Scattered abroad. ,. . aor. i. and o. To let w a t e r j o i s . - $ 3 VII. To burst forth (water), see21.

aor. a. To scratch the ground like a hen (with Ji). ,,. To slit a camel's ears. 7 Plur. J\ar and

Joe?*! The sea, a large body of water; 22 dual, T h e two bodies of water, viz., salt and

s. , fresh, tf . Baheera, the name given among the Pagan Arabs to a camel which they turned loose to feed, after slitting its ears.

Jl s . nor. a. To diminish, withhold what is due (with ace. of thing and & of pers. or with double ace.). J* A deficiency, small, trifling. & To slaughter ( a sheep) by cutting its throat, to kill one's-self with grief. part, act, One who frets himself to death (with ace. ol pers. and & or 3).

Jar aor. a. To be covetous, avaricious, covetoui of (with +). Ja Avarice.

1% aor. a. To begin, create (with ace, and also with bP1,. L 9 .

4; ,we " And they began (with) you (to assault you),"9 v. 13,-I$I IV. To create, make anew ; Aorist A&.

0.. s^ - u ~ i am. o. To make haste, J+ Bedr, name of a placenear Mecca; The moon when fu l l ; Plur, S 9 9 J,JJ . 94 . Haatily.

,0. S 0

~ J J am. a. To produce something new. ~ A J New, new-fangled. ^& The Creator, as maker oi

, a new creation.- C* VIII. To bring forward a novelty.

j& To change, f& For a change.- J& 11. To substitute, change one thing for another (with act. or with double ace. and w), &,G n.a. An exchange. J& part.'act. One who changes.- JJ IV. To substitute, give in exchange (with double ace.) - JG V. To

,^t-, ' exchange (with ace. and u),- J+) X. To 0

wish to exchange (with ace, and +) ; to put in the place of another (with ace. a n d s ) . J\&l An exchange,

, ,. s ., S t-9 fi aor. o. To be corpulent. ^AJ A body. +I plur. of SJJ 22 v. 37, Camels sacrificed at Mecca.

A) aor. o. To begin, to be manifest, to appear (with b y - /, a, J or >) ; to enter the mind ; *<1 I+ .; 12

v. 35,"Then it occurred to them." ,&A desert., i J for SJb part. act., see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p.

, 9 ,

I l l ; Plur. ,_,& A dweller in the country; tfi 4 d l & "At first thought," 11 v. 29.-

i f IV. To make to appear, show, manifest S b 9

(with <Ã‘ or with ace. and J). J^Ã for ^+ , . part. act. One who makes manifest. , a . aor. a. To sow.-,& 11. To dissipate, squander.

s - ^ 9 G.$ Profusely. l+part. act, A spendthrift. aor. a. To be pious, just, act justly towards (with

s - accus. of pers.) 5 Plur. jkT Beneficent, liberal, just, kind; Dry land as opposed to sea. s - Piety, kindness, that whichis just and proper. 4 S $2 plur. of j$ part. act. Innocent, pious.

I,, 3 - '1. 9 aor. a. To create. Plur. ^y. and If " Sound, free, innocent; with d, Clear, guilt-

s. l e a of; Ex. sp 9 [ 6 v. 78, "Verily I am innocent of that which ye asao-

3 . s.., ciate (with God)." same as a. i*\J

f 0' Immunity. $ A creature. part. act. The Maker, creator, ~od.-^J 11: TO absolve,

1.e 1 - 0 acquit; Ex. & jy^ 1; 12 v. 53, " I do not absolve myself,'' (also with ace. and &), yÃ part. pass. Absolved.-51 IV. To cure,

l a - / heal.- bi V. To free one's-self, clear one's- self (with &) ; f\^s 28 v. 63, " We are free (from them and turn) to thee."

0 . , S I P ^ To eat and drink in large quantities. @J

plur. of 2 A tower, sign of the Zodiac.- 0 ax,-: s-t-: yy V. To deck one's-self. cy n.a. The ornamenting one's-self in an ostentatious

0 -00 4,' . i. a< Â¥ manner ; Ex. &\^\ -y fly 1 33 v. 33, " Deck not yourselves with the ostentation of

s -.. f (the time of) ignorance." ' C . ~ part. act. Decking one's-self out.

0 '. Ã‘ To turn to the left, as a deer, which was thought unlucky ; and k. aor, a. To cease, leave off, quit.

aor. o. To i e cold. J^J n.a. Cold, cool, coolness. s 0. 9 Hail. part. act. That which cools, refreshes. .., ju To go forth, as out upon a plain (with ^jl, (J,

s ' or ^y) ; to be manifest (with J). j$ part. - .' act. One who goes forth ; *yb 18 v. 45, In an extended form, like a plain.-- 11. To make manifest (with J).

0

A partition or interstice, a bar; the abode of departed spirits, Hades ; No verbal root.

' ' aor. a. To be leprous, &? (2nd declension) y Leprous.

..0 aor. o. To shim, and J^ To be smitten with ~toniahment, to be dazzled. $ n.a. of

s.i.0i. ~ightning, thunderbolt. ,^Â¥~Â¥ Brocade, see p. 5.

3; aor. o. To kneel down Zike a camel, stand firm. 'S,/, Plur. t-J$ ~ ~ Ã § ~ i n g e . - i _ III. TO

bless (with ncc. and with & or &) ; Pass. s, , P . 0 0. L$$ . G b part. p a r . Ble8sed.- dJp VI.

PÃ -a 0 " // To be blessed ; dl\ 4LJ Literally, " God was blessed," or " Blessed be God ;" the Pre- terite being used for the Aorist in an optative sense in the same way as JG q.v. For this use of the Preterite see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 169. /. 9 To twist.- IV. To twist together and wake

s I,* firm, to fix, settle (a plan). iy part. act. . One who fixes upon a plan, 43 v. 79.

A.0 s A' ,y To demonstrate, convince. &n/ An evident proof. 1

.0 Â ¥ ~ To insert a lancet, rise (as the sun). b~ . part. act. Rising.

2 aor. o. To drive gently, to crumble to dust. s. '-a 6 . la^ n.a. A crumbling to dust ; (Ju\ -4

0 56 7.5, "The mountains shall be crumbled into dust," To do anything out of season, to be of an austere countenance. 2 part. act. Austere and dismal-looking.

i*J am. o. To expand, extend, enlarge, stretch, stretch forth (with ace. and J, & or 2). ^Ã n.a. Extension, expansion. & Excel- lence, increase of stature. &\M A carpet. &q part. act. One who stretchea out ; Jfl 7. 93, " Stretching forth their r^*

hands ; " Literally, " Stretchers forth of their hands ;" $& is here put for JÃ which loses i f l.l as being antecedent to &I ; the Alif is added as an Alif of precaution or

8 , 4

&$!i -.. d, the object of which is to prevent the final, from being taken for the conjunction

and; for the construction see D. 8. Or, T. 2, . * 9 L ' p. 183. u+ 5 v. 69, part. pass. fern. dual "(His two bands are) stretched out."

, /' +,+ To spit, to be tall. J ' Tall (as a Palm-tree). & To lookfierce.-jÃˆ- IV. To deliver over to

perdition, , ,, /a,-' -' ,-' J aor. i. To smile.-*Ã‘ V. Same as Ã‘Ã .

aL- 9 ) To peel o f f the hark. ,* and/*) A bringer of good tidings. ^J A man, men, human

,1- Ã

beings ; masc. and fern. sing. and plur, dJ . Good news; +$ 57 v. 12, " Good news to you ;" if is replaced by \ before the affixed pronoun, see D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 118. 3 A bearer of good t idings.-- 11. (used with accus. of person and v of the thing, or with j ) , To announce goodnews ; sometimes used L '/ <-/(/^.-< ironically; Ex. _),I L J J - ~ ?^_> 3 v. 20,

# ,

( 1 Then announce to them a painful punish- G-", 9

ment." ,-2Ã‘ p art. act. One who announces joyful news.--c 111. To goin unto(a wife).- , ,'. 4 IV. To receive pleasure from good news

-/ , ^ / L (with u of t h i n g ) . - 9 4 X. To rejoice, , 5-, I., I- 1

especially in good news (with +). i+ , part. act. fern. One who rejoices.

/Ã f , To see, look at (with u); to understand. S,, Plur. Sight, eye-sight, sense of seeing; $T 16 v. 79, " Like the

twinkling of an eye ;" In the plur. i t generally s -' means " Eyes." ,+ Seeing, a Seer, or

Beholder, One who sees or understands. s, , 9,-'/ iJ-! . Plur. L+ An evidence, evident argument or demonstration ; & 12 v. 108, d ( -', ' By a manifest demonstration." ii+ A

matter for contemplation.-p 11. To make to see, shew, make mani fes t . - - IV. To see, consider, cause to see (with ace. or with u of pers.) : For two different interpretations of

, .Lit ,a\ . . at 1 8 v. 25, and 19 v. 39 see -1 i t . f. , .-- S t - f

of -. ,.,a+ part. act. One who sees, that which renders evident, or enables one to see,

s L-' '. ^ visible, manifest.-, , . part. act. X. f. A clever and far-seeing person.

3ÃˆA An onion, and when used in a collective or generic sense, Onions.

5- \ To cut off a part, A part, a small - number (from 3 to 9 or to 5, or from 1 to 4,

, ' " 6

or from 4 to 91, also seven ; _ -.- 12 v. 42, " A few years;" is here put in the accus. as indicating the circumstance of time, see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 69. ZL& A portion of goods, sum of money, merchandize.

L //- '.PL

)Ã To be slov.-& I I . To retard ; & IA-, , a t '-9, ^Ã L 4 v. 74, " And verily there is (a portion) of you who tarry (or cause to tarry) behind." Note. I n cases where the 2nd form of a verb has a neuter signification, the Ellipse of a complement may frequently be inferred ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 133.

aor. o. To split; ')w aor. a. To be insolent. Careleamess, insolence.

^a> aor. i. and o. To lay hold, take or seize by force, make an onslaught upon (with +I.

Â¥ '

iWlll n.a. Force, violence, vengeance. Force, power, severity. aor. o. To be in vain, perish. J part. act. That which is vain, false, falsehood, vanity ;

9 H - f f

&'Jl is the opposite to $-If, see 13 v. 18.- I u\ IV. To cause to be in vain, frustrate,

3

- -

make ineffectual. JLl part. act. b e who deals in vanities. 1

inner vest; metaphorically, An intimate friend, 3 v. 114 ; Plur. (2nd declension) Inner . linings, 55 Y. 64.

& aor. a. To send (with ace. and J, +, and 0 0 &, alao with $1; to milie manifest, HUM

up, raise from sleep or from the dead (with

3 nor. o. To enter into the inmost parts of anything, to lie hid. ')Ã n.a. Plur. 3 Belly, interior part. 36 part. act. That which is hidden, inner part, indde, interior. An

ace. of pen.), Ã§ n.a. The resurrection. 16

~L

5 "Â¥ part. pass. Sent, raised from the dead.- . ./!, 5 ' < f +! VII. To be sent. uL+\ n.a. The

0

being sent. ..C,

j i ~ To scatter abroad, turn upside down, tear forth. To be far off, go a long way off, perish; - '/, ..*.a 4 9 ',.. C .Ã 6d1 fc,. I.&JJJW 9 v. 42, " The way seemed far to them." & when used as an adverb is indeclinable, Afterwards, again ; when employed as a preposition it is used in the Accusative Am, or in the genitive if preceded by ,, as , After, see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 508, and T. 2, p. 152. A distance;

^ t f , .Â lG Away with; J@ \A>- Y l 11 v. 63, " W m it not (said), Away with 'Ad 1 " & Diatant,

S . s c , far off, remote, as J^U y, 60 v. 3, "A return remote from the imagination, or from .. 0 possibility ."-A+ 111. To cause a distance to

S * t f 9 intervene (with 2) M at 34 v. 18.- part. paes. IV. f. Far removed. . ,

JU To become full gmvn (a camel). 2 comm. gend. A full-gro wn, camel. 3 A portion of anything, some; one mother; 1

' 5# / 0 . 6 , Ã ˆ C i * '4 BI.,JJ l/Ã§J AÃ§ &I 2 v. 84, " Set ye down,an enemy one to another ;" used for both s., 9.

muc. and fern. and for all numbers. <bÃ§

A gnat ; verbal root & To he stung by gnats. am. a. To be in a married state. & Baal, a

? 0 > 9 husband ; Plur. dfi . 3 aor. a. To come upon suddenly. On a

sudden, suddenly. JIM aor. o. To hate. "6 (2nd declension)

Violent hatred. > A m/e; Pinr. J& Mules.

3 nor. i. To transgress, paaa beyond bounds ; to seek, desire (with double ace. or with ace. and

c . JI , d, or &) ; to act unjustly or ~nsolently towards (with J.c of pers. or .Ã§ of thing). s'" n .a. Injustice, injury, oppmion, iniquity ;

In an insolent manner, 3 A harlot. *\M Fornication, k ' part. act. for 3, we . ^ D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. I l l , Desiring, lusting.- Ã‘Ã‡- VII. To be fit and proper, becoming, easy, desirable, suitable, expedient (with J and VIII. To de~ire, covet, aeek, aeek for (with acc.md dl d, J , A, or<^*). f%\ n.a A Ã§{eking deiire of.

. & aor, a. To dit opm. 2 collective noun, Oxen.

f,.. 9 comm. gend. An ox, a cow. ,'y. 4 To go away into any country. &UJ A corner -

of ground. 1& Ã§or o. To appear, push forth. Jw generic

noun , Herbs, pot-herbs. Ã§i Ã§or a, To remain. put. act. for >q D. 8.

9 Gr. T. 1, p. Ill, Remaining, that which remain~, or turvivea, permanent, constant, the rest; &aQf&Gut 18 v. 44, and 19 v. .

79, "Pious - works or words, which are per, manent." iiÃ‘& A relic, that which is left

6-0 > a Ex. <U wr 11 v. 87, "That which is let you by God." Note. The letter (Ã‘ is occa sionally substituted for the ii, see D. 8. Gr T. 1, p. 276, note; '{.v \>,'I 11 v. 118

c.1.3 "Endued with prudence or virtue." .u\ (2nd declension) comp. form, More or mosi lasting, enduring, permanent.-&^^ IV. Tc leave remaining, leave alive, suffer to remain,

.L, . .. -I,@! see +I.

'*, <^LÃ (2nd declension) Becca, a name of Mecca ; sef D.S.Gr.T.l ,p.404.

aor. 0. To be earlyin the mor ing . 3 A virgin, a young heifer ; ~ l u r . J d virgin;. iy In the morning, early in the morning,-Jq\ n.8. IV. f. The morning. & To be &mi. ,&f (2nd declension), Plur. Dumb.

s & aor. i. To weep, weep for (with ace. or with

&). J? weeping.-$! IV. To cause 10 weep.

& A particle which affirms that which follows it, but contradicts or corrects that which went before ; thus it may be translated But, not so but, on the contrary, or rather, nay rather, still more, &c. according to the context; for the difference between 3> and 3 we D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 565.

' 4 To stay or remain in a place. Plur. S& A, .

A region, country, territory. 14 A country, territory.

(MJJ A man of desperate character; there is no verbal root of this word in the first form,- &'f IV. To be overcome with grief, to be

S t./

desperate, atruck dumb with despair. (*4- part. act. Seized with despair. l/J;\ (2nd declension) Iblees, The Devil.

& aor. a. To swallow up. b "

L& aor. o. To arrive at, reach, attain one's object, obtain (with ace.), as at 18 v. 75. &!< . . part. act. Arriving at, bringing to a conclusion, attaining its end, excellent, consummate ; Ex. AÃJ & 54 v. 5, " Cons~mmat~e wisdom ; " also, that which is paramount over, aSJ' 7 &Jb \ 1 "fff 68 v. 39, " Haw ye any oaths which shall be binding upon us?" & A warning, preaching, that which is published, sent, or brought to any one. && Affecting,

s -^" eloquent. + A goal, perfection, highest 11. To make to arrive, publish,

/ .bS bring (with double act.).-Ãˆ-) I IV. To cause to reach, bring, deliver a message (with double ace.).

J aor. o. To try, prove, experience (with ace. and or d), see note t o g ; & aor. a. To be-

come worn with age, to be worn out. % A trial.-$7 IV. TO try by experiment.- &:) VIII. To prove by trial or examination, try either by prosperity or adversity (with ace. and +), see 89 vv. 14 and 16, where i t is used in both sensea. J for & D. 8.

*Â

Gr. T. 1, p. I l l , part act. One who proves. & Yea, surely, verily, nay but verily, on the con-

trary; this particle is used after a negative proposition (interrogative or otherwise), and affirms the contrary of such proposition to be

I, .-' the truth; hence it differs from *Ã which assents to the preceding proposition; see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 514.

:& collective noun, The tip8 of the fingem, we D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 381; the verbal root is 5 ^ &' To stand fast.

2 aor. i. To build, construct (with ace. and +, . 4, or Jx). 3 for 5 A son ; ~ l i i r . flat, , 9, also ^ y ~ , oblique &, and when in connexion -.

with a complement and Dual '-xu 0u

and &:, or in connexion \-J\ and s\ ; ,<-> s -

My sons, D. S. (3r.T. 1, p. 459: 3 din-k~u- I 5 dL

tive, A little son. A daughter, see s, .. l ,,-'

+SJ ; Plur. &% ; oblique dual, My two daughters, see 2. Note. I n all these words the prefixed \, when i t does not begin a sentence, is marked with a wesh; D.5.Gr.T. 1,

,-<'- p. 66. ^& A ceiled roof. ^b A builder,

3 L / ' 2. 9L" architect. i1.1) A building. for part. pass. Built, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 108.

/ /-- s ,L/

L_-M,J aor. a. To confound, Slander, calumny ; the root of this word is said to be t,' To be accustomed.

0 x 0 s ', 6 aor. a. To makejoyful. i& Beauty, delight. 5 . -y Beautiful, delicious.

J(Ã aor. a. To leave one a t liberty.-J.^) VIII. To invoke, imprecate (the wrath of God).

4 , To mean lambslor kids; the first form is wanting. ( s, t ' , '{ s An animal ; <u.Ã‡-< Brute beasts,

dwelling, provide a dwelling for ore's-self (with ace. of thing and J of pers.). Kote. $ is one of those verbs which are at the same time concave and hamzated ; for the rules for the suppression (or otherwise) of the hamza see D, S, Gr. T. 1, p. 62, et seq. ; and also the rules for the permutation of infirm letters.

s ,I.* 3 Plur. < Ã ‘ Ã A door, gate. ,\i aor. o. To perish, to be in vain. 3 One who is

lost, wicked. J'^J Perdition, jq aor. o. To make venter. J\J Heart, mind,

thought, intention, condition. 5 6 am. i. and a. To pass the night. 1Ã‘ Plur.

s I ,

u y ^ i A house, abode, family. e^G A night a t t a c k . - a I I . To meditate by night, attack by night.

>$ aor. i. Togo away (from one's friends), perish. , 0 s, <-Â ,& aor, i. To excel in whiteness. collective

noun, Eggs; D. 3. Gr. T. 1 , p. 381. 3 1 , Fern. *-G; Plur. ..J , for 3 D. 8. Or. T.

Â¥^A

1, p. 360, White, clear.-&\ IX. To become white (with ^< 1.

, 0

r\iaor. i. To sell. &Â¥ n.a. Interchange by sale, selling, rnerchandizing, barter. pIur, of

/ / Â ¥ / & C h ~ r c h e s . - ~ k 111. To make a contract 0

with, properly, by striking hands (with accus. of person or + of thing; also with ace. oj

t , l "// , . ,/ pers. and ;_,I &).-^.b VI. To sell to oni another. . , b aor. i. To be distinct and separate. 2 Between, ^ . u00 I.-"

as 3 ~ 1 " Between his two hands," i.e. ' before him, in his presence ; This word, though

commonly used as a preposition, is properly a noun in the accus. meaning an interval, and sometimes a connexion ; when preceded by a

0 , s

cattle : the logical root ia Lambs or kids.

*l) nor. o. for '2 To bring back, bring down, take upon one's-self (with u); to draw upon one's-

/ a . 4 0 self; Ex. <Jh , _ r ~ 4 8 v. 16, "He

.+ . . will draw down on himself the wrath of God; " the preterite being used with a future aignifica- tion ; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 158.3; 11. To *rÃ parea dwelling for, locate any one (with double ace. also with J of pers. and ace. of place, or acc. of pers. and ^f). 72 A place fordwelling

<i

'

in.-ÃˆÃ V. To take posseaaion of, occupy a 1

Ã‡Â S.0' 0

with J of pers. and ^,\). part.. act. , -Â -1 0

manifest.-^\J\ IV. To make manifest, to - s 0, articulate distinctly, see 43 v. 52. u& n.a.

An argument, clear demonstration, eloquence,

preposition i t is declined, see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 498. ^J Manifest, evident. &^ An evident testimony or demonstration, evidence, proof. S -<-8 &' An enpotition, explanation.-2 11. To

show, make manifest, make known, declare, explain, become manifest (with ace. and J or

By ; preposition prefixed as a form of oath to the word $1, as <AC " By God."

tÃ‘Ã An ark, -I

Â¥\ pi a . ii. f. of $! q.v. - 6 I/ 4 , * 9.6 v. f. o f p 1 q.v.

0 -.*, .- ,1 ^ v. f. of ^ q.v. 6 ^ 0 I 2 pera. sing. aor. cond. of q.v. UMi. Ji, n.a. ii. f. of JT for J.1 q.v.

s ., s b-' To cut ox peri8h. +k L o s s . - w n.a. , 11. f. A loss, detriment.

J$ seeJ^. tt*-u'- ,^~k ' 2 pers. sing. aor. cond. viii. f. of ^J q.v.

00:

J aor, i. To break, destroy. JG ~ e s t r u c t i o n . ~ s 6, 9 11. To break in pieces. ,+ n.a. Utter des-

truction, ,.-Ã part. pass. ~ e s t r o ~ e d , broken up. .J v. f. of T q.v. , a,, ,-, -^Â v. f. of ^ q.v. sa,/ \ y ~ v. f. of *% q.v. . . S -, ' &or. a. To follow. ^J and &G A follower, t^ .

one who follows, or attends upon any one. SÃ‡ Name and title of the king of the Himya-

f r i ta . (.-5 A helper, p r o t e c t o r . - ~ ~ f IV.

faculty of clearly explaining, explanation. af

e P art. act. That which is manifest, open, /a/. perspicuous.-^,J V. To be or become mani-

fest, clear (with J or or with J and 2 ); to be distinct (with &) ; to be mode known

-Â¥a^ (with J) ; to perceive, as .1 *ijT ++' 34 v. 13, " The Genii perceived that ; " also, to use discernment, or discrimination, vid. 4 - ,-Â¥

v. 96, and 49 v. 6.- ,L.J X. To be mani- s 0 b Ã S f feat. part. act. same as e. . 0

To follow, follow up, make to follow (with double ace.) ; to pursue, prosecute, continue ;

0 t, Ex. Ã‡-J 18 v. 83, "Then he con-

s /,' tinned his ~ay . " -~ ,b^ , part. act. VI. f. Suc- cedve.-'g\ VIII. To follow, follow up. S ."rf s ' a# n.a. A following after. Ã§. part. pass. One who is pursued.

-Â¥a, 0 . ^J v. f. of ^& q.v. = 6 .- . -. n.a. ii. f. of Ãˆ_Ã q.v.

or $ fern. One after another ; said to be derived from% q.v. see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 293. s 0

w .. . ma. ii. f. of 2 q.v. ,

Lf vi. f. of G+ q.v. 0. s. 0 . $ aor. o. To traffic, Ã‡,\s Merchandize, traffic, ,

bargain, merchandizing. ,-Â A 8 , 6 - I^MSC- v. f. of u q.v.

Ji v. f. of iff q.v. a ^ ^ ~k vi. f. of & q.v.

& Ã -', J,lat? n.a. vi. f. of& q.v. That which is below, the lower part; This

word, which is properly a substantive, ia used (though not in the Kordn) aa an adverb, and

is then indeclinable, as S D o w n , below When employed as a preposition it is put i n

061-0 , I,^ the accua. iÃ‘ Beneath, as dl t~cc' 20 v. 5, "That which is beneath the earth;' If preceded by > i t is put in the genitive, af > " From beneath it," see D. 0. Gr, T. 1, p. 509, and T. 2, p. 152.

-Â /' $2 v. C of r- q.v. s 1.: 6 0 _^a- n.a. ii. f. of q.v. , a -, 6 ' . wiaef- V. f. of *tÃ q.v. ^WeJs-.

,Jf n.a. ii. f. of Jl^- q.v. Â ^ .S ' 6 0

see s. 0 0 , < &\ST vi. f. of 1Ã‘' q . ~ .

^a? v. f. of liÃ q.v. $ 4 ,. JN see dL>-. -

JAJ v. f. of 13 q.v. * < 3.3 n.a. ii. f. of JJ q.v. a - Â 0 0 G^/ From uJ, q.v. See also D. S. Or. T. 1,

0

p. 293. ,'& ace. plur. of is A breast-bone : It aeemi

doubtful whether this word ought not to be derived from $ q.v. To have much earth, to hold earth in thÃ hand. Â¥y Earth, dust. 4'97 plw. of 42 Of

fw the same age. 4.y (2nd declension) plur. of $2 A breaat-bone. Poverty ; 1Ã‘G*, &tf0 ^ '" ^Ã \S 90 v. 16, " A poor man intimately acquainted with hie mother Earth!'

^J v. f. of ^ q.v. ^Ã‡'

d,i D> (ijjoy tin good ttmft sf thh l>fi.- )\ . IV. To bestow the good thine of thia life (with Â¥a of pÃ§n and fl. ^f, put. pu.

Endowed with-and hence, enjoying-the good things of this life.

_ 'J aor. o. To leave, leave alone, abandon (with - 'I a i x . a n d y ~ , & , & ^ , o r & ) ; \,!& 3 $3 .',I Gl3" 29 v. 1, " Do mdn think that they shall be left alone in saying?" i.8. "That i t ia enough for them to say ;" & /.. $; e(Ã§ 37 v. 76, " And we left (these words, or this blessing) upon him ;I' with an

'.

ellipse of ,*iOT' IJkA or similar worda. <_$ part. act. One who leaves, or leaves out; & for J l' 11 v. 56, aa being ante-

/ ./- cedent to the word \ \, "We will not leave our Gods," D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 183.

Ã ., Ã 000 . 0 ,& for,,p, see, . iJ,$ 2 pew. sing. am. viii. f. of 5 q.v. /a^/ i)_i V. f. of 55 for 5; q.v. J?j v. f. of jlJ for jy q.v.

* Ã ˆ a 0 lW" see w. see G , 9 ".

, The number nine : For observations on the - . f G " numerals, see*. Ninety.

if*Mi3 2 pew. sing. aor. pus. ii. f. of I*- q.v. * G' Tasneem, name of a fountain in P d i s e , fty^

said to be BO called, because conveyed to the higheit part of heaven ; from & To be tall (a camel). " v. f. 0f;L for$ q.v.

be p 8 pen. fern. aing. aor. cond. of *G q.v. . * " &HJ 2 pers. plot. tor. act. iii. f. of$ q.v. N.B. There ie no difference between the active and pauive. pM-^.

&$ n.k. ii. f. of \^f q.V.

" 0 . a . 11. f. of & q.v.

:)SM me pi viii. f. of &. u & 2 pem, sing. aor. cond. iv. f. of f s q.v. * sO,o; AS>. , i_^*w 2 pera. sing. aor. iv. t. of u\ , quadriliteral verb, rt. J^o q.v.

,a 0. f u T. f. of LU? q-V. ~6 .-/ ,AS v. f. o f j G for;& q.v. JA? 2 pers. sing. aor. cond. of ^A& q.v.

if I"" Jy To perish. 3 =.a. Destruction; 2 G

47 v. 9, " May perdition seize them." JX6 vi. f. of Vai q.v.

5 +-Â¥ 6 -Â

n a . v. f. of & q.v. S f , . ,' dLu n.a. vi. f. of & q.v.

6- ;,*! 3 pers. fern. sing. aor. energ. of) q.v. n.a. v. f. of bic q.v. , S f ,

s-U; n.a. vi. f. of? q.v. S 9 . - ~ j k i n.a. vi. f. of (_^j q.v.

To perform the sacred rites at Mecca; also, to cleanse, &.6 Two interpretations &re given of this word ; according to one i t means filth, and according to the other, the observance of certain rites and ceremonies imposed upon the Pilgrims at Mecca, among which were

them put an end to their want of cleanliness,*' or, " Let them complete the rites" above mentioned.

'JJ, llature,mlut.-$1 IV. To establish firmly. This verb is not found in the primitive form.

v. f. of JG q.v.

0, $5 n.a. of 2, q.~. s 'f.; w . a . ii. f. of ;>5 q . ~ .

$ am. 1. To fear. 1-27 (2nd declension) comp. d

form, Greatly fearing, most pious. 3 God- fearing, devout. These words seem to owe their derivation to the viii. f. of & q.v.

l_(S for y , 2 pen. sing, nor. cond. of 3 q.v.

22; n.a. ii. f. ofJ t q.v. 3 To lay prostrate (with ace. of pers. and J). $]i; n.a. vi. f. of 3 q.v.

U' v. f. of ki q.v. 3-2J n.a. of$ q.v. A' v. f. of 3 q.v. L D; fern. of OJ,J q.v. >see'?. aor. o. To follow, rehearse, read, declare, medi-

tate (with ace. of thing and & of pers.., also with acc. and 2). A t e . The I called dfl

or Alif of precaution, ia sometimes found added to the words & and JÃ‘;' though properly only added to servile, to distinguish it from; and, D. 8. Or. T. I, p. 100. &l.~df fern. plur. of J6 part. act. "Those who read." 5, , ^ Ã,l n.a. A reading.

b2; see &f. aor. i. To be entire, complete, perfect, fulfilled

(with & of pers.).-pi IV. To complete (with ace, and & or * y ~ of thing, also with ace. and &, J], or J of pers.) ; to perfect,

s -^

accomplish, fulfil, perform. ?LÃ‡ n.a. Borne- thing complete, perfect; E X . ~ _ > W ~ > @ cu? 6 v. 155, " We gave Moses the Book, a perfect Law," etc. Ã part. act. One who makes perfect.

&LtJ plur. of JG;, see j Ã§ ,Hi'

(C;LÃ vi. f. of d,-Ã q.v. .- I"; ^ , (_)Â¥/-Ã§ 2 pers. plur. am, viii. f. of q.v. /' Â¥?, , ., Ã§- v. f. of p. q.v. u LÃ‡ v. f. of UxÃ q.v.

<t ', , , ^ v. f. of &. q.v. + see X , ?.A,.: PaÃˆ,, , , ,+ for+, see j L Ã ˆ 3 vi. f. of"J q.v.

'Â ,' ^ LJ vi. f. of \+' q.v. , , ,, tjl; vi. f. of i> q.~.

it, /, , , &L' n,a. vi. f. of $U q.v.

&s n.a. ii, f. of J$ q.v. ^ 6 ~ : .I"/ UM^J v. f. of ^fc q.v.

ilJl..' . , 11.a. ii. f. of J J q.v. 2, 3,: J ~ J An oven (a word of foreign origin} ; i t also

means a place whence waters gush forth. , , ,,

LA .. , see d. Y Â¥ -Â .-", ly see d. , -, ,, ,\y vi. f. of d,, q.v. , /' /, ^\y vi. f. of q.v.

9 aor, o. To repent towards God (with ^\) ; to turn one's-self in a repentant manner; to relent towards men,-as God,-(with A).

s '-- "2 and $> Repentance. *b part. act. s 6 - One who repents, u\+ Very repentant, re-

3 ., . - lenting. UL A penitent conversion ; &Ji - +l Ã 13 v. 29, " Unto him must be my conversion ;" +L-Ã is here put for &^-<,

, "if , 6 1 fi,+ see d \ , <"

,6 for;\J To go round. G\J A time. -

s .LC , , Jh i see iJs;

n.a. ii. f. of JiS; q.v.

- Jy v. f. of J; q.t. L-P s,f see ' ,

A fig ; no verbal root. G aor. i . To wander about diatractedly (with &).

& To be firm, steadfast, constant; &+c part. &u To keep back, hinder.-L-' 11. To make slothful. , act. Remaining firmly fixed, firm, steadfast. i

9' - Ã &t-j Steadfast, fixing.-+ 11. To confirm, 1 s i: set fast, establish (with ace. and +I. , t,Ã '

n.a. A confirmation, establishmen t . 4 1 IV. To confirm; to keep in bonds, 8 v. 30.

see 2. ,

S 's. 3 aor. o. To keep back, lose, perish. ,*-J Destruc- - s 'I. -' tion. Jy^ part. pass. One who is lost.

2 To collect, congregate. & 4 4. 72, In s 9 f

bodies;" accus. plur. of A.J the fern. of 2 for A company or body of men, Note. Many

nouns in the fern. sing. lose their third Radical when it is s, , , or ,e ; where they take the regular form of Plural this Radical is sometimes omitted, and sometimes retained ; see D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 358.

: 6 aor. 0. Toflow. ' @pouring forth abundantly, ^ 'S 3 To be thick.->I IV. To do something great, make a great slaughter (with ^); slay in great numbers (with ace. of pers.). aor. i. To blame.--9 n.a. 11. f. Blame.

0 +; To be moist, as the earth after rain, S.J for Â ¥ y 22 and J'I, and with the article &)S\ The +

Earth. 0 s,.'

To cause to flow. & A serpent. 0

ÃÃ‘-A aor. o. To perforate, penetrate, shine. *_^ Y 6'4. G?" port. act. Shining ; i_Aa l ,+d I 86 v. 3,

"The star of piercing brightness," by some supposed to be Saturn, which is called &; . aor. a. To find, catch, take, gain the mastery over (with accus. of pers.).

0 1' ijJiS To be heavy, grievous; to be a grievous matter (with>). p! generally interpreted

I I to mean men and genii," as at 55 v. 31, dual of $~aggage . $7 plur. of Ja-! A burden. & Heavy ; Plur. .I@. $&

^Y A weight.-&\ IV. To grow heavy, oppress,

^ d o ,

weigh down. JJS Fem. S si part. pass. &, *- f f tuf *-

Burdened; 01Ã e - ^\ 35 v. 19, "If a burdened (soul) cry out;" the word 3 being understood.-j~{l for $>2 VI. To he borne down heavily, incline h'eavily downwards (with Jl); For the employment of those forms which take teachdeed on the first Radical, see D. 0. Gr. T. 1, p. 220.

a 0 SÃ‡ JJ To perish. ijj A crowd, a number of people. dA nor. o. To take a third part of anything.

/ f iw and iJiL! Three ( s e e p ). yy J Thirty. One third part ; Dual 1J and in conjunc-

f f

tion &and $ Two-thirds, D . S. Or. T. I, 9, /

p. 415. ~ern.i$li Third. i ~ g ~ h r e e by " ,. i. t three, in threes, or three pairs; Ex.*\

0 9 $" '& t 35 v. 1, "Having two and

^9

three and four pairs of wings;" At 4 v. 3 G-Ã may be rendered " By threes;'' This word is of the second declension, it answers to the Latin Temw ; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 426.

i < Ã aor. o. To tread. *J There, in that direction.

Then (after an interval).

J$ Thamood, name of an ancient tribe of Pagan Arabians, destroyed for their impiety. This word in the Kodn is always of the 2nd de- clenaion ; see D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 405.

2 To tear fd. 9 Fruit, wealth, poueesions. s 0

Ã ˆ A fruit; noun of unity or individuality ; see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 300.-.& IV. To bear fruit.

" ^1 .nu nor. o. To take the eighthpart. 3 A price. s 9 ; Ã£Ã One part out of eight. >e The eighth. uG (for >V*3) fern. and &l maw. Eight; + 0 0 0 0 4 , ' / see+, see also qL, r t . 3 . ^Lw Eighty.

0 ,$ aor. a. and i. TO bend, Told, double. 0

for 3 The second ; also part. act. Turning, as /& &G 22 v. 9, "One who turn^ his side," or " A turner of his side," i.e. Proud. $f

L,

m a . and &f fern., and in the oblique I.,'- ' -,> 0 . 0 cases &f and y^Ã‘i Two. + Gl masc.

0 , L

and ;,H Gi\ fern., and in the oblique cues I. ,'". G0, 00o 0 *- /<:

,AS i\ and i uÃ Twelve ; These forms which admit only the above inflexions are considered as adverbial expressions; D. 8.

,*- 0

Gr. T. 1, p. 420. ,p By twos, in pairs, two and two ; another form of this numeral

4

(but not found in the Korin) is *\^; These forms are equivalent to the Latin Sinus; see

P "' ulj. &; and with the article A name given either to the whole Kordn, or to those passages which are frequently repeated ; some interpret it to mean the first chapter, -'. -a -'

as at 15 v. 87, &h-th & i_ a " We have given thee seven (verses) of those which are to be frequently repeated ; I 1 others interpret it to mean the seven long chapters. it-* for AlL* without the minnation (Sing. 9.' . +A), is one of those irregular plurals which are of the second declension, with this pecu- liarity, that in the nominative and genitive they preserve the tanween, as G, but reject . ..^ it in the accusat.ive, as &Ã ; the latter word occurs at 39 v. 24, where it may be rendered " double or repeated portions ; " see D. 8. Or. T. 1, pp. 410 and 111 Si 226. The rule as given by the grammarian Motarrezee is as follows : Speaking of those irregular plurals which are of the second declension he says, " If the second of the two letters which follow Alif quiescent happen to be a 4 i t is 0up- pressed in the nom. and gen. and the tanween

is affixed, but in the accus. 2 is retained without tanween." For an explanation of the passage at 39 v. 24 see \J , rt. 2. . Note. Other singulars have also been assigned . .-' ?. f * ' 9 I- f /L-' I/

to &dl u &, +, or ye-& X. ^ PC,', .. To make an exception, as Y, 68 v. 18,

"And they did not make an exception" (by 0 -a -.

saying i-Ul %I*, ;\I. . sli aor. o. To return. 413 A reward. (Ã‘ , /Â . plur, of b-r; Raiment. +L< A place ofresort. -:* 9 . - a; <u+ A reward,recompense.-vY 11. To repay

/I

(with double acc.1.-t_Ã IV. To reward with, give as a recompense (with double ace.).

, 0 /' $ aor. o. To be stirred up (os dust).-J\ \ IV. To plough, break up the earth, excite, raise (as dust, clouds, etc.).

$ aor. i. To abÃ§f in a place. ,U for (J,*C part. act. A dweller. &f" A dwelling, 'abode ; 9 -" . t\f & 12 v. 21, " Make his abode honourable;" see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 118. (no first form) To have connexion, 09 a husband

and wife. A woman who haa left her husband after the first interview.

0s 8 i\p" aor. a. To low, supplicate God with groaning (with Jl of pen.).

9Â 0 J,+ (2nd declension) Goliath. i Â & Tocutoff. wel1,cistern.

Jibt, An idol, false deity. -V. - TO bind, make fat, Strong, powerhl,

gigantic, having absolute power, proud, per- I * - c verse. ,G I The Mighty One, a ntme of the

Deity.

J J The Angel Gabriel. Jto>- aor. i. and o. To /arm, create. Jio - Plur.

JCf A mountain, and 08peoially Mount Sinai. ' 5 0 is- and + A aimd, multitude ; 'u

. 0 ,; 1

3?r26 T. 184, "The former generations;" see D. 0. Gr. T. 2, p. 268.

/ Ã -Â s # 6 To becowardly. y^-o- Cowardly; the temple, . aide of the forehead.

0 0 . s 0

& aor. a. To strike on the forehead. x\ plur. of s^f A forehead.

0

for aor. a. and i. To collect or gather

ace. of pers.), ae 6 v. 121, "That they should dispute with you;" J&\ -\ 7 v. 69, "Will ye dispute with me?" AJ+G

Â¥ &- A cistern, see ^y, rt. &> ; see also . Â¥ &G, rt. &-&l VIII. To choose (with

acc. and or Jl). a 0 i - & To cut <if.-*\ me To tear up, root

I,. *J up (with ace. and 4 1 &). . 0 0

aor. i. and o. To lie with the breast on the ground, $& part. act. One lying on his breast.

s aor. i. and o. To kneel. +\9- Fern. i& s part. act. Kneeling; The Plur. is for s 9 9 0

j -, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 108 and 362. 0 Aa-f To deny, refuse, reject (with +). . ..

aor. a. To light a free. 2 fern. Hell, hell-fire, any fiercely burning fire.

a 0 2. ~ t f - aor. i. To be of great wealth or dignity. Majesty, glory. &AS>- New. Ãi plur. of ?& A track or way on a h ih ide .

s 0 ,

i s+ Plur. &A>-^ A sepulchre; no verbal root.

if. ^ To be covered with pustules, to fence in. 9 0 *J '\& ~lur .y>- A wall. More fitting

or easier, compar. form (2nd declension), D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 403.

& aor. i. and o. To twist fimly. 1 >- In a 0, 9 90,

contentious manner ; f$ $1 03 t* 4i v. 68, " They ,only propounded this to thee ii the hope of a dispute!' J<& A dispute.-

. ^ && 111. TO dispute (with i_> of means an< or 2 of subjec t) ; to d i e & , , with (wit]

3 " 0 fragmentfi. +^f* part. pass. Broken ;2 j,JUB'Ã Uninterrupted.

s : & To keep without food, amputate. t . Plur. S ' i

, Â¥ The trunk of a Palm-tree.

s t - /

am. o. To stand firm. <A>- A burning coal or firebrand.

f aor. o. ~ o d r a w , drag (with acc. and ^\I, 0 , S i t To mound, gain, acquire for one'sself. r , ~

S i r 9 9 0 0 plur. of Ã‘ A wound, rh (2nd declen- .- sion) plur. of 2 . ~ Beaata of prey.-r/y-\

0

VIII. To endeavour to acquire ; kgr 9 00L-G i-> 9 l \,+*l 45 v. 20, " Those who seek

to do evil." , 0 7b tear off. 5 9 comm. gend. noun of

species, A locust. , , - aor. o. To cut off. JG Dry (ground) bare of herbage.

, 0 0* . i /- To drink ( w a t e r ) . - ~ V . To sip. 00 0

i aor. o. To cany 'of the who& o f anything. A water-worn bank of earth.

0 0 aor. i. To commit a crime, to drive one (into s 0 0 sin, with of following verb). y A sin;

0 0 0 0 t~ ) No doubt ! An adverbial expression, ^0C D. 8. Gr. To 1, p. 621.- 7 IV To be guilty s ' ;

of sin. '-\ n.a. Sin. ty~* part. act. A . sinner.

'f- aor. i. To flow, run, happen (with J, also with J; or j\). kJO$ part. act. fei. Running, a vessel ; he Ark, 69 v. 11 ; Plur. ,I,>., and

0 , -0 with the article i^i4 l , for which by Poetic

,, 4 licence is substituted ,$1 both in the no- , 0 ,, minative and genitive cases, see note on LkL, , ,. rt. &I; see also D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 497.

S, ' , 0 .sf for 6-f D.S. Gr.T. I, p. I l l , The 0 ,0/Â course of a ship, as b e 11 v. 43, " During

her course;" D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 118. Y., 0 aor. a, To take a p a r t ofanything, $5 A part,

portion, individuality ; At 43 v. 14 the word \ is by some taken to mean "Daughters."

-Â -'0 c>- To pass over, and c@ To be impatient, c& Impatiently.

5 aor. o. To subdue, and & aor. i. To satisfy, recompense for good or evil, give as a reward (with double ace. or with ace. or u of thing for which

0

"reward, etc. is given) ; to give an equivalent, or make satisfaction for (with 2 or with double ace.). '\s- for 5 - part. act. One who makes 4 satisfaction for another (with 2). i%G Corn- pensation, satisfaction, equivalent, retribution,

3

reward. i >- Tribute, especially that exacted from Jewa and ~hristians.-s& 111. To reward.

e , 0 6 /: & aor. 0. To h a n d l e . - r n V. To inquire curiously into (by handling, ete.).

Aut>- To stick to the body (blood). n,a. A body; \g tsf- 7 v. 146, " A calf in a bodily shape."

" t ^ To haw a toye body. A body, Plur. 0 ' ' - C , ,t,* ,LA ; i. ÃˆLrf 1 63 v. 4, "Their Persons."

1 J w a o r . a. To place, put, impose, make, appoint, 1. constitute, ordain, attribute (with J of pers. . and ace. of thing or with double ace. also with ace. and &,&, or &I ; to hold, regard or esteem, as at 29 v. 9 ; Used with of follow-

\w- To cast scum and foam upon the bank (a river). 9 4 ' : - Froth, as -a+, 13 v. 18, " I t

passes off like froth." .<, 8 To serve up camel's flesh in a large dish.

lw>\ plur. of S^Jtff- A large dish, trencher. L& aor. i, and i. To treat harshly.-& VI. To

be removed from (with 3). J>- aor. i. To be glorious. J& Majesty. & aor, i. and 0, To drag, ezcite,-*I IV.

To attack, assault (with &).

_ -Ls- To put on a (__>CL>-. && (2nd declen- Â ¥ , , r ' "

sion) plur. of vk A large outer covering .. worn by women.

^sf aor. i. To wound the skin, scourge, i iy n.a. 5 '- A flogging, blow with a rod. da- Plur.

ifs- Skins, hides. ,

& To sit in Eastern fashion, in which respect it differs from 2. &,Is- (2nd declension) plur. of $,& A place of sitting or assembly.

& aor. o. To be clear and manifest. d.& Banish- xnent.-J - 11. To make manifest, reveal ;

,6 -0, \;: /,J\, 91 v. 3, " By the day when it reveals her (the Sun) in all her splendour." -J v. To appear in glory (with J).

& aor. i. and o. To abound. Ã§.* ~ u c h . ~ rf^" am. a. To be refractory.

G0

aor. o. To congeal, to be firm. x.& .part. act. That which is firmly fixed.

, ,. aor. a. To collect, gather together, assemble, unite; to have connexion with, marry (with

b.0 4 0 ' 4 ^ 0 ' < t, . 3, as 1\ 'f^f J, 4 vo 27, ' ( ~ t is forbidden you) to take two sisters to wife," -

ing verb at 56 v. 81. &U>- part, act, He or "intermarry ; " to gather together-against, who places, etc. 1 with ace. and J ;-at, with ace. of pers. and

J or of time; i t is also used with ace and as a t 6 v. 35, and with 2 of per' sons assembled aa a t 34 v. 25. n.a An assembly, multitude, a gathering together crowd ; G37 28 T. 78, " Who have amassec

a (wealth) more abundantly; " Literally, mon ^t--^."t-.

abundant in amassing (wealth) ; " & \ ,0. 4

9 Ly! \ 3 v. 149, "The day of the meeting o '^-l .p p /" , ,',/,

the two hosts ; " <iu I j, A*-* - &L 75 v. 17 " Upon us devolves the collection (of its scat tered sentences), and the proper method o reading it." &-& part. act. One who gathen

S't' together, etc. ifw- A congregation, as $ ".'/ 4 <&x \ The day of the congregation, Friday. a 0 . Collected, assembled, all, an army ;

s 9t--'

At 36 v. 32 && is used for t y * - ~ r * , see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 540, note : \**^- adverbially, ' / I . < , / - - C

Altogether, wholly. _Ã‡> I ~ l u r . e>tÃ‡^Ãˆbl s " 6 .

The whole, fl A place of meeting to- s ' - .

gether. ty*^9 part. paas, Assembled.- , / I .

IV. To agree together, concert a plan or design (with of following verb); tc

, r - 'u

agree upon (with a ~ c . ) . - ~ * VIII. To bc gathered together (with J) ; conspire (with

S ," 0 3). y-f* part. act. Gathered together. & am. o. To collect, and JM" To be handsome. - ., &.$ A camel. ,I+ Grace, elegance ;

JG \Y^ .^j 16 v. 6, " They are a credit tc you." J-Ã§>s> Becoming, decorous, honour*

5, 0 ' able, gracious. &^>- An aggregate, some-

" / / '.t, Ã

thing complete, aa a sentence; i'+J 25 v. 34, "As one complete and perfect whole." Â£SL plur.of Xnsf A camel. . - > aor, i. To be covered; nor. o. To cover (with

3 Jrf). Ã £ , ~ collective noun, Genii, demons, 0

a s a - spirits, SB opposed to men. i-if Plur. u k ,' A garden, Paradise. A covering, cloak. s & Madness, frenzy ; used also in a collec-

s tive sense, or as plur. of > Genii ; see D. 8.

s -- Or, T. 1, p.382. %f &. of Any-

, % thing covered, a ftetua. ,.,& A serpent, genius, demon; :dl 15 v. 27, for 2?97 "The Father of Devils; " or the part for the

S9 t,. whole, Jinn or Genii. ..i,+ part. pass. Mad, possessed of the Devil.

aor. i. and o. To turn aside, cause to a < - - turn from or avoid (with ace. and 3 lest). Plur. (_>f A side ; 2~ 0 . >

4 V. L" L' 40, " The familiar friend ; > j 0 f

^T ?- - 39 v. 57, " What I have neglected (of my duty) towards Clod!' A stranger, coming from afar, One suffering

f 9 0 ,

from pollution ; 0y 28 v. 10, " From afar off." A side, tract of country ; ,ii\ss^ 'u 17 v. 85, " He drew aside."- ,;.

/ a , 11. To cause to turn aside, remove . / a , : away from (with double act,).-k~^ V. To turn away or withdraw one's-self from (with

, ,, I/ ad.->__Ãˆ- VIII. To (urn aside from, avoid. a / /

& aor. a. i. and o. To incline (with J). -l-aÃ‡ , - 5, 1- t comm. gend. Plur. w^-\ A hand, wing, arm, arm-pit ; t_S -G &j J 15 T. 88, "And behave with humility ;" Literally, " Lower thy wing." cG A crime.

.s- Plur. Skf - An army, troops, forces, a host, companions ; no verbal root.

&- aor. i, To de&e; and aor. a. To deviate (from the truth). & n.a. A swerv s / - Ã

ing from the right way . -+w part. ac VI. f. Inclining to evil (with J).

^ ^ &- aor. i. To gather (fruit). a for ^J Fruit ; a3 55 v. 54, "The fruit . of the two gardens," D. 8,. Gr. T. 1, p. 110. ,?& Fresh (dates) ready gathered.

,/Â¥ A aor, a. To be diligent, ^y- n.a. A striving with might and main ; The words ( a J >- at 5 v. 58 and elsewhere may be translated "Their most binding oaths." A^ Power,

L P ^ O t -Â 9 ,, ability ; *A+ $1 ~ee: , 1 8 v. 80, "They find nothing (to give) but the fruit of their labour."-A&& 111. To strive, contend with, figh t-especially against the enemies of Islam -(with ace. of pers. and (^T A', as at 31 v. 14, also with d, +, or J). 3& n.a. A con- , . , tending, striving, a going forth to fight (in the Holy War). $^ part. act. One who strives, one who goes forth to fight in the cause of IslAm.

, , aor. a. To be manifest, publish abroad, speak aloud (with u of thing and J of pers.). . , S G 0 That which is manifest, loud speaking, open and public speaking. Openly, publicly. Openly, viaibly, manifestly. -$% 1.1. 111. f. In public, openly.

0, ^ Ã§yp aor. a. To rush on a mounded man with intent s 0. to slay him. jk Paraphernalia, things

necessary for a journey.-- 11. To fit out with provisions or other necessaries (with ace. of pers. and (-_Ã of thing).

J Ã aor. a. To beignorant, & part. act. One ' who is ignorant. Jy - Very ignorant and

?. . -. foolisli. tsw Ignorance. *& state of ignorance, condition of the Pagan Arabs before the time of Mohammad.

/a/ . fern. Hell, Gehenna, from the Hebrew D3q K'a The Valley of Hinnom, where human

sacrifices were made by fire to Moloch : This word on account of its foreign origin and feminine gender is of the second declension; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 404.

s0 Air, The Firmament.

't * ,. &? see rf 3 ,/ >l>- aor. o. To split, cleave, cut out. +^>- An -

answer, see iv. f.-&l IV. To return an answer, hence, to hearken to (with ace. of pers. or thing). 3 part. act. One who returns an answer, as ttf^r*~Ã§- 37 v. 73, " And verily we returned a gracious answer;" Literally, " And verily they who gave the . ,,L answer were gracious."-<Ã‘> X. To re- spond (with J of pers. and g), to answer, , hearken to (with J of pers. or v).

i\y aor. o. To be good. 3l-s- plur. of s\'f Swift 5 ? coursers. ' El ~ad6e," A name of

Mount Ararat. s Â¥ i\f aor. o. To turn aside. ,\Ã Near, one who is

near, a neighbour. >& part. act. One who term a8ide.--&- 111. To be a neighbour, to dwell near (with ace. and &-;j IV. To protect, deliver-from punishment, etc.-

00, f 0 P ., (with ace. of pen. and >) ; ,AJ J\a Y, 23 v. 90, "Neither is he protected of 'any ;" Literally, " Neither is it protected over him," or " is any protection (thrown) over him : " for the me of Passive Verbs in an impersonal manner see D. 8. Gr, T. 2, p. 129; see also . s ,-Â¥ at Â¥/-.-a part. act. VI. f. Near to one

0'0 0t. a n o t h e k - - 1 X. To a i l f ir protection. ,, 0 && aor. o. Togo.-j3\>- 111. To paes on or over,

to cause to pass over (with u of pers. and , 0, , 0 ace. of thing).-j,+ VI. To paas by or over

(with 3). & aor. o. To search, explore.

SI & aor. o. To huuger. e >- Hunger. dU>- aor. o. To penetrate inwardly, to be hollow. dx The belly, the interior. *& aor. i. To come, come to, arrive at (with ace.

or with J, dl, >, or &) ; with I-J i t means to' come with, Le. to bring ; ~ i k e ' ~ 7 i t may sometimes be rendered to do or commit (an action), as at 18 v. 70 ; Pass. *& aome-

0

Ã / - a 4 Ã ^ times w r i t h 1s for 1 6 , aa & IJ 3&J

39 v. 69, "And the prophets shall b'Ã brought." Note. In the above form of construction the verb is impersonal, like Venfum est in Latin; see D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 1 2 9 . - l w IV. To make to come ; hence, to lead or drive (with ace. of pen. and J\).

.& aor. i. To cut out a garment a t the neck. Â t,, Sf# Plur. vy9" The bosom of a shirt or

vest. )l>- for i& aor. a. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 2-13, To have

a long and beautiful neck. & A neck. .

s aor. 1. To h e . &. Grain, corn.

noun of unity, One grain. Love; - & 2 v. 172, "Out of love for him,' , . i.:. "for Qod." GI comparative adjectiva of the 2nd declension, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 324 and 403, More beloved, more pleasing, pre- ferable. and with the affixed pronoun f1-Ã ii, \ - f ~ f \, the hamza being changed into, with damma in the middle of a word, D. S. Qr.

s 0 T. 1, p. 118, plur. of Beloved. Â¥; 0 / a - 0

+e L O V ~ . - ~ 11. To render lovely (with k c . of thing and & of pers.).-

a , 4 IV. To love, will, deaire, like (wiili 6 0'0

ace. or w i thgof following verb).-+l X. To love, prefer (with acc. and 3).

0, , aor. o. To make beautiful, delight, make joyful. plur. of> or> A (Jewish) Priest

or Doctor. 0.0

aor. i. To restrain, hinder, shut up. laÃ§> aor. a. To be vain, fruitless, to 'perish (with

CJ 0 9 k 9 f 0 '

or >).-GI IV. To render vain; Urfi-,

47 v. 34, Mr. with ', and $ prefixed, " And he shall make (their works) of no avail."

d& am. i. and a. To meaoe well ( a garment). &. plur. of && A way or track; especially, the paths of the Stars.

lL&. To take a wild beast with a snare or halter. J-Ã n.a. Plur. & A rope, vein, compact, or covenant.

',, am. i. To inspire. Ã‘Jh n.a. A decree. $. Even to, up to, down to, as far as, until, in

order that ; This particle is used in four different ways.

1st. I t is used as a preposition to indicate a certain term, and when thus employed governs

C J Â ¥ - t .l*0 the genitive case, as)\ &1L. & 97 v. 6, " Until the t ide of the rioi& of the dawn.''

2ndly. As a conjunction or adverb, meaning I I and even," or "up to an extreme point inclusive;" thus it differa from dl, which signifies "Up to," or "As far as, but not in-

' \ ' *. '"'4 eluding; " Ex. l y b u'T " I ate

the fish, head and all ; I J if we say Vy}^ we mean " as far as the head, and no further : " No instance of this use of $ occurs in the Ko14n.

3rdly. As a conjunction serving to connect a proposition with that which precedes it; it then means "until," and has grammatically no effect on the succeeding proposition; thus at 6 v. 149, Â£- I$ i~s.. g y 3ri_;.Ã &S

8 .

' I n like manner did they who went before them accuse (the prophets) of falsehood, until they tasted our severity." Note. In the Kodn , it is frequently followed by \^\; D. S. Qr. T. 1, pp. 175 and 202, note.

Lastly. I t governs a verb in the subjunctive mood, when that verb has a future signification; it then means " until," or "in order that ;"

/ , 0 'To ewer, shut out. (_>* A veil, curtain. s ,"' +yF" part. pass. Shut out (with >I. nor, o. To hinder (with A). 2 n.a. Any- thing forbidden, unlawful, a wall or dam, understanding; ~ l u r 2 A bosom, guardian.

t.

, , If, Jirb i Ã § , o ^ i i l y u 2 v . j ~ 4 J . i . i . A . ~ ^ V' 80, "I will on no account quit the country, until my Father give me permission ;" It may eometimes bear either interpretation ; thus at 4 9 ~ . 9 , 4 T ' J Ã§ $ & &ln%>s "Then fight against (that party) which is in the wrong, until (or so that) they return to obedience to God."

Â¥Lft To excite. \L^>- Quickly. To c m l d nith, go on. a pilgrimage to (with acc.). n.8. The p i lg r i i a~e to Mma. s 3 6 w a e as &. & part. act. One who per- forms the pilgrimage. plur. of A

pilyrimage, a yew. *A disputing, mm of ffltpnte, qpmmt; 88 iqgrig? 6 v. 160, The oonclueive argument."- * ^ I*. III. TO dispute Â ¥ h u (mth,.-); to du. p u b with (irith W. of ptm. lid ,J OF Q.- t ~ V I . To dispute with one another (with&

hip ; 2~ , 89 v 2- 4 J- '%r one gifted with , ti -----

intelligence." 3 - & n t r y inhabited

&

*.

-

by the tribe of Thamood ; The words \, * 9'-' L,.& occur twice in the 25th chap. ; in the

24th verse they appear to mean "' Far be it from US," like " Ne licitum sit;" In the 55th verse they mean " a wall which it is forbidden them (the two Seas) to pa-." a 2 ~ l u r . & A rock, stone. i> ~ l u r . s - Ã * s Ã ˆ -

<Ã‘> A private chamber. ,fl part. pasa. Forbidden. aor. o. To make a camel lie down; to restrain

(with tec. and 2). >>Ã part. act. One who , hinders, a bar, dam to keep back water.

s f f aor. o. To sharpen, limit, dejme, plur. s Â¥

of ifab A prescribed limit, ordinance. JU+

Iron, Plur. 8barp.Ã‘J\Ã 111. To hinder, stand in the w i q of, oppose.

s " 0 To be humpiacked. (_JÂ¥&Ã An elevation of . , the ground : Instead of this word which occur8 at 21 v. 96 sorne copies have i->& uglifying "A grave."

_>L. TO be m v , to haopen. i& A novelty, event ; eomething which has lately happened, a atory, hietory, narrative, dincourse ; 2

df 31 v. 5, I' The ludicrous tale," ^-t, A" \ (2nd deden>ta> plur. of A&. Trim, myingo ; +&W&% > 1 2 v. 6, " He ahall tetch thee the interpretation of (dark) aayinga;" kLiLT Ã‘ 23

v. 46, "We have made them (idle) tales," or H e . " like a tale that is told."-UAÃ 11. To

declare, narrate, acquaint (with ace. of pers. and t _ ~ of the thing).-&^ IV. To cause to , happen, bring about, produce (with ace. and J

s / 0 > of pers.). part. pass. That which is newly produced or revealed.

0 0. GA~>- aor. i, To surround. (2nd declension) plur. of &.&. A garden planted with trees.

;& aor. a. To beware, take heed of, fear (with ace. s" also with of the verb), Precaution.

s -" JAÃˆ n.a. Fear. JJlÃ part. act. One who is

/ 0 0

cautious, provident. J,i.d part. pass. That ^ , which is to be f e ~ e d . - ~ ~ k ~ - 11. To caution against (with double ace.).

f p aor. a. i. and o. To become free, to be hot. .- - 0 S V > n.a. Heat. A free-man. Jp fern. A' hot wind blowing by night. J . Silk- 0ll .- JP XI. To free from slavery, devote to the serviceof God. y 3 n . a . The giving freedom,

"'-." l-< aa eJw 5 v. 9, " The freeing of a neck +-a , ' (from the yoke of slavery)." [)if part. pass.

ace. " Dedicated to God's service," 3 v. 31. . 0, s 00

up aor. o. To spoil one's goods. up fern. ".a. s 0Ã

War. ul^c; Plur. (2nd declension) A private chamber; a niche in the wall of a mosque marking the direction of Mecca.-

111. To fight against (with ace. of pers.) .

. 0 . ep aor. i. and o. To till the ground, BOW seed. &/Ã n.a. A field, cultivated ground, produce of the same, fruits of the earth, tillage. . . ^ aor. a. To be oppressed by closeness or dzfficulty . S .0 ^ n.a. Narrow, a restriction, difficulty, crime.

-0, AI"' -p aor. i. Toperforate, intend. JP n.a. A purpose.

0..

p p To guard. ( ,Ã collective noun, Guards. 00 0 s 0 J'P aor. i. To desire ardently (with A). u & > " ~

Greedy, eager (with A). &? superlative form, Most greedy.

0.t

jp To milk dry, to corrupt one's-aelf. ;/- At the last extremity from disease.-$> 11. To instigate, excite (with ace. and &).

t.0 0

~,a- aor. i. To change. i,Ã A verge, margin, manner; & 22 v. 11, " After a way, or upon the verge-as i t were-(of religion)."- h->> XI. To pervert (with acc. and >).-

Sr, 0 * 1_~+ part. act. V. f. One who turns aside (with J).

,00

<.Ã aor. i. and o. To gnash the teeth, to bum. s 0 4 - /'-/0', J Burning.-* 11. To burn.- .

VIII. To be burnt. To refuse what is due, and Ã To be moved.

-^S? 11. To move (with ace. and ^_Ãˆ) #0.

p aor. i. To prohibit. ,*$ A holy place, A Â¥" asylum. ;p plur. of ,+b Prohibited, un-

lawful, sacred, sanctified, as believers during 'H\4 the Pilgrimage. ALP \ The Sacred Ordi- 5 9 0 0 nances of God. ? 5 ~ ^ part. pass. Forbidden ;

At 51 v. 19 this word seems to mean " Pre- vented by shame, or a sense of decorum ;" at 56 v. 66 and 68 v. 27, " Hindered from enjoying the fruita of our labour."-i*^ 11. To forbid, make or declare unlawful (with ace. of the thing and 3 of the pers.).

SÃ‡ > fit n.a. Prohibition. fl pa t . pus. That - whichis forbidden or unlawful, declared sacred. . ,

_cy aor. i. To d e c r e a s e . - 3 V. TO ~ e k . S 0 S 'b 2JÃ To touch. i - f ~ f t - Plur. s-*g A company,

5 '

troop, party, sect, Those who side with any l - 4 4 A

one ; , \ 18 v. 11, " Which of the two , parties ; " Meaning probably The Companions

f * A ^ >

of the Cave or the Companions of +;,I 1 9 - ' c l - ^

mentioned in the 8th verse; vbY1 The confederates mentioned in chap. 33 were a body of Infidels, who were leagued together against Mohammad in the War of the Ditch ; Those at 40 v. 31 are the People of Noah, etc. who appear in the next verse, and who were in league against the prophets of their day. .. 0 0 , UJ^ aor. o. To grieve ; aor. a. To be sad ; to be grieved about (with & of pers. o r thing), 5: - 7 9 ^ and ^>- m a . Grief, sorrow.

a 0 s i,ÃˆÃ aor. o. To parch up, utterly destroy.

A sound (sc. hissing).-,'*- IV. To perceive, find, be aware of, feel (with y*, or with ace.

L, - a r'

l and fl).-,tÃ§*.a.r V. To make inquiry after

pronoun 4 is here written and pronounced i_sO, as is frequently the case ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 459. - s , . .. , One who takes an account.

G ^L, 9 The word I+A besides being the plural of _Ã is also used as a collective noun meaning Darts or lightning, and i t is in this sense

, i " /

that it is employed at 18 v. 3â‚¬iÃ‘iÃˆ - 111. To call to account for (with ace. ofpers. and <-->). ,

0 0 , ' -\ VIII, To calculate upon, expect. aor. i. and o. To envy (with ace. of pers. and & of thing). &lÃ part. act. One who envies. >L*aÃ Envy.

,, , s - aor. i. To lay bare, to be weary. a y Plur. s - 0 ,

D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 355, Sighing, cause i"0 o 0 of sighing ; J,-Ãˆ 39 v. 57, " Ah I my

sighing, (ah me ! )" Expressions of this kind are spelt and pronounced in a variety of ways,

s i" D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 90. p Fatigued. s i o -

J# part. pass. Stripped, destitute.- ^ - ' t - < G +L X. To be worn out with fatigue.

0 0 Sf i - aor. i. To cut. t~ The usual acceptation of this word is A succession of unlucky nights ;

f i t At 69 v. 7 the phrase ty-Ã &d may be interpreted "For eight days in miserable succession.')

P 0 . ,.+ and > To be good or beautiful ; in the latter of these forms the verb is employed in a manner similar to the verbs of praise and blame L, pj and > ; EX. a-5 &?, yÃ‘ 4 v. 71,

II They are excellent (in point of) company ;" At 18 VV. 23 and 30 two different forms of construction occvr i n the same sentence, as <'.Â¥;^ o 0 i 0 0 I -Â¥ 4 0 ^ ,, Imp LÃ‘- -.Id 1 ,-j How delightful is their reward, and how delicious their couch ; "

S 1 . Ã D. 0. Qr. T. 2, p. 223 it aeq. Qmdneas, beauty, excellence, kindness. , *"Ã Beautiful,

(with A). 0 . 0 0 0

aor, 0. To reckon; aor. a. and i. To think, imagine, to be of opinion, calculate (with ace. of thing, also with or without 2 before following verb) ; see D. 8. Or. T. 2, pp.

s ^ " 74,296, and 580, also 127, note. +.- n.a, One who suffices, a sufficiency, or that which one is obliged to regard as sufficient; Ex. Ã ˆ f i 0 IH.. 0 c ^>- + 2 v. 202, "And Hell shall be his

4 O i o 0 sufficient reward ; " a 1 9 v. 59, '' God is all-sufficient for us." &l*> part. act. One who reckons, or takes an account, an

s I * ^ Â accomptant. Ãˆ_i Plur. ub A reckon- ing, computation, account : i^&Â¥f 2 v.

1. 0* 0 208, " Without measure;" +\Ãˆ 69 v. 20, . "My account," for &LiÃ‡ ; The Ã at the end

\f4-,

f

'

of this wurd is called t-JUJl1 Lk ; The affixed 1

s good, fair, gracious, handsome. A gooc thing, a benefit, good, a good work. ;&

s , masc. and fern, plur, of ,.,- Beautiful 5 ,L, ;I.& i-)+ 55 v. 70, " (Damsels) eiquisitt

t - I - * and beautiful." (2nd declension) comp form, not used adjectively in conjunction wit1

9 , L s t , a substantive, as &Ã‘* &,, but with tht substantive understood ; Better, best, more 01

most excellent. Note. Words of the seconc declension when in connexion with a comple ment take the three inflexions, tlius

,'%L.' 7 v. 142, where the pronoun refers to \,J 1 \ , f - * 9 x 1 . 7 - fern. ofP1, when used substantiv+

means a good action, good thing, happy state ,'1. f -0 happy end ; Dual ^L_i l and in the obliqut

L,.' Y -0 cases I 9 v. 52, " The two most excel. lent things," viz. Victory and Martyrdom For the Rules which govern adjectives in tht comparative form I must refer the reader tc

/ Â ¥ i f D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 301 et stq.--\ IV. To do well, act uprightly, act with kindness (with u, or with or J of thepers.); to render agreeable, make beautiful (with ace. of thing

s , L and J of pers.). J-l n.a. A doing good, a kind action, kindness, well-doing. 2 part. act. One who does well, acts righteously, a righteous man.

. . , + aor. o. and i. To gather together, and hence, to raise from the dead, to banish (with ace. and j\ or &, used in the Pass. with 4 or

st. -' J1). ,-Ã n.a. An assembly, banishment, b e 4 emigration ; at 59 v. 2 the words ,d l J:! ,

refer to certain Jews who were banished by Moha~nmad. >I*, part. act. One who

Sf I - - assembles, ,,.&& part. pass. Gathered together.

, ,, aor. i. To scatter gravel, cast into the fire.

!iÂ ,, That which is cast into the fire, fuel.

& A violent wind bringing with it a shower of stones. ,, 0 /Â

(.ea-0*- To become manifest. s ,, .La>. aor. o. and i. To reap. i ^ L n.a. A reaping,

- -

harvesting. J aa- Harvest, mown down, utterly destroyed.

,, , 0 ,

p aor. o. To briny into difficulty, besiege; aor. a. To be restricted, hindered (with of

S 9 , s , the following verb). J,.- Chaste. / , 0 l

A P r i s o n . - - \ IV. To prevent, keep back -from a journey, etc.-(with &).

_!-Ã To be over and above, to he manifest.- & 11, To n~alce manifest.

,-',

p To be strongly forttf.ed, and ;.."*- To keep Sf f

at home. ^yv- plur. of :Ã§a> A fortress.- $ * r i +* part. pass. 11. f. Fenced in, fortified.- P I IV. To keep safe (with acc. and >),

s 6 9 or in safe custody, to marry, d s r * part. act. - " i f ' Â ¥ " Ã One who is chaste or continent. w part,

pass. fern. A married woman, one who is s 4 ,* chaste and n.a. V, f. Chastity. . . ^ f aoi, i. To strike zi th a pebble. $1 for ./a cornparat. form, Clever in calculating

(with J of the thing calculated); D. 8. Or. T. 2, p:310.-$faÃ IV. To number, calculate, compute, take an account of, know.

a' aor. o. To incite any one, instigate (with &). ^1\^ VI. To urge one another (with A).

. 0 0 + aor. o. To be present to, or present at, stand in presence of (with ace. of pers. or thing) ;

9 9 0 , to hurt, u a t 23 v. 100, '} (for f 9 0 , &~^secr) " Lest they hurt me;" D. 8. Or.

= .^ T. 1, p. 570. 3 part. act. One who is L 4 Â ¥ present at, present, close upon, es \ ijl*.

0

7 v. 163, (The town) "close upon the sea," viz. The town of Elath, about which a fable is here told, and which is also referred to at 2

, <I,% v. 6 1 . - - I IV. To present, bring into the preaence of, cause to be present, put forward

5 4 ','.*-a z '3 (with double MC.); 81 +Y\ t - y - 1 4 v. 127, " (Men's) soulsare prone to-Lit. are made to be present with-covetousness : " see De Sacy's observations on the construction of

5 , *-- ' the PassiveVoice, Gr.T. 2, p. 123. ,.e? part. paas. One who is made to be present, brought

a i',<* f forward, given over to ( p u n i s h m e n t ) . - - Made present, part. pass. VIII. f. This word

-;,/', f 1.. ' * o c c m at 54 v, 28,- y> 3; The paasage is rather obscure, but it seems to imply that each portion of water should be divided among those who were present ; viz. The She- Camel and the Tribe of Thainood on alternate days ; see also 26 v. 155. .-

nor. 0. Yo p a t doun. .&& A patting &ma, remission (of sins), forgiveness; A word by some thought to signify the profession of faith an; a b Y,

L&. aor. i. To abound in wood. & Fire- wood, fuel. , z 0 + aor. i. To break into small pieces, ;c That which crumbles away through dryness. ~ T A name of Hell,

aor. a. To be in good circumstances. &*- n.a. A part, portion, a fortune, good fortune.

S I ' M To prohibit, hinder. JJW part. pass, ~indered.-jaaJc-* part. act. VIII, f. One whc builds a fold for cattle.

s aor. i. To surround (with acc. and (Ã‘Ã &

part. act. One who goes round about. =,< 0 aor. i. To run hastily, minister, i~hto.

Daughters, Grandchildren : a collective noun ; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 382; or it may be a plural of $L.

5, to. To dig. $. A pit. i&. A beginning, original state, former condition. aor. a. To keep, guard (with ace. and &I; to take care of. !& n.a. A guarding, a keeping ; && As a guard. &lÃ part. act.

. One who guards, keeps watch ; a guardian, s.,.

keeper (with ace. or with J). , Sai^- an irregular plur. of GlÃ Guardian (Angels). Iftito- same as &l?-, used with & in the sense of watching over evil doings; at 50 v. 31 it is used in the sense of one who keeps

S r u / (God's commandments). b w part. pass. Kept, well-guarded.-la^L*- 111. To observe

,, tf ,' ~trictly (with &).-y.ri-.l X. To commit to one's keeping, or one's memory. aor. a. To go barefoot, Honour greatly, $

G " Thoroughly acquainted (with el ; gracious, kind (with +).-&! . IV. To be importunate towards any one (with ace.). a -- aor. i. and o. To be right, just or fitting, worthy

-3,s - of, to be justly due to (with &I ; jai& p, 4 L., _>\&dl ,AJrf 22 v. 18, "Many deserve punish-

ment ; I 1 Literally, "Many (a man), punishment is justly his due ; " At 84 vv. 2 and 5

e, ' the verb appears in its passive form (pret. for fut.), which may mean " It shall be treated according to its deserts," or "shall be verified and certainly known; " the active voice having these significations as well as those

s above given. (JÃ That which is right and proper, just, true, justice, a right, just due, need, duty, such as payment of a debt; Ex. yr Jd \ 2 v. 282, "He upon whom

is the duty (of payment of the debt) ; I ' it alsc means Truth, The Truth, One of the Names 01 God. & Fitting, just. &.? (2nd declen. ion) compar. More worthy, more just, truer, Q , 4 LLs! \ The Inevitable, the day of Judgment.- y\ IV. To justify, verify (with ace. and ").

a,,'. , -J^L X . To he worthy, adjudge worthy; t c be guilty of (with ace. of thing), or think guilty (with & ofpers.), in both which sensef it occurs at 5 v. 106. , . To suffer from a retention of urine, to bt nithheld (rain. etc.). && A long space 01

$ , n * time, space of eighty years; Plur. UU.

To lie among crooked, or minding sands, dUÃ‘ The winding sands ; name of a pro- vince of Arabia, formerly inhabited by thc tribe of 'Ad ; plur. of A.

J aor. o. To exerche authority (with A); to judge, judge between (with 2 of pers. and <- . of thing) ; to give judgment in favour of (with

I J of pers. and (_J of thing) : when it meane to give an adverse judgment i t takes & oi pen. J* judgment, wisdom; $@T'JL . ^yÃ§ 5 v. 55, " Do they then d.esire the judgment of the days of ignorance?" i.e. To be judged according to the laws of Paganism ; a rule of judgment, as l *- igl 13 v. 37, "We have sent it-the Koran-down as a

s.. rule of judgment in Arabic." ,& A judge. s & Plur. ;l2Ã and uy^Ãˆ part. act. One who judge., a judge. & Wisdom. &. Wise, knowing. comp. and super. More or most knowing or wise.- 11. To take as judge (with tec. of pen. To confirm ; The Paaeive 4 occurs at I1 v. 1, and haa been variously interpreted ;

Sale renders i t " Are guarded against comp- S ' G ' tion." 6x-Ã part. pass. This word aleo admits

of divers interpretations ; a chapter is said to 5 ' Ã be ^LarÃ when i t is not abrogated by any

subsequent revelation; it also means clear and perspicuous, void of ambiguity ; at 3 v. 5 the verses called &^S &T, or those which are clear and are to be taken in their literal sense, are distinguished from those which are allegorical and figurative ; the former are said to be "The mother ,. . , -or ground-work-of the Book."-+la^ VI. To go together to judgment (with Ji), aor. o. To untie-a knot-(with ace. and >); nor. i. and o. To fulfil the rites and ceremoniea required of a pilgrim, to become JX* after

Ãˆ * being ; to be lawful (with J of pers. and 3 of verb) ; to descend, alight (with &) ; to settle in a place. & Anything lawful, an inhabitant. JiÃˆ Lawful, One who has per-

formed all the rites and ceremonies of a pilgrim. &k plur. of JJ - A wife. &$ Dissolution of B VOW. Jf Place of lawifice.-XI IV. To render lawful, allow, allow to be lawful, allow to be violated (with ace. of thing and J

>

of pers.) ; to violate ; to cause to descend or s

settle (with double ace.). J Ã part. act. One who considers lawful that which God has de- dared to be unlawful; Ex. ar&~ . .. 5 9 9 LfL. *

yf 5 v. 1, "Not violating the prohibition against the chase while ye are on a pilgrimage : " & being in conjunction with L Ã -C A-<J I is here put for s.

Ã a ~ r . i. To swear (with J of pers. and + of . object of tha oath, also followed by ,1 or J of

verb, or by & of the thing sworn?; Ex. .' -< "'/ 4 \ JS \-)* 58 v. 15, " They Bwear to

afalsehood." AÂ£ A great swearer. L . 9 /tia- aor. i. To shave.-+ part. act. 11. f. One ,

who shaves. S 9'. 9 'fts. To cut the throat. pL The throat.

-9- 9 s -1.1 [A- To dream. + A dream ; Plur. +I. '& S F L * '9'

Understanding; Plur. ,Ã§L . Ã§1> Puberty. J-Lk Kinil, gracious, intelligent. ' -).Ã nor. i. T b adorn with ornaments. i+ Orna- ments, trinkets; This word is used in the Koran as a collective noun, or i t may be an

P

irregular Plur. of 3, which also takes 3, I). S. Or, T. 1, p. 382.-JiÃ 11. same as & (with ace. of thing, or with ^<).

I- Letters prefixed to the 40th and six following chapters of the Korhn, see

a - s - aor. o. To heat. *-*A. Boiling hot water, a near relative or friend.

t*Ã To clean out mud from a melt. L*>- Mud. s Ã '- fern. of & Muddy, composed of mud.

&L aor. a. To praise. 1*1. n.a. Praise. part. act. One who praises. & Worthy of

1 b 3

praise. A* \ A name of Mohammad, Most praiseworthy, renowned. Note, By a per- version of the Gospel, the Mussulinan Doctors teach that the Comforter promised under the name wopdxXyrov was the wep~uXuro? or Re- nowned Mohammad; see Or. Test. 8. John

S 9 l .0 xvi. v. 7. dyka^ part. pass. Praised, landed. . 6 / 9 -A^& part. pass. 11. f. Much-praised, highly

lauded, Mohammad. ', , p aor. o. To pare a thong of leather. AH

$ 9 9 s - Sl. t ass; Plur. p and -Ãˆ >- p plur. ol

>I Red.

J-Ã§^Ã aor. i. To carry, bear, bear away, load, charge with, impose a burthen (with ace. of thing and & or >); to attack any one (with & of pers.) ; to conceive, be with child, undertake (a duty), provide with carriage and other necessaries of a journey, as at 9 v. 93.

Â¥ ^1.I J<A- n.a. Plur. JL\ A burthen, foetus in the womb, time during which the foetus is in the womb, as at 46 v. 14. JlÃ A burthen, load. ^\sf part. act. One who carries ; IJ &uL* " And by those which bear a load," i.e. The clouds bearing a load of rain, or women bearing a burtben in their wombs, or the winds which bear the clouds. 51 v. 2. Â £ / , JL~L A woman who carries much or fre- .-

5 9 0 quently, a portress. dy^ A beast of burthen. -JÃˆÃ > 11. To impose a burthen on(with double ace.), charge one with (a duty).-J.Ãˆ>. VIII. To take a burthen on one's-self, bear a burthen.

0, - aor. i. Tb defend; and ,,*>Â aor. a. To be hot, *l>- Himee, name of a camel concerning which certain superstitious - usages were observed by the Pagan Arabs. &\Ãˆ fern, of

:a - part. act. That which is burning hot. Affectation, cant.-$! IV. To make hot;

I t \ & ,<*a 9 v. 35, I t i.e. the money- / .@*, .it4 ;lid #,.I>I I -shall be made hot ; " Lite- J:. rally, I t shall be made hot lipon it, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 129.

Ã ‡ . aor. i. To emit a sound as a she-camel towards uf ,,

her young; to be moved with pity. (.JL S C , 9 Mercy, Honein, Name of a valley

near IKecca, where a battle was fouiht by Mohammad.

s 0 aor. a. To break one's oath. ÃÃ‘<- ,Wicked- ness.

0.00 ,aci~. To cut the throat, f-^9' (2nd declension

%^, plur. of 5+- A throat.

s k aor. i. To roast. Roasted. -',0 PIur, 3 - G (2nc & aor. i. To incline.

declension) Inclining to the right Religion orthodox.

i.J Ã aor. i. and o. To put a bit upon a horse.- &\ VIII. To bring into subjection, utter!}

9 4 - ' destroy; 'Ji-3 17 V. 64, " Verily 1 will bring his posterity under my authority ; ' or, " I will destroy them utterly" (as locustt destroy every thing where they alight).

&l>- aor. o. To sin. (_>; ".a. A sin, &\Ã aor. o. To fly around. &.>- A fish; Plur.

s -Â¥ J-. \ Ã ˆ aor. o. To be in want o f . %L Sotnetliinp f

necessary, a necessity, a thing, matter, wish, a want; <~>y .>& . &\a- i[ 12v. 68, " Except for the sake of a wish (or to gratify a wish) in Jacob's mind." ,

5 f c . 0 1 , &. aor. o. To drive quickly.-a,sid X . To get the better of (with &). Note. Some verbs whose second Radical is , may be conjugated either regularly or irregularly in the 10th form.

JlÃ aor, o. To return. JG plur. of f\j& fern. of fin- jJ both nouns of the 2nd declension, D. 8, Gr. T. 1, p. 360 ; Houris, a name given to the Maids of Paradise on account of the splendour of their black eyes ; the word is derived from . . Jf a form ofJl>- D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 246, *he exact meaning of which is somewhat a matter ofdispute, but which is properly applied to the blackness of eye seen in a gazelle; The words S S f ^y~ . J)>- which occur several times are generally translated " (Damsels) having large black eyes ; " Literally, " Black-eyed (damsels) with

.- 5 ^ a g e eyes," see &. dy p Disciples or Apostles of Christ ; This word is by some supposed to be of foreign origin ; by others i t is derived from;&, one of the meanings of which is to whiten clothes by washirig, the Arab commentators pretending that the Apostles were Fullers by trade.--& 111. To reply to

Sf 0 0 in an argument (with a~c,)-~,.\acr n.a. VI. f. An argument between two or more persons.

S-, Â¥ 9 j >. aor. o. To gather together to o n e ' s - s e l f . - . S-0 : Ã

0

f o r j ~ D. 8.Gr.T. 1,p. 105, part. act.V. f. One who goes aside or retreats (with JR.

>\fi- am. o. To beat for game; i_^c in the Korftn is used adverbially, and means far be it, as &, & " Far be it from God," or " God -- ----

, forbid," D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 532, tor. o. To guard.-i\H IV. To ourround, en- '

compass, comprehend (knowledge), and hence f c . 0 Â ¥ L Ã to know (with of thing) ; A bk J /1 12 . ,

v. 66, " Unless ye be prevented," or "com- passed about (by some hindrance) ; " The verb is here impersonal with an ellipse of the subject, a common construction both in Arabic and Latin, D. 8. Qr. T. 2, p. 129. l& part. act. One who encompasses, or comprehends.

JlÃ nor. o. To be changed, to pass by, go between ; 0 0 L - r 0 0--' b f 0 b 0 .

p a m J-t. ; u (-"J" l-. , , -) JÃ‘ 34 v- 53, ' I t (a bar) shall be passed between them and what they long for;" The verb is here used impersonally, D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 129. &

fc., fc.

and JÃa Ã £ , adverbial expressions meaning . ^ 9 round about, and from around, see and +,Â¥ &. JJ> n.a. P o w , a year. J& A change. <u-&. A plan, contrivance.-&.$ n.a. 11. f. A change, a turning off, or turning away.

& aor. i. To collect. ^Ãˆ> (2nd declension) for S . , , J\ - D. 8. Or.T.1, p.111, plur. of

, b 0 ' H

Intestines. i^f^ Dark-colonred, from J ? another form of &i>. To be dark-cohuredas dead herbage ; Fr. " Feuille morte."

Ã ‡ , , ', ,Ã or sty for y aor. i . a doubly imperfect verb,

^-Â¥-,b .- aor. Las; f o r ~ To live (with &). $ -/t, 1

Plur. 3 b \ Living, He or that which liveth, .- .- alive. A serpent. >'ia>- or ;&, or more correctly jy~- Life. a$ Life (eternal).

I - t t , S "^i. John. for 3 for Life; , ,', ^La- My life, D, S. Gr. T. 1, p. 111.-

a - - 11. To salute (with <Ã‘Ã *.a. A ,t-1'

salutation.-^.^ or La-1 IV. To preserve one's life, restore to life, give life (with ace.

L ' and + or with double ace.); for . . 26 v. 8 1 , " He will restore me to life." I-, ....

.g 0 '

for 4 part. act. One who restores to 8 , ] i f e . " - ~ \ X. To save alive; to be ashamed (with , , of thing or with yl of verb). 3 - s l Bashfulness.

9 I-" ' 6, G

Where, wherever, whither; + From whence soever, from the place whence, or of the place where, from the time when, in a

&>A acc. part. act. of t-A q . ~ . i,li- fern. of la. for &G, oee i;;Ã‡- L , tÃ 'TO hi&. 1 4 n.Ã§.Tha which is hidden.

>TO humbleoneva-a@( before God), to acquiesce. --a IV. m e as ksÃ‘rf (with & or J). part. act. One who humbles himself.

&& TO be bad. ". Bad, evil, wioked. .

9 0 , P G , manner which; l< i>Ã‘>Ã Wheresoever; L+- although strictly speaking a noun, is indeclinable, and is always found as an adverb and as antecedent to some complement either nominal or verbal, D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 146.

il>. nor. i. To avert (with A). ' 4 'Â ;iff- f o r p aor. a. To he astonished. JF (2nd , declension) Distracted.

' >- aor. i. To turn aside. iJ*- A place or way of escape.

& aor. i. To have her courses (a woman). 2 The monthly courses of a woman.

J L a o r . i. To be unjust (with &). & nor. i. To surround, hem in, compass about

(with v of pers.). & aor. i . ~ o arrive (the time). -a> Time, aa

6 4 , S

.>~&sfsfi- 76 v. 1, " A space of time ; " a a. f. 28 v. 14, " In a time of negligence," i.e.When the people were not mindful of him. & When, at the time of; throughout the Koran when used in this sense & is indeclinable, D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 149 ; At 11

- 4 V. 5 the words Y \ belong properly to the next verae. & Then, at that time., com-

0 pounded of J a- and a\ or \^\, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 521.

6-

&,-g plur. of k& Impurities, filthy or wicked things or actions; ec. Jl ci.

,, . + To prm, and> aor. o. To kwrc. ,-&. n.a. Understanding, knowledge. > Plur. '@

s - News, tidings, report. fi Knowing, One 0

who knows, or is acquainted with. ,, / j+ nor. 1. To make bread. 3 Bread.

4 0. k> - aor. i. To stamp with the forefeet.-- V properly, To strike with the forefeet; at Â . 276 it means to drive one mad, strike will confusion, to infect, or simply, to destroy.

(J. *- To distract. jG A hindrance, corruption, 1 f@ f^^i 5 3 v. 114, "They will not fail in corrupting you."

LfL aor. o. To be extinct. - 0

,ZA aor. i. and o. To deceive. A perfidiout man.

0.0 p aon i. To seal (with &). " A. A seal ; a1 r - 6 Ã ˆ - Â 33 v. 40 Mohammad is said to be y^~T+la~.

/'0

" The seal of the prophets." ;E&L A sealing ; the wax, clay, or other substance used in seal-

S I L T ing. ft f part. pass. Sealed.

9 . aor. o. To make an impression. ~ s * . A cheek. S Â ¥ I P I , - a # 0-

+~ks-I A pit or trench; The "le*! spoken of at 85 v. 4, "The makers-or Lords-

,& -0 ! of the pit of fire " were the servants of yp \ ,J

A Jewish tyrant who caused a number of Christians to be burnt alive. . . . e~d> aor. a. To cover over, deceive. p Ã part. act. One who deceives.-G& 111. To endeavour to deceive.

s A OI.

. . l~ Plur. i . i l~ l Equals, friends, lovers ; no verbal root.

0 &. aor. o. To disappoint, leave without asaist- - '0 ance. &A;>- One who deserts his friends, a .. Ã ˆ V

Traitor. &As^ part. pass. Destitute. 2 aor. i. and o. To make a noise in jyhy (an

eagle); to fall down (with ,,& or J). , 49 To strike or pierce the ear, to lay waste.

s " ++ A laying waste, a making desolate and 0 .l. Ã ruinous.-up1 IV. To lay waste (with ace.

and +I. . 0 ./ Ã‘ aor. o. To go out, go forth, come forth (with

&J J.1 &, +, or Jl). -2 and .$. Tribute, maintenance. 9 n.a. A getting

I'-C#L/ or going forth ; &I The Day of Re- s 0 surrection. Ã‘J part. act. One who cornea - - a-<s0 forth. r~ An issue, place of exit.-

/ /I. p.+l IV. To bring out, drive out, bring forth, produce, etretch forth, cast forth (with ace. and

<. Ã &, 4, u, and ,_;it also with 3 for ,_,];of 0

S -/t/ 0

following verb). +! n.a. A driving out, S expulsion, bringing forth. wy part. act. ^ S-l, I One who brings forth, etc. part. pass.

One who is brought forth, etc. ; also The place from whence, or time a t which anything is

.^*- Ã I. brought forth ; -& 3 17 v. 82, '2 2 " Bring me forth (from the grave) with a

0.1,- favourable exit."- a \ X. To take out, v take forth.

j+ quadriliteral, To chop up meat. Js Mustard-seed.

,, 'Â S <. /Ã, aor. o. Toguess, to tell lies. uÂ¡ A liar. $2 quadriliteral, To strike on the nose, f$f-

A proboscis or nose. /,> n-fc am. i. and o. To rend, make a hole in, feign,

falsely attribute. c /, To lay up in a storehouse, barn, or treasury. Â¥ ,,-,, a".

&A (2nd declension) plur. of <tjp A trea- s Bury, treasure, storehouse, magazine. ,_,ik

part. act. One who lays in a store, or keeps a ,

store of anything (with J of thing); Plur. .- (05 Keepers. 0

*, l. 2s nor. a. To be disgraced. J - n.a. Shame, / U S 9 0 ' disgrace. i_s, -\ for D. 8. Gr.T. 1, pp.

110 and 403, comparative form, More dis- graceful.-j^\ IV. To cover with shame,

6

disgrace (with ace. of pers. and ,<*I. $ 'c *

and in connexion with a complement > - ? - 0

part. act. One who puts to shame. t&- aor. a. To drive away, to be dull-the senses ;

1 0 6 4 to be driven away (with J), as +I 23 v. 110, " Be ye driven away," imperat. plur. for

/Â t - - 0 Â¥ <,h, the hamza being changed into, in consequence of the damina, and the servile, being dropped, D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 95 and 104. Â pA>- part. act. That which is dull, also that which is driven away (from society).

, , aor. a. To wander from the right way, to be deceived, suffer loss, lose, perish. n a . Loss, a losing concern. ilL>- and u f ^ \,b ' ns.a. Perdition, loss. part. act. One who wanders from the right way, a loser. 2 7 comparative form, The greatest loser, one who errs e x c e e d i n g l y . - . n.a. 11. f. A loss.- ,- C , t IV. To diminish (a quantity), give short measure, 3 part. act. One who givee sliort measure.

& aor. i. To bury one beneath the earth, cause the earth to swallow up (with (Ã‘ of the person and ace. of 3) ; to be eclipsed (the moon).

0 . # 2, ff + aor. i. To mix together (with (_J). & S ,. ,

plur. of Rougli wood, timber. ,., +L aor. a. To be low or humble, to humble oneJs

S 9t self (with J). L+ n.a. Humility. s&G part. act. One who humbles himself, or ii

Xt- 4 .. dejected ; at 41 v. 39 the passage ~ } i \ + JA^L must be rendered "Thou aeest th,

f a 9 earth barren and desolate;" Plur, + an( ;)4L

, , &A nor. a. To fear (with ace. or with in thi

^ n , sense of lest). +i% Fear.

2 To distinguish a s particular; Pass. To be in want. S^\s> Particularly, peculiarly. LG . a . ~ o v e r t ~ . - s \ VIII. To bestow upon any one in a peculiar manner, appropriate to (with u of thing and ace. of pers.).

& aor. i. To sew together-prop.. a soh-(with a . and &).

A aor. i. To have the best in an altercation. 7 An adversary. Note. This word is used for both singular, dual, and plural, though the dual - u L&L is also found in the Korfin, as a t 38 fl

v. 21, where there is an ellipse of the pronoun f f . - ,S, s '" A contentious person. + A . ^/ disputer.-,*Lt>- n.a. 111. f. Contention, dis-

S f ,: p ~ t e . - ~ l A * n.a. VI. f. Mutual disputing and -i"/,l, 0 s - recrimination .- el and VIII. The

reason for the latter form, which occurs a t 36 v. 49, is given by De Sacy in his Grammar, T. 1, p. 223, To dispute, strive together by way of dispute or litigation (with J, &, or ^a).

k^>> aor. i. To break wood, cut off the thorns from S I t - .

a tree. i^yo-sf* part. pass. Deprived of thorns. ' 0 ,+ aor. a. To be grew. > Green herbs.

Ã ,>.Ã F a - i f Ã 9 fern. plur. of+\ Oreen.-:+ fern.

part. IX. f. That which is green. aor. a. To be humble and lowly (with "1. -

&G part. act. one who is aubmis~ive with^). 2 a&. o. To draw lines, to write (with "1. Â£i TO cast out scumÃ‘ pot ; ,&- aor. a. TO do '-..

o n b& *.a. An error, fault, sin. s UiÃ BY mistake. &i- same a a k ; ~tasi. p~ur. 5 / of d+ D, â‚¬ Qr. T. 1, p, 370, the final 4

being changed into \ because preceded by another >. ; D.S. Or. T. 1, p. 111. ' \i part. t ,t- act. One who sins, a sinner, sinful.-llas.-f IV.

1

To be in error, to sin (with "). &. saii to be a n.a. Habitual sinfulness ; or i t may bt

3 regarded u the fern. of &. and agree with m i ' u n d e r d o o d , as at 69 v. 9. Note. Thi 0

t is not unfrequently added to nouns to give intensity; D. 8. Qr. T. 1, p. 322, note (3); see also T. 2, p. 279, note.

& nor. 0. To o j m up the State Prayer calhd ^'> 5 &. +k n.8. A matter, thing, business. $+ n.a. The demanding a woman in marriage.-&U t 111. To speak to, address (with acc, of pers. and & of subject). 4% n.a.

4 I60 A discourse; <-^a I J.& 38.v. 19, "A sound 0 .

judgment in legal matters." dl& aor. a, To march quickly (a came0, To

snatch, snatch away. b Something / a,/

snatched away by stealth.-* V. To snatch away, carry off, despoil.

& aor. 0, To make a step fornard. G I G :,I. r plur. of IS* A step.

5 < phr. s~ &. aor. i. To be light. '3: Light.-- 11. To make light, make things

easier (with Ã£. of pen. and ace. of thing). * I. n.a. An alleviation.-&I X. To

think or find light and easy, induce levity in any one (with ace. of pers.).

/ < . To be quiet or s i l e n t . - 1 ~ ~ ~ k 111. To speak 0 0 .0

i n 4 low voice (with v).-L-xA^ae' VI. To con- 0

verse in a low tone. & aor. i. To remain in a place; to lower

(with ace. of thing and J of pers.), aa &\ A$, i.G 15 v: 88, "Behave with humility,-Literally, lower thy wing-to the true believers." part. act. That which humbles.

& aor. i. To make manifest, and 3 aor. a. T o be hidden (with & of pen.), $. Hidden, as 'fi sf > 42 v. 44, "hkance, or with a Healthy glance ; " CÃ‡A In wcret.

'I. 1 &\ for .- &I comparative form. More hidden. &\i A secret action. '& In secret.-$? IV. To hide, conceal (with ace. and > or J); The words %? at 20 v.

0

15 are by some translated I' I want but little of concealing it," and by others "of making i t manifest;" The iv. f. being used in both

-Â v '^<* senses.--I X. To lie hid (with >). 'Â¥,I t

k_a.aÂ£LÃ part. act. One who tries to hide himself. aor. i. and a. To be lean (meat). 3 PIur. & A camel entering his second year ; see aim under Hi. f. $ Friendship, ,&& A friend, an epithet of Abraham, the friend of God; Plur. 4i.f (2nd declension), D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 368.-& 111. To be friendly towards any one. >. n.a. Friendship ; J$ is also plur. of &., in which sense i t means the

d >, middle or inner parts, as,$JO \ J& The inner 0 Ã‡

apartments. ilÃˆ aor. o. To be eternal, live for ever, remain for

ever in a place (with '1. .)!=Ã and $,Lk ^ Eternity, eternal life. i!,k part. act. Living for ever, e t c . - ' s part. pass. 11. f. Made immortal, or eternal.-GI IV. To render immortal ; To incline towards (with J!).

S a o r . o. To be pure and sincere, to arrive at; \& 12 v. 80, " They held a secret con-

ference." J,c part. act. That which is pure; proper and peculiar. a, Peculiarly. -&I IV. To purify (with ace. of pera. and

u), show sincerity in religion (with ace. of thing and J of pem.). &l n.a. Faith pure . and undefiled ; The name of the 112th chapter, which is held in especial veneration. [J^C* part. act. One who exhibits the sincerity and

' I , f purity of his faith, n^sf part. pass. Purified,

Yi- Â¥'Â sincerely religious.-i^aCU)1 X. To take entirely to one's-self (with a u . of thing and J of pers.).

ll- aor. i. To mix. s - u plur. of I& Those who are mixed up (in business).-g& 111. To mix one's-self up in the affairs of others (with act.).-Gj VIII. To bc mixed with (with u).

&L&- nor. a. To draw off, put off. aor. To be behind, come after ; to aucceed

(with 2,) ; to do a thing behind one's back (with ace. of pers. and thing), as at 7 v. 149 ; To act as deputy (with ace. of pen. and &), as $1 7 v. 138, "Do thou act as nay deputy." & A succeeding generation ;

6. ti + Behind, from behind, afier, suc- L . ' , 4 4

ceding ; &b &I I at 3 v. 164, "Those who are coming after them," refers to those for whom the honour of martyrdom is yet

L ^ ' L . reserved. L%. After, behind ; + L* 2 v. 256, "That which is yet to come upon them." iÃ‘aJ, part, act. One who stays, 01

sits behind another. i^k The contrary ; -. 4% ".n opposite sides ; dl+ In opposi- ^ tion to, &+ A difference ; & 25 v, 63, " For a distinction, or to follow one another;" see the corresponding passage in Genesie ch. 1, v. 14. (2nd declension) plur. of &G, generally translated "Women," ae being those who stay behind in case of war.

s & -. A successor, lieutenant, vicar ; 8 name given to sovereigns as Vicegerents of God, also to the successors of Mohammad; The termination i adds energy or intensity to the expression, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 322 ; Plur. &&. a n d m both words of the 2nd declension, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 402.& 11. To leave behind.

part. pass. Left b e h i n d . - d c 111. To oppose (with 2)' accede to (with ace. of

' Â ¥ -,i 1.1 ' pen. and J\), as \^ J\ J 4 I- t'. ' ' .I,* ~H-A \^\ 11 v. 90, " I will not accede to you

1 .

in what I forbid you." 2% n.a. v. suprd. >-I IV. To break the promise given to

any one (with ace. of pers. and thing) ; At 34 v. 38 it means to restore (with ace.) ; In the

/-/',' l,--

Passive Aala & 20 v. 97, "It-the promise- shall not be broken for thee ; " For the construction of doubly transitive verbs in the passive (or objective) voice, the learner may consult D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 123. iJsLs part. act. One who breaks his promise; for the con-

f ' Â struction dm &; i lf 14 T. 48 see D. 8.

-a 'Â¥' Gr. T. 2, p. 187.- a V. To remain behind (with ;).a\ VIII. TO disagr~e, differ

s. * (with 2). i_*SL;Ãˆ- n,a. Diversity, vicisai-

s 0 L f

tude, oontradiction. part, act. Difler- ing one with another, various, diverse, dif-

e '\ ' ferent ; For the construction $\ ULs-4 6 v. 142, "Whose food is of various kinds," see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, pp. 79, 197, and 270.- ,.; ;(. X. To make a successor, cause to

S . k ' O / aucceed (with acc. and &). + part. pass. Made a successor, or inheritor (with 2).

& aor. o. To measure accurately, and define the dimensions o f anything, to create, produce (with acc.and^>,u,^,,or . J). 0 &n.a.collect.

noun, Creatures, created things, especially 0 mankind, a creation, lying device; lAlo. JL&I

37 v. 11, " Stronger by nature ; I' At 36 v. 68 the word JÃL> would seem to stand for &. "Old age;" J . A natural disposition, manner or habit. JOc part. act. One who creates; 3 d f T h e Creator, one of the names of God. % A portion, full share of happi-

Qt- Ã 0 1 - 0 new. &I The Great creator.-inÂ£ fern.

part. pass. 11. f. Well and perfectly formed.- sfci-\ n.a. VIII. f. A lying device, . aor. o. To be empty, clear (with J), free, alone, ,

alone with (with (Jl) ; to paw away, to have been in existence or in force in former times ; in the latter sense it appears at 48 v. 23,

L , tf-Jii- 2 J1; To be proper to or belong to (with J, also with ; to light on , a vacant place (with ^); this or the preceding would seem to be the literal meaning of the passage> l& La. i l 3 5 v . 22. * J O ~

fern. of JG for J$ part. act. That which has pu&d away.-& 11. To empty, make clear; ff^ 9 v. 5, " Diarniss them," Literafly, " Clear their road."-la- V. To be clear and empty. am. o. To get low (afire), to faint away and

die. part. act. Extinct, dead. *ri- aor. i. and o. To cover over, ferment. >

fern. Wine. 2 plur. of- A covering,-- and especially a woman's head and face veil. ,- ", d 0 aor. o. To take a fifth part. ^^ . ipasc. ..

St-, " - Â ¥ L - . t - 0 and ( ^ ~ 4 i ~ - fern. Five, see a p . Oblique 3 Fifty. & A fifth part, (ank The fifth.

0 , 0 + To subside (a swelling), To be empty (the s.., belly). u Hunger.

ÃˆÃ§>= aor. i. To AaIf-roast (meat). ^&. n.a. Bitter. 0 . Ã 0 0 j+ aor. a. To stink, > A pig; Plur.,iliA. .

(2nd declension) Swine. 0 0 , + aor. i. and o. To remain behind, hide anay.

5 6 Ã + The Stara in general, or, according to some, the five Planets Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, because they have a re-

a 9- trograde as well as a direct motion. wLaÃ The Devil, because he hides himself at the name of God.

00 0 s f<Â¥ To strangle.-tf a part. act. VII. f. That

which is strangled. S 0 9 ;k aor. o. To &w like an ox. ,\,A A lowing.

&. aor. o. To plunge into, wade, enter into- a discourse,-engage in-a discussion, or vanity, -(with &. Note. After ye . there ia frequently an ellipse of the complement. J& n.a. A wading, engaging in (vain discourse).

^t-; L/a-Ãˆ,l part. act. One who engages in vain discourse.

&. for dfi. aor. dlA? for dJ , D. S. Qr. . T. 1, pp. 113 and 115, To fear, dread, appre- hend (with ace, and with & of pen. in sense

t-0 L, of for; or with or in sense offrom; it is likewise found with ace. of pers. and u of

d X 0

thing ; also with \ of following verb, or with st,/ 7 -,

acc. and :\). &,A n.8. Fear, U I ~ . a, LL s

part, act. One who feare, afraid. && Fear ; k+ Out of fear.-t_Ã 'f 11. To cause to fear, frighten, terrify. i JU-fss n.a. Terror ; &*

, 6 0 0 0

In order to terrify ( them) . -+? V. To be frightened, to diminish by taking away a part.

5%. '; JF n.a. $2 & 16 v. 49 may be

rendered " By taking away a portion of their & aor. i. a doubly imperfect verb, To be tumbled goods or profits," or according to Sale's ver- , hwa (a house). ,k for 3, 6~ sion, " By a gradual destruction." 1 part. act. That which is utterly ruinous, waste, JG aor. o. To keep. Jla. Plur. Jw A maternal 1 1 and tumble-down ; fallen down (with &). Uncle. Jb'k A maternal ~ u n t . - J> 11. To 1Â° aor. i. To be disappointed, frustrated, to be bestow favours on (with double ace.).

Ll>- nor. o. To deceive, be unfaithful to (with ace. of pers. and u) ; to violate (an engagement), as I,' 9 9 I"' J -~GL~ lw, 8 v. 27, " Nor violate your covenants." N.B. ; is here a disjunctive .- particle. Ã‡)J n.a. A deceiving, treachery ;

, . ^ L ^ P # L 0 .. , J!. \! 8 v. 72, "And if they desire to deceive thee ; " the n.a. being here put for the verb; D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 163. s,- - j,lÃˆ part. act. One who deceives, a cheat, treacherous. 3~i- with i added for 8ake -if

energy, D. S. Gr. T, 1, p. 322 ; same meaning 5 , - ' <Â¥ S,',

as &la- ; or it may agree with 3 or +I understood, thus, $fi'G-& 40 v. 20, Literally, " l i e knoweth the deceitful of eyes; " For the construction of the Participle (verbal adjective) with the genitive, see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 183. 3% A perfidious person, a traitor. - u ' 0.1 VIII. To deceive, defraud ; 3 * ^ \ !G4 c 9 v. 107, " Those who defraud one another ; I 1 Literally, " who mutually defraud themselves;" the eighth form being here put for the sixth, which is not ueed in this verb, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 138.

i_Ã aor. a. and o. To be diligent. $5 and Gji; A state, custom, manner, wont : & Accord-

<.*,-^ ing to custom, e,! J oblique dual part. act. Both of whom diligently perform their work.

s -, in a hopeless state. +l i. part. act. One who is in a hopeless state.

)\ . aor. i, To be in good circumstances, .- to be favourable to. 2, Fern. i s Good, agree-

s 8 t . Ã

able, Plur. ; also Better, best, f o r s f , the 1 being omitted on account of the frequent use of the word;' N.B. With these comparative significations it is common to all genders and

/ 0L0 d

numbers. Good tliings, good works. SO/ /'a 0 -'

if& Choice, selection.-+? V. To chooae ; -Â If, - 6 ; at 68 v. 38 d , ~ is for ^ys D. S. Gr, T. 1,

p. 221.--Â£ . VIII. To choose, choose from out of (with double ace., also with ace. of pers. or thing chosen and &).

al>. aor. i. To sen. laÃ > A thread. fk& A needle. & for J- aor. a. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 243, To ,

imagine. J-&. a collective noun, Horses, Horse, cavalry.-& 11. To make to appear

'1 . - 0 c . 9

(with Jl of pers. and ^\I.- Jw a verbal adjective with the form of the passive part. of VIII. f. Proud, arrogant.

Â¥I* aor. i. To act the coward. plur. of f & A pavilion.

a 5 0 0

( Ji aor. i. To go gently, crawl. g\3 Plur. + Whatsoever moveth on the earth, especially beasts of burden ; A miraculous Beast is spoken of at 27 v. 84, which is to be one of the Signs of the last Day.

.8 8 p To be behind. ,Ãˆ The back, hinder par t ; f / ', s ,'-

4 J ^yy From behind. plur. o f 2 The back, the last, extremity, that which comes

,, ,*,,, after ; lÃ2$ & bpi 4 V. 50, " And we render them after the manner of their hinder parts," i.e. smooth and without features ; +$$T';u 50 v. 39, " At the end of prayers; alluding to certain supererogatory observances which may be made or not after the evening Prayer. ,i\i The extreme, lnet remnant,

/<Ã - uttermost part.-,+ 11. To dispose, manage,

a - / Ã

govern. J J ~ part. act. One who governs, etc. . ^ 1 -p\ IV. To turn the back,retrent. ^J ' i ln.a, 4.. 1. t$d I J b ~ i 52 v. 49, Literally, "At the waning

, of the Stars;" the words refer to certain

t observances after morning Prayer, see . S 1 . f

./, A-Ã part. act. One who turns his back and retreats.--2 a n d 2 V. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 220, To meditate upon, understand, consider.

s'6 f JJ To p u t forth leave^.-^^^ part. act. V. f. One who wraps himself up in a garment ; The name of the 74th chapter, in which Mohammad is addressed by this name; H e is said to have been thus wrapped up when accosted by the Angel Gabriel. . ,, a P Ã

,SJ aor. a. To drive away. JFJ n.a. Arepelling; 0 Ã ˆ \, J 37 v. 9, " To drive (them) away." s * L, ,,s& part. pass. Driven away, rejected. .. 0 LJOÃˆ- aor. a. To examine info, slip, to be weak (an argument). part. act. That which has

/, I.* no IV. To weaken or nullify by an argument, condemn (with ace. and u).

*- i . Ã -A^ part. pw3. One who is condemned or worthy of condemnation.

1 \ ) aor. a. and o. To spread out, expand, transitive.

_Ã- aor. a. To be small, vile, and of no value. >^ part. act. ~ h a h h i c h is or becomes small, vile, or of no account.

a . 0. To enter (with ace. also with > or with J) ; to go in unto (with ace. of place and & of pers.); to join one's-self in company

i . V G - 0 '. . with (with +), as at 5 v. G 6 ; J@ PJ

, , I t They entered into-your society-with in-

fidelity ;" with + it also signifies to have connexion with, in which sense i t occurs a t

5 , - 4 v. 27. J^>-J Vice, corruption of either mind or body ; L>-i Falsely, frtiudulently. &^

' / L l part. act. One who enters in.-&dl IV. To introduce, cause to enter, lead into (with ace.

Â ¥ " - ' I - of pers. and 2, or with double ace.). &A^ part. pass. Introduced, also Time or place of entering in ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 305;

Â ¥ - Â L , Ã J ^ e &J^ 17 v. 82, " Cause me to enter (the 4 s / $ Ã

grave) with a favourable entrance," see FJ . s - a Â

-&A. noun of place VIII. f. A place of ' - 8 L f retreat, see &J^Ã auprd. .,,

&J aor. a, and o. To smoke. z\a-J Smoke. Ji aor. i. and o. To give much milk (a camel), to

s ,L shine. iLfJi Shining, Jb+ An abundant rain.

aor. a. To drive off, put off, avert (with >).- *' a ~4 VI. for IJ l J j D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To strive one with another (.with &. .- , . . :,.0 _,a aor. o. To walk, go. A step; in the

L

K o r h i t frequently means a step in rank, honour, or authority; a degree of honour or '.,. happiness ; &--a and (Ã‘iG By degrees (of

'8,.

honour) ; G J a 'p 9 i. 20, " Of higher degree," Literally, " Superior as to degree."- . .',." ^ 4 X. To move gradually: conaign to a gradual punishment.

0 . .

W,J aor. o. To be obliterated; to study, read with attention (with ace. also with &). Attentive study. &,JJ~ Enoch, so called from his great learning; this word is found in the Koran of the 2nd declension, D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 404 ; Freitag in his Dictionary spells it with the tanween. To follow up, overtake. 4 n.a. The act of , /-' -'

following up ; &Ls t 20 v. 80, " Thou art in no fear of being overtaken (by the Egyptians);" iJ$ also means the lowest bottom, BC. " Dregs"' (of l l e l l ) . - 4 IV. To overtake, reach, attain unto, comprehend. 1

S / b , GJJ& part. pass. overtaken.-^i\^ and 4 \Â¡s [VI D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To overtake, follow one another (with &); to reach, comprehend; The passage at 27 v. 68

,-' 6-0 l>'lT& & i_y.il Jj' is read in various . ways and admits of several interpretations ; it may either be rendered " But their knowledge has comprehended (somewhat) of the life to come," or " Still less have they comprehended, etc.," see & .

s --'b 9^f pJ4 Plur. * )J (2nd declension) from the Pers. Money; a silver coin, the value of which

has varied considerably at different times and in different places; the weight of the legal dirhem is fixed at 503 barleycorns.

0 . L i t. . q,~ aor. i. To know; en'! y[y 21 vv. 109 and

Ill, " And 1 do not know ; " for this negative use of yl see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 520; the verb is used with ace., also with 1 whether.-

IV. To make to know, teach (with ace. of pen. and <Ã‘>) - 0

(^~Ãˆ aor. o. To hide (with ncc. and >I.

- 0 . st Ã

aor. o. To ram in. + pi ur. of,% Oakum or Palm-tree fibres with which ships are caulked ; according to others, Nails.

0 0 a - JJ aor. a. To get no increa~e,-~+a 11. To

corrupt. , . ;a aor. o. To push, drive away with violence (with L

ace. and J1). [J n.a. A thrusting. , , 2 aor. o. To call out, call, call upon ; to call for,

invoke (with ace. of pers., u of thing, and 0

of place) ; to pray to, invite (with ace. and L * \ also with >L or with ace. and ^.l); to fc-

attribute (with ace. and J of pers.) ; & for , 2L.S 2 v. 182, " He prays to me," D. S. Or.

IÃ‘

T. 1, p. 459 ; 1+3 " I invite," 1 pen. sing. aor. for $1, the final Alif being an 47 .- - 4 <uU+l or Alif of precaution, D. S, Gr, T. 1, . p. 109 - \:; and when followed by We& or

I F ' ,.. Alif of union, \iÂ£ 3 pers. plur. pret. D. S. Or; T. 1, pp. 69 and 112. & n.a. A cry, prayer ; with an affixed pronoun it is written L f 0-b. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 118. Gi A prayer, supplication, invoking, asking for, calling upon

s . . or for. 59a A eupplication, prayer, invoca-

*^<, 0

tion, summons ; i,ca 30 v. 24, " By a sum- IOIIS." -&if plur. of 3 5 An adopted or spurious Son. @3 for &\; part. act. One

^ who preys, invites, summons, etc. a Preacher; a t 2 v. 182 e%lÂ¡i a poetic license for &\ST . D. 8. Or. T. 2, p.497.-& VIII. D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 222, To claim, desire (with ace. or +).

rf; for g3 D. 8. Or. T. I, p. 97, aor. a. To be hot. ^Â¥J Warmth, warm clothing made of camel's hair ; The food, milk and raiment derived from camels are all classed under the head of 4&.

3; aor. a. To push, pay over to (with ace. of -

thing and ^\) ; to repel, drive away, avert (with ace. and +), Ã§. n.a. The act afpro- , 6 4 < -0 ?<., A-

hibiting, prevention ; ^wL-H ^\ Ã § - i ^J I-/ ' , Â¥'I-

&+J 2 v. 252, " Unless God (had set) r f - ,

men to hinder one another;" The noun of action is here used instead of the verb, and governs the subject in the gen. and the object in the accus. case; D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 166. J\J part. act. o n e who averts.-& III. (with 2) To defend.

/.Ji aor. o, andi . Topour forth (water). 9 2 part. act. That which pours forth or is poured forth.

>Ã§ aor. o. To pound into dust. Powder, a s/

level batik of sand ; l ? ~ Into powder. & Level sand. ^ui-' (2nd declension) D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 402, A flat mound of earth or dust.

3 t i e e ~ i .-,Sl VIII. f. of$ f o r p i D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 222. /*Ã part. act. s e e ~ J . -

$ aor. o. To show, point out, gnide (with ace. of pers. and & of thing). A proof, a meana of showing (with &), as 3T'W Qi ,& 25 v. 47, "We made the sun to be a meana of showing it-the shadow."

&; To rub, to incline downwards from the meridian (the sun). & c.a. The declining of the sun from the meridian.

15 aor. o. To let down a bucket into a well. 2; comm. gend. A 'nicket.-$ 11. To-occasion a fall (with ace. of pern. and ").-JY IV. . To let down, offer as a bribe (with + of thing offered and I\ of pers.l.-J.Jj V. T; approach

s^, closely.

<J for; v. la/&. 0 , o -r , Ã ˆ J ~ quadriliteral verb, To plaster over, oblite-

rate, destroy (with & of pers, and u); 0

Original root ,*i To piaster, $ aor. o. To destroy.--5 11. same as,<; (with

ace. also with &). n.a. Destruction ; /' ,L-Q , , I'-;% I A L ~ A * 17 v. 17, "Then we destroyed

i t with an utter destruction." a 6 , Ã aor. a. To shed tears, y- n.a. A tear ; used -

with a plural signification, Tears. 22 aor. a. and 0, To wound the brain; hence, to -

destroy. 5 for y*i ; Plur. 3Lj Blood ; the hamza here

takes the place of final,, the word therefore retains the tanween; D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 1l.3

L * -, and 402 ; +sL+ & Y 2 v. 78, " Ye shall not shed your blood," meaning " the blood of one another."

s -Â¥ ,L>+ from the ~ersian,l^+, or mire probably from the Greek %vdp~ov, A gold coin, a ducat.

aor, o. To be near or low, to draw near. ,_ ; s

for * J I ~ , Fern. &l.) part. act. That which" is near at hand or low, like fruit hanging low and near at hand, as at 69 v. 22. 3 for S'Jl, Fern. GJ for $3 D. 8. Or. T. 1, pp. 110, Ill, and 403, comp. and super!. form, Vfier, worse, less, easier; as it were, more ready to

A. Â¥S -a ' , -a hand, nearer, nearest ; \ dl Sy } " The present life," as being nearer or perhaps viler; "*jr $ > 30 v. 2, " In the nearest parts ^ ^ ^ - of the earth ;'I where ia not decided, Lut it seems probable that the Victory spoken of in the text took place either in Syria or the Holy Land, possibly at Jerusalem ; at 33 v. 59 $1 may be rendered " More convenient or suitable ; " at 58 v. 8, "fewer ; " and at 73 v. 20, " very near," or " somewhat less ; " at 7 v. 168 it is used with an ellipse of theword

7

^ Â ¥ 4 /'Â¥('" ' ,// / ' P '-, a,,$\, thus l liA & i-L " They take the goods of this baser thing (viz. the world)." GJ' as a feminine substantive, The world, ibis world, this world's gear.- ;I IV. To bring near ; at 33 v. 59 it means to fetch

,/,

(JÃˆ To cut in pieces, fill a cup. ;^ti.? Full-a cup,-a bumper.

,< / ^ , L ,

Ã ˆ J ~ nor. a. To come suddenly ~ ~ o n . - ~ \ & d \ XI. To 2 - " , be of a blackish tint. t b > ~ Ã part. act. That

wliicli is of a dark green colour inclining to black, as gardemfrom being much watered. >^ nor. o. XI atmint, dissimulate. Gh Red lcntlicr, also plur. of :z Butter, anointing oil; at 55 v. 37 it may be taken in either sense ; if in the latter, i t means that the heavens shall melt away and become like oil. - - '--a --,+I IV. To use dissimulation, in modern pliraae, to bc a humbug. &I- * part. act.

'

in order to put on (with J>c of pers.) ,, , 5'- / 0 s 4 , st-'

J ~ J To happen, ,A Time ; \ ^^_^- 76 v. 1, n A space of time."

One who glosscs over or holds in low estima- -" 9 '-9 LV\S ' -4 ' , tion (with fc-*), as ^i,+~ y! I++! l \'^cf\

f

/Â -^ especially of bad l ~ c k . - ~ M IV. To transact (business).

j6 aor. o. To change-as the times,-to undergo .- vicissitudes. 3:; A change of time or fortune ;

59 v. 7, " In one circuit."-&\; III. TO cause to interchange good and bad fortune (with ace. of thing and of persons).

.\i aor. a. and o. To endure, continue, remain 5,- -

(with 2) ; to persevere (with &). e t ~ part. act. That which endures perpetually, One who perseveres.

</ -' .1- 9 9 ' . 2 I J aor. o. To be inferior. & and @ is

properly a noun, signifying inferiority; as a preposition i t is employed in a variety of senses, Besides, except, beneath, to the exclu- sion of, in preference to, contrary to, different to, in opposition to, without; a t 16 v. 37 we find it used with two different meanings in the

50 v. 80, "Will ye therefore gloss over this new revelation?" i.e. the K o r h

, <Ã J Ã ˆ aor. i. To happen to, i";uriously affect any one. ^ L 1 9 , ' 1

*ti\ for dt)l ( s e e & ? ) compar. form, More grievous.

)>It> or if written with the hamza $\; for GiJ (2nd declension) David, D. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 104 and 404.

s ^ i\iS aor. o. To go round. ,\a fern. gender; Plur. s A house, dwelling, mansion, abode ; ;\a1 A name of Paradise ; also of Medina, as at

9 , - / / . 59 T. 9. ',{Â¥ Any. $5 Plur. _I(\,.) (2nd declension) A change of fortune, turn of luck,

, 0 / 1. 9 ' ,t--",

same verse, as *G fl LA+ 1; "We had not served anything besides him," and t - ' ' 9 b> -"* , > i - r ? w f i w " N o r had we declared anything unlawful without him," i.e. without his permission ; Lastly, i t is used to express any thing interposed be tween two , 0 t-Ãˆ-- C.1- 0 - t-'

otijects, thus \j-s $,a _1 JÃ§Ã + 18 v. 89, "We have given them nothing to act as a covering against i t (the sun);" The people referred to in this passage having neither house nor clothing, but living in holes in the ground like the Earthmen of South Africa;

t, Ã ' '- ^ <<*.-o^- So again at 19 v. 17, &J <-?as-LÃ

$* "And she took a veil to cover herself from them ;" see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 496.

,li aor. i. To be indebted, to judge, profess the St- true faith (with ace.), & A debt, that which

one owes. ,_ Custom, institution, religion, , - 0 P G . 1 -

the true faith, obedience, judgment ; ijJ , \

I; PIur. *),} demonstrative pronoun, called also demonstrative article ; This, that, He ; to this pronoun the particle or l& is frequently prefixed, and it is then written \,& or commonly I.&, Fein. !$, Plur. q.v. is frequently used with an ellipse of, or instead of

and must then be translated "that i^s, . ' y o ' which," or "he who," as ,.Ã£.-. li 1. 7 v. 107, ' What then do ye order ? " Literally, "What is that which ye order?" According to the system of the Arab grammarians these de- monstratives are all indeclinable nouns, and totally independent of each other; D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 441.-N.B. \i is likewise the ace. of !

,J q.V. s ' L fi aor. a. To collect. i_^ A wolf.

! &G fern. q.v. 0

\J fern. plur. part. act. of $i q.v. 0 4 S l . / Â 1. 0 i1.i aor. a. To despise. ~ J - Ã for ;*,~i)-Ã part. paas.

Despised ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 104. Ã " ^9 +,i aor. oi To prohibit, wander to and fro. +J

generic noun, A fly. 0 05 p lor. a. To split, cut the throat, day, sacrifice

(with ace. and &). a<J That which is -Go".

1 sacrificed, a victim.-^u 11. To slay in large I numbers. 1 , 0

&i&i quadriliteral verb, To be moved to and fro, s '.'.' Ã

as anything suspended in the air. U+J^Ã

-6 l f - Â # 6 -6 Ã y / The day of judgment; & \ + 4 24 v. 25, "God will pay them their just due."

part. pass. Moved about, wavering to and fro ,Ll- (with k); Original root (_)i q.v.

0 ,, 9 + a . a, To select.--^,\ V I 11. To store up for

- ,., , ~ J J VI. To become debtors one to another (with u).

future use (with ace. and J;).

>A< One who receives payment of a debt.- _/+ for^Â¥} v. suprd.

* r f ;

JJ imperat. ofii ; q.v. , 5,'

Ã aor. o. To scatter, strew. I'J noun of unity, One single ant. $1; Progeny, offspring, children, race ; The following passage is rather

l"' I- ..'- ! , obscure, < - ~ y +,,J yy*\ 2 \M I0 v. 83, "And none believed on Mosca, save (certain) children of his people ;" Some have imagined that Pharaoh's people are those referred to.

~11':- \,i aor. a. To create, produce, multiply ; as &+ AJ 42v. 9, "He multiplies you by this means;" , .. . i t is also used with the ace. and J. , , $ To measure with a cubit. LJi A stretching forth of the hand, strength, power; * ) StÃ

0 , - l .i 11 v. 79, " l i e was weak in power concerning them," i.e. He had no power to protect

8 / u 0 Â¥ /I,<

them; clrf J 69 v. 32, " The extension-length-ofwhich is seventy cubits." If ,. e b ~ comm. gend. A cubit, length of the arm from tlie elbow to the extremity of the middle

' 0 -' * finger. ,+LJ 18 v. 17, oblique dual, " Hi8 two fore-legs;" properly, down to the knees.

s : ; nor. o. and i. To snatch away, katter, n.a. , s - The act of ecuttering abroad. for +U

D. S. (3r.T. 1, p. 109, part. act.; Fem. Plur. A$$, as \y +q>l"; 51 v. 1, " By the winds which scatter (the dust) in every direction ; " or, by another interpretation, " By the women who scatter abroad (their offspring)." , S < - I &J To ~ b e y . - ~ J ^ t part. act. IV. f. One who is submissive (with J\).

s ' I , 2; To strike sn the clan. ^Ut;l plur. of >^ A

chin; at 17vv. 108 and 109 it may be rendered < 6

,, Faces." 3; nor. o. To strike a man on the private parts,

to remember (with ace. and 2); to com- memorate, make mention of, bear in mind

(with ace. and & or &I. 34 A remem- brance, record, commemoration, memoir, me- morial, making mention, an exposition (of religion), admonition ; The K o r h is frequently called i-iJld,TJ "An admonitioti, or exposition of religion for all creatures ; " >$l"&l It T. 45, The Jewm and Christians, a s " Keepers of the oracles of God ; " 34 also

' -' ,<-,,, means fame, good report, as a iÃ‘ hi, 94 v. 4, " And have we not exalted thy fame ? "

., , s ,<-! s ' 3J Plur. 3 and yl/i) A male. >$\i part. act. One who remembers (God). 4; (2nd declension) D. S. Or. T. 1, p.402, A remember- ing, admonition - fiT i 34 38 v. 46, " By , J their calling to mind the life to come; " y - 7 9 %>w + v. 43, "What record of (o~means of knowing) i t do you possess?" Note. 2 is here put for " In what? " see

S' <-

I,. iss A warning, admonition, that which s "Â¥ brings to one's recollection. ,+iAÃ part. .pass.

,a' eme em be red.-,?J IT. To remind, warn (with S <-.

ace. and v) ; to admonish. ->(A' n.a. A

s * , , reminding, warning. Ji * part. act. One who .*', ,a?

warns or admonishes.-jAJ or,^ V. D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To be admonished, to $e

,'Â¥' < - , Ã*', , > . f u . , 9 ' / . l

reminded ; Ji^i ,+ j + . L ,ÃS,-Ã§ +,I 35 v. 34, "And did we not give you (a sufficient) length of days, that whoso would be admonished might be admonished therein ? "-;i:l VII I . D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 222, To remember, remind * Ã

one's-eelf. part act. One who remembers or reminds himself, hence, who is reminded or admonished.

Â¥i < LJ aor. o. To burn furiously.->a 11. To cause

to burn, to slay. a . Ji aor. i. To be abject, humbled. ji n.a. - 3. .ON

Humility, abasement ; JiMI , 17 v. 25, , ,,

" The wing of humility," see ; At 17 v. **-', s H 9 . L ,w,

111 the words Ã ‡ J 2, aJ , +, bear one I /

or two interpretations ; they may mean I I Neither has he any friend, on account of the vileness (of all created things) ;" or they may be translated, "Neither has he any to protect him from ignominy,' (as requiring no s* , one). <JJ Abasement, ignominy, vileness. Jjiwell-trained, tractable~abeastofburthen); commodious or easy, (the earth, or the paths

S f ! S < Ã

of the earth) ; Plur. &la. ail plur. of 3: Humble, submissive, mean, low-spirited, weak- * l hearted. JJI comp. form (2nd declension),

05 /Â

Viler, most vile.-& 11. To humble, render submissive (with ace. and J); to bring low. . a / * $2 n.a. A bringing low.- Jdl IV. To abase.

$ Fern. ; Plur. & i That, thoÃ§ ; all of which are considered by Arab grammarians as indeclinable nouns, entirely distinct one

from the other ; they take as affixes the personal pronouns of the second person, as &:, L*iL]$, J,>J, ( and q, according to the number and gender of the persons addressed ; they are also found with the usual prefixes, aa &A? Thus, in that way ; For that reason, etc. See D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 440.

6 " .- p aor. o. To revile. 2; A treaty, good faith.

S t" , , A ~ A < part. pass. Abused, disgraced.

->/; aor. o, and i. To follow closely. Plur. s 9 ' . s 9 : ++a A crime, fault, sin. + j a A portion,

lot. 0 0 . nor. a. To go (with &) ; go away, depart

Ll, (with ^c.) ; take away, or go away with (with , 3 0 .

u); D.S .Gr .T .2 , p.121. ^^hjcomm. , gend. Gold. k_-Ã t>\ part. act. One who goes.

5 ,< 0 , ? Â¥A& n.a. The act of taking away.-+a\ IV. To take away, remove (with ace. and s), also to take, receive, as sit 4G v. 19, where

t r f9 - 9 .9 there ia an ellipse of the words ,Ã J'L:, 0

L 0 &i nor. a. To forget (with &&). ! ,a Fern. &\i, Gen. ^j, Ace. IJ; Dual ,_)';J,

oblique G;, and in constr, with a conlplement 0 , 0

\Ji and ,_^i ; Fein. Dual +,'uSJ., oblique 0

L0 0 . ', , . &,a, and in eonstr. G$i and >'_Â¥ ; Plur. - I", , . . . i_ , oblique d,.y and in c ~ n s t r . ~ ~ and ,.,i ; ^

s *: Fern. Plur. 4 2 ; These words are never used but in connexion with a complement, it is therefore only in their abbreviated forms as

most usual acceptation is Possessed of, Lord of, endowed with, or having; The following are a few of- the instances where they may be paraphrased with advantage ; Ex. "-6 ' ' f^s. ,J 2 v. 280, I' Under a difficulty ; '"

0 Ã ‡ . ' Y

U&; 1 ,J 3 v. 3, "Mighty to avenge ;" ,AÃ ^ ', - 0 , +I ilea 41 v. 51, "Then is he given to much prayer ; i_^^\f,*> 2 v. 172, I' Bela-

Ã‡. . b , 0 '

tives ;"" cj 6 4 ,+ j\y 14 v. 40, " In an un- fruitful valley ; 9Il lr~' l l)G 0 0

18 v. 17, "To the right and left; " +I; J ' ' lg 54 v, 13, " On (a vessel) built with f^ 5 !

planks and oakum " or naila, see >i ; ,J ^0b0 J S & \ " The Lord of the two horns," either

Alexander the Great, who is thus represented on his coins, or an older Hero who lived in the time of Abraham; AT^ 21 v. 87, The prophet Jonah, see In addition to the

'. a- meanings assigned to ;J, c-^J has special significations, i t may sometimes be rendered The essence of, the very identical, the thing

' 5 4 P ' itself; , , d l e-?G 3 v. 148, "The very in- , most thoughts of your breasts." For the rules of syntax whicli affect ,: see D. S. Or.

0 9 . T. 8, p. 145. Note. Instead of it is usual to employ the irregular Plural ^\, written lJJ q.v. ', 12 aor. o. To drive away ; &*? 2 pers. fern. dual, 28 v. 23, " They drove away (their flocks)." c , . ^ Â¥- '0" &, b'ja, etc. that they are to 1.e found in m r o, To taste, experience (with ace, and &

the Kodn ; their proper rendering depends , or w). 3i.Ã part. act. One who taÃ§tea, very frequently upon the sense of the words 1 ,. - - in connexion with which thry occur ; their 1 J l i l IV. To CBUH to tnste (with double KC.).

~9 see ,J . I

- 0 0 0 0 0s

L$ see 5. 5%- Sll aor. a. To be the head of. PI, Plur.

f i t A head, capital sum, as Wft yn 2 v. 279, "The capital of your money ;" J . \y^ 6 1' wa 21 v. 66, "They fell back into idolatry," Literally, "They were turned upside down upon their heads."

&I&$ plur. of iÃ‘y, rt. I-; q.v. s

t_$& aor. a. and o. To be compasswitate. 4 Coin- s.*- passion. t_si Compassionate, merciful. i^t aor. a. To see, look (with &), behold, per-

ceive, think (with ^) ; to know (with or without 3; with an ffix iq ia for $15, which again is for L. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 118 and 98 ; in the aorist and imperat. the 7 is gene-

I->-,, Ã

rally omitted, thus +.L AT'&; 9 v. 95, " And God will see your works;" &fl17 v. 64, and f^^ 6 v. 40 ; the personal pronoun d in these instances is purely a pleo- nasm, and adds nothing to the meaning; 1 " What thinkest thou?" " What think ye ? "

iÃ§^ Those two ; dual of di, generally 0 0

written la^JOi q.v. 9

D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 544, and T. 2, p. 479 ; At ,,

18v.37 ^, is for Ã‘i D.S.Qr.T.l,p.459. &. - \ * - a - s\, Judgment, opinion ; d~ l ,&$ ll v. 29,

'0 -0 0 S;0 " Upon first thoughts;" i\ GI, 3 v. 11, sG, "Judging by sight." 4 That which pleases

4 t the eye. ky for ^y (2nd declension) D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. I l l and 402, A vision of the night. Hypocrisy, ostentation ; ST[, 4 uÃˆ0T' v. 266, "To be seen of men."-

0

f\i) aor. i. To become known.-@\ IV. To divulge (with u).

0

111. To deceive by hypocritically aasum- Â¥*Ã‘ -- f -> ing a false appearance ; y\,+ for 3 pers.

plur. aor. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 112, Â 230.- &,- IV. for &\ To cause to see, show, make to appear (with double ace.) ; & 4 "1.1 \^ &i 40 v. 30, " I only point out to you what I think (to be right)."-dsT/i VI. To see one another, come in sight of one another ; This word is written ~9 at 26 v. 61, the only place in the K o r h where it occurs, but this seems to be a license, having for its object to avoid the concurrence of two quiescent letters ; the

0 0 , -0 following word commencing with a Wesla.

0 - 3 0 +J aor. o. To be a lord and master. L_^ Plur. 0 ** "g A Lord ; t-/; for My Lord. ^*_,

3 * 0 -t -/,

plur. of Myriads. ^_4.^ (2nd declen- " s ^ , .- .^ sion) plur. of < t ~ ^ A daughter-in-law. ^J

A Rabbi, a Doctor or one learned in Divine Law. L J Frequently, often, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 500.

e"; To be profitable (a trade or traffic). 00, /g -, /~SJ To expect.- .! V. To wait, wait for, expect,

watch for something to befall any one (with a&. of thing and + of pers,). ( -i ma. The , s-,/' Ã

act of waiting, a period of waiting. &J , part. act. One who waits.

aor. i. and o. To tie, confirm, strengthen (with - &, aa F)L' & lap, 8 v. 11, " That he might strengthen your hearts."-&G 111. To

be firm and constant. Â£ A body of horse, ,

consisting of five or more. , ,,

To be watered every fourth day ( a camel) ; aor. a. i. and o. To be the fourth. $ The fourth

/- -^9 part. eq Four by four ; ?bJ By fours (2nd P - fs ,by. ''-Â¥

declension), see &U. Ã§->, fern. and <ouil s /Â , , ,Mi

masc. Four, ae~+~. ufiJl Forty. ?$ A fourth.

5 aor. o. To increase, grow, swell, mount up; a t 30 v. 38 $7, and are for and,;, the ... - -0 f 1 I being an I\J \ d , I or Alif of precaution, D. S. Gr. ~ . 1 , p. 109. -1, for Fem, \, part. act. That which niounis up ; 1-u;

L<, 1 3 v. 18, "The scum floating on the surface (of the water) ;" i t also means severe, as :, . : 0 % ',' ,--, +\J *^>.I ?A=>-U 09 v. 10, " And lie inflicted

.1 on them a severe punishment." dl comp. form, More uumerous. \y^ or more correctly L i Usury, the t h e e cases being alike, D. S. Gr , ",

T. 1, p. 10G ; with the Article i t is sometimes spelt \n^\, the I a t the end being an Alif of

, s ^/L,

precaution, v. suprd. H J or i,~, A hill, an elevated part of the ~ a r t h . - 2 ; 11. Tonourish, n u s , educate (with ace. and 2) ; &q 1 7 r. 25, "They two nourished me.-- IV. To cause to increase, grant an increase to.

/' Â¥ 'Â v s i ~ aor. a. Tofeedin abundant pastures, pass time pleasantly, enjoy one's-self.

,/, (t.i, aor. o. To mend anything by joining the broken 5,. .

parts. ,*.> n.a. Anything close, solid, im- pervious ; The word occurs a t 21 v. 31, where it is said that the Heavens and the Earth were originally J i, i e . united together in one solid mass.

J, To be well and fairly arranged.-^ 11. To

repeat (the Koran) with a slow and distinct s G*

enunciation. A;,-' n.a. The act of repeating the K o r h in a slow and distinct manner.

1 , $, rJ aor. o. To move, shake. T ) n.a. A shaking, -

shock. g - To compose a particular kind o f verse called

s,, c,G S 9

2). and>- Impurity, a plague, punish- , merit, any abomination, especially Idolatry.

Â¥'Â¥

J aor. o. To bellow loudly, yls An nbornina- tion, punishment, indignation, doubt.

->) aor. i. To return, turn back, turn off-blame- L

upon any one (with ^J\), as f -> \ ' > 21 v. 59, "Perhaps they might turn i t off upon him ; " or, according to another version, ' T h a t they might return unto God ;" to come

>- el,% -- 9 ^ /: back, 'fly 21 v. 65,'" Then they , came to themselves-returned to their senses; " to bring back, give back (with ace. and ) ;

,,, 4

to turn again, ~ Â £ 1 &L-' 67 v. 3, " Turn , , P L - 0

again thine eyes (unto Heaven) ; " ,.x=-, 1 23 v. 101, " Restore me (to life agiiiii)," A rare instance in the Koran of the plural for the eingulcr, used out of respect; D. S. Or. T. 2,

5 0 , ^ U P

p. 237, note. ->-J and &, ns.a. A return. 5 , *, I-, .y\^ part. act. One who returns, etc. c,..

, , ,, noun of time and place, A r e t ~ r n . - ~ P VI. To return to one another.

,, , &, aor. o. To be in violent motion, to shake ./, t- " violently, tremble. +, An Earthquake, a

mighty blast. Name of the first blast of the trumpet which is to precede the general

5 L f

Resurrection.-+p part. act. IV . f. One who makes a commotion.

' -, aor. o. To hurt one in the foot. JÃ- n.a. collective noun, Foot, Foot-soldiers.

P L Y a 4 0 , D, / - y ' L' f fern. ; Plur. ^y A foot; y+, & .. 3

Gfytd +JW, 60 v. 12, "And do not bring a calumny which they have invented between their hands and their feet;" The words are interpreted to mean, " Shall not lay their illegitimate offspring to their husbands." J.Ã- Plur. J$ A man, as opposed to a

L> ' woman; >TÂ¡ 4% 72 v. 6, "With , 8 ,

certain of the Jinn." , ., s 0 , FJ aor. o. To stone. YJ A doubt, conjecture;

I,/Â¥ ^ 0 0 d k L*>-J 18 v. 21, " Doubtfully guessing .- , s 9 9 at that which is secret; " Plur. r,?, Things

s , which are thrown. KJ Stoned, pelted or driven away with stones ; an Epithet of Satan. Sf 0 . -

ftf-p part. pass. Stoned. \a'-; aor. o. To hope (with ace. or with i1) ; to hope

for (with acc. and i9 or J) ; sometimes also , to fear, but in this sense it is always found

4 - 9 9 r with a negative, thus b+J &; Y \^ 25 v. 42, "They did not dread the Resurrection." ,-Â¥- I, Sn., skJT plur. of G; he sides. y , part. pane. Hoped for.-Â¥-fJ IV. To put off, postpone ; at 7 v. 108 is for ,+-;? " Put him off; " , ,

0 0 , t . Ã v L ? D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 460. . plur. of L 5 5 " ~

S 0 0 ? a 4 0 - ' 0 , 0 9

for JÃˆ part. pass. 91 A, i.iy/' 9 v. 107, d (

I Held in suspense (awaiting) the decree oi

/* 9 , 0 0 9 , -/ 1 ++> To be ample, spacious; -J & 9 v. 25, ^ , 0 ^ 1 " For all it was eo spacious." b, a form

+ , I f , 1 of salutation equivalent to Welcome ! aa b.. " You are welcome."

f sf-; Pure Wine ; no verbal root. ^," ^J aor. a. To place saddle-bags on a camel.

JÃˆ n.8. A saddle-biig; Plur. JlÃ y *!.Ã

--- -05' A journey, travelling; *\^\ A. Ã‡.*/&. LÃ Â¥Â¥O y&d l i 106 v. 2, " For their joining together

(in fitting out) the Caravan in winter and summer.''

f; aor. a. To be merciful, have mercy upon (with , 9 / 0 9 ace. of pers.) ; In the-passive ,,t+- " Ye

shall be treated with mercy," or "shall receive .- : / I , / - 0 ,

mercy." < t ~ ? - ~ , sometimes spelt ~Ã‘ÃˆÃ‡Ã D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 276, note, Mercy, kindness. 6 1 compar. form, Most merciful, ;q

s , s' comm. gender, plur. of PJ or A womb, relationship, as IÃ- tT'g, Blood relations. S L 9

C J >-J Kindness, affection. &\J part. act. One S ' 0 , 9 / I , / who shows mercy. AJ or hJ D. S.

Gr. 9. 1, p. 404 (with the article usually spelt 9 - L a and &~erciful andcompassionate;

The two words are constantly found together, as if to add intensity one to the other, but the former conveys the more comprehensive mean-

-, , 9 s -'

ing. s L J (2nd declension) plur. of pJ. ://'./

<t^>>- Mercy, kindness.

s J aor. a. To be soft and flabby. 9-cy A gentle wind.

)J aor. o. To drive back, avert (with ace. and 2, also with &); to restore, give back, bring back, refer, give again (with ace. and J, dl,

6 9 , ' or JS; ^y J, ^ 14'v. 10, "Then they put their hands up to their mouths," either biting their own fingers in anger; or i t may be, to close the mouths of the prophets; At 16 v. 72, and 22 v. 5 it nieana to keep back (with ; at 41 v. 47 (also with dl) to reserve; and at 5 v. 107, To take (an oath), $ n.a. 21 7.41, s The act of

Â #

averting, bringing back, etc. d, part. act.

I , 6 4 I One who averts, restores, etc.; ,.i/.G l< <- ..'- 35 I& 16 v. 73, " Nor do t h o ~ ^<; , who have been made superior (to others) giv back their wealth, etc." Here i^$ is fo , - /

, , i,+, the participle-or noun of agency- 0 0

being antecedent to a complement in th genitive ; D. 8. Qr. T. 2, p. 183 ; u bein/ an expletive after the negative l<, see +

A place by which or to which we return

I besides being anoun of time and place as above J/* is also a noun of action, D. S, Qr. T. 1

I p. 291, and then means the act of averting

I Sf^, restoring, etc. , J , D ~ part. pass. Restored Pa-, IL< averted, as 9 , ~ p f i 11 v. 78, " Inevitable.

-3 V. To be agitated, moved to and fro.- %;! VIII. To be rendered, to return, turn

Â¥^I Â¥fi/G.^Â

again (with &), as & \+U 18 v. ,

03, " And they retraced their steps ; " or wit11 '-9P'-^ L ^ Â¥{.,' ^

J\ ns .,Ji aij. l 14 v. 44, "Theii sight shall not return to them," being fixed

I with horror; at 27 v. 40 the same expression

I may be translated " In the twinkling of an eye," or " Before thou canst fix thine eye upon any object, and remove it ; " with 2 it means to apostatize.

s ,. \J, To prop a mall. A helper. &, To come behind (kith J), iÃ‘* part. act.

, a L P That which follows.-\-s* pnrt. act. IV . f.

a . Bame as 4 ; at 8 v. 9 it may either mean following oneanother, or causing (the believers) to follow one another. . ,. S L-'

,.J, aor. i. To shut (a gate). ,+, ma. A strong wall.

& aor. i. To trample the earth with his feet (a / ' -

horse), A; aor. a. To IV. To

bring to dettruction.-diJ/ V. To fall head- .- Â¥'. -

long. ji fern. part. act. That which falls , headlong, or ie slain by a fall.

/Â 9' JJ; aor. o. To be base. j $ f Plur. ._nlg and J J ~ ? comp. form, Vilest, most abject; d\

I t - 0 .a-1 p d 1 J.), 1 16 v. 72, " To the word part of life," i .e. To a decrepit old age; the Madidi mfantia nasi. /.-'

ly aor. o. To supply with the necessaries of life, provide for, bestow upon (with double ace.);

'" a'i; fi2 v, 37,11 KO to sustain ; 642 .. 0 .. food shall come to you with which ye shall be supplied ; I ' For this use of the verb in the passive voice with a complement see D. S. Gr.

s T. 2, p. 124. 4 A provision, maintenance, bounty, fortune, income, anything granted to another from which he derives benefit. s.5 part. act. One who provides for, or supplies with necessaries. s$J The Great Provider, one of the names of God, as Providence.

s 0 p, aor. o. To diy a roe//. Er-Rass ; sup-

posed to be the name of a well near Midian, or according to others near Antioch.

, , <-', To bejirm. y^ pnrt. act. One who is firmly - established ; # i" j kl)7'4 v. 160,"~hoiie

who are well grounded in learning." .- f . \H; aor. o. To send a messenger, &AJ An apo~tle, a messenger ; Pliir. J, ; at 33 v. 66 we find g4 I for ~ i -57 for the sake of the rhyme, by a license called e ' saturation; D. 8. Gr.

Ã 9 . . T. 2, p. 497 ; At 26 v. 15 the word +, is used with a plural signification thua jg; \ etc. as though it were "Verily we are a de- putation;" neveral reason8 are assigned for this; Freitag says, quoting the Kamoos, that

8

words of the form J$ are both sing. and plur.; (JkG is by others considered to be a noun of action used adjectively, for this con-

s / , struction see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 280. ^lLj A message, commission.-&? IV. To send (with ^\, also with acc. and & or A') ;

/ 0.' 9<- / Ali 12 r. 45, for &, D. 8. Or. T. 1. *- b f

- p. 459. Ar part. act. One who sends;

./ L9 ,-'

s& ^f 3 L>L;f* U 35 v. 2, " Tliere is no ont , , who can send or bestow it, after he has withheld it." J part. pass. One who is sent, i

f - Â ¥ / O 1 legate ; uL,$ 77 v. 1, Angels, winds, 01

the verses of the &or&n, according to differcni interpretations.

L ) aor. o. To be or standfirm. , '$ (2nd declen 5 ,

sion) plur. of A.-)s fern. of ^-J for >s foi >J ; D. 8. Or. T. I , pp. 330 and 366, part act. Things which are firmly and immovablj fised-mountains.->;I IV. To fix firmly

^t- * i.4 noun of time and place, That which ii

fixed witli regard to time or place, as 3 It&./Â 7 v. 186, "When is its fixed time?" a Port, harbour, or roadstead, as 6^-y 6% 11 v. 43, " Both whilst i t is moving, and whils it is at anchor, or at rest."

2; aor. o. To walk in the right way, to be we1 S , , 5 Â ¥ /

directed. JwJJ abn, and nouns of action A going in the right way, true direction, cor rect rule of action. &\i part. act. One wh, is well directed, or who walks in tlie right way &$; A person of discernment, a guide to th

- 9

right way .-+,Ã part. aot. IV. f. One whi directs aright, a guide.

a 0 . f t~ nor. o. To cement o r join together. $)-> part. pass. Firmly and compactly united.

.Lie; nor. o. 71) observe, lie in wait.. -e; n.a. l

lying in wait; also as a collective noun, An T , t - / Â ambush, band of watchers. A place of

arnbusli, A place of observation, or of ambush.-SLÃˆJ n.a. IV. f. A means of pre- paration or fitting out.

4; aor. a. and i. To suck the mother's milk. - s. ,, l . Ã ˆ Ã ˆ / eLiJ n.a. The act of sucking milk : +\ "/ / a & / +=lffJ\ 4 v. 27, "Your foster sisters."

s ,L-' y\ (2nd declension) plnr. of ?/Â¥ A breast. / -^-t

-yJ\ IV. To suckle (with ace. of child and ^f t- 9 J of father) ; to give suck to. +,-Ã fern. /Â , /' l.

part. act. One who gives suck.-& X. To seek a nurse for (a child). . , -tfJ aor. a. To be content, pleased (with c., with u, or with ace.) ; to choose (with v, also

s / with ace. of thing and J of pers.). .e , s , Agreeable, acceptable. / \' for &, part. UPJ

act., Fern. &\i One who is content, well 5 \ , y pleased ; also pleasant, agreeable. {^VJ

Grace, acceptance, favour, that which is pleas- ., L /

ing. c.+/Â¥ part. pass. Accepted, well pleased s ,t- , S ^ /

or contented. ub>d n.a. for x+ D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 276, note; The act of pleasing.- JJ\ IV. To content, please (with ace. of pers.

, ,-'Â

and ").-A VI. To be pleased with one another, to be mutually agreed (with Ã£, or

A' 9 ,, +). yil/ n.a. for >f,S for &f,J! D. 8. Or. T 1, p. Ill, Mutual c o n 8 e n t . - ~ ~ [ VIII. To be pleased with, pleasing to (with 2). .

IÃ‡-JÃ To be fresh and ripe (dates). J; n.a. That which is green. ^_J collective noun, Fresh ripe dates. . ,/ S ' - I

+J aor. a. To frighten, fear, ( ~ i c ~ n.a. Fear, terror.

A<. aor. a. and o. To thunder. dc., Thunder.

0 0 d, am. a. on account of the guttural Ã D. 8. Gi T. 1, p. 250, To pasture, feed (cattle), t

s observe aright, as at 57 Y. 27. J>>G, n.a. A . right observance. g^c lur. of \ for &! 4 QJ part. act. One who feeds flocks, a shepherd ^Ji-. pasture.-35 111. To observe, reaped look at (with ace v with J); 2 v. 98 ' Look at us ; " a word to which Mohammai had a great objection, it having been deriaivel; employed by some Jews, in whose language i bad an uncomplimentary meaning.

<. 1 t-r ;J aor. a. To desire (with ,1); also to be un 0 ^ willing (with g), or to dislike (with &)

The passage at 4 Y. 126 may be rendered eithe < . L "I\'-

way; ,++ if-". fi v.121, "The! should prefer themselves before him ; " Wit1

5 0 ,

i t means to supplicate. +LJ Love &is part. act, One who supplicates earnestl; (with 3~ ; also one who is averse from (with I, -'. ^.

&; 5% abound in good things. \^s. Abundantly. 0 ^ 5 , " f

,.CJ aor. a. To dislike, abhor.-+ noun of place 111. form, A place of refuge. WIT, o. and i, To break in pieces. 'Ã‘' Dust,

any thing broken small. ^^^ , tor. o. To be obscene, &; Carnal inter-

course. 5 9 s > 0 - ^SJ aor. i. To &e. M A gift. part. pass. J

Given. i ^ i To spread the wings. si; A pillow. 0 <0

f-~, aor. a. To raise up, exalt, lift up (with ace. and J}). 25 part. act, Exalting, one who raises

s Â¥'s up. ^fi High. erÃ put. p a ~ . Bailed on high, exalted.

0<. a To help. & A companion, friend. &yf An e t h , utiKty, comfort ; GJft Comfortablj ;

9 ,, S^^f Plur. &f* (2nd declension) Elbows.-( ,-Ã A couch, noun of place derived from the VIII. f. which means To recline on the elbow.

.- -, 5 To be thin. & A volume or scroll, generally of parchment. aor. o. To observe, respect, regard (with ace.

s - and &), &j, A watcher, an observer. c ^^^ t (r: G; Plur, c.G 4 A neck, a slave; +i, AJ

4

4 v, 94, "The freeing of a neck (from Ihe ' 4.': yoke of slavery)."-+j V. To look about

r 4 4 5 .\.f

one.-+,\ VI11. Toobserve, watch. ÃÃ‘<*' part. act. One who watches.

s ,0 4 2; aor. o. To sleep. 5;; n,a, Sleeping, JJi A bed. $ To write, mark with diacritical points, $31

Er-Rakeem, a word, the meaning of which is in dispute ; according to one interpretation it was the name of a leaden plate, on which were inscribed the names of the seven sleepers. s p - ,+i part. pass. Written.

& aor. a. To mount a ladder (with &; to .- enchant. 2 n.a. An ascent. & f o r 2 5 part. act. An enchanter; $1, 2 .75 v. 27, "And it is said, who ls the magician (to ,

drive away his agony)?" .-><,>' ace. plur. S,*I...

of i9i A breast-bone; see this word under , , 0 , see also &, rt. $.-JC;i VIII. TO

ascend (with J;). 3; aor. a. To ride (with ace.) ; to be carried,

go OQ board a ship (with ,*). A company of 10 or more mounted on camels, a small caravan. :q plnr. of part. act. One who rides, mounted, il^, collective

Â tÂ¥

noun, Camels. U S , Use of a camel in riding. -9; 11. To put together.-^-(p part. act. VI. f. Lying in heaps.

&I; aor. a. To fear (with acc. or with J of pers.). s o , i? , , ^<I, -- , 5.

+J, -2, and eJ ns.a. Fear; L, +bJ

59 v. 13, "On account of the fear inspired in their breasts by God." i1-A; plur. .- "a --I,-- of &if A monk, &,bi Monaaticisrn.-

-1 -- Ll +aJ\ IV. To frighten, cause terror (with ace.

^ -'I,--I, of pers. and u of thing).-++l X. To . -'Â

terrify. &; To tahe h r y e mouthfuU. 5 n .a. A family ;

I., '. La, Ax* 27 v. 49, " Nine men of a family ; '* D. 8. Qr. T. 2, p. 316; This word is not generally used when more than 10 men are spoken of, but in any case they must be the sons of one man. aor. a. To follow closely, cover; aor. i. To oppress, cause to suffer; to be given to evil practices towards (with double ace.). (ÃA *.a. Folly, oppression.-~JJ~J IV. To impose a difficult task on any one, afflict with troubles and difficulties (with double acc,). , /r s " PJ To give in pledge. Given in pledge. LlÃ plur. of A pledge.

aor. o. Togo softly. 3; n.a. A ditch or furrow. ' \ ' see C; . u"' -?J .<i aor. o. To do anything in the evening or at sun-

Sl." S9 set. Ã‘< n.a. Rest, mercy, Ã‘ comm. gend. n41 t A spirit, sou1 ; 16 v. 104, "The

Spirit of Holiness," or "the Holy Spirit," viz. The Angel Gabriel, who done is intended

'Â¥'/' J To he still. Ji(& (2nd declension) fern. plur. / of %$ part. act. That wliict is still. 'S, aor. o. and i. Tb fix a spear in the ground. 3 A low sound, a whisper.

,-', " 4, To i n v e r t . - a IV. To overturn, upset.

with u of thing) ; to cast aspersions upon any one (with ace. of pers.), as at 24vv. 4,6, and 23; At 8 v. 17 allusion is made to a miracle which was wrought at Bedr in favour of Mohammad, who, by throwing a handful of gravel into the faces of the Koreish, brought about a victory in his favour.

yS; aor. o. To move the feet, stamp on the ground; to fly (with 2) ; Before the words &) Ja

,/Â

at 38 v. 41 we must understand <d A;, and between the first and last parts of the verse, we have to imagine the springing up of a fountain, or two, according to the fancy of the Commentators.

& aor. a. To have the back bent, to bow down in prayer. 2'; Plur. yy< and Ã§J part. act. One who bows down.

, ,, +, aor. o. To gather together in a heap. & s '^' A heap ; L; In heaps. ,++ part. pass. Gathered in a heap.

^J aor. a. To incline one'a-self (with &. 3; a stay, support, prop ; hence, Princes or chiefs of the people.

<, ' A, aor. o. and i. To repair ; also aor. i. To be rotten. s , ^J Rotten ; adjective of common gender.

S G 9 aJ generic noun, Pomegranates. â‚ aor. a. To pierce with a lance. gt<i plur. of

I â‚¬ A lance. nor. o. and i. To invade an enemy's country, 5t.G Ashes. ~ a*, sl. f

y ^ ~ aor. o. and i. To nod, mink. -Ã§ n.a. A sign, such as a wink or nod.

, ,, +, aor, i. To bake a sheep in its skm. (2nd declension) Ramadan, the ninth month of the Arabian year, said to be SO named, because it originally fell in the height of summer. ., dJ aor. i. To throw, cast, throw out (with ace, or

1

^

L

, I.

u , 2

by this name; At 16 v. 2 it may be translatec the Inspiration or Revelation, viz. the K o r h +; fern., Plur. ' L> A wind, smell, prosperity, c 2 S i n , - ' f v, power. -$ The evening, as ,+ LpI,) 34 v. 11, "(It blew) for a month in the evening.' Note. At the commencement of this verse we

-U 6 , m e t understand the word + q.v. i_ Victuals, things necessary to support life.- , ,

1 1 IV. To drive home (flocks) in the evening. CJ ,I,,,

is aor, o. To seek. 1% Gently; 9, is said to be equivalent to &1 Grant a respite ; D. 9.

/Â

Or. T. 1, p. 546; at 86 v. 17 the words are 4 t Ã ‘ ' O f ^ found in conjunction I.)- , +$ " Grant them

a gentle respite," or "respite them for a while." ., , -.$, 111. To long after, desire to have inter- <-,. /Â course with (with ace. and 2) ; thus &~,b

'Â¥, 'Â Â¥

, g w ~ 12 v. 26, I' She desired to lie with me;" At 12 v. 61 it means simply to solicit. $1 IV. To be willing, wish, desire, intend,

>. * t,f mean (with ace. and u, also with ; & " 36 v. 22 for >< i. aor. conditional and &. <Â "i. <-.-'

aor. o. To exercise, or break in a colt. U,J A rich and well-watered meadow.

i*<j aor. o. To give anyone cream tc eat. Froth, scum.

, Jj aor. o. To pelt nith stones. J Jj A book, The

Book of Pealma ; Plur. 2 Books, writings, .-

St< Scriptures ; A a n d x are also Plurals of i,' A lump or large piece of iron, a divided por-

S" tion, sect; Jj occurs with the first of these meaning! a t 18 T. 95, and with the last, a t

# 0.

23 v. 55. ^J MS. i. To sell dates on the tree by guess.,

, . S b &<i aor. o. Tofighten. Q, n.8. Fear, timidity. aor. o. To turn furtively from one thing to another (with j\); to turn upon (with &).

aor. o. To seek. 3' 1 collective noun, The Greeks, as being subject to the Roman Empire. Note. The events mentioned at the beginning of the 30th chapter relate to the wars between the Greeks and Persians under Heraclius and Chosroes.

S '.. f\, aor. i. To make uncertain, n.a. A t.. 4 , b,

doubt, calamity, as y.I 1 >Ã‘' 52 v. 30, "Adverse fortune," literally, "the calamity

> of the time." &^ Suspicion, uncertainty.-

S t ,Ã£/ part. act. IV. f. Disquieting, he or that which inspires doubt or suspicion; also one who is guilty of a crime.-&^A VIII. To be

S ,b f in doubt. wLy part. act. One who is in doubt, a sceptic.

, , aor, i. T o f t feathers to an arrow. &

generic noun, Feathers ; fine clothing. 1' aor. i. To grow. & A high hill. J 'I' aor. i. To take possession-of the hearl-(with JJ a.

.- .- "^ ,-' J,bj plur. of &j, or wanting the singular,

0

Rebels (against God), Praetorian Guards; at 96 v. 18 i t appears to refer to the Angels who keep guard over Hell.

6 * -j aor. o. To pierce with the ferule of a spear; S' ,, <te-bj noun of unity, A thing made of glass, as a glass vessel. ,,.

sj aor. 0. To prohibit, drive may. $j n.a. The act of driving or prohibiting. &1>91 , fern'. plur. part. act. Those who drive ; sj i^hpG

87 v. 2, "And the Angels who drive forward the clouds, or drive away evil spirits, or keep men

s ..-" 6 -' 0 , .-" from sin." >^>-j A single c ry . - -51 VIII. for 251 To drive away with cries, reject. S " - ^ t - f -9 part. pass. Forbidden.

&j aor. o. To he e a s y . - A IV. To propel, drive = 0 6 ,

forward (with ace. and J or ,A). i\f/* fern. of &$ ~ e w , email.

^ 0 ^ 0 - -

5 " ' f +j To remove far from a place (with 2). *y~-? , I,.* / Ã

part. act. One who removes, an ,+/in JÃ I*; 0.1- 4 <->a l 2 v. 90, " But, he shall not free

himself from the punishment." Derived from -

2 which has the same meaning. ,0 - q 0.

&j aor. a. To proceed towards. -j n.a. An army marching in a hostile manner.

S,*6 Ã 0, t j Anything highly embellished, as with gild-

ing, decoration by gilding, gold, embellish- ment, either real, as the flowers of the earth, 10 v. 25 ; or figurative, as a flowery discourse,

0x6 0 6 v. 112 ; verbal rt. To gild. 43 aor, o. To construct a pen or fold j'ar sheep.

s 25 (2nd declension) plur. of gy A rich carpet.

# 00 en aor. a. To BOW seed, give increase to, as , # a 4 Ã 6 4 Ã‡. Ã ˆ >/6/ an y& 1 <uy$ 56 v. 64, "Do ye give . i t ib increase, or are We the givers cif i t ? " s -- fi) Plur. I$ Seed, corn, land s o w ~ with corn, S Ã‡ s 0 &j plur. of c> part. act. A sower.

,$, aor, o, and i. To drop dung (a bird) ; to have blue eyes. J plur. of 3 One who has blue

~ -

eyes ; an enemy, each as the Greeks, whoee eyes were frequently of that colour.

,A. S,) aor. i. To abw.-J[^\ VIII. for D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 222, To despise.

0 -, ,+j aor. o. To aped, asaert, generally used in

doubtful matters ; to suppose, think, imagine, fancy, to be of opinion (with ace. or with ^}. 5- s -" *Ã§ n.a. Fancy, imagination. ftffj A surety, one who vouches for or guarantcee another.

0.: JJ aor. o. To carry home t i e bride in procession ;

aor. i. To hasten, go with hurried steps. 0:0 ,*j aor,i. Tolend forthadeep breath. 2- Adeep

sob ; properly, the first part of the braying of an asc, ae j*v& is the second; at 11 v. 108 thew words & be rendered " Bobbing and sighiag ; " at 26 v. 13 the term G> is applied to the roaring of flames.

;i To wallow speedily. ; } A tree growing in the midst of Hell, for a description see ch. 37 v. 60 ; The tree after which this infernal production was named bears a kind of intensely bitter almond. -* 0 /

^Qj Zacharias. ^J or more properly ISj aor. o. To grow, to be

5 /, pure, or purified. S)SJ pronounced, and some-

'Â¥ \, <, s,. times written S l S j or S+j like i+ or iL, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 86, Purity, a portion of one's substance given in order to purify the rest,

' .0 n. id. Alms ; >+j <t-, 18 v. 80, "One more righteous than he," literally, " Better as to purity." 3 Piou~ , righteous. JJ for 'J i comp. form, Purer, more righteou; Ga J 18 v. 18, "The purert and beat food."-$ 11. To purify, jnstify (with ace. of pen. and + 0 of thing).-& and JJl V. To endeavour to be pure and holy, to give part oCone's substance in alms, as a t 92 v. 18.

Jj aor. i. To slip.-3 IV. To MUM to slip or fall (rith ace. and s).-J! X. fame as $1, but with acc. of pers. and u.

&&--of Ã§ earthquake. &j To draw HW. $ Nearnew, proximity, a

new approach; $ Near a t hand ; Plur. d; ; The @t>~ ar& 0 at 11 v. 1 16 signifies tho^ hours of the night which commence a t the close of day, and those of the day which commence at the close of night; There are other w a y of spelling this word, such as &,', <s) and ,A', the 1-t bekg a n o m in the singular, having the same signification I g, and of the second declension, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 408.-^aj7 IV. To bring near, cause to approach (with ace. and J). .

(3- aor. o. To slip. 3 A place in which the feet are liable to dip.-JT IV. To cause to slip or fall (with ace. of pers. and +).

S'" 5 '0 ft To madm about. Jj PI&. ,dj1 Headlem arrows used by tile ancient Arabs for purposes of divination, a superstition forbidden by the KorAn ; for a curious illustration of this custom see Ezekiel ch. xxi. v. 21.

000

p j aor. i. To play upon a mind instrument. 3 Â¥- l ^-" 9 plur. of ty*j A crowd of men; LÃ§ In crowds.

J ; aor. i. and o. To limp.-J^;; part. act. of $jl for sf V. f. D. S. Gr. T: 1, p. 220, To wrap one's-self in a garment. The epithet yft\ is applied to Mohammnd in the 73rd ch. because a t the moment it was cornmuni- cated to him he was wrapped in a mantle either asleep or at prayers; SO say the com- men tutors.

,, 0. s 0 0 0

- y ~ j Toflash with anger (an eye). M j Exces- 0

sive cold, by some interpreted to mean the Moon ; original root &j To be uiotent.

S-afj Ginger, with which the water of Salsabeel, a fountain in Paradise, is to be flavoured.

i j no verbal root, An excrescence behind the hoofs S f o/feats. @ Spurious, illegitimate.

3 MI. i. To be guilty of fornication, $ n.a. Fornication. ^, and with the article > ,J1 and Lv - / part. act. One who is guilty of fornication.

xkj aor. a. To abstain; aor. i. To have in Ion ' estuHatwH. $5 part. act. One who eateems lightly, or holds in low estimation (with of thing).

,/ 0

/Ã am. a. To be resplendent. tJf A fiovevr, splendour.

y>j aor. a. To be full of marrm (a bone) ; to vanish, disappear, perish. JJ , part. act. That

s 9 , which vanishes away. Vain, ', perishable. q' A & aor. o. To stir up strife. Ã ‘ ~ Plur. p,y

companion, mate, spouse, husband or wife, an individual when consorting with another; that in which individuals are' united, as a kind, species, class, or sex, also a pair, a couple;

A/(, . Exam plea, & $j Ji' > L& L+b 31 v. 9, ^ ' ,

I t And we have caused (vegetables) to spring up in i t of every generous species ; " > \ yiO If"" i.$G J 55 v. 52, "In each (garden) ^ . a ^ , ,

there shall be two kinds of every fruit," or i t may be "wo pairs of every kind ; " thus at

'. -o Ã -' I,-" ^ t, 11 v. 42 the word0 y^y l -$ ,$ (-r< may either be rendered two, or two pair, of every kind, so also at 13 v, 3 ,6 v, 144 and elmewhere ; for the use of & with the dull we D. 8. Or.

0

'-,4 L., 0 -' T. 2, p. 315, where he translates ~ , j I t Two individuals," a reading which is supported by the passages a t 51 v. 49, where

t f ' t >-,, must of necessity have the meaning of two individuals paired together, nnd at 15 v. 88, where means simply " individuals,"

i t 5 , "^ L I ,-, or certain of them ;" c,J , , &+I, 38 v. 58, And other (matters) of a similar kind shall be in conjunction with i t ; " In this

? , - passage there appears to be an ellipse,+\ for I , t ,L\\ in virtue of its comparative form being put in the singular, D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 304;

/' "it/ it is also written>\, tee 3 v. 5.-,,j 11. To give in marriage (with double ace.) ; to wed to (with ace. and -i) ; to join together ; 14;

L. , - 9 9 9 ^ 4 -,:, 1 / * ' ~ 1 81 v. 7, "And when the souls shall be joined (to their bodies); " A t 42 v. 49 i t m a n s to make of two kinds, to make or give conjointly.

3 o r . 0. To take provisions. Provision for ,a//

a journey.-A, V. To provide one's-self for a journey.

s f ,\. aor. o. To viait. Ji False, a falsehood.- ,, /.

Â ¥ V I . To decline (with 2) ; 18 v. 10 J'J p, ,,. is for,,>; 3 pers. fern. sing. aor.

J , nor. o. To cease, cease to be in a place, fail, - * - 6 1 as l,, J 35 v. 39, " Lest they fail ; "

-- 9^<Mff to decline, n~ J^J ?/< 3 3 14 v. 47, " Even though their craftiness were such that the mountains should be moved by i t ; " literally, "should cease to remain in their

S 9 L /- f: ,<, . d j collective noun, The olive, olives. <^<-i,j noun of unity, An olive, an olive-tree.

i\\ aor. i. T o be increased, to increase, cause to increase, give an increase to (with ace. of pers. and J or with double ace.) ; to exceed in

^ f " U X number; uw 37 v. 147, "Or there were more in number;" to make an addition to

T O /Â (with &I. 9 Zeid, Mohamrnad's freedman and adopted son, whose wifezeinab Mohammad married after her divorce from Zeid; see ch.

s,, 33. iub j An increase, addition. &$ An accession, increase, addition.-;\^\ for %\ VIII. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 222, To increase, suffer an increase, or be increased by (with ace.) ; as LhuJ; $xiT) 18 v. 24, " And they suffered an increase of nine (years)."

CJ aor. i. To be inclined downwards, to become dim (the sight), turn aside, deviate (with 3). 9 I-" n.a. ~ e r v e r s i t ~ . - 2 3 IV. To cause to deviate, render perverse,

/Â I' 4 15 aor. i. and a. To cease (with ,<*).-&j 11. To make a separation (with 2).-&3 V. To be separated one from the other.

s ',,\, aor. i. To adorn. oil) a An ornament, as apparel "2 a t 7 v. 29, or trinkets, etc., pomp ; sometimes used collectively for ornaments, as at 20 v. 90 ./ - 4- and elsewhere ; At 20 v. 61 *-;$I ~Ã‡J means the day of the solemn feast, when the temples and other buildings were decked out in olden

, , times.-& 11. To adorn, prepare (with ace. and u or 2); to deck a thing out (with . specious arguments, or otherwise), to make i t

^ f " a ,Â¥ -" places, or incline downward8 (like the Sun)." 1 appear pleasing (with acc. and J) ; $ J.j'I 1.1 4 & n.a. A declining, declination as of the sun Y \ J 15 v. 39, "Verily I will make (their 1 q J

from the meridian, in which sense i t is figuratively employed a t 14 v. 46.

$ C" A t n o r . i. T o dress food with oil. k_~>,j Oil.

disobedience) appear pleasing to them on the . aÃ .p,, Earth.'*-& for &' V. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 220, To be adorned.

s an adverb prefixed to the aorist tense of verbs and giving them a future signification; it ii considered as an abbreviation of i_Ã q.v. thus & J\ ,L 11 v. 45, " I will betaki mvael'f to a rnountnin," see A; i t is like wise used in conjunction with other prefixes

9 4 f 9 0 ( - / / ' I " aa \ + 2 v. 131, "And God wil' suffice thee (as a protection against) them,' see $.

J am. a. To ask, interrogate, ask for, demand 0 5 (with ace. of pera. and Î , also with double

0 I" ace. or with ace. of pers. and IÃ‘ or dl; to 0

pray to (with ace.), as at 55 v. 29; Imperat. Jt\ and & Note. Verbs whose second radical is hamzated are frequently declined nfler the manner of concave verbs. J$ A .- * # request, petition. J$ n.a. The act of de- mnnding. J part. act. One who asks, de-

S-1 b - manda, etc., a beggar, as a t 93 v. 10. JF part. pass. That which is demanded or inquired into; at 17 vv. 36 and 38 it refera to those things which shall be inquired into at the day . -,, of judgment.-J*U VI. To ask or make

0 . inquiries of one another (with &), ae & gG 4 v. I , "About whom ye have dis- . . cussions one with another, or in whose name

0 9 Ã ye beseech one another;" u , l ~ which may also be spelt ;y'-G is here put for ;,TG, D. El. Gr. T. 1, p. 220.

8 AI" 0 Ã Ã§.Ã aor. a. To disdain, dislike, acorn (with .\, or with ^f of thing).

s .. & aor. o. To cut, revile, Plur. &a A rope, cord, lien or that by which one thing is connected with another, M a path, way, meana

Ã ‡ Ã ˆ / Â b . - 9 G ^ ^ l Ã ˆ . ~ to an end, a cause; \-> J!> SQI, <Ã‘ 18 v. 83, " And we gave him a

mcana to accomplish every end, SO he followed - 0 1 - a /.."/'-,/ his way ; " "L-JI & 38 v. 9, " Let ,

them then ascend into the tracts (of Heaven)." / I "

3-& Sabf, v. *, 0 ,I"

-

1 aor. o. and i. To rest, celebrate the Sabbath. Â 0 0

The Sabbath ; at 7 v. 163 and elsewhere reference is made to the story of certain Jews who resided at Elath on the Red Sea in the time of David, and who were turned into apes for catching fish on the Sabbath day. <_yg Rest.

ÛJ aor. a. To swim, roll onwards, perform a daily L Stf

course (with &). n.a. The act of swiin- ming, occupation in worl'dly affairs. $ - part. act. One who swims or moves with a swimming motion, applied to Angels at 79 v. 3, or, according to another of several inter-

Â ',# Ã‡ 4 I" I " 0 t pretations, to ships. ^\î Praise; A-lJl i.;k+ PI" I",. 9 and tULsrta) are adverbial expressions in which

there is an ellipse of the verb '-/I, as " The f praise of God," or " by praising Iiirn," for " I celebrate the Praise of Gcd," etc., hence it is . 0 0 9

that the word &+ appears in the accus., see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 502, and T. 2, p. 82 ;

f , 6 - a ' , L V

.Â) \ê AJJ 1 ,1*-}-; 37 v. 159; In this and similar passages there would appear to be also an ellipse of the verb Jk ; At 28 v. 68 this deficiency is supplied, and the passage then reads thus, " I celebrate the Praise of God, and may He be far exalted above that which . Ã -Â they impute to 11. To aing praiÃ§e (with *J of pera.), celebrate praise8 (with u),

0 S b. " laud and magnify (with acc.). ^WJ" ma.

9

s-, The act of praise, ,,+M part. act. One who ^ Sale translates this word "prevented," a meaning it may well bear in the two instances in

,, , which it occurs.-&L) 111. To strive to excel

,, , L or reach before another (with VIII. To strive one with another in a race, or

celebrates praises. laÃ‘ nor. a. To be lank (hair). laL> Plur. fc&l A

0

tribe (of the children of Israel). ,-',

Ã § _ ~ u nor. a. and i. To make a number up to seven. .- S o * Â¥'^ - 0 ^ s t . , fern., +-i masc. Sevenl s e e p . ^ y ~ '

to reach a goal (with ace.). JÃ‘ Rain, no verbal root. i)Ã‘ Plur. (L-) (corn.

, Seventy. A wild-beast. gend.) A way, road ; a cause or reason, as at 9 vv. 92 and 94, where it means "a cause of

- < 0 ,

ÃÃ aor. o. To be long and trailing on the ground ,- 0 / L l ( a garment). &L A coat of mail.-^-^ IV. , S - o Ã

' reproach ; " &% A traveller; +U l JÃ‘ , , 5 The path of duty to God ; i t frequently means Tocause to abound (with ace. and &of pers.).

,/* ,- 1 aor. i. and o. To be in advance of (with ace.); precede (with J) ; to go before (with ace. and

an expedition or war made by believers to propagate the Mohammadan faith; anecessity, as JÃ 0 ~'0, y.3 3 v. 69, " There

0 ^

- & or tyÃ ) pass before, go forth previously, 0

as a sentence of condemnation (with & of pers. and A), with which meaning it appears

is no necessity incumbent upon us (to pay or observe justice) towards the Heathen."

0 , p (tor, i. To take ca$bc. 9-G SabAY, called in Scripture " Sheba," a city of Yeman destroyed by the inundation of El 'Arem; i t took its name from Saba', the great grandson of Kah-an or Joctan.

s s <- % s o -' for (>-IA-> fern. Six ; masc. +, see*. ^ 4 Gf-, Oblique Sixty. ., 0 s o S s o 0 + aor. o. To cover. A veil, covering.

part. pau. Spread over as a v e i l . - 3 VIII. To hide one's-self.

^fÃ nor. o. To be humble, submit one's-self, bow down in adoration with the forehead touching

5<. . the ground, to worship (with J). x+-'

a P Ã .s*Ã Adoration. iif-C Plur. ^Ã§ and i)uc- part. act. one who bows down. A*""* Plur. Aff-lw*

at 11 v. 42 ; or a promise of eternal happineno (with J of pers. and >), as at 21 v. 101 ; to

0

happen previously, pass by, surpass, get the better of (with arc.) ; With + it may sometimes be rendered to do previously, as

6 *,,0 &t$lr,& 4 , $ 7 v. 78, "No created being has committed this (crime) before you ;" to prevent, in the old sense of to be beforehand with (with ace. of pers. and <_Ãˆ)

thus at 21 v. 27 ;&-9 "They d o h t , . 5 G 0 prevent him in their apiech." /.--i n.a. The act of preceding. J^G part. act. One who

0

precedes or outstrips in a race; At 56 v. 10 . t Ã ‡ - we find the word yuU l repeated, probably to give force and dignity to the expression, which may there be rendered "The leaden on earth and in Heaven," viz. those who having been the first to embrace the Faith, shall be

S f G . the first in Paradise. J- part. pass. One who is surpassed or beaton in a race;

(2nd declension) A placeof adoration, mosque; s r+r ' j l . ,yr~^e-arv~* H 17 V. I , "From the sacred temple at Mecca to the further mosque at Jerusalem," or as BeidAw* explains it, to the Holy House there; for at that time there waa no mosque behind it.

nor. o. To utter a cry, as a camel to her foal; - topour forth,jill nith water, to burn(with& S I < - " , y ~ part. p m . }FT/olT 52 Y. 6, " By the ocean poured forth over the earth." -2 11. To swell and become turgid (the ocean).

S JK" To pour forth. Js-" which is spelt in various . ways, has also sundry significations ; by some it is supposed to mean the Angel who inscribes men's actions in a book, rolling it up at their death ; o r it may be the name of a certain scribe of Mohammad, or a written -11 ; for the construction of the words @rs 0 0 0 ./ 21 v. 104, see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 164 ; see also his Chrestoinathie Arabe, T. 3, p. 231. ilJe-' Baked clay of which the stones were formed which were said to have been rained down from Heaven upon Sodom, and also upon the " Companions of the Elephant" mentioned in chap. 105.

S 9 ^ . 2 am. o. To imprison. i^f^ part. pass. S <- Imprisoned. & A prison. The

register in which the actions of the wicked are recorded, or the place where i t is kept. am. o. (also written 3) To be quiet, tranquil or dark (Hie night). . .. aor. a. To drag along the ground (with 2). s". "lsd A cloud, clouds, sometimes used as a

collective noun. S I,# To destroy utterly, eradicate. >Ã‘<- Un- . "'I- lawful, forbidden by law.--} IV. same as

primitive form (with ace. of pere. and -*I. 7 aor. a. To gild, enchant, bewitch (with ace.

S<f and ty>). ,< Sorcery, enchantment. 2 P ~ ~ ~ . J G I The early dawn. '?I* Plur. ?. 0 /

ÃJB part. act. A magician, sorcerer. \*f

S t t - - A great magician. iy ' part. pass. One be- sÃ - f witched, deluded by s o r c e r y . - - part. pass.

11. f. Bewitched. i f To hat maall, and To tefvsff. 3

ft, "Â n.a. The set of being fur off; 1&*-* 67 v. 11, " Far then be (pardon) from them;" an ellipso.

4 >. Ã Ã -S lW Ãˆ<,ÃˆÂ¥ for lw & l p t i Odd hu removed them far away in respect of pardon." J-y-" Far distait. a IBUC (2nd d e c l d m ) D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 404. *' To Itrip off the bark. JÃˆ Shore of a river or aea.

2 Â¥or a. To ridicule (with ^y of pen.). >G part. act. One who turns to ridicule. itf, A jeer, ridicule ; at 43 v. 31 it means One who is compelled to nerve without payment.- 3 11. To aubject (with ace. and J); to

0

compel any one to work without payment; a t 69 v. 7 i t is used with the ace. and & of pera. and may there be rendered " He caused

5 9 0 f i t to assail them." part. pass. Subjected, ^

compelled to serve or w o r k . - - \ X. To turn anything to ridicule.

3 aor. a. To be angry (with &I. Â£Ã§ Wrath. -=I IV. To incense.

Ã / f Ã

aor. o. To obstruct, stop up. A-) n.a. or ~k - i A L 6 6 S mountain, an obstacle, rampart, bar ; &>\J \

18 v. 92 oblique dual, " The two mountains," supposed to be situated in Armenia, or on the borders of Turkistan. J^A-> Well-directed, convenient or opportune.

0.. St- ,A.) To let down the hair. ,A-> generic noun, The

s/ L Lote-tree. + noun of unity, A single Lote- tree; ,_ST$& 53 vv. 14 and16, TheLote- tree, beyond which no creature can pau;

allusion is made to it in Moore's Lalla Rookh.

" Farewell, ye vanishing flowers, th .c shone, I n my fairy wreath, so bright and brief;

Oh! what are the brightest that e'er have blown, , To the Lote tree springing by Allah's throne,

Whose flowers have a soul in every leaf." 0 0 ,

( t x ~ aor. o. To take a sixth part. &c A sixth part. (JW$ The sixth.

1A-i uor. o. To stretch out the hand towards any one. i_yx Neglected, uncared for. 6 - aor. o. To cut the navel string, to make glad,

4 S 9 * &

rejoice. ,.,-1 n.a. Joy. ;-i A secret; I> s n s Â¥ Secretly, in private, -i plur. of A

, -, , coucl~, throne. Joy, joyful state. JlP

(2nd declension) plur. of t f A aecret. a * S t < - ^

I.,- part. pass. Rejoiced.-- IV. To con- /

teal, and also to reveal or manifest (with ace.); At 10 v. 55 and 34 v. 32 it seems doubtful which of these meanings is intended to be conveyed ; to entrust a secret (with 3 ), hold a secret conversation (with ace. or

b with J of pers.). n.a. A secret.

, ,/ up aor. o. To enjoy free pasture (a camel). _>> A pipe for the conveyance of water;

\; 18 v. 60 may be translated " as it were in a tunnel ; " the fish there mentioned being supposed to have swum in that manner under

5 ,, the sea. w t J T ' A mirage, deceitful appear- anoe, as of water in the desert. AIL> part.

' , act. One who goes forth freely and carelessly. - ,* -Â r- /I- f ,, ^ 0"'

J )- To Put on the garment called JG* *> 'A'.,.) Perpetual; Perpetually, a word appa- (2nd declension) plur. of &> A garment, 1 rently of mixed Persian and Arab origin.

I,* , G' 4, i. To travel by night ; -i_ 1;: JJ I ,

A lamp, or rather a candle, the receptacle being called &&.

0 H ' / cp nor. a. To let (a flock) go free to pasture at liberty ; to lead out to pasture in the morning. s 0, - a -

\ 11. To dismiss freely, c s I.'

divorce (with ace. of pers. and u). 6 - n.a. , , Dismissal, divorce.

0,,

i~? aor. o. To perforate. n.a. Work made of rings woven together, as chain armour.

#0\,./

J-Lr To cover with an a~vniny. &\}" 18 v. 28, Smoke which surronnds and covers after the manner of a tent.

/ 9 , 5 , To be quick. y, Plur. & Swift, prompt,

0

hastening; + f& , , Swift at taking , account ; l<l> Suddenly, hastily. fy (2nd declension, comp. form) D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 403, Very swift, miftest.-& 111. To hasten emulously, or in company with others (with J or & of pers. or thing, also with ^J\). ,/. nor. o. To eat away (the leaves of a tree).- ^/^l

&>I IV. To be prodigal, extravagant, to exceed bounds, transgress (with ^& or .,). 25' n.a. The act of exceeding bounds,

5 I- , extravagance, transgression. ui part. act. One who is guilty of excess, extravagant, a transgressor.

,, , sÂ¥ J -> aor. i. To steal. ,J~L part. act. One who

-',,I.

steals.-J(A VJII. To take away by stealth, . 1-6 4 -,,1,4 as ~ ^ - i l 15 v. 18, " H e listened by stealth," as the Genii to the conversation of the angels.

I ,* either generally, or a coat of mail ; at 16 v. \srl aor, 83 it is used in both senses.

0.. , , v aor. o. To saddle; and cf To s . ;& I 8 9 v away

, 3, '' By the night when it passetli 1' ; Â¥Ã is hero written by poetic licence

s-

for ,J.< on account of the pause--,-at Â¥

, the end of the verse; D. 8. Qr. T. 2, p. 496. 5 . 6- A rivulet . -A IV. To travel by night; with u it becomes transitive, To cause to tme1,'thus at 20 v. 79 &\-v / / "(saying) Take my servants for a journey by night,"

0 Â¥ see J. rf^-* tor. a. To spread out.

I 'y. aor. o. To write. Fnblee, idle tales; Thia word, a plural of the 2nd declension, seems to be derived from the Greek imopla,

G f t - 0 but the sing. i~ doubtful. part. pasa.

I I 1 Written. 5__' also spelt One who

S O 0 t presides over, a manager of affairs.-+Â part. pass. VIII. f. Written.

I Us-) tor. o. To attack with violence (with <Ã‘ 0 oi I

pers.). I ?.0 , .

b see w,. 1 JJL> nor. a. To be fortunate ( a day) ; and & To be

happy (a man). Happy, blessed. ^ ^ p a o r . a. To light a s r e . ^AJ fern. A burning fire,

Hell. ~ a d n e s s . - - 11. To cause to burn

I aor. a. on account of the guttural To go L.

hastily (with dl); to run, be diligent, pup pose, to endeavour labour or strive after (with

- 0 ' tcc. rim with (J or ; y* &\v $ 80 v. 8, " But as for him who comes to thee

At*. striving after (good)." ..Ã§ n.a. The act 01 going quickly or hastily, an endeavour ; l li 9; & 37 v. 100, "And when he bat attained such an age that he could assist bin- .,'. 0. , . in his work ; " + L) ,11-., 17 v. 20, " Anc diligently strives after it ; " Literally, " Anc etidenvoura after it with its endeavour ;I' tht

noun of action being added to the verb to give 0

energy to the e x p r e s s i o n - ~ ~ O . # < . aor. o. To sufer from hunger and nant.

50~0 A+. Famine.

0 . S 9 ^ ^ aor. a. To pour forth. part. paes.

5 . / f Poured forth.-^*& part. act. 111. f. One

L - who commits fornication.

2 nor. i. 'To sweep (a house), go on a journey, 5' . S ' L 1 9.1 Plur. ,L\ A journey ; ;U ia also the

s,, 0

plur. of ,a-> A large Book or Tome. i+ plur. o f>L A scribe.--7 IV. To sliine,

S ^ / brighten (thedawn). part. act. Shining.

& aor. a. To strike with the icings (a bird when - fighting), to drag along (with u), as at 96 v.

600 15, &fib U "Verily we will drng hiin by , 6.

the forelock ;'I where instead of the ,_, of the second energetic form of aorist, the tanween of the fatha f is used, see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 15G.

_i aor. i. To shed (blood). nor. o. To be low, &G part. act. One who ia low, vile, abject; &G l JG 11 v. 84, " Up- side down." &! Fern. & cornp. form, Very low, lower, lowest.

,<. p aor. i, To scrape of the skin. k& A bark, ship ; at 29 v. 14 The Ark.

and <uLi To make a fool of (any one), render p 0 y . . 0 I.,

foolish, as AÃ‡J + 2 v. 124, " He who S.. has made a fool of himself." iLi n.a. Folly ;

-00 , & Foolishly. Plur. *L+ (2nd declension) A fool, foolish, silly, ignorant; C^A_ 72 v. 4, "The foolish individual amongst us," =. , . viz. Iblees, or a rebellious spirit. A J Ã ˆ Folly. .< . JU 7b i ~ j u r e by heat ( t h tun). & fan. Hell-fire (2nd declension), supposed to be of foreign origin, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 405.

l&.; aor. 0. To fall (with 2) ; kg? L2 & 7 v, , 148) an instance of a & or vague expression aubatituted hr mother) and meanin8 "!t'hey grievously repented." part. act. Falling. -GL 111, To let fall (with acc. aud &I.-

IV. To eause to fall (with acc. and &). aor. 0. To r o d ooer. L% Plur. L% A

m f . b' 0 nor. a. To be ill. + Sick) ill.

& aos. i. To water, give drink to (with double a m ) ; In the P m . to be given (waterl ch.) to drink, see D. 8. &. T. 2, p. la; When meaning simply to be watered) as at 13 v. 4) the Passive verb governs ito complement by heans of the preposition u, aa +sj-&t:l

0 0

or the verb may here be taken in an impemonal sense " Rigntum estjl' with an ellipse of @ ; by some however it is written & ; so again

L < L P N nt 14 v. 19) and aimilar passages, e", 0 - 0 ++ *L " .4nd he shall be given to drink of a putrid liquid)" where we may understand an ellipse of the word &. $& n.a. The act of giving drink to) a180 a drinking cup. for P 0k t A (2nd declensionJ final 4 when preceded

L" * by g boing changed into short alif, D. 8. Qr. . T. 1) p. 111, A watering; At 91 v. 13 where

this word occum there ia a considerable ellipael 6z; &%G fir&.,; 3 j6 " And the apoatle of God aaid unto' them (let alone- \$) Qod'a ahe-camel and (do not hinder) her drinking!'-&I IV. To give drink to, ta water

0 G 0 b (with double m.).-+l X. To mk any one for drink (with aoc. of ped??!~

TO pour forth. GJZ part. pam poured forth, flowing.

aor, 0. To be silent, appeaeed-anger-(with '. 0 of person).

aor. i. To fill a vessel; and& nor. a. To be d r d . - I n t m i m t i ~ g drink) evecially Datawine. pmpmb, ~mnkemaaw~ ~tnpefaction ; &!r& 50 v. la1 " The agonies of death.*' d;c plur. of :$

6 0 - 0 ~ r n n k e n . - - 11. Te make drunken ; u& $G3 15 v. 15# '' Our eyes are iabxiated," i.e. bewildered.

& nor. 0. To be quiet, reat) dwell (with &) ; dwell with (with &) ; inhabit (with am.). & Any means of mt or quiet, a hbitatian. & part. act. That which remaine quiet ; at 25 v. 47 speaking of the Shadow a t daybreak i t xneana " fixedll' either by the Sun'a neglecting to riml or rising d w a p in the -me place.

comm. p n d . A knife. % ranq quill it^^ aecurity ; a word variously interpreted, but probably referring to the Hebrew SchcAinaA MY* The Divine presence which appeared

on the Mercy aeat of the Ark. &G (2nd 5.0 L 0 declenmon) plur. of A habitation. &

Povertyl misery. :&Z pert. pnas. In- habited. &. Plur. sG (2nd declension) POO~.-,&~ IV. To make to dwelll cause to abide (with double acc. also with or & of place) ; ta quiet.

5 0 t aor. 0. To bring out. d L Ati extract.- = V. To withdraw one'~e1f privately,

& ~ o e e J x . 2 mr. 0. To mat& away fmm (with acc. of

pem. and thine). & aor. a. To void excrmmt. , b

%I plur. of & eomm. gend. h a , weapon#.

0 . '& aor. 0, To j a y , pluck OK, withdmw (with ax. , ,? and A). 'pl VII, TO p m away, pass by (with >).

Sahbeell name of a fountain in Paradise. , 0,, . J.& To join chainzke one thing to another. 3w Plur. &G (2nd declension) A chain,

s A # l& nor. a. To be hard. ,.)& comrn. gend. Power, authority, demonstration, argument, convinc- ing proof; 69 v. 2Q for &u " My power;" the final is called dJ?s& for which see D. 8. Gr. T. 1 p. 4 5 9 . - c 11. To give power or authority, to m a h victorious (with acc. and &I,

I d aor, 0, To hamon, to pas0 or be put , to go 0, , , 0 0 0 ~ or happen previously ; & L di 2 v. 276,

"Then shall that which is past be (forgiven) to him," or no account shall be required of him. n.8. A precedent. IV. properly, to pay for yoods bdorehandJ but in the Kodn it must be understood of the actions done in this lifeJ which areJ as it were, gent before us.

& aor. i, To throw on the back, throw domn back- war&, to abuse (with acc. and -1.

aor. 0. To cauae to go or walkl i s &$ *# # 0 I+ b0 20 v. 65, " And has made you to walk in i t by patba ;" to cause to enter (with acc, of pen. or thingl and d; of place, or with

P .&-.

double acc.); dAL 26 v. 2001 "We have c a u d it to entm;" both here and at I5 v, 12 the w o r d ~ ~ " u n b e 1 i e f " muat be under- 8 h d ; a do0 mean8 eimply to walk (with am. of place)J thua G% & \w, 71 v. lQ, "That ye may walk in ita opacioua ptba." 0 & nor. 8. To be mfe and mud. P w e .

& mmm. gend, Obedkm te @e doc&inee of El I d h A treaty of peace or suhmie-

s aion, a captive. &J part. act. One who is s O , mfe. ,&I Peace, safetyJ a greeting of peace,

# -6b-O aecurity ; One of the name8 of God ; ,* d t 0 tlAIJb ParadiseJ the abode of peace ; at 21 , v. 69 i t may be interpreted " a means of ~ecurity ; " â‚¬ fire into which Abraham had been thrown by Nimrod not only having IeR the former uninjured, but also destroyed hie

ss * enemies, + coxnm. gend. A ladder. *&J # 0 w

PerfectJ ~iucere. && (2nd declendon) 6olomon.-p 11. To preserve, give advation, deliver* hand over (with acc. and J or J\ of

0

pers.) ; to submit to a judgment, salute (with &); & \& 0 24 v. 61J " 8dut.a the people of the House" (as being of yonr own people), literally, '' Salute yourselves."

n;: !, salutation, submissionJ resignation. fern. part. p w . IIanded overl

M Y . sound.-?I 1V. To mbmit, commit (will1 acc. and Ji) ; to reeign one's oelf (with J) ;

s 0

to pmfesa El IslAm. ,&I n.8. Tlie act of P 06 L m

resignation to God LY \ El I s l b J the only J t b true Religion which according to Mohammad WM profeased by all the Pmp11et.o from Adam downwards; from the worh of the KorAn 40 v. 14 i t would appear to be rather the pro- f e ~ i o n of faitb than the faith itaeIf ; the latter, which ie h m the heartJ b called &~f l

"b

upon thio point however there are differen&# S G # of opiaion among the Modema. + part.

act. One who reeipa himaelf to God, a Mosleml one who profewe tbe hith of El I e l h - s * - G P ,&A.- put, act. X, f. One who mbmita to jodgment.

nor. 0, To be care/ess about a thing. & for (2nd declension) generic nounJ Q~inila,

s nor. 0. To poisonJ penetrate. n.a. A hole; bcy; The eye of n needle; thia name is given in the East to the small doorway for foot passengers at the eide of a large gateway;

s P , ace S. Matthew chap. xix. v. 24. r~ fern, generic noun, The Sirnoom; n pestilential scorching windJ which it is said shall penetrate into the bodies of the dmncd ; it was from the fire of this wind that the Jinn or damona were created* aee 15 v. 27. ?b stand in astonishmentJ to idle. &G part. act. One who passes his time in vai~itiea.

-,, nor. 0, To pass the ni& in conversution, >G part. act. One who converses by night. A f l o r o r 2-G The Samaritan, n name given to an individual who is aid to 11ave made the Golden Calf for the Children of Israel.

& aor. a. To hear (with accJ ; hear of (with +I; . to hearken, listen, hearken . to (with J.) ;

# / L 4 , P x I . 4 - , for &t.& 36 v. 24J " Then hear

s I,. me ; " D. 8. Gr. T. lJ p. 459, y n.8. The ,-

act of hearing, hearing. a&+ One w110 s e x l~eors. tL One who is in tho habit of

llewkening, D. S. Gr. T. 1) p. 3 2 2 . - s T IV. To make to hear (with double accJ ; a t 19 v. 39 k, is by come underdood ne ,a verb ,, of ad~niration, " How el~arp shall be their hearing," viz. that of t11e Infidel8 ; D. 0. Qr. T. 2, p. 685 ; according to another interpretation is here the imperative of the iv. f, " Do thou came them to bear;" t11e eame remark applies to 18 v. 25, where however the expressionJ if understood in the imperative, must be taken as ironical, " D6 thou cause

5 L # (God) to hear," part. act. One who s , L * makes to hear. part, paas. One who i8

"And hear without being made to (hear or) understand ;" out of' nuinerons explanations of thia pasaage none seem quite satisfactory ; poasibly the words being used by Jewa to annoy Mohammad conveyed a dou6/e entendre. , a,., , *-a - p d or V, To M e n to (with

4 /, ', D. S. Gr. T. lJ p. 2 2 O . - p 4 VIII. To hear, listen, hearken to (wit])-J 0; di) ; to over

s , L # hear. -4 part. act. One who hears or Iistena.

% To raise on high. & A roofJ or the higheat part of the interior of a building. . , s . s , + aor. a. To be f a t . L+ Plur. & Fat.- $1 IV. To fatten.

2 aor, 0. To be lofty. 3-G comm. gend., Plur. s ,/, u\? HeavenJ of which the K o r h say8 there

5 nre BevenJ vide 2 v, 27. yl Plur. 3-G7 A name; when following another word 7~ is

s S L 4 alwaya written with the &; thus ?I ; In the formula ar &.J when 'commencing a . , eentence, and not following a verb, thef'ie omitted on account of its frequent use, in all other indances it ia retained; thus when a t 11 v. 43 we find s, in the middle of a aentence, we know that there is an el l ipe of the word &@ ; see De Sacj's Anthologie Grammaticale Arabe, p. 112. 5 A name+

e . sake,-e 11. To name, call by name. 3 '. n.a. The act of naming, an appellation.

: . v S 0 . P * f o r e D.S.&.T, l , p . l l l , p a r t . pass. Named) fixedJ determined.

a . 5 E S * .p aor. 0. Toform. ~9 fern. A tootb. b mme- S S P tiinea pelt -, D. 8. Gr. T. I , p. 27G)note;

s, ? Plur. + A law) ordinance) line of cv~duct,

S ? G 0 mode of life) punishment, u~ part. PM8. Formed, made into shape.

S P L ? J+ Plur. &G (2nd declension) An ear of corn. ?A P - d+ noun of unity) One ear of corn ; thia word is by some derived from bG.

?* 0 , + Drowsinessl rt, &, q.v. ., , ss 0 ? aor, 0. To lean up on,-^.^^ part. pme. 11. f. Propped up.

S P L ? uu a word of Persian origin) meaning Fine silk.

? ? ,0 ,0. see I- ' ,s . 0 & To be full of years.-& V, To be muety) mouldy through age.

aor. 0. To water the ground with a Persian s-., mheel, to ,dine, for p D. 8, Gr. T. 1) .-

. ? , 0 P p, 106, Splendour. 2 Plur. u~ or u*l Oblique A yearl a barren year) barren- ness) dearth ; for the une of the masculine form of plur, with certain feminine nouns see D, 8, Gr. T. 1) p, 358 ; this word is by some derived from &; in either case the last radical is dropped) and the i taken in its place) see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 358 and 317.*

0.

aor. a. To be watchJu1. GG The face of the Earth, or according to another interpretationl the place of the last Judgment ; it is a180 one of the name8 of Hell.

& To be mwoth, h e l . & plur. of sL A plain. .. 0 aor, a. To be leun,-?G 111. To c a t lob. aor. 0. To forgetl neglect. & for &G D.. 0. Qr. T. ll p. 330) part. act. Neglecting) negligent (with 2).

At pqa 868 in the ae.cond edition, 4 MI them u a misprint in the mend l i i of the w p b , where & ahodd be 14 for i..

-, L nor. 0. To do evil) be evil wretched or grievous; very frequently ueed with the acc. aa sG

0

11 I t ie an evil way)" Literal&) '' I t is evil as to ita way ; 'I to grieve) afflict (with accJ1 as

P P i 9 , pe, b 4 . 1 7 v. 7) "To vex youl'' /iteral&. ( 4 your face8 ; )) The language is here more than usually obscure; according to the corn- mentatore the sense of the passage ie somewhat as followe, "And when there came the punisl~ment with which ye were threatened for your latter offence (we sent against you certain foes) to vex you))' etc. There are numeroue reading8 and interpretation8 of the'nbove) from all which it appears that wlde Moham~nad himself wne not very strong on ancient historyl his commentators have only "made that darlcer which was dark enough before ;" Pass. sd or s> for s ' To be made ad) to be vexed for ?' (with w). 3; n.a. and 3; Evil. Badl wickedl evil, used both aa substantive and

% .. L .

adjective. L+ Evil) a sin) evil action. i+ s -Id, Plur. u I y shamel ~ec re t parte. $1 comp.

form) Worsel worst.-sL1 IV, To do evil. b ? 9- part. act. An evil doer.

LG A courtyard open to the sky1 no verbal root. IG aor, 0. To be Aord; and 54 To be black.

& Plur. i i ~ A Lord) a perion of distinction. $ Plur. 5; Black; Word8 expressive of

,colour although in the comparative form are generally used with a positive meaning, D. S. Gr, T. 1) p. 324.-:+\ IX. To become black. S , G l SF part, act. Become black.

5 ? f. ;L nor, 0. To mount a wall. Jy A wall. gy s t ? P l ~ r . , ~ A degree o j rank) a aiyn) a chapter

6 * s* c. of the Korbn. & A bracelet; Plur. byl and 10

0 * 0 . (2nd declensi~n).--~"~V. To climb over 4 a' wall (with, acc.) ; "wl bF- 38 v. 20,

'' They climbed over the wall of the private apartment,"

LG aor. 0. To mingle. gii n.a. A mixture, a - 0 0 G 0

scourge ; at 89 v. 12 the words +\is by may be rendered " A mixture of varioua punish- inentu resembling a scourge."

& aor. 0. To Let (cam&) runJree. ZL An hour, !.0 6 4 time; &U\ The hour of Resurrection, the

#

lmt Day ; &G adverbial/y, By a ungle hour. & Soowd', name of an idol mid to have been worshipped by the Antedihvia~, and again after the Flood by certain tribes of Araba.

kc aor. 0. To p a s easily and p h a d y domn the s - throat. g G part. act. That which passes

pleasantly down the tliroat, agreeable to drink. -iLl IV. To cause to pas8 easily down the throat.

0 G 0 & nor. 0. To try by smelling. dp a particle prefixed to the Indicative and Energetic Mood8 of the Aoriat tense in order to give them a fiiture signification) occasionally joined to other

O ' O O ,

prefixes ne ti+, and someti~nea contracted into q.v.

0 0 & aor. 0. To drive ; Pass. & (with acc. and 5 # Jl). & fern., Plur. d y A leg, stalk.

plur. of 2; comm. gend. A market- place. .Jc part. act. A driver ; &.& AL . 60 v.20, "A driver and a witneeti)" Two Anpla who ahall attend every men at the lmt day. < / * oL n.a. The act of driving.

& for J% nor, a, D. El. Qr. T. 1, p. 236, To 4. -& 11. To contrive, m g p t , prepare (with am. and 4 of pmd.

0 # ,& Wr. 0. TO 90 t0 m, a c t , 8 h . d

task or punishment upon (with double acc.1. L& A aign, mark (2nd decleinsion) D, 8. Cir. T. 1, p. 402. Note. Borne suppom thia word

0 0 0 G-. #

40 be deri~ed from v, q.v.-p- part. act. 0

11. f. Om who makes a mark of distinction, a person of mark or dietinction ; at 3 v. 121 the

# 6 0 P word ia ~ometimea read *,M part. pms. d & (Angeld distinguished by their appearance ; " at 3 v. 12 i t means '' marked with a 5- or brand."-^^^ IV, To turn out to graze (with

0 .

5~ aor. a. To iatmd. $ Equal, middle. * # f dy L C 20 v. 60, '' In an equal place, or

in a place in the midst)" Le. half way between you and us. Note. In Fluegel's Kor&nl edition

* 0 ' of 1834) there is a misprint in this place, LL 0 0 - 0 0

for L L . ly Equal, the same) even) equality) correctness, rectitude, the middle, the midst ; G~$T; .. . The right way ; :is 41 0 0

v, 9, "Correctly (fixing the tcme) for those 3

who inquire about it." 2; Even, right, sound in mind and body ; c g l 9 v. 11) '' Being in sound health)" Le. althoughnot being dumb, -$ 11. To proportion, faahion, perfect,

0 s 0 0 make level or equal (with -1 ; b\+ 91 v. 0

14, "And (God) aent an equal destruction C 0 0 ~ 0 upon them all ;" the word h ~ a ia here

understood.-& 111. To make level (with HC.0

&).-&\ VIII. To be equal, to w e n d , intend, aet one'a.aelf to do a thing (with Jl) ; to ait h and aquare upon (with &I; to attain maturity aa at !28 v. 13; At- 63 v. 6

.0G& 6 p L i io by mme rendered "And he (the Angel Gabriel) atood erect in hie proper form)" in which he had a p p d to none of the Propheb before Mohammnd.

5, - / L& aor. i. To fiorv. <-JL Sa-iba, name of a she-

camel concerning which the Pagan Arabs held certain superstitions, among others the right of free pasture.

- 0

c L aor. i. To/low over the ground (water)' ; to run backwards and forwards (with ^>), zX One who wanders about in the cause of religion, and especially one who fasts, hence, devout.

Sl. 0 ,L tor. i. To go, travel, journey (with 2). p n.a. 5 The act of going, a journey. <,..-Ã State, con- .-

dition. A company of travellers.- -Â - -.Ã§ 11. To make to go, cause to pass away.

JL* aor. i . To flow. J n-a. A brook, torrent. 0 - 6 9 ^ ^ ^} JÃ‘ 84v. 15, The inundation of El 'Arem,

0 0

see ,Ã >. JU IV. To cause to flow (with ace. and J of pers.).

*-& or :& (2nd declension) Mount 0inai. ^WJJ A iynonym of Sinai (2nd declension, on

;G aor. a. To be unlucky, sinister. 2U.i The 011.. 4 /

left hand ; h\ \ 4 56 v. 9, The companions of the left hand," i.e. The damned ; either because the Books containing their actions in life will be given into their left hands, or because they will be companions in misfortune,-Ã‡-JG

J,U tor. a. To Anom, care for. *,U A matter, business, thing.

&L& see ^. 0

st> A akeneuu. The verb is not used in the primitive form.-<1& 11. To liken ; Pass. <-! To

l.f0 0 - f

be made like; _H-t 4 v. 156, "A liheneaa or similitude (of Christ) was made for them ;I'

it being believed by the Mohammedans that Judaa or some other person was substituted for our Blessed Lord, and crucified i n his

06 0 0

dead.-&l&J VI. To have a mutual resemblance to each other, uxd with & of pen., thm at 2 V. 68, ^fi ZG JaQ " Verily

account of its. feminine gender and foreign - ' 0 If

origin) ; 1-& ;$, ll-. ,,k, and &;f are all different names of the mountain which stands in the territory of Sinai; some have supposed these words to be derived from L-Ã Splendour, or 3-G An eminence; for the termination J^ see&g\.

the cows appear to us to have a resemblance one to another ; " to be figurative or allego-

5 . f rical. &\M I part. act. Mutually resembling one another; &\i $l ' 0 % 39 T. 24, " A Book conformable to itself in (or as to its) repeated portions," or " twofold qualities,"

5 -" , 0 ,

viz. those mentioned at 3 v. 5, where (Ã‘ÃˆLJ~~ , may be rendered open to conjecture, meta-

s 0 0 ' f

phorical or ambiguous, see ulÃ‡Le< rt. &. s - 6 f - part. act. VIII. f. That which is

0

similar. s s 0 6 & SOT. i. To separate. d n.a. Plur.

Beparato; 6ia1 99 v. 6, " Divided into li - classes." & indeclinable, sing. and plur.

Separate, divided ; in an adverbial form, Separately ; I t is said by Beidiwee to be a

s - plur. of 4. I=L& aor. o. To winter. 9-& Winter. 2 To avert, @ to be a matter of controversy (with

Â¥f f generic noun, A plant having a

0 G f 0

trunk or stem, a tree, trees; & w ~ > r 3 6 V. 80, " He giveth you , fire out of the green tree ;" Fire is obtained by rubbing together the wood of the and

5 'Â¥

;&, even when green. i> noun of unity, A tree, a plant.

a i 5 ' <-* nor. o. and i. To be avaricious. Avarice. %a a s 0

B-; I plnr. of 2 Avaricious, covetous. 0 s P: .ÃJC Â¥qr a. To JRM any one fa t to eat. , y e

plur. of ~t. s i ! : 0 ' f aor. a. To fill. u ) ~ part. pau. Filled,

loaded (a ship). & aor. a. To be raised up, to be fixed (the eyes)

in horror. (,a&-G part. act. That which if fixed in horror, as the sight of the eyes.

Â¥hi aor. o. To run, establish, bind firmly, strengthen 00 Ã‡., (with ace. and "1 ; & JJ~&T; 10 v.

88, " Harden their hearb." &G Phr . 514 and T&! (2nd declension) Vehemen t, strong, violent, severe, grievous. Note. Adjectives oi the forms &J$ and JI*J are used indifferently for both masc. and fern., thus at 12 v. 48 before the words %+ '& we must undentand

s Ã the fern. plur. ^y^ ; so also at 72 v. 12, when ( -~ \xtkJ is the word to be supplied. 1 foi JJ L\ cornp. form, more or most strong, etc.,

. "Â¥ i * an y A A ~ 2 v. 69, fit. " More strong i n hanlne~," for 3 Harder, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 325. 3 The age of full strength, viz* from 18 to 3 0 . ~ 3 ~ VIII. TO tct with violence against (with u).

5, 3 aor. o, and i. ~ o d o evil. > Plur. ',\"&Evil, S0; bad, wicked. ,/-. collective noun, Sparks 01

fire. . , -2 aor. a. To drink (with ace. or with <Ã‘Ã 0

4% n.a. A portion of water, time of drinking, 43 n.a. A drinking. $L& part. act. One

a if* who drinks. ( Ã ‘ Ã Drink, a beverage, potion. S 0 Ã ‡ .

u+ A drinking place ; i t is also a noun of action, meaning simply the act of drinking, or drink ; Plur. A (2nd declension).- . J &y IV. To give to drink, make to drink ;

&TG ; 2 7. 87, "And they 0

were made to drink the calf into their hearts; " for the construction see D. S. Or. T. 2, pp. 124 and 453.

0,0 aor. a. To open, enlarge, expand (with ace. and J or u).

0 0 . 0 0

,A aor. o. To become a f u g i t i v e . - 9 11. To disperse (with v). s: ... 0

J^~.)A A small band of men; possibly derived - 0

.*0 /a. from ~i> for a+. .. 0 9 aor, o. and i. To impose a condition. Â£9 pluk. of @ A sign.

* 0 0 Ã£ aor. a. To lay down a law, appoint a religion for any one (with acc. and J of pen.). *G plur. of 'fjG 0 part. act. Holding up (their heads), or appearing manifestly; both of which meanings belong to the verb; for the story

0. . 'A alluded to a t 7 v. 163 see ÃÃ‘<.- &.& and 5 0 Aw$ A law or institution prescribed by God,

0 - 0 *{ theright way or mode of action; (ifLLo- *J

2% &45v. 17, "Thai we put' you in the right way concerning the matter (of faith)."

00 0 s ."' j2 a ~ r . 0. TO @t, rise (as the m). & Of 3. b 0

or pertaining to the East, Eastern. ,J+ 6 <-e I ;"* The ptec of am&, the East. i_e'/- ll

oblique dm~, fitma&, The two ~ l i t a , "o the

two places where the sun rim in winter and '< 6, - 4.61 summer ; at 48 v. 87 the words ~ A Ã § 1 +

are by some interpreted to mean the distance 9 0 , from East to Weet ; Plur. J^L (2nd declen-

don) The Eastern part*, thedifferent points 01 .. 1, smrioe.-,'pI IV. To shine, rim (the aunh

1-7 5 ' # ~p n.8. The s ~ i k tu, part. act. One

0

on whom the sun has risen, or who does anything a t sunrise.

(Â¥ tor. a. To bÃ a companion or sharer. s> A share, participation ; at 31 v. 12 it meant polytheism or idolatry ; f t ' , j/K 35 v. 15, "They will disclaim yo& having associated them withGod." 4.2 An aaaociate, partner, sharer; ~ l u r . ~ ~ (2nd declension) <1) >x> All those to whom the idolaters rendered a share of Divine honours, such as Angels,Genii, Devils, idols, eta., it is to these that allusion ia made at 6 v. 137 and elsewhere. Note. Nouns of the second declension when followed by' the affixed pronouns take the three in-

i . 9 i Ã ‘ ' - <Â -0,9 i f / Â¥"'0 flexions ; thus p,Bp, ,-rib/-, and .JfB$. &@I 111. To share with (with acc. of pen. and & - q f IV. To main a s h a m or associate (with ace. of pers. and u or &) ; to give companions-to God-(with ace. ofpers. and u) ; to be a polytheist or idolater ; . u f S i ' 14 v. 27, "Ye associated me," D. 8.

S G I Gr. T. 1, p.459. & ' part. act. One who S 0 Â ¥ I gives associates to God, an idolater.-G^:f

part. act. VIII. f. One who partakes or shares (with &.

2 mr. i. To buy, sell, barter (with ace. of thing sold or' bartered ind u of thing taken hi

0

e i ~ h a n g e ) . - ~ c l VIll. To buy, barter, take

in exchange (with ace. and w); it i s also found a t 2 v. 84 with the mnM of to sell or give in exchange (with ace. and +); at 2

**0 4' v. 15 and elsewhere the word I,+\ ii written with a Damma instead of Jezm over the, on account of the Wqla which follows it; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 69.

3 aor. o. and i . To be f a r off. An extravagant lie.-&\ IV. To act unjustly.

i l aor. a. To watt on t i e bank Ã§/ a river. !& The stalk of a plant. - 2~ii Bank of a river or valley. aor. o. To part in two. 'J n.8. A side. ,ki) In the direction of.

5 'b' am. o. To be obstinate, perverse. ,.,u Plur. (2nd declension) Satan, a Devil.

5 9 9 5 ' 0 1 To collect. t ~ y - plur. of i_--iw n.a. A large tribe, a nation, 3 plur. of 3 A

9 b.9 forked branch. ShoBaibJ name of a prophet sent to the Midianites.

,0 . JÃ aor. o. To know, perceive, understand, to make verses. /^ n.a. Poetry, the art of Poetry. S' -'

,& ~lu r . J&l Hair. Plur. Â¥r\ (2nd declension) part. act. A Poet. d.4 Sirius, the Dog-star, which was worshipped by the

I,-. 0 Arabs in Pagan times. (2nd declension) plur, of $+ A sign, rite, ceremony performed by the pilgrim@ at Mecca, one of which was the offering of victims ; hence some

0 - 0 , L -., understand the words *3)T',! ~Ãˆ Jaw 22. v. 33, " Holds in honour the offerings made to God," viz. by choosing for slaughter victims

S. I* 0 of great value. J^w* A place appointed for r ., 4 * , ' 0 4 sacred rites ; +.*I\ A mountain called

Kuzah in the neighbourhood of Mecca.- J)L IV. To make any one underatand (with

ace. of pen. and Ã£,! ; to mak6 known to(with v of pen. or thing made known, and ace. of

0

pors. to whom the discovery is made). & To tight a )re.- ,\ VIII. TO be lyktad,

to become shining. JLX I aor. a. To affect in the heart's core, inspire

with violent love. J*i aor. a. To employ, occupy. JÃ plur, oi

& n.a. Work, occupation, employment. , .. Ã§-i nor. a. To make even that which was odd, to

intercede, be an intercessor (with J e. of pers. to whom, and J of pers. for whom intercession

0 s < - ' is made). Â¥_i n.a, A pair, double ;

0

/')Xi 89 v. 2, " Dy the double and the single ; "

numerous interpretations are given ; according to one of the most plausible it may mean, All created tl~ings,-which are said to have been made in pain,-and The Creator, who is One and Single. g G part. act. One who inter- cedca. '&?lur. '-ÃÃ§ (2nd declension) An .. , interce~aor. &LL& Intercession.

, . Ã£& To/Ã§>r pity. JÃ Radnem of the sky if t t r e u n s e t . - a IV. To be afraid (with or

s L Ã with 3 of verb). ,**-Ã part. act. One who ie afraid or in terror.

.^. AA- aor. a. TO strika any wu on th* ~ p . i&i fox

@ (see iEL*, rt. d), A lip ; ~ u a l _ , 1 u ^ and tlJ-, #

Oblique _^a&& The two lips. aor. o. 71) b6 near v t t h g (the sun) ; and . .s, nor. i. To heal, cure. ISA A brink. 9-% Medicine, remedy, means of cure.

3 aor. o. To split, cleave, place under a difficulty, Ã or impose a hard condition (with 11). (^A

n.a. The act of splitting, a fissure, difficulty, .. labour, trouble. Difficulty, trouble.

.

?Ã Ã § ~ A distance, a tract, a long my. 31 amp. form (2nd declension for &I) Mom troublesome, more difficult to be borne.- & 111. To contend with, oppow, w i d , separate one's-~lf from (with acc.) ; &$f

0 * . Ã fcÃˆ f^t & _{ 16 v. 29, "Concerning whom ye used to contend (with the believed." Jl*,. &.a. The act of separating one's-self, ~ h i s m , heresy, dieaent, contention ; j@ 11 ^ or v. 91, " Your contending with me."-<_y<-Ã§~ &% V. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To be tplit open, cleft asunder (with v) ; at 25 v. 27

:a Ãˆ~~~ ,

(tAAJ is for jaÃ aJ D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 221, and the meaning of the paasage is that the Heavens shall be cloven asunder by the clouds on which the Angels shall descend.-$\ VII. To be

I < 0 t , cloven asunder ; .*fl l /n^T 54 v. 1, " And the moon bath been (or shall be) cloven asunder ; I' the former meaning having reference to a miracle said to have been wrought by Mohammad, and the latter to one of the signs of the lad day. $$) n.a. The act of cleaving asunder.

am. o. To make tnkerabfe; and J am. a. To be miserable, wretched, unhappy. 3 Miserable; at 19 vv. 4 and 49 i t may be , 1,s rendered " disappointed." ^Ã‡ 1 comp. form,

-Â 0 1,s Moat wretched ; blU\ 91 v. 12, "The greatest wretch among them," whose name w a a i \ z

5 dc "j see 54 T. 29. i& Misery, wretchedness. To doubt. & A doubt.

am. o. To give thanke, to be grateful (with J) ; <_&! '& Gp 27 v. 40, "He is only eratkul 0 , 0 " to the benefit of his own soul ; I' to thank, show or feel gratitude for (with ace.); 'J

G; 27 v. 19, "That I may show my gratitude for thy favour." "jSvi, Plur. ; g n . a , The giving thanks, gratitude, thanks. ,@ part. act. One who gives thanks or is grateful; God is said to be grateful in the sense of giving rewards to men for their obedience. J*L;t Thankful; a distinction is made between this word and% ; the former is said to denote a person who is thankful for little or for nothing, the latter grateful for large favours; in the Koran we find both epithets applied to God. & part. p a r . Gratefully accepted, acceptable.

& To be crowgrained and ill-tempered ( a man). -$$li part. act. TI. f. Quarrelling, or at variance with each other.

<jL& aor. o. To shackle, fasten by a tether. ,& A similitude, likeness. &\^ Likeness, mode; &G & 17 v. 86, "According to his own .. , way ."

aor. o. To utter a complaint (with ace. and JP ; at 12 v. 86 we find an alifof-precaution added to the word 9, see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 109. i\H, A niche in a wall.-&! VIII. To make a complaint (with &I.

&.&, aor. a . To rejoice at the misfortunes o f others. ^ I. -h&l IV. To cause to rejoice over another's

misfortunes (with ace. and u of pers.). , @ To be lofty and long. S/;L part. act. That

which is lofty. ,.. -4 To bd seized with fc irrar . -Ju\ IV. f. of

,t*A a qnadriliteml verb not found in the 1st form, To creep or contract with horror.

0 , . & aor. i. and o. To be bright with sunshine. $6" fern. The Sun. aor. o. To comprehend, contain. JlÃ§> Plur.

&l (2nd declension) The left hand ; for an explanation of 66 v. 40 see >'lt .-mi VIII. To contain, conceive (with ace. and $1, as

w.y 4 / ,oS t . o .-'-'o-a Q

d l ,.&-J + "--1-Ã‘ 6 v. 144, "Or that which the wombs of the two females have conceived."

*,Â¥-, S1-, aor.. a. To hate. L i for L-Ãˆ U n.a. Hatred. 2G for tit, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 97, part. act. One who hates. , -', 4 nor. a. To b u m , scorch. <Ã‘'L PIur.

5 f f -4 A flaming fire. , , t> aor. a. To be present at, in, or with (with ace.) ;

to bear witness that (with i1 or ',\I, against (with &), or of (with w) ; to bear testimony

" / , b , to i> fact (with :1); as $TJg> a\ A+ 63 v. 1, " We bear testimony to the fact that thou art indeed the apostle of God ; to bear witness by an oath (with ace. and +), as

' / / u s ,.I-. ' (ST , i y ld .+ f ~ l A,Ã‘ y1 24 v. 8, "That she make four asseverations by God; " I t is

, f , ' , -'

also found with the simple ace., as 1 '1-0 ,,,J 1 25 v. 72, " They bear no false witness,"

I-,, . and again at 22 v. 29 f i yl_' 1,,1.1,, "That they may witness the benefits accruing to them." Plur. 3 and z@ part. act. One who is present, or who bears witness, a witness; at 11 v. 20 the word is generally

f <J r /

supposed to mean the K o r h ; $,.+-Ã 85 v. 3, "By a witness and a thing witnessed ; " a vague and indefinite expression, of which a great number of explanations have been sug- gested by the commentators; according to one it means the Creator and Creation, or vice versd ; several others are given in Sale's

^ 9 9 ' ^ ^ Kodn ; b,.+ &, 74 v. 13, "And sons remaining in his presence (at Mecca)." %

Plur. ifq (2nd declension) A witneaa; / / s -, *, yi, L 60 T. 80, tide & ; One who bears

witneee to the truth by suffering martyrdom, *. ,' a martyr, aa at 4 v. 71 and 89 v. 69. Ã ˆ J n.a. of To testify, the act of bearing witness, evidence, a taking of evidence, testimony; $1; y!w &? 24 v. 6, " Evidence given

W Â ¥ 6 0 by swearing four times by God ; " ^Jt\ ,& &!J'J 9 v. 93, " He who knoweth that which ye keep secret, and that which ye make known." S'I. -' J uu* Time or place of being present, or of giving or hearing evidence ; the word occurs at 19 v. 38, and is susceptible of any of the

s f ^ - above meanings. J+ part. pass. That 5 9 6 -'st-' which ia witnessed ; J+ 11 v. 105, "A

day on which evidence shall be given," or i t may be "a day which shall be witnessed by all," or " of which testimony has been given ; "

Ã ˆ . .-Ã‡"Â¥-I. ^ \a+ 2 91 u\ 17 v. 80, "Verily the prayer (or reading) at daybreak is borne witness to" (by the guardian angels).- ^-y\ IV. To take am witness, call to witness (with ace. and &) ; to call upon any one to be present at or to witness (with ace. of pers. and thing) ; to cause evidence to be taken of

,J"C.Ã‡ or again~t (wit* &).-+al X. To call a> witneu (with acc. and &. ., , SI. SÃ + aor. a. To publish abroad. p ~iur.,^ and s Ã ˆ ,Ã A month ; origin~lly A moon, either new, or according to utter!, a full m w g $ &L& 2 v. 193, "The (time for thdpilgrim- age is (the) known months,"viz. Shawhl, Dhu'l Ra,'da, and part of Dhu'I Hajja; The word g; must here be understood; Lit." The pilgrimage (ill tlmd ii," etc., $1 being what the gram-

' 4 S re. 'A I marian~ call Ã§T<to Y \J vp ff+, put in the * ' nominative case as being an inchoative ; see D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 694.

'00 . f i am. a. and i. To draw in the breath in sighing. : roperly, The drawing in of the breath <^!f+-p

of an OM in braying, A sigh, me >J ; at 67 v. 7 it is applied to the roaring of Hell-fire.

0, s"' ' V& aor. o. 7!Ã &#ire, long for, fy n.a. Plur. s ". w\+ Lust, desire.-$1 VIII. same M LA.

s I"' 2I.i aor. o. ~II mi~g/e . <Ã‘ n.a. A mixture ; ' ' rg 37 v. 05, " A mixture of boiling v f 7

water and other delicacies," with which evil- doers are to be allowed to wash down the fruit of tbe infernal tree Ez-Zal&oom.

',\i nor. o. To gather h o ~ y from the comb. ÃJJ ' Ã O Ã ˆ Ã ˆ (2nd declension) A consul talion ; p,! (. Ã ˆ ,

J 42 v. 36, "And their business is (a matter of) consultation among them."-;& 111. To consult.-;HI IV. To make signs (with dj of

Sf '0 pers.).-JÃ§l& n.8. VI. f. Consultation with one another.

'Ã S'JÃ Flame without smoke; no verbal root.

5 '0 _ft4 aor. o. To pkk. 49 A tin# t h m , weapons, arms.

Jfi aor. h^ f a doubly imperfect verb, To rout, ' Ãˆ A '0 ecald. (^A plur. of i\ . The acalp.

Â 0 'Xi for or 4, tor. st& To will, be willing, wiot'(with ace. or of verb). 1 3 n.8. Plur. 3"@1(2nd dulension, me D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 364, MU) A thing, matter, rfair ; @, adverbially, In any way, at all.

.& tor. i. To Ã hoay ( t k head). 3 and ' S t- Ã "S +& n~.a. Hoariness. 4 plar, of &\ Hoary, grey-headed ; thia word may be re-

st.: S I Ã garded as a contracted form of O r i_^&, like & for s, ?. or & for Et). 8. Or. T. 1, p. 360.

5 ,, d& see &,.

st-- 6 P I aor. i. To be old. + Plur. t)Ã An old man.

& nor. i. To plaster a wall. & part. pass. properly, Plastered with gypsum; according

to El Beid&w& it may also be rendered lofty. SÃ‡ P ' part. paw. 11. f. Built up on high.

@ tor. i. To be published abroad; with ^> of pen. 0 4 0 i t is used in a bad sense, ~II &dl

\&7 &$l" ~i 24 v. 18, " That filthy rumoun should be spread abroad about the true bc- lievers." & Plur. \y, and A met,

I.> I 0 0 party ; w&T Those of a like persuasion, or of their party.

&

p The name and initial letter of the 38th chapter, see FT. aor. o. To pour (with ace. and &) ; at 44

"-<Â Ã v. 48 it is used with J^J, Pour over," and at 22 v. 20 with $ ' ,. & n.a. The act of pouring.

& aor. a. To rise (a star). S L e ~ h e Saberma, who thought themselves followers of 'the religion of Noah, and worshipped the heavenly bodies.

0 0 0 st- 9 JW aor. a. To give one a morning draught. S 0 0 S! 0 0 f c and c\-t\ The morning. ;&& Plur.

0 s . af-i,G (2nd declension) A lamp.- 1I.To come to or come upon in the morning.- ^#. 1 el IV. To be, become, happen, or do anything in the morning ; This word is one of the .@ I - 0 ,J6 4 ~ 1 or sisters of LG, which govern their attributes in the ace., D. 8. Or. T. 2, p.

,0L* 60 ; el may frequently be rendered simply Ã he was, or became," and sometimes "he

I *'> ','l. began," u f- 18 v. 40, "And he S L I began to turn down." p part. act. One

who does anything in, or enters upon, the morning.

aor. i. To bind, to be patient or constant, to endure patiently or be constant towards (with ace. or with &I. ^_Ã n.a. Pntiencc. >c part. act. One who is patient or constant, per-

s a - severing. ,b Very patient, constant.- 2l-e 111. To excel in pat ience.-- IV. To suffer misfortune; J Y& ^> 2 i. 170, "How great will be their sufferings in .

the Fire." For the construction of verbs of admiration see D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 218.-

VIII. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 222, To be patient or constant (with J or &).

aor. a. To point thefinger at any one. &L - (2nd declension) comrn. gend. pliir. of A finger.

S c s aor, a. o. and i. To dye. Sauce. IfLs - ., -o:/>- Baptism ; 9 l + 2 v. 132, an elliptical expression meaning "God has baptized us with his baptism," or " his religion ; " the visible signs of which appear in the believer, as water

11

is seen on the person of one baptized ; the word is said to be put in the ace. as being the

f -39 - 4 corroborative, 1 of KT v. 130, and the substitute or equivalent, JGY of &\ & D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 526, see also p.'85 of the same volume.

Ctf nor. o. To be puerile, to feel a youthful pro- pensity towards (with d). % A male child, a boy.

0 0 0 ToJay an animal; and 4 s aor. a. To be a S 0 0 companion to any one, -I< Plur. e,

Plur. of Plur. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 376, A companion, associate ; i t frequently means Lord of, or the possessor of any quality or thing ; one in intimate relation with any thing,

9 - 0 9 as j&\ *L< Jonah ; as it were, " l ie of 5 - 0 9 0 b Ã the fish or the man of the fish ; " ,U \ ulÃˆ

0 i t The men, or companions of the fire,-the

. < C 0 - 0 9 ~amncd ; " O a f & q a n d &,LJ 1 56 vv. 8 and 9, "The companions of the Right and Left hands," viz. The Righteous and the Wicked, so called because they shall receive the Books containing a register of their actions, the former in their right hands, and the latter in their left; r&I< 12 v. 39 oblique dual, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 415, " 0 my two fellow prisoners ! " : as in the case of ,;, the proper rendering of this word may best be gathered from the context, thus at 51 v. 59, where

rf la- refers to I' Those who resembled them in former days." &U A consort, wife.- -l< 111. To bear company with (with

0 0 c . I act.).--1 IV. To preserve, hinder, keep from (with A).

f0 0 o & To dig with an instrument called J-AA-^.

&k! plur. of Au-* A dish. iJLe-' plur. of SJ^ A leaf or page of a book, a book; *p 74 v. 52, " Open Books" from Heaven, in which should be written each man's name, with an order to follow Mohammad.

9 aor. o. To strihtf anything solid. i i f - ~ c A L

deafening noise. s

generic noun, Rocks. t i noun of unity, A rock ; no verbal root.

&.Â aor. o. To turn away the face (with 3) ; turn away, divert, hinder (with ace. and L,) ; nor. o. and i. To cry alond (with of object), as at 43 v. 57 ; the words in the text refer to a passage at 21 v. 98, where judgment is de- nonriced against all objects of idolatrous worship; but the Meccans contending that Jesus must be included with the rest, the blunder waa corrected by the lOlst verse. k n.a. The act of hindering, diverting, or turning away

S i t from. J,JI-<I n.a. The act of turning away the face. IA)& Boiling (water), the serum in a wound, purulent matter, see 42.

,JkJ aor. o. and i. To return/rom watering, to pro- s o 0 S f 9 ceed, go forward. i~ n.a. Plur.,,.x< comm.

.0 t, gend. The bosom, b r e n a t e Ã ‘ i ~ IV. To bring -0- -00 ( , f Ã 0 back, as &,! \J _ 9 ~ 28 v. 28, " Till the

0

shepherds have brought away (their flocks)." 0 0 . c~u? aor. a. To split, expound, profess openly (with

s o - / a -Â * - 9 u). 4 ti~tf A fiss~re.-~.x< 11. Pass. p . TQ oppress with, or suffer from headache.- 4s 5 0 a ,. 6 4 for c~uw V. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p..220, To

a - - P be split up or divided in two. ti& w part.

^ act. That which is cloven or splits itself in two.

_Ã .L aor. i. To turn aside (with $1. d; The steep side of a mountain.

0 0 0

jAtf aor. o. To be truthful, true or sincere, to speak

the truth, to establish or confirm the truth c what another has said, to verify (with doubl

.f-i.^f-' f , 9 s 4 4. 0 ace.), as b,,! l dH iLJJ l JA< 48 v. 27, "Go hath confirmed for his Apostle the truth of th vision ; I' to keep faith (with ace.) ; observe ,

sf. promise faithfully (with double ace.). JÃ‡\ Truth, veracity, sincerity, soundness, excel lence in a variety of different objects; thu $Jafl \y^ 10 v. 93, " A salubrious and agree ,. G Ã able dwelling;" -1- & ~ n 17 v. 82, " Wit1 9 a favourable entrance (into the grave) ;" GL* Of. jI( 18 v. 51, Literally, "A lofty tongui

*Â

of veracity ; I J meaning that they should receivt the highest praise; a similar phrase occurs a1 26 v. 84. Jt)LÃ part. act. One who, or Thai which is true, sincere, one who speaks tht

a -:. , truth. ( ~ J J M ~ Whatever is given and sanctifiec

s to God's service, as alms or tithes, etc. i& A dowry given by the husband to his wife

Ã ˆ / b J/.J^cotum. gend. Asincere friend. (*A^\ (SnC a - declension) comp. form, More true. &.A<

Very truthful, a man of veracity.-;A< 11, To be very sincere and truthful, to verify, tc prove the troth of, a~'& y Jz 34 . v. 19, "Iblees proved the truth of his opinion of them ; " to give credit to, or believe in the truth of (with AJ n.n. A verification, S- Â ¥ Â

, J A - ~ part. act. One who verifies, confirms, 01

,a ., bears witness to the t ru th . - j~^ i or J57 -JK V. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 220, To give alms (with

^6 Â¥" 0 "'if & of pers.) ; f v~ 5 v. 49, " And , whosoever remits it (the penalty, or the retaliation) as alms.;" the word is also found with this signification at 2 v. 230 and 4 v. 94. s - , . Ã * . - a # z u e nnd ,j?a part. act. One who gives u,

alms.

.- iikf aor. o. 2'0 clap the hands.-(Us n.8. 11. f.

A clapping of hands.-JIA> V. To receive with honour; at 80 v. 6 this word is put for

Ã‡ -'.. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 221. 6 - p nor. o. To tie up a purse; aor. i. To cry aloud.

e 5 Excessive cold that scorchea plants. s/e A loud cry.- IV. To be obstinate, persist obstinately (with &).

".Â¥ S l-,

V To make manifest. Ã‘,- n.a. A palace, a high tower, or other lofty structure. ,,.

,-p To c r y aloud. <Sy One who brings help.- s < . ' !Â - f.? t~ part. act. IV. f. same as ; 9 G; 6' 0 Ã

, & - , 14 v, 27, " Neither can ye help me,"

O f for *~^f oblique plural with personal pro- ,'" .'.

noun 2, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 459.-Ã‘^, VIII. 8 ,, l-

for & D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 222, To cry aloud. --'- 'G-'G - c ~ X. To implore assistance of any one

(with ace. of pers.). sf* quftdriliteral verb, derived from >,v. To make a chattering noise (as a green woodpecher), 5.00 p,.,s A loud roaring and furious wind, or according to another interpretation, a blast of cold wind.

r , coinm. gend. A way, and especially an open way; the name of a bridge over Hell; no verbal root.

, , ^ G 0 s . ,.o aor. a. To prostrate. dy plur. of y^ -

Lying prostrate. ,. , A> nor. i. To turn, turn away, divert, avert (with -

ace. and ,>) ; to turn towards (with ace. and - , , # ' , Â ¥ Â ¥ I * A) ; JJp 3 v. 146, " l ie put you to

flight before them." no&. The act of 5 G .

- averting. I_Ã ,A A place to turn to, a refuge.

a Ã ˆ G . Â¥"& fÃ

~ Ã ‘ A part. pass. Averted.-1_Ãˆ 11. To explain, give an explanation of (with :?); at

t/0/08 0 0S*fl d

25 v. 52 the words * Ã n!+ may either refer to the water, and must then be rendered if We cause i t to flow amongst them (by different channels)," or it may be translated "We have explained the matter to them (in the Koran)." n.a. Change (of wind). dTj VII. To turn aside.

,'-' ,.. aor. i. To cat off-dates (from a tree). & a part. act. One who cuts or gathers fruit. (

A garden whose fruit has all been gathered ; also a dark night, as though it were burnt' up and black; both meanings have been assigned at 68 v. 20.

Ji see&. A*< aor. a. To mount (a ladder) ; ascend (with

^Jp. A severe torment. J.A Earth, S9 -Â sand, or dust. d<x^ A calamity, torment,

' t <Â . name of a mountain of fire in Hell ; AAJ^L l3& 74 v. 17, " I will afflict him with torment," or " I will compel him to climb a peak of fire ;" the words may be taken in either sense.-=I IV. To mount up./<<il

- a 8, for AHA V. D. 0. Qr. T. 1, p. 220, To climb up (with &).

. 0

,Ã - To have the face distorted.-- 11. To make a wry face at (with ace. and J of pen.).

- 0 . ,

(,*< aor. a. To strike with lightning; and & To 5 swoon, expire. ,J* One in a swoon, &i&

Plur, &(? (2nd declension) A stunning noise os of a thunderbolt, a punishment from Heaven, a thunderbolt.-jÃˆ IV. To cauae to swoon.

"< , ,W aor. o. TO be younger than another; and$

To be small, >LÃ put . act. One who 11 small, s . vile, contemptible. Small. 'j3 (2nd

declension) comp. form, Smaller. "j e Vile- - - ness, contempt.

. . LÃ aor. o. and i. To incline, swerve; and & aor. a.

To incline towards (with , I. < ' nor. o. To set, arrange in a row or rank, to

extend the wings injtying. A row, rank; 6 Ã -0' ILÃ In order, in line of battle ; k &J 1,

37 v. 1, "By (the Angels) standing in rank." s 0

i_fL part. act. Extending its wings. d\yi s

for 4s (2nd declension) plur. of dG for &G A camel standing with its fore-feet in line, or with three feet on the ground and one

8 P i . . forefoot tied up. &+ part. pass. Arranged in order.

, < ^ P aor. a. To turn one's-self away from, repel;

to pardon, forgive (with 2) ; at 647.14 this word is found in combination with a n d p , the meaning of all three is nearly identical, but a slight distinction may be made by con- sulting the primary signification of each word ; a somewhat similar passage occurs in the 51st Psalm, "Turn thy face from my sins, and put out-all my misdeeds." Â¥?">,a Pardon, the act of repelling a suitor ; with the latter meaning i t is found a t 43 v. 4.

s Â¥" iJLfi aor. i. To b i d Fetters, plur. of 1&Ã A present, and hence an obligation.

-.*.a & tor. i. To whistk. S I p (2nd declension) fern. of 3 1 Yellow; Plur. 3 comm. gend.- Â£ 0 0 + part. IX. f. That which is or becomes yellow. - / v 6 > quadrili teral, Tb pass alone over a levelplain. \'\' L a w A level plain. .<.

,M aor. i. To stand on three feet-as a horse- nit4 the toe of one of the hind feet just touching the ground. &$% fern. plur. part. act. Horses standing as above ; at 38 v. 30

the word &!ria to be understood, D. 8. Gr. T, 2, pp. 233 and 267. .* 4 \s aor. o. To be clear. liJh Name of a mountain

S . p - ^ near Mecca. Jp A hard stone.-- part. p Ã § ~ 11. f. ~larified.-fl IV. To choose in preference to, or grant 6 another a prefer-

I

ence in the choice of anything (with ace. of pen. and + of thing).-&\ VIII. for

0 Je D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 822, To choose, select; to choose in preference to (with ace.

1 and & ; at 37 v. 153 we find 3 for JiS\ "Hath he chosen?" D. 8. Gr. T. 1,

' " b ? p. 71. K<^&Ã part. pass. Chosen. >J-Ã To strike violently.

wr , i. To crucify. 2 The back-bone or ' loins ; Plur. ^>Â£<I.- 11. To cause to be

crucified. tor a. To be right, good, honest, upright. ' ,';

Peace, reconciliation ; & Peaceably.

, ' \i part. act. One who or that which in good, sound, free from blemish, perfect, upright, righteous, a man of integrity ; also a proper name, BQeh, a prophet said to have been sent to tbe tribe of Tharnood ; &\Â£.' Good works.-27 IV. To make whole and sound, amend, reconcile ; to make a reconciliation 01 peace (with a ; to dispose aright (with la,

and J of pen.) ; to render fit, as at 21 v. 90, . I &, SW\, " And we rendered his wifi

fit (for child-bearing) ;" instances occur, as a1 27 v. 49, where the meaning seems to approach very closely to that of the primitive form, to be upright, or act with integrity ; at 46 v. 14 it means to show kindness (with J of pen.

S b and & of thing). n.a. u&igbtner,

righteousness, reconciliation, amendment, re" formation. part. a c t One who is upright, righteous, a penon of integrity, a reformer; at 28 v. 18 it may be translated " Peacemaker."

iiLtf aor. i. To be hard. ^LÃ Hard. & To m u d . Ju Dry clay. Derived

from J aor. i. To sound. 2 aor. o. To hurt in the small of tAe back; and

& for& aor, a. To ksw the centre <sf the back bent in, at a mare b f f w foahg. *lLÃ pronounced, and sometimes written f ~ * D, 8,

S F 0 Gr. T. 1, p. 36; Plur. d,b A prayer; b W b S O O w1 y> w'& 2 v. 152, " Mercies from their Lord ; " at 22 v. 41 i t means "Synagogues."- & 11. To pray, property, by bending the knees and whole body in adoration, or generally, to offer prayer to God (with J); with . &it means to pray for, also to bless, aa in the formute & jSic <3)T& GO^ H o t mit Awp Aim." Jd for 3 put. act. One

who p i ty . JZ A place of prayer. Irf aor. i, To roast; and ,'& &or. a. To undergo

roasting in the fire (with ace. of fire); Instead of ,& another reading of several pauages is & etc. in the Pm. or & in the ii. f. and they must then be translated "He shall be burnt" or " rotated." dl< part. act. One who suffers the pain of being r o ~ t t d ; ftY\^ for &fl as antecedent to the complement,^^ 38 V. 39, Literally, " Sufferera of the routing of the fire," or "entering Hell-fire to be roasted therein." fiL. n.a. ~oasting.-& 11. To cause to be burnt, submit to the action of fire (with ace. of pen. and of the fire), thus

4-0 9

* Ã +F ,. , \ GO v. 31, "Then cause him to be burnt in Hell." *Xa; n.a. A burning.- j.3 IV. To thrust into the fire to be burnt (with double act.).-&\ for VIII. D. S. Gr. T, 1, p. 222, To be warmed at the fire.

* ' y To cork a bottle; nor. a. To become deaf. Deaf, plur. of '-1 (2nd declension).-Ã ,. IV. To make deaf. , ,. aor. o. To be silent. &G part. act. One who holds his peace.

5 .. f

nor. o. To wish to approach any one. + A Lord, one to whom reference is made in matters of importance; os an adjective it means sublime, everlasting. . , 0 aor. a. To bcdt with a cudgel. ;Ã‘Ã (2nd

S 0 6 0 declension) plur. of yye A monastery. , ,. f - ~ o am. a. To make, do; chiefly used in things

where art is employed; to nourish or bring L , ,., 0 b I , up ; + & +9 20 v, 40, " And that thou

mightest be brought up under my eye;" a similar meaning also pertains to the IV. f. s t ,# Ãˆ_- n.a. An act, that which is done ; For the

d , 0 I elliptical expression 9 I &Ã at 27 v. 90 aee s 5;; see also a similar ellipse at 4 v. 121.

An .art. &^-* (2nd declension) plur. s 0 0 . of A cistern, also a palace, oitadel or , , #0 .t-

other fine building.-& for 4 VIII D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 222, To appoint aa agent (with ace. and J).

" To be foul (a 'mcltl. phr. of '-; An (*- idol. Ã - o r p A palm or other tree springing from the

same root as othoi ; Plur. u\Tf ; no verbal root. ... ,.p aor. a. To injure by its heat (the sun), to dis- solve. 2 Relationship by marriage.

s , - f _ l< am. o. To pour forth, Aft the mark. +\y S r ,

That which is right. ++ A rain-cloud.- &! IV. To overtake, happen to, befall, fall upon (with ace.) ; To will, as at 38 v. 35 ; to happen, 57 v. 22 ; To affect injuriously, as at

- 0 . I . . - ' * 3 v. 113 i^jf -la\, " I t strikes (or in- jures) the corn ;" To meet with, as at 3 v.

,**-'I, l * tu-" 159 l,J-, 4 3, "Ye had already met with two pieces of good fortune equivalent to it," viz. at Bedr, where the forces under Mohammad had not only slain seventy of the Koreiah, but had also taken an equal number prinoners ; of this they are reminded when murmuring at the loss they sustained at Ohod; To send down, pour down upon, afflict or purdah (with

t ' t. / t,, ace. and +), as j i ^ + ~ u 7 v. 98, "We 0 . ,

/ I could punish them for their sins;" sTc > >Ã‘"- 12 v. 56, "We poir d o n our mercy upon whom we please." &- .. , ?. ' / part. aot. That which happens. Ai accident, misfortune, calamity.

stu0 ;\ aor. o. and a. To emit a sound. uf^ n,a a 00 A sound, voice; Plur. OPT.

;LÃ aor. o. To incline or turn-a thing-toward) S I - (with [); To divide, dissect. ^ A trumpet

5 I s> t ' 6

S Y Plur. Jy A form.-Jy 11. To form, !Â¥ , I fashion (with aco. and .<>). JJU~ part. act.

Ã ˆ Â ¥ Ã ˆ i r ' One who forms. iy \ The Fashioner, a #

name of Qod. ilÃ aor. 0. To measure with a IlÃ containing about te- S . I four pints. A drinking cup. * ' G Ã Jc aor. o. 7& b w wool. i_i\+ plur. of >.+

Wool, a fleece. ÃL aor. o. To fast; 'a 2 v. 181, " Let him

fast (during) it," for <y, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. stu -'

and ft^f ns.a. A fast, the act of f. -, fasling. 6 I- part. act. One who fata.

departure ; also aa a noun of time and place, 1

.- LLt aor. i. To abut . n.a. A shout, a blast, L

a terrible and mighty noise, also a punishment from Heaven.

St. , a- nor. i* and a* TO hunt* A- Game, the produce of the chaw, including fish.-GGl for VIII. D. S. Gr.T. 1 ,p . 222,To hunt. & aor. i. To become : to go, tend towards (with

. 5 0

>G Plur. LU Sheep ; no verbal root. 0 . 0 JU aor. a. To breathe hard in running. 2 n.a.

The act of panting.

the place to which any one goes, or at which one arrives ; a t 25 v. 16 i t may be rendered II a retreat." Bop_ i, r0 podw jmpmfit d a m (a ph.

tree). yd-t for &G plur. of - or S& A castle1 or defensive work*

St. 0

0 0 . + aor. a. To lie on the side. Ã§Ã‘> (2nd S 0 ';*

declension) plur. of f-sf' 1 A sleeping place,

nil), n.a. The act of going, a journey, , >-JLÃ aor. i. To p a tAÃ summer. L+B n.a. The

resting place; at 3 v. 148 i t alludes to the sleep of death. - .

{.J! am. a. To laugh, laugh at, ridicule (with A). &L< part. act. Langhing, one who laughs.

la"' aor. o. To appear conspicuously; and 'Jd0 aor. a. To suffer from the heat of the sun. Lc-* or 2 comm. gend. said by some to be

a 0

the plur. of 13 Those houra of the morning which follow shortly after sunrise; a t 91 v. 1 and 79 v. 29 i t means the full brightness of the sun.

4 0 s

AS aor. o. To gain a lam-suit. 1Ã Contrary, an adversary.

s 0 > am. o. To hurt, hum, injure. ,d n.a. Harm, 5 . hurt, injury, affliction, ,i Harm, affliction,

evil, advereity, famine, aa a t 12 v. 88. 3 Hurt, inconvenience. "\* part. act. One who

summer.

hurtt. ST> fern. (2d lieclensi~n) D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 402, Adversity, loss, tribulation.- \e 111. To hurt, annoy; to pat to' in$on- venience on account of (with ace. of pers. and u). Note. In Surd verbs of this form there

0

is no difference between the act. and pass. in s -' the Aorist tense. j, n.a. Injury; 1 Ã By

? ., violence. ,la-Ã part. act. 1 n j u r i n ~ . - - 1 for 3~ VIII. D. 8.Gr.T. 1,p.222, To compel; to drive forcibly (with ace. and ^Jp ; Pasa. 6 a. ja T! be driven by necessity (with .J or

5 t . r - Jp. ,kA< part. act, or pass. One compelled

by necessity ; 27 v. 63, " Him who is compelled by his necessities" (to ask relief of God).

4 * 0

+,i aor. i. To beat, strike (with ace. and u) ; 0

This ia the primary meaning, but the verb admits of a great variety of interpretations, thus (C; a@ 14 1-29 , " GO^ propounds as an example," or "puts forth a parable" (with J) ; t h l ~ also at 43 v. 16 p> (_Ã c, " That which they p u s off upon the Merciful M being his similitude," viz. female children ; in allusion to the angels, who were consid-

ered to be the daughters of God; 431" > $2 3 v. 150, " They travelled in the earth ; " here we may suppose an ellipse ofG&J! or some similar word ; SO likehise in the expression

' Ã ˆ W ' &hT'& & p 14 47.96, "When ye are 0 0

on the march in the cause of God's religion ; " fc- !\ & !y j 1; 43 v, 58, I' They have only set this question before thee for the sake

P f . ' b 4

of disputation ; " hf $ r f f i u/^-js 24 v. 31, "And let them draw their veilsover their bornnu ; " & l T p &g 43 v. 4, "Shall we then turn awayTfrom you our

t '>A,. - admonition ;" i+O 4 57 v. 13, "And a separation shall be made between them

9 - - 0 f L - ' - o G 0 Ã ˆ by 8 wall ; " SS\ ,+ u-,, 2 v. 58, . 0

" And vilenew was stamped upon them." &'/- n.8. The act of striking, a blow, a going from place to place; at 47 v. 4 there is an ellipse of a verb, see D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 460.

0 . 9 war. a. To be humble. 2 A plant growing 0

in Hell, said to be more bitter than aloes, more fetid than a putrid corpse, and more burning

0 Ã ‡ than fire.-@ and ff[ D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 22b, V. To humble one's-self, submit one's-self

s* 0. humbly to God. n.a. Humility. and war. 0. To be weak. & and Sl , , ad n8.a. Weakness, infirmity. &+ Plur, i_ l*rfl Like, an equal portion, a portion equal to another, or as much again, double; 6~

0 0 4 " 01, f 10 qU\ 4; jJr&.j &aY 17. v. 77, " Then we should verily have caused thee to taste an equal share (of the punishment) of this life, and an equal share (of the punishment) of death," i.e. a double punishment, the

0

word "16 being in both cases understood ;

D. 8. Or. T:2, p. 279 ; Dual &it Oblique Two equal portions, twofold. bJG&

0 s f 0 s 0 plur. of d>A comm. gend. Weak. U+ -00 I

Plur. $UIK (2nd declension) Weak, infirm. hJimI (2nd declension) comp. form, Weaker. -&Lo 111. To double, give double (with acc. and J). &u part. pass. Doubled.

0 <Â 4 part. act. IV. f. One who makea

0 0 'Ã '. double.--1 X. To think, repute, or esteem weak, and hence to ill-treat a person as if he were weak, to take advantage of his

S," '-0 <Â f weakness, thus at 7 v. 149. part. pass. One who is found or held to be weak.

0 0 .

L v aor. a. To repeat in a cohfused andjumbled manner. &j A handful of green and dry grass or other herbs ; Plur. L_>GT Things confusedly mixed together . a L*JIfce? 12 ' c , . v. 44, " Confused dreams."

. 0 S 0 0 J&Ã aor. a. To dislike. l ^ ~ l plur. of 3 111- feeling, hatred.

. 0 l , 0

A & A frog ; Plur. &@ (2nd declension) ; The kh. O.u 0 grammatical root is tJA>Ã To contain frogs

(muter). we. i, To err (with w ) ; to wander away, go astray from (with k c . or with 3); to err against (with &) ; to go from the thought* or be forgotten, as at 17 v. 69 ; to leave in the lurch (with 2) ; to lie hidden (with d), a at 32 v. 9. ' jl~ put. act. One who errs or goes astray. & and 3~ Error, mistake. $7 (2nd declension) comp. form, One who goes more astray ; For the Rules of Syntax affecting the comparative and superlative forms see D. 8. Or.T.2,p.301.-J-L^n.a. 11. f. ~rror.-X^ IV. To cause to err, seduce, lead astray from (with double ace. or ace. and

21, u unL<6 33 v. 67, " ~ n d the: . have seduced us from the right path ; " The

I I is here added to u T Â ¡ t assist the rhyme

D . B . Q r . T . 2 , p . h ; w J < 1 4 7 v . 1 ' H e haa made their (good) works to be o none effect; " to seduce through or by mean1 of (with w). JÃ§ p u t act. One wh(

0

thine hand clwe under thine armn 7 . m r . o. To b6 alender. >\i pet. act. Thai

which ia slender, or tucked up in the belly. 3 aor. a. and i. To bu tenacioua or grasping. 2 Greedy, uaridoaa, grudging ; 3 GJ & +r,$ 01 v. 24, "And he d m not act grudgingly in the communication oi the mreta ; " come copies have u-ki, "He had no suspicion of the secrets."

i_j J To be narrm. i SIs n.a. comm. gend. Narrow, wretched. ,'& Ta bu without b r e d and barren (a moman), and thergore She a man.-& 111; for

(2nd declension) Sad, long of find. tor. a. To aeal, oeal up (with JÃ ) aor. i. To cover. 3 A state, condition. 2% plur. of & The order of the Heavens, one above another; u& In order one above another.

3 3rd pen. fern. plur. of i_>Uf for 4 q.v. &>or. a. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 230, To expand,

^pr ad out. /

(the primitive form IÃ§ ia not found), To rwemble, D. 8. Qr. T. 1, p. 236. Note. The word ,.,1 G 9 v. SO it dm q e l t &G, and . / .f without the hamza.

'X; Ã§or o. TO a h . .j-Q ~ i g t t . ~ I . I IT. TO enlighten, illuminate.

;G aor. i. Tb injun. 2 n.a. Harm, injury. . 0 .I. Ã jL. aor. 1. Taittfiraut. J,Ã for ,-i D. &Or. T. 1, p. 112 (2nd declension), An unfair apportionment.

i l> aor. i. T'O piai.-il.l IT. TO mffer to perith, , b

neglect, be unmindful of. 36 aor. i. To iÃ§c<?m a y w t . n.a. Bing.

and p~or. A gnat , guats.Ã‘JC 11. TO entertain a guest.

^i.^ I. jc aor. i. To be narrow, straitened; b.,~ & , t-y 11 Y. 79, "And he was powerless to (protect)

Ãˆ Ã§.0 I. f 0 them;" a\ .ylc. u L i 9 Y, 119, "The earth became atr&itened for them." 3 n.8. Trouble, grief. ' strait, narrow. & T i part. act. That which becomes narrow or itraitened.-& 11. To reduce to istraits (with & of pen.).

i , aor. a. To c u t forth (with double m.1, as f I - i . 4 lS.1 I 12 v. 9, " C u t him forth into a

(distant or unknown part of the) earth." L f ^ P i ^ , '>jÃ aor. o. To drive away ; the word is put

in the subjunctive at 6 v. 52 as being what the 5 Ã‡ 9 0 0 grammarians call ,-fc-l\ (~'k ; for this use

of the subjunctive after Ãˆ_ see D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 26, where the above-named passage is quoted. 2 & rt. act. One who drives away. J Y

/I2

.fi aor. i. To avert. i_^ n.a. An eye, a glance, sight of the eyes. $ Plur. dCg1 The extremity, extreme part or verge, border ;

0 5 4 8 . 0 ^\^\ J/b 11 v. 116, "The two extremities of the day," morning and evening. >> aor. o. To cone by niyht. &UÃ part. act. That which appears by night. comm.

#

gend. A way, a road. J ^ J Plur. J^}s (2nd declension) A path, line of conduct, behaviour; . If Lff.' /JUJ f^i^ 20 v. 104, " Those most eminent

for'tlieir good conduct';" $,i> '& 23 v. 17, i t Seven tracts," meaning the seven Heavens ; .- &J is also used with a pliir. signification for Chiefs, Princes ; thus at 20 v. 6G.

\'js aor. o. To come from afar ; and ^s}e aor. a. To ,- be recent. 2 - Fresh.

, . . ,

(A Initial letters of the 27th chapter, pronounced T A ' Seen, see p'i.

<Jo Initial letters of the 26th and 28th chapters, see A. '+' nor. a. To eat, taste ; \yu&a \*J iG y^ 5 v. 94,. "There is no sin in that they have tasted" (that which had not a t that time been forbidden them). " & art act. One who r* ps ;/ eats. 7 n.a. Taste, and L*^ n.a. Food, the ^ act of eating, as at 5 v. 9 7 . - 4 IV. To feed,

1. 4 . ^ # . give food to (with double ace.); 4 1 f,a- 106 v. 3, "Who hnth provided them with - food against hunger." ;q n.a. The act ol

S * Ã ‡ feeding; At 2 v. 180 and 5 v. 96 also appears to bear this meaning, and may {hen be considered as another noun of action of the IV. fa-',-S -\ X. To ok for food (with double ace.).

3 aor. a. and o. TO pierce with a aped, to

speak ill of (with Jf of pen,). 3 n.a. Evil speaking.

Â¥ aor. o. and $ or & aor. a. To transgress, exceed all bounds (in wickedness) ; to wander from its orbit; applied at 53 v. 17 to the eye-

s #</ 9 sight ; to overflow, as at 69 v. 11. i^w n.a. Transgression, the being exceedingly wicked. fVa for >'& part. act. One who is excessively

impious, a transgressor. &ll> A storm of thunder and lightning of extreme severity,

9 0 Ã § . &f comp, form for ^^\ (2nd declension) Most extravagant inwickedness. Excess

, a4.F 9 *# L 86' of impiety, as l&\tjtkl +A? 91 v. 11, , "The tribe of Thamood accused (Sdeh) of falsehood by reason of their extreme wickedness." Note, The names of Arab tribes are feminine. &fIL' Tftghoot, a word which with the sing. form has sometimes a plur. signification, and then means Idols, dremons, or whatever is worshipped besides God, and particularly the two Idols worshipped by the people of Mecca ; at 4 v. 63 it is used in the sing., and is there said to refer to a certain

^ < / l ' Â ¥ ? L *Â 1.'

Jew named +iYI &S, either from his exceeding wickedness, or because a judgment- given by him would be prompted by the Devil. -^Â£ ITr. To cause to transgress, to make one a transgressor.

_5ilÃ To be near.-- =.a, 11. f, The giving hart measure. part, act, One who gives short measure.

'Ã§ aor. a. To Ie vttinguished. -'&I IV. To extinguish (with ace. and u).

0 9 aor. a. To begin. JJ To be o f a tender aye. JSk sing. and plur.,

though we also find the piur. JUtI Very young children, infants.

Jl> To d s t e n the ground (den). Jl> Dew. 3 am. o, To seek; at 7 v. 52 i t means to follov

up. iÃˆJl ma. The act of searching for S ' L i_Ã‘l,U part. act. A petitioner, *yi part

pa& Petitioned. aor. B. 2'0 be weary. 3 n.a. A Plantain 01 Banana tree, according to some the Acacia 01

Egyptian thorn. . 0 , Ã§Jl aor. a. and o. To ascend, rise-the sun,-(with

&). &1C The spathe or Â¥heat in which the flowers of the date-palm are enclosed, also the fruit when it first appears, or simply fruit,

S - 0 0

wat37v. 63. cJ^ 0.8. The rising. Jla n,a. The time of rising (of the dawn). <JÂ£ n.a. Place of'the suds rising.-O$l IV. To make manifest to any one, cause one to understand (with acc. of pers. and &of thing).-yi>'l for Ã .a VIII. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p.222, To mount up (with J\) ; to penetrate (with ace.) as at 19 v. 81, where we have '& " Has he pene- trated?" for f^SX\, the T of union being omitted after the interrogative 1 D. 8. Or. T. I, p. 71 ; At 37 v. 52 is a passage which is read and interpreted in various ways, see D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 185, but adopting the reading given by Flugel 0 0^40 /Â / g f ' P 0 (J1Ã§ u& (>a J&, ,the meaning will be " Will ye look down (upon the inhabitants of Hell) ?-and he shall look down," (pret. for fut.); in this sense the verb governs its complement with &' ; so likewise when it means to mount above, come upon, or meet with. p-L&u part. act. One who looks down upon.

& aor. o. To be divorced. Jl-iÃ n.a. Divorce.- ^-9" ,pÃ 11. To divorce. & fern. part. paas. A

woman who is divorced.-&\ VII. To depart, go one's way, to be free or loose, aa a t 20 v. 12.

aor. o. and i. To be much, 4^0 A calamity ; '9 0 4 spr <LÃ‡ 79 v. 34, " Tin very great

calamity," viz. The last Judgment. l^a aor. o. and i. To deflower a virgin. i/w*iÃ aor. o. and i. To obliterate, put out (the eyes),

as at 54 v. 37 ; At 4 v. 50 i t means to deface the features ; to dettroy utterly (with &).

p 0 0 _^ aor. a. To de~i re (with ;I). .-A n.a. Desire, a hoping or longing for ; a t 13 v. 13 \*i*So means "causing you to be full of hope (for rain)."

0 1' 0 f Ã Quiet; whence cornea (quadriliteral) To 6 1 - / 0 resteÃ‘^\^e IV. To be quiet, reet securely in,

0 f\.f '^ '4

or aatiified with (with 9) ; ?l.k l ldG 4 v, , * 104, "And when ye are secure (from danger); " 2 pers. plur. pret. D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 231.

o ^ - p art. act. One who rests securely, or enjoys peace and quiet.

& Initial letters and name of the 20th chapter, pronounced Tft' HA", see Fi.

3 To remove; aor. o. To be pure, free from her courses (a woman), J ' n.a. Pure. ',Say (2nd declension) comp. form, More pure, see D, 8. Or. T. 2, p. 3 0 4 . - - IT. To purify,

5- -/ t cleanse. n.a. Purification, part. act. One who frees from impurity: part. pass. Purified, freed from impurity,clean, p u r e . - - or>\ V. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To purify one's-self, keep one's-self pure ;

Xi6 4, 6 I $,+LÃ 5 v. 9, imperat. Then purify your-

Â¥; -/-/ 9 selves" (by waehing the entire body).

5 6 P or& part. act. Those who purify themselves, or are clean, pure.

I& nor. o. To be firm and immoveable. 54 A mountain.

,Us nor. o. To approach. 2 A mountain ; ;$

o r , ~ ~ , ; Ã § Mount Sinai; it isalso called , I$\ plnr. of ',& A condition or state; ';!;' '+-z 7 1 v . 13, " He created you after n. variety of states or stages of existence;" b~~piiining w i t h tlic formation of Adam.

I o. and a. 7'u be obedient; to hearken to 5 L .

I n~~~rcess ion) , as at 40 v. 19, ?Ã§1 Obedient ; L& With willing obedience. ii s Obedience. JL part. act. One who is obedient, obedient. - - '& 11. To permit, consent to (with ace. C^ and J of p e r s . ) . - p IV. To obey. ( i n . pass. Obeyed-$ V. To give one's-sell In~dicully or willingly to perform (a good

5 - ' work) . '*; part. net. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 327, w- One who gives himself willingly to perform (a

, /Â¥/

good or charitable a~tion).-~1iÃ‘) and tHa.1 I.,-tlioiigli some have considered the latter to be a variation of the IV. f., D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 224,-To be able, have power, be capable ol (with acc. or acc. and&), as ,& & 7 ( i t ,

I 8 v. 81, " That which thou wast not able u* to bear patiently;" I t is also used with J\ or

with ace. and J ; instances of both occur at . 18 v. 96 ; or with ace. and & as at 3 v. 91 ; A t several places in the 18th chapter it is found with ;-'; of pers. and ace. of thing; thus

'^^.- Â¥ . , 4 ' . ', in the 66th verse @ &+A' J '' Thou wilt not be able to have patience with me;" In translating such sentences os the above i t IE frequently necessary to supply a verb according to the context, thus 6 17 v. 51,

0

' But they were not able (to find) a ground ol reproach (against thee)." A note explanatory of some of the above modes of construction will bc found in Dc Sacy's Grainmnr, T. 2, r. 170.

Ji e aor, o. To go round about, encompass (with /Â '/

LJ G) ; to go about, circulate (with ^I).

A\lb part. act. One who goes round about or encompasses ; at 68 v. 19 it means a common destruction surrounding all ; see also (_^& for

s. Ã‘ a. g b A part, some, a pwty, a people, a company or band of men from 2 to 1000, according to different authorities, >$ The Deluge, a common destruction or calamity rbich embraces all. > IF One who goes about (to serve another).-^^\ V. D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 220, To go round about (with u).

5 , aor. o. To be able. <Lf\\s Power, strength.- .-* ' . Ã. , Â , -,L 11. To twist a collar; + I@ L;

3 v. 176, "They shall have that which they have covetously withheld twisted as a collar about their necks," lit. "they shall be bound with i t for a co~lar.'~-JU?! IV. To be able (to do a thing, with ace.).

j& aor. o. To be long, to last long, or be pro longed (with & of pers,). & Plenty oi wealth, a sufficiency of means, Power, as a t 40 r. 3. Jf n.a. Height. Jy^ Long.- J;G VI. To be prolonged (with & of

fja aor. i, To roll up. 3 n.a. The act of rolling

up. i~iy/a ~ o o w a , name of a valleynear Mount Sinai. i_f& part. pass. Rolled up.

GUÃ aor. i. T; be good, pleasing (with J); LF Ã $. >., ', 0 L , b - d 0 L

. Uu + S> ~ f r JJ 4 v. 3, "And if they kindly give you up any portion of i t of their own free will," /it. " if they arc good to you concerning any portion," etc. s$ (2nd declension) Good fortune, happiness. & . Good, agreeable, sweet and clean, happy, favourable.

nor. i. To fly. generic noun, Birds. Note. Verbs having for subject a noun of this description may be put in the fern. D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 233 ; According to some there are two words of this form, one in the sing. meaning a bird, as at 3 v. 43, and the other an irregular plur. of>& meaning Birds. " a part. act. A flying thing, an omen, and especially an evil

& To migrate. , 9 n.a Migration. & nor. 1. To claw with the nails, A nail or

claw ; i^p , ~ 4 6 v. 147 is translated by Sale Ã‡

''having an undivided hoof," but it may be doubted whether the words will bear this interpretation ; a better translation would seem to be " having claws or nails," as wild beasts or camels . - - IV. To give the victory to (with ace. of pers. and &).

Jl? aor. a. ; 2nd pers. sing. pret. 3 or i>l-ll? for vi^e D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 228, To continue all day, become (with aor. of verb following). Jb Shade. Alb' Plur. 3 A covering, roof. tfc sing. and plur. Shadows, shady groves. Li .. JJ1? shady.-J^a 11. To oversliadow-with

clouds-(with ace. of thing and J of pers.). J nor. i, To wrong, injure; to be unjust, oppres-

rive, or tyrannical towards any one (with ncc. also with u, or with ace, of pers. and +) ; to bo guilty of injustice, to act

0

wickedly; to be wanting in, or fail, as r^ ij; ^Ã '>. (u 18 v. 31, " Nor did they fail in any of it-" Injustice, tyranny, obscurity.

Phir. tt.'Gfc' D n r k u c ~ . $ Unjust.

one.-"Â£ or 'l& V. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 220, To augur evil, draw an evil augury from (with * ) . - - part, act. X. f, That which

0

spreads itself far and wide. All? aor. i. To appear ( a spectre). iÃ‘fuU part.

act. A spectral appearance of the Devil, an instigation of the Devil ; see dli? for dÃ§k

i\\s nor. i. To plaster with clay. 2 Clay.

S " , flk Very unjust. 'Jg part. act. One who treats unjustly (with J). 'p (2nd declcn-

, S9 'Â¥'

rion) comp. form, More unjust. ?+.L part. ,, l Ã

pass. Unjustly treated.- \ IV. To injure; ^ to be dark (with &I. J. part. act. One who is in the dark.

1- < ' - 0 , 3 aor. a. To third. L& n.a. Thirst. ylA (2nd declension) D. 5. Or. T. 1, p. 403, Very thirsty.

'.}a aor. o. To thinli, be of opinion, imagine (with ace. or +, or with 3); for the construction

/ t. t-f

+4 uÂ¥ pJ 1; 41 v. 48, "They shall perceive that there is no way of escape for them," see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 297. ,,b Plur. S f 9 & Opinion, i~p part. act. One who forms an opinion.

& aor. a. and i. To appear, be manifest (with d) ; , ,

to help, mount, ascend (with ace. or ; to . , get the better of, know, distinguish (with &). 2s ~ l u r . z $ The back. ,&& part. act. One who is manifest, that which is apparent, outward (speech), as at 13 v. 33; clear, con-

*, spicuous, victorious; ji,+lÂ $ 34 V. 17, I t Conspicuous citiea," or I' cities connected

one with another by a track called 3; i>b Outwardly. '^ft A helper. 'is Mid-day heat. c>$ ~ h r o w n behind the back, with neglect.--G 111. To assist (with ace. and &) ; to divorce a wife, with the words

I.,, Ã ,' & J . 4, see 58 v. 2 . - - f IV. To

s 8 , + aor. a. To mix scents; to be solicitous about (with v).

s , 0 iÃ§Lw> nor. a. To amuse one's-self. iJL-^e n.a. Sport, jest. ,f. St, 0 mr, 0, To adore, worship. +G Plur, s- A servant ; and Plur. Servants, especially of God. Glf part. aot. A worshipper. , 4 - Service, worship.-+ 11. To enslave.

, ^ G lor. o. To to interpret (with (J). , 2 An instructive warning. &\i '. 0,

oblique plur, of >\i part. act. One who passes , o v e r . - - \ VIII. To take warning.

,-' /Â s * ' i m ~ & aor. i. To he austere, to frown. (-^y- Austere,

dismal. , i b . S 4 - To glitter like the mirage. .-?J sing. and

/

plur. A kind of rich carpet. S / I d > am. o, and i. To be angry.-+a* part. pass.

0 0 0 , G IV. f. Received into favour.--1 X. To beg for favour, receive into favour, invite any one to make himself acceptable.

-'*. A.& To be prepared, ^yc. ~ead~.-'&^ IV. To

prepare (with aoc. of pen. and J). 'f, ~ - t f aor. o. To itf old. & ~ncient. & aor. 1. and o. To drag violently (with ace. and J\). $ Violent, crael.

make one acquainted with (with ace. of pera. and & of thing) ; to cause to appear (with d), as at 40 v. 27 ; to enter on the period of noon, aa at 30 v. 17 ; to render superior (with

4 0 , 0

ace. and &).--AU VI. To assist one another , against (with & and d).

aor. o. To be proud, insolent, to offer an insolent opposition, to exceed all bounds-in impiety-

' Â£, (with^c), fs. n.a. Insolence, pride. (Ã‘A

5 for :&, Fen). +;G part. act. Exceeding, violent. & A decrepit old 'man, an obstinate rebel,

,, , p am. o. To stumble; to perceive (with &).- 0, ' IV. To make one acquainted with a thing, or cause one to understand (with & of pera.).

aor. a. i. and o. To do evil (with 2). 3 aor. a. To wonder (with >, or with 3 of

S T . - s"? 'following verb). L+, el*?, and ~onderfu1.-J-^ IV. To delight, piewe.' < t O aor. i. To he weak. ,ycf An old woman S .I, jM Roots of palm-trees.->l*^ part. act. 111. f. One who baffles, or makes of none effect. -9 IV. To weaken, to be unable, to frus-

0 * b k * Ã trate, find one to be weak ; & ,+i 8 T. 61, "Verily they ahall not f i n d l ~ o d ) to l a weak," or " fru~trate (his decree) ; " for the ellipse of the complement Bee D. 8. Or. T. 2, pp. 121 and 454; it is also found with the m. m i &. JJ " for urf9.4 oblique plnr of p u t k . 0 n e whoOGeakenB or frnfr tratea.

/Â¥ 'Â -= aor. i. and 0. To tvnackte. de plur. uf thing against the future.-Lj IV, To prepare, - & ,

fem. of -iT (2nd declension) 1,. :in ; ' arrange (with ace. and J); \,&? 8 v. 62, a t 12 v. 43 the word agrees with under- Prepare ye ! " for \,;g imperat. see D. 8. stood. Gr. T. I, p. 230.-^sl VIII . To reckon or

, & aor. a. To hasten, accelerate (with ace., or with fulfil a term. ,<i\> ; to be Lasty or act hastily (with &> ; to hurry over (with +I, as it; J , 75 v . 16, ' That thou mayest hurry over it," viz. the receiving of the Koran from the Angel Gabriel.

I J-E'-precipitation. JLs A calf. &L part.

b act. That which hastens away, transitory.

I J? llasty.-J^ 11. To cause to hasten, give beforehand (with ace. and J).-J^^ IV.

I To cause to hasten (with ace. of pera. and 2). , / 6.- c.

-J^" V. To be in a hurry,-~lÃ§"-' X. To I

seek or desire to hasten (with J of pers. and u I 6, L,

of thing), as 7 J Ã ˆ ) 40 v. 34, "Neither desire to hasten (their pr!iiishment) for them ;"

I Â ¥ " / -a the first complement +4Jk<Ib being under-

, I stood ; D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 454 ; to urge one to I make haste in doing anything (with ace. of I I pers. and <_; of thing). J'G%\ n.a. The

6 v , , ' desire of hastening; Ãˆ^~E 10 v. 12,

I 6 6 t According to their desire of hastening ; " i D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 503. , ,,, '

a . 0. To try by biting. (2nd declension;

I A barbarian, a foreigner, one who speaks Arabic 5 - '1 imperfectly, &+I Barbarous, foreign.

.AÂ aor. o. To number, reckon, reckon up (witli ace, 5

and J of pen.). n.a. A number, computa- I I tion, determined number. A number,

s f t $ a f

Ã A number, prescribed term. SJ . A pro. s

vision, & part. act. One who keeps ar Â¥ f ' f account. J,I\Ã‡, part. pass. Determined, corn

I puted.-Jile 11. TO prepare, or lay up any

, / ,

aor. i . To minister. >^c. generic noun, Lentih,

J; aor. i. To deal justly (with ^Ã‘ or ig); to establish justice (with >), as at 42 v. 14 ;- to swerve from justice, as at 4 v. 134 ; to hold as equal (with ace. and u), as a t G v. 1,

, where the first complement "other Deities" is understood; to pay as an equivalent, as a t 6 v. 69; to dispose aright, as at 82 v. 7.

3 L .

JAC n.a. Justice, recompense, ransom, cquiva- lent, compensation; &,J JL 5 v. 90, " In- stead thereof."

,, , 'Ã (/.

>JLC aor. i. and o. To abide constantly. d~ n.a. A perpetual abode, Eden, Paradise.

i aor. o. Topass by; to transgress (witli 2); to < ' 5 L ..

turn aside (with ace. and ,-:). JJLC 11.a. Malice, wickedness. k;'L for ;+'Ã part. net. A

, transgressor. (Ã‘ $+ Swift mares. s , L

.-b , Enmity. s3^e. The side of a valley. .,\;A.

S f Â¥

Injustice, hostility. j a Plur. iikl An S V ,

enemy ; The sing. j& is sometimes put for 5 9 , I -?, 1^?/

the plur., thus at 18 v. 48 ~ J C JJ *& "And they are your e n e m i e ~ . " - ~ J l e 111. To be a t

2 ,, enmity with. - d~*.i' V. To transgress.- $;\ VII,I. To be wicked, to transgress

,I- f

(with ace. or ,J or with & of pers.). part. act. Wicked, a transgressor.

&k nor. i. To hinder. (_Ãˆ n.a. Fresh, sweet. 0 4 . a c. Punishment, torment.-"A- 11. TO

punish (with ace. of pers. and + of instru- 0

ment, as also of crime, or with J) ; i t is

sometimes found with the double ace. thus 9 , t , 9 - / Â ¥ ' , 9 ' /Â ,^""I M <u& 1 &\iz AJ+ 5 v. 115, " I will

punish hiin with a punishment, with which I will punish no one (else) ; I' to afflict, as at 20

5 ' " / 9 v. 49. L+C.Ã part. act. One who punishes. :, " ^ Ã VL part. pass. Doomed to punishment. .:, 5 ' - 1 < # . L

,AC aor. i. To excuse,+ i1.a. An excuse. An excuse. ;!{c (2nd declension) plur. of

5 - 2 9 ;\AX Ã Excuses.-,JuM part. act. 11. f. Uttering excuses.-.&I VIII. To excuse one's-self (with j\ of pert.).

a / sÃ£, s Â¥, 9 f aor. i. To be scabby, ip A c r i m e . - - part.

act. VIII. f. One who does not beg, though poor.

^ . ->y aor. i. To eat; and &/ To be pure Arabic and free from faults (a speech). <_ ,< Be- ^ Sf-' s ,-' loved wives, plur. of v,/c. a Arabic,

a -I.* an Arabian. vp plur. no sing. The, Arabs of the desert.

, ,. aor. o. To mount, ascend (with Jj\ or &. ^ t . c 1 ? ^ \ (2nd declension) Lame from birth. c4

s^^. (2nd declension) plur. of -p A ladder, place of ascending, stairs.

, 0 0 8 - To stamp cloth with the figure of date-stalks.

Â¥ 9 1 . 9 ( _ i ~ - A dry date-stalk.

,,I' & aor. i. and o. To construct, build houses. ? I t

$ i n.a. A throne ; Plur. /-,y Foundations, _. f1. Â

props, ~ < ~ ~ o r t s . ~ I / H part. paaa. Supported on trellis-work. ., , ~p aor. i. To happen, come against ; to propose, set before (with we, and J or &I. &n.a. Breadth, extent ; 6/1 In an extended manner.

2.. Teqporal goods or advantage, this world's gear. t f. 2 v. 224, Object, butt, or impediment, according to different renderings.

s. -' i_ n.f Much, many. J^Ae A cloud traversing the sky.-$> 11. To make an offer (with u).

/'I,* , -yoyl IV. To turn aside, decline to do a s Â¥-" thing, leave it undone (with 2). & n.a.

S 6 9 A turning away, aversion. GJ^ part. act. One who turns away from, averse.

J/S. aor. i. To know, discern (with ace. and L+ or . 2); The difference between 1Ã‘J'/ and $ is that the former refers to distinct and specific knowledge, while the latter is more general;

,/, ,,', hence the opposite to i f i& ~ o d e n ~ , and to

S O Ã p, Jy>- To be ignorant, i_^s Known, just, a benefit; l5.c 77 v. 1, " In a continual seriea," or according to another reading, "Conferring

9 -l.H.-o benefits ; " Plur. with the article dlrf Y l The walls which divide Paradise from Hell. , ,,, ,;by Name of a mountain near Mecca, said to be so named because of the recognition which there took place between Adam and

n.' Eve, after a separation of 200 years. u p part. pass. Known, recognized, honourable, good, befitting, a kindness; the opposite to p.-& 11. To acquaint, make known

0 , , , (with a&. of thing and J of pei-s.).-i_~jLtf VJ. TO know one another (with Ã£z).-Lw VIII. To confess, acknowledge (with +).

, /^ 6 aor. o. TO strip meat from o f bow. n ~ a . plur. no sing. Mounds or dams for banking in

? .* a body of water; Ãˆ Name of an inundation which destroyed the city of Sabb'.

,0 =.Ã£ p aor. o. To come upon. ie A handle.-l >-l VIII. To cofne down Upon, afflict (with ace. of pen. and u). , > am. i. To come upon; and >> nor. a. To be , naked. f l ' ' A bare place.

6 - ~ c - nor. i. To be rare, precious; to get the better of (with ace. of pers. and 2). > n.a. Power,

Â¥I

glory. ) = Power, honour, pride. 5; Plur. ., . >,l Mighty, excellent, troublesome ; grievous,

9nd declen- as a t 9 v. 129 (with &). >'\ (- sion) More excellent, mightier, worthier, most powerful; Fem. $ (2nd declension) ; $1 El 'Uzza, name of an idol of the Pagan Arabs.

, /'

-j> 11. To give additional power, to corro- I borate (with + ) . - - IV. To render powerful.

, /, V? aor. o. and i. To be away from, be hidden I (with is).

,, , S ' 9 /I / 1 aor. i. To reprehend. _;p Ezra.-, 11. To assist, honour.

, , / Jp aor. i. To remove from a place or office, set I

aside. A place separate from the rest. ' h , &p part. pan . ~enioved.-JJ^i VIII . To

separate one's-self from, remove one's-self from (with ace. of pers.).

, ,, p aor. i. To determine, resolve, purpose; to be I determined on or decreed, a s a t 47 v. 23.

A L* vi -^ , O K p n.a. Fixed determination ; J l t j .~ 6 t God's fixed resolve concerning human affairs. "

, \'f. aor. o. To bring one back, oblique plur. s

of & A crowd, company, D. 8. Gr. T. I , p. I ,., 3.58.

aor. i. and o. To demand with harshness the I repayment o f a loan, to be difficult. 7 n.a. , Di5culty. > Difficult, unlucky, grievous.

$^, .., L 9 '. iy Difficulty, distress ; JÃˆ.>ÃˆC 2 v. 280, " One who finds a difficulty in paying a debt."

I s -Â T O 9 I Difficult, dire, grievous. d y (2nd ., ,/ declen~ion) Wretchedness.--li; VI. To be

' & / ,/ ' difficult; to be in a difficulty; +l>; 65 v. 6, " If y e find yourselves in a difficulty ; "

the particle ^\ gives h e preterite a future signification ; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 191.

-Â¥' L /

To come on by night (as a wolf7 ; I ~ I I : I ~ I - riliteral verb derived from & To go round by niyht to keep match. preceded by Initial letters at the com- .. e

mencnnent of the 42nd chaptrr, see el. & aor. i. and o. 5% mix food ivi th hum?,, 2-

comm. gend. Honey. , / I- I I t may be, perhaps (with J), a verb of pros-

d

imity used only in the preterite ; I). 8. Gr. L ? L , ' ' ,

T. 2, p. 2 1 3 ; Ã ‘ Ã &a 2 v. 247, "Will it come to pass that ye ? " " Wonld it have happened that y e ? " 47 v. 24.

,, /' + aor. o. To take away a tenth part ; aor. i . To If ' make ten by adding one to nine. ,.h n.0.

!, , , 5 . '. , , , and+ fein. ; I'+ and masc., Ten, a decade. Aute. From three to ten inclusive the termination i , which is generally tho sign of the feminine, marks the masculine ; These numerals usually agree in gender with the noun of which they express the number, but instances occur where this does not appear to be the case; t h w at 6 v. 161 dq z&

/ L l 9 L , 9 , L ,LC dll " "W hoever shall bring a good action shall have ten (good actions) equivalents of that which he has wrought; " Here,

Â¥ ,1,1

although the noun J b l is m a s c . 3 is fern. 5 ,.,,

because it really refers to GL understood ; D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 329; so also a t 2v.234, where 1 agrees in gender with JL) understood.

s , - - - 9 & Twenty. plur. of *\ . (2nd declension) Camels ten m p t h s gone with

s '- s, , young. A companiorl. i+ Kindred

Â¥I- L ^ on the father's side. j L - n A company. ,'H. The tenth prt.-,-k 111. TO live with, associate with (with ace. of pers. and +),

1 :1

I-,.

& aor. o. To bepurblind; to withdraw from (with 3). 3 - h Commencement of darkness, .- s Â¥ -:.a -- evening, + Evening. .- ^wf. An evening.

0 0 . ^' L I +a aor, i. To surround. +s A body of men

s 0 from ten to forty. Grievous, heavy. 0 8 ,

e aor. i. To press (grapes). n.a. Age, time, J

a ~ o r n o o n . - ~ ~ ~ n.a. IV. f. A whirlwind. !. r ' 9 part. act. fern. plur. (Clouds) emitting or pressing out rain.

&' nor. i, To blow aiolently. n.a. Leaves and stalks of corn, of which the grain has been eaten by cattle ; In violent gusts.

part. act. Stormy, a tempestuous wind. b\e A violent wind.

0 0 , p aor. i. To make a profit; to preserve, save s 0 iarmless (with ace. and >). y, plur, of

k& Defence, guardianship; & part. act. 0 0,' Defender.- \ VIII. To take hold on, cleave ( ,,',,,,

firmly to (with +).-?[ X. To preserve 0

one's-self from sin. Ls nor. o. To strike one with a stick. fern.

Â£. 0 ,

for yac, yas. and dc A staff, rod. Note., at the end of a word, when preceded immediately by fatha, does not take a vowel, but becomes quiescent, and is changed into \ in words of three letters, and into in words of four; where there is a tanwecn it is given to the preceding fatha, D. &. Or. T. 1, p. 105; & plur. of G.

$ aor. i. To rebel, disobey (with ace. and J or 5 0.. " ace. a i d Jil. Rebellious. ubO Re-

Â¥ ../ bellion, Disobedience. & aor. a. To bite (with & 25 v. 29, or ace. and & 3 v. 115).

aor. 0. To strike any one on the arm, An arm, a helper.

aor. a. o. and i. To hinder a woman from 1- 1 marrying (with J).

2 aor. o. To divide Limb from limb. &.& oblique s

plur. of Ls& A separate part. Note. Nouns from a defective root occasionally lose their last radical letter, which is then replaced by .- i; thus 2 becomes & ; on passing into the plur. they regain the masc. form, thus /- 9 0 +, is the plural of &,; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 317 and 359.

_fllic nor. i. To incline towards, be well disposed tomards. &, A side.

Ike To be bare of ornaments (a woman).-& 11. ^0

To deprive of ornament, leave without care. S Ã ‡ - JLfcÃ part. pass. Neglected.

lac aor. o. To take anything in the hand. ^^aa A gift.-$ IV. To give (with double t ec . ) ; to lie docile, as at 92 v. s . - ~ G VI. To undertake, or take (a sword) in the hand, 54 v. 29. Togive a dog a bone; and To be great. S O , *la& n.a. A bone ; Plur, ,Ã \iÃ e & Great, heavy. (2nd declension) Greater, BU-

,t, perior, highest in rank.- +s 11. To make great, honour.-.lael IV. To increase (with ace. and J of pere.).

% aor. i. To abstain/rom that which is unlawful $4-0

or improper.-&& n.a. V . f. Modesty.- 00 ,, 6 Â¥i X. same as i.

,ifi aor. i. To roll (am) in the dust. &J / A , demon, an 'Efreet.

am. o. To obliterate all traces (as the n h d ) ; to pardon (with 2 or J); to abound, as a t . 7 v. 93; to pass over, pass by (with g), as at 5 v. 18; to remit, as a t 2 v. 238. Note. \& ia found in eome copies for 3rd pen.

sing. aor. ; this \ is called $~TiaJ)j or alif of precaution, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 109. ?-; n.a. Overplua, superfluity, 2 v.217; pardon. && oblique plur. of i_>G for part. act. For- - giving. Ã§& Very forgiving.

k_^&c To strike on the heel; aor. o. To succeed. Sncceis ; ;:Ã 18 v. 42, Lit. "The

best as to success." IÃ‘A comm. gend. A S , e l

heel, posterity ; Plur. +LC\ Heels ; ,&& His two heels. 4% Punishment; & , for ->& 13 v. 32, etc. " M y punishment." :, \Ã‘' A- A place hard of ascent. 3 (2nd declension) End, success, reward, as if , l a T ~ h e reward of Paradise. & End, , a -0 3.. - issue, (fortunate) result ; ,\ \ {c. same as

3 - 0 ^ ^ 9 , Ã ‡ /

,\d \ #,-d 11. To retrace one's steps, , 5 - < * iÃˆ^JÃˆ part. act. One who puts off or reverses; , 5 ,-, 9 uUtx, . Angels (of the night and day) who ,

succeed each other.--& 111. To punish (with <-_>) ; to succeed in turn, as at 60 v. 11 ; . Pass. To be punished or injured, as a t 16 v. 127.--1 IV. To cause to succeed or follow (with ace. and J ) .

& To tie in a knot, strike a bargain, make a compact, enter into an obligation. % Plur. Sf Â s J,& A compact. iJiSa' Plur. S&& A knot, tie,

9 ,a6 -0 obligation; Â¥}w! , aiÃ‘?'JlÃ‡- I 113 v. 4, "The women who blow on knots," witches. aor. i. To wound, hamstring. > Barren (woman)..

JAft aor. i. To keep back (a camel, by tying up the foreleg) ; aor. i. and o. To understand, to be ingenious, prudent, sagacious ; 4^'? 6 22 v. 45, "They have hearts to

/

understand with."

2 am. o. To be barren (a woman). Barren, childless (man or woman) ; grievous (day), as at 22 v. 54 ; destroying, blasting (wind), as a t 51 v. 41.

tn -" -t i aor. i. and o. To keep back, detain (with d) ; to give one's-self up to (with &). <Ã‘4 part. act. One who remains constantly in any place, an inhabitant, as at 22 v. 25; assidu- ously devoting one's-self to, aa at 20 v. 97. dF part. pass. Detained. aor. o. To cut off the top leaves of a tree, adhere to, hang from. 3 Clotted blood. s .- ..'a ' 9 & A lump of clotted blood.-& part. pass. 11. f. One in suspense.

aor. i. and o. To mark, sign; and '&aor. a. To know (with ace. and J, also with yl) ; to distinguish (with ace. and >,) ; to be learned or knowing; For the difference between

X,, and + see 4. n.a. Science, knowledge, learning, art ; gl L] '& 43 v. 61, " A sign or means of knowing the last hour." s,, +.s A sign ; Plur. Long mountains. 7& part. act. One who knows, or is wisd. .- LC A s i p , mark. s G oblique plur. of

A world; The worlds spoken of in the Koran are taken to mean the three species of rational creatures, viz. men, genii, and angels. "& Learned, nnowing, wise; Plur. *-a (2nd declension). Very learned, wise or knowing. '&I (2nd declension) comp. form, More or most wise or knowing (with (_A ft& part. paas. Known, predetermined.Ã‘ 11. To teach (with <- , or with double ace., or with

c "' S'Â¥ 9 ace. and or m)). JJ* part. pass. Taught, instructed.-'$7 IV. To make known.-'p V. To learn (with ace. or with A).

& aor. i. and o. To be manifest. GL In public, openly.-'^, IV. To make manifest, publish (with 2 or with ace. and J). .

aor. a. and o. To be high, lofty, exalted, elated, proud (with 2 or A); to be upon, to be over, aa 17 v. 7, " That over which they

^.9 f 6 /L-'-'-' had gained the upper hand ; " l+ ^*^J 17 Y. 4, "And ye will verily be elated with

6 P U P great insolence;'' & is here put for ^ , the radical, being suppressed because of the quiescent contained in the teshdeed ; i t being contrary to the rule to have two quiescent letters together after the same vowel; D. S . Gr. T. 1, pp. 94 and 252. 3 n.a.

-- c . 9 Exaltation, insolence, pride; $A 17 v. 45 ; \ e is said by BeiddwGe to stand in this place for u G ; the literal meaning will therefore be "May he be exalted far above that which they utter by a great exaltation." &^ oblique plur. of fi for 'Jk' part. act. That which is high or haughty; Fern. Qlc Lofty, see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 330; @$ g O G 11 v.

0 f Ã Â C f 0 0 84, " Upside down ; I' *^Ã i-)q ,.& 76 v. 21, " Having garments of silk as a covering ; " The accus. of the part. or verbal adjective'is here put for the verb, and the words have the same meaning as if they had been 4l.l *ftp etc. " There were upon them garments," etc.; for the grammatical construction see D. S. Gr. T. 2, pp. 270 and 271 ; there are various readings of thia pusage.- J\Ã VI. properly, " He wat exalted" (with &) ; ftlm "He came" (with or with aor. conditional) ; In an optative sense this word is frequently put after the name of Qod, and it

then signifies " Be He exalted," or with 2 "Be He raised far above," as \ls iJG / ' U P ^JWJ 16 v. 3, " Be He exalted far above that which they associate (with him)," see iÃ‘i;g K O . 0 0 0

i^JLej " Come then ! " fern. plur. impcrat. 0 0 9 - a J T 0 4 Jlu-*11 13 v. 10 for ^JiK-til on account of

the pause, D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 496, part. act. The exalted, the ~ i ~ h . - & i X. To mount, get the upper hand.

,& aor. i. To mount up. & preposition, Above, upon, over, in addition to, before, towards, against, opposite, alongside, to, according to, of, for, on account of, in, from, by ; /& He owes, it behoves him ; G! & In order that, on condition that, seeing that, although ; & I * * . ,. *&fL 6 V. 135, "Ac.cording to your power;'' >Ã,C J 4 v. 50, " As-or like-the hinder parts thereof; " & 22 v. 11, " After a way," or " upon the verge-as i t were-(of religion);" The various meanings of & seem all to be more or less connected with the primary idea of something upon or over another. (2nd declension) comp. form, Higher, highest, more or most exalted ; Fern. l& (2nd declension) for 3 in accordance with the rule that final i< when preceded by 2 is changed into short \ ; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p.

Â¥^I* - f"i-s 11 1 ; Plur. masc. &\ for llÃ+ according to the rule of permutation, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 354 ; Fern. Plur. J for [li and with the article $i" If. High, sublime, eminent ; name of Mohammad'~ aon-in-law. iif properly, High placea, a name of the upper part of the Heavens, where the register of men's good actions is preserved, or according to some, the register itself; Learned Moslims

differ greatly about this word and its meaning ; it is found in Hebrew.

Â¥C * s s - 1 ; aor. o. To be common. Plur. rlÃ‡A Anuncle fs., on the father's side. & s. An aunt on the

father's side. s ,-Â ^c. aor. i. To afflict. . ~ ^ c plur. of 2% comm,

gend. A column, a lofty structure, a tent pole, ,s*, < Ã ˆ r f , /

-^XJ V. To propose. IJ^IU^* On purpose. , ,/, y aor. o. To cultivate, make habitable, perform the sacred visitation-to Mecca-(with ace.).

, PU/, '-kc Life ; dJ a form of oath, "Verily by J thy life." Note. When not med in this manner

S b * S'I the word is written and pronounced p. y Life, age, and especially long life, old age. =,/ Ã.* The sacred visitation to Mecca. *)&

* xu n.a. Religious cult, culture. +, (2nd declension); Two persons are called by this name in the Koran, viz. the father of thevirgin Mary, and the father of Moses and Aaron. 5 .... part. pass. Visited, etc.-> 11. To cause

sa - 9 to live, grant a long life to. ,w part. pass. One whose life is prolonged.-- l VIII. To

, ' L ^ 0 visit, pass one's time in ~ i s i t i n g . - ~ \ X. To settle any one as an inhabitant (with ace. and Jf ) .

/ f - s Â¥

.y^c. am. o. To be deep. ly^s- Deep, distant, far off. & nor. a. To be active (a came0 ; to do, make,

9 ,I,/ "' act, work, operate ; ,+,It $ J-w 17

' 7.86, see &, see also 6 v. 135; at 34 v. 12 before we must undoratand the words L f , ,..,J J-Ã " It was aaid to them," viz. the house of David ; so also at the 10th verse the word 9 t,-* ', i'J,..\ We commanded him," is to be under-

<-,L-^ 1 L 1 stood before J l ^ I , see J^G part. act. One who does, etc., an operator, worker, toiler.

Â¥ -0s j*c Plur. Jl*tl Work, act, deed, labour, toil, action.

)LÃ§ nor. a. To wander distractedly to and fro (with & ; to be struck with amazement.

0 . p aor. i. Tofiow ; and . f. aor. a. To be blind, G / ' < dark, obscure ; $"Cyq i~-Ã§Ã 28 v. 66,

" And the account shall be (was) obscure unto Ã ^ ,

them." - JI n.a. Blindness (of heart). *& 0 /. . , #

Plur. ,-u Acc. Blind, D. S. Gr. T. 1, S t , Ã

p. 354. J S (2nd declension) ; Plur. p S- I./ and ^& Blind, dark.-$ 11. To blind,

hide, conceal from (with & of pera.), as Â£i 0 0 - P : 11 v. 30, "And i t is hidden from , O U - $ 7 IV. To make blind;

'.f. off, from, from off, away from, out of, in spite of, concerning; The primary signification of

trf Â¥Â conveys the idea of removal from off or away from a thing, and from this the other significations may be derived, see D. S. Or.

<-r t, -' s$: a,.

T. 1 , p . 483; & dw ,4$12v. 45, " One soul shall not a t all make satisfaction for another," i.e. so that the punishment should "dl be transferred from one to another ; &

- - - 4 > ,- Jul if^ 3 v. 92, Lit. I' God is rich away from his creatures," i.e. rich enough to dis- pense with them.

& generic noun, Plur. A grape, grapes, a vine ; no verbal root. aor. a. To be corrupt, fall into misfortune,

perish, to commit a crime; 7 \n 3 V. 114, " They desire your ruin ; '' tÃ with the verb following is here considered as equivalent to the noun of action 'rf, and is hence called .?a -- L /

+,,A- L; D. 8. Or. T. 1 , p . 541; $49 v. 7, "Ye would certainly be guilty of a crime."

. 0 L LiÃˆ.0L.I a . sin.--7 IV. To destroy; P Y 2 v. 219, " l i e will surely distress or destroy you ; " The preterite being put for the aorist to give greater energy to the expression, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 158. .. .

A*-Â aor. o. To go out of the right way. & At, with, near, about, in ; This particle is properly a noun in the accusative case, meaning a side, part or quarter; after the preposition it is

" Q G L. written &, as $ I % f lu From God; " also when followed by i_y, as &Je>e (I t is) in my power; (there is) with me, or I have, Lat.

Li 9'1 ,L./ 0.

mihi est; i_y&, +J & V 12 v. 60, "There will be no measuring (of corn) for you on my part ; " D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 496. & Con- tumacious, stubborn, refractory.

0. < ,tiÂ£ To hide the head and neck in its form (a hare). S f 9 s \-t + comm. gend. Plur. jLl A neck.

&y. comm. gend. A spider; verbal root doubtful.

\lc. nor. o. To distress, to be humble (with J); f f9 ^ .,, fys-j \ ~y^s-, 20 v. 110, " And their faces shall be humbled.''

Aye aor. a. To enjoin, command, stipulate, covenant (with ^ of pers. and 3, or with ;+ of pers.). A covenant, promise ; also time, as at 20 v. 89.-A&L 111. To make a covenant with (with ace. of pers. and & of matter).

,, , s <Â _+ aor. o. To wither-. Particoloured wool. . . ^^

7- 1c aor. o. To stand still, recede; and _? To be s 0 bent, distorted. ,,fi Crookedness, curvature,

distortion, obliquity; 2 2 20 v. 107, "There is no obliquity in him," or "no re- ceding." Note. 1 when used to deny the existence of a thing generally governs the accus. without tanween ; D, 8. Gr. To 2, p. 63.

Ã nor. o. To return, turn (with J or &, frequently used with an ellipse of the comple- , . 0 0 Ã # / a { men t ; \^\S 4 u,ayu p 58 v. 4, " Then they would revert to or repair what they have said ; '* this passage admits of avariety of explanations. Sic 'Ad, an ancient and powerful tribe of Arabs of prodigious stature, descended from 'Ad, the great-grandson of Shem. $1c part. act. One who returns. zlx A place whither one returns, a name of ~ecca . -^W IV. To came to return, restore (with ace. of pers. and &, or with double ace.).

Ã aor. o. To be next the bone (flesh); to take or seek refuge, especially with God (with u of pers. and >) ; also used with ,T meaning lest, as at 2 v. 63, and again at 44 v. 19. :I)LÃ A refuge ; gr,& 12 v. 23, "God forbid ! ,' Lit. " (I seek) refuge with God," for i l *< $.-il IV. To recommend to the protection-of God-(with ace. of pers. and ").-iGl X. To take refuge (with <_> of 0

0,,-e0 ,

pers. and A); +LA imperat. 7 v. 199, " Then fly for protection." .-

"A. i\Â aor. a. and o. To be or to make one-eyed. 6 , Pudendum, nakedness, a place lying naked and exposed to the enemy, as at 33 v. 13; *Â£ vysg a 24 v. 57, Lit. "There are three (times) of nakedness for you."

0 , 0 - , P 4 jle. aor. o. To keep back.-&+ \ oblique plur. part. act. 11. f. Those who hinder.

jc aor. o. To swerve, turn aside (from the right way).

;\i aor. o. Tosnim. A year; p \ i 3 1 v. 13 oblique dual, Two years.

s .. ;\s aor. o. To be middle-aged (a woman). y\3s-

~iddle-aged.-;^ IV. To assist(with acc. and & or w) ; y-A 18 v. 94, " Then assist ,

- , ., me."Ã‘u,\ VI. To help one another (with

0 .,tt &).-,_,>Ã§Ã X. To uk assistance (with acc. a '0 <Â '

of pens. or with +J). ulx. part. pass. One , whose aid is to be implored.

3 nor. i. To hesitate; and > aor. a. To be hindered so as to be unable to complete a thing (with .-.) ; 'Ju f 4 6 V. 82 aor. cond. "He was not unable to complete;" G! 50 v. 14, ,

I "Were we then unable to finish?" The verb

I 2 being at the same time surd, concave, and defective, presents several apparent anomalies; these may, however, all be explained by the

I rules which affect such verbs. - & aor. i. To he faulty; to render faulty or un-

serviceable.

SGaor. i. Tovisit. A.& Afeast, festival. , -' ,k aor. i. To go backwards and forwards. >

fern. A caritvan. &+ (2nd declension) Jesus, Our Saviour. .-

4 ,

;lt aor. 1. To pau one's life, KM. & n.a. Life. & Whatever is necessary to eup- port life. ti-fc< -, Plur. (2nd declen- , sion) Existence, manner of living, victuals, necessaries of life.

$ aor. i. To twist the body about in a conceited manner when walking, to be poor. &T& part. act. Poor. *?< Poverty.

s - & aor. i. To flow. fern. Plur. 2 A fountain, spring of water; Plur. 3 An eye. s & for > D. S. Gr.T. 1, p. 112, $ 227, fern. plur. of 9 (2nd declension) Having large

a -' eyes. ^y^ Clear-flowing, a fountain.

. , &c see 4. ,-' -" s ,+ air. o. T; delay. ip Dust, >^ part. act.

I One who stays behind, lags behind. 4 9 , / .-9 ,

aor. i , To deceive,->\w a.8. TI. f, Mutual deceit.

Â£ aor. o. To be covered with foam and &ad leaves, Â tic. (a river), a Scum and light

straw, stubble. ,. . -', , ,Ac aor. i. and o. To remain behind,--& 111. To leave out.

5 , -' & nor. a. To be full o f mater ( a spring). ,j& Copious, abundant.

I2 aor. o. To come or go early in the morning I (with & or &). 3 f o r J 2 The morrow;

,-, , (2 Tomorrow. %I Ac An early meal, dinner. 9 ,, )AÂ£ The morning, early morning, i\Ai same

a, * as ,A.

7 aor. o. To deceive with vain hopes (with ace. and 2) > when used with ace. and v i t means to , seduce from, at 82 V- 6, and 57 V* 13. S f-" A deceiver, the Devil. J A vain hope; s,> Deceitfully.

iÃ‘f aor. A , f o. To yo away, set, as the sun (with >). SIf +!/ A raven. Sunset. Fern.

t< t- < by The West. iÃ‘; (2nd declension) plur. of -2 A kind of black grapes, a l,' up The West, setting of the sun ; Plur.

&'G (2nd declension) The western parts of J

the points in the Heavens, where the sun sets i summer and winter. aor. i. and o. To dram water for d r i n k 4 . -'L f

iuy A draught of water taken up in the hand a;,! the seventh Heaven, 25 v. 75. 43 an,

A\^,Â plurals of AÃ Lofty apartments.- /-"' , ui\ VIII. To drink out of the hand (wit! ncc. and +). , , ,

@ To be submerged. *.a. A draught, 5 At a single draught; and hence, suddenly

S T , ,.t violently. J.C The act of drowning.-~f./ IV. To drown (with ace. and > or i_^)

S-l f , ,i part. pass. Drowned.

/ ^ op nor. a. To be in debt. ;$ part. act. One i n s --, a,,,. debt. ?Iy A continuous torment. t p A

debt that must be paid, a forced loan, 9 v. 99. Â¥,* f - r p part, pass. IV. f. One who is involved

in debt, or laid under an obligation. , , l,i tor. o. To alue.-G> IV. To excite, incite

against (with ace. and u) ; to cause enmity (with L-Ã ;

JY aor. i. To spin. 29 n.a. A spinning, thai which impun. /. \,c. aor. o. To will, seek, make an hostile excursion against. &f. for 23 plur. of,G for 2,G A * combatant.

s , ' Â (_yoÃ aor. i. To be very dark ( the night). + n.a. The commencement of night. J c The moon, also the commencement of 'darkness. a w . " jLtc Corruption which flows from the bodies

of the damned. J-c aor. i, To wmb. Same as JLZ q.v.

- - Â ¥ / t , -=\ VIII. To wash one's-self. JÃ‘* A

earth ; Dual . '" 55 T. 17, The two u . * n

1.

I

place for washing.

aor. a. To cover over, come upon, as a t 29 v. - 'Â¥ -0^ Y . 6 . /L.

55, i_^'~<i \ pL+ f$ "On a certain day their punishment shall come upon them ;"

L 9 Â¥". r^-i is here put for w, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 118 ; <Jrf & pass. Lit. " I t is covered over upon . .. him," a phrase meaning "he faints," 33 v. 19. &U The day of judgment. J^yi plur. of

Â£ , <- &+\1 A covering. i,Q A covering, veil.

L . s Â¥ , -1 part. pass. One in a swoon.- & 11. To cover, to cause to cover (with double ace.).

, ' 3 -&I IV. To cover, cause to cover or be covered (with double acc.l.-^Ju V. To

, 6, tJ have carnal connexion with.-+> X. To cover one's-self with-a garment-(with ace. of garment).

2 aor. a. To be annoyed by something sticking i l l

the throat. 2 Something which sticks in the throat, so as to cause pain.

, ,. +or. i. To carry off violently. By

force. 2 aor. o. To cast down-the eyes, to lower-the

voice (with >). 2 nor. a. To be angry (with & of pers.

5 /Â against whom). - . - . 11.a. Anger, indignation. L G ad,. (2nd declension) Angry,

S /'. I- 5 ' 9

VAL part. pass. Incensed.-++\& part, act. 111. f . Being angry.

.:-!ai aor. i. To be dark.-&: IV. To make dark.

aor. o. To he dark. Fg A veil, covering. 2 aor. i. To cover, pardon (with J of pws. and

ace. of thing); to forgive (with J). >{i qf part. act. One who forgives. and JG

-- " .L 9 Very forgiving. ;\J" Pardon ; &+ 2 v. 285, "(we implore) thy pardon, 0 our

9 ? L , Lord; " There is here an ellipse of or

some similar word ; see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 82 -^/- ' / '",' L

i,+ P a r d o n . - - X. To ask pardon foi (with J); to ask pardon of (with ace. of per8 and J). ;%\ n.a. The act of asking for , s L,'. 9 giveness. + part. act. One who askt forgiveness. aor. o. To neglect, be negligent (with >), &is part. act. One who is negligent or careless, iLL:' Negligence, carelessness.-&I IV, To cause to be negligent (with ace. and 2).

' . & nor. o. To insert, defraud, bind-as the hand tc the neck. J< Hidden enmity, grudge. 3

s fL. / Plur. sc? A collar, yoke. J+ part. pass. 4 , PI-,

Bound, tied up ; & & d+. d< Wi, 17 v. 31, " Nor let thy hand be tied up to thy neck," i.e. Be not niggardly.

L& aor. i, To prevail (with &) ; overcome, conquer. 3 n.a. Victory, conquest ; > (hyJx 30 v. 2, " After their conquest, or ,, defeat ;" the word is liere used in a passive sense. a,& part. act. One who overcomes, victorious, all powerful. LÃ‘J- plur. of Thick necked, lofty, dTJ 8 0 v. 30, "Gardens (planted) thick (with trees)." Â 9L. .

U+I part. pass. Overcome. & aor. i. and aor. o. To be thick, rough, severe

(with & of pera.), .. , Plur. & Rough, L, 4 f severe, strong, firm ; +dl k& Hard-

,.c^" ' hearted. ~ e v e r i t ? . Ã ‘ l a ~ > ~ . X. To be thick, strong.

& To put a bottle into its casc; and & To be uncircumcised. 3: P!ur. 3 Uncircum- cised.

& aor. i. To shut (a door).-& I I A m e a& 5 , s $ aor. a. To be lustful. ?ic. Plur. ,t*)-c A boy,

a youth, frequently used in the Koran for a son.

aor. o. To be dear, excessive; to exceed what is just and proper (with d).

& aor. i. To boil. 3 n.a. The act of boiling. a - 5

; aor. o. To cover. n.a. Anguish, affliction. I <i- s ^ .-, li-L;' In the dark. j*L*c plur. of Ll*e Clouds

covering the heavens. s , , s /,. y^c. aor. a. To abound (in water). i> Plur. up

A flood of water, a confused mass of anything; , I', . sometimes used metaphorically, as ULÃ‡

'.,4

The pangs of death. ,, : '' <: y c- aor. i. To point, or wink a t any one.--\M VI.

To wink a t one another. aor. o. To be Ion and level (the ground).-

-1 IV. To connive a t the payment of less than the full value (with J) .

ÃˆÂ¥ To get as booty, acquire, gain without trouble. s., 9 ,

n.a. Sheep. 1 1 (2nd declension) plur. ,:. of , Ã ˆ Ã Plunder, spoils.

2 aor. a. To be rich ; to dwell (with J). 2 . -, 1-* Plur. ^&I (2nd declension) Rich, self-sufficient, able to do without others (with 21.- $1 IV. To enrich (with ace. and ",I; to avail or be profitable to, satisfy, suffice for,

' fill the place of another for or against; used with 2 of pers. for whom, and of pere. against whom, as a t 12 v. 67 ; or with 2 of p e n . and ace. as a t 19 v. 43, see 3 ; another

9 ' construction is found a t 53 v. 29, & yu Y 4

Â ¥ - 4 @ +& 1 " I t profiteth nothing against the .' 4 , t r u t h ; " , Ã ‘ f t d & : i 7 7 v . 3 1 , " I t shall not avail against the flame; " I t is also employed with the ace. alone, as a t 8 0 v. 37. & part. act. One who suffices or stands in * -"I-, C

the place of X. To become rich, desire riches, to be able to do without, to be self-sufficient.

/Â /, L LG aor. o. To assist, relieve (with ").-Ã§_ilÃ§ X. To implore assistance (with ace. and &I.

;c nor. o. To come into a hollow place. JG A cavern. 3 n.a. (Water) running away under

.- 5 -- ' s - , ground. x,LM A c a v e . - c y k fern. plur. part. act. IV. f. Horses making an hostile excursion.

2\1 nor. o. To dive (with J at 21 v. 82). yÃ l A diver.

!pLc aor. o. To plunge into. \u\Â A hollow place, a privy, easing one's-self.

JG nor. 0. To sci ic . J>c Inebriation. 5 ^yc. nor. i. To wander, go astray. 2 n.a. Error,

2 . destruction. i_^ One who is in the wrong.

,/ 9 , fl p t . act. Plur. ,,, '-t, Oblique Plur. &G One who goes astray; expressions denoting

Â¥'& Devils, or those who listen to them.-<-?^I IV. To lead astray.

s 6 , S If <_Ac nor. i. To be absent. L+ n.a. Plur. "y^

A secret, mystery, whatever is absent or hidden, & fo r&G, D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 276, note, The bottom (of a well, etc.). &% part. act.

He or that which is absent or hidden.-- C /(// Â¥" VIII. To traduce the absent, as 4. I, 49

v. 12, " Neither traduce one another ;" aor. conditional.

am. i. To water by means of rain. Rain.

')\i tor. i. To provide for. 2 A difference, an other; This word, which sometimes does duty as an adverb, is then indeclinable, as> Not, besides, unless; when used as a preposition, and meaning Without or Except, i t becomes declinable, see &. Note. Much controversy exists as to the grammatical construction of this and similar words, D. S. Ur.T. 2, p. 153,

4, note.-- 11. To alter, change, "y^ part. .-

act. One who changes.-& s e e p for;?. ,a ., -fiu V. To be changed.

^^ sic aor. i, To diminish, abate, be wanting, as ;1 ;!r& I, 13 v. 9, "What the wombs want (of their due time)."

a\s. aor. i , To incense, irritate (with ace. and u). , G n . a . Anger, fury. gc part. act. One who is angry.-L^y *.a. V, f. A raging furiously.

d A prefixed conjunction having less conjunctive 1 occurs so frequently in almost every page power than;, and hence principally employed 1 that the choice must be left to the reader's in connecting sentences ; the following is from Johnson's Pers. Arab. and English Dictionary ; kJ is a prefixed particle of inference and sequence, signifying And, then, for, therefore, SO that, in order that, in that case, in consequence, afterwards, at least, lest, for fear that, truly ; all or most of these significations may be found in the Koran, but this particle

judgment, see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 549 et seq., also T. 2, p. 396 ; It is constantly to be found

<it.-- <i t, prefixed to other particles, as Lu, U, 26, LC k-4

etc. etc. ..--. , , ,, wO\s An opening or commencement, rt. ,b

^ q.v. %^ " 'I'hen protect him it' iv- [- of

2% q.v.

c->G nor. o. To assist, relieve (with i^),-i^^c^i\ X. To implore assistance (with a k . and &I.

; i nor. o. To come into a hollow place. \e- A s<^: cavern. ,*Â n.a. (Water) running away under .- :0 0 0 s 0 9 ground. s , A c a v e . - e y k fern. plur.

part. act. IV. f. Horses making an hostile excursion.

SG aor. o. To dive (with J at 21 v. 82). .%;' 0

A diver. 6G aor. o. To plunge into. A hollow p h e ,

a privy, easing one's-self. JG nor. o. To seize. J$ Inebriation.

s ,_f2 aor. i. To wander, go astray, 2 n.n. Error, c

destruction. 2; One who is in the wrong. " 0 9 , \s. art. act. Plur. ,L, Oblique Plur. 2.E 2 "3

One who goes astray; expressions denoting 0 l Devils, or those who listen to them.-iJT,i\ IV.

To lead astray. s ' f *Ã‘>lf am. i. To be absent, n.a. Plur. i^fp

Asecret, mystery, whatever is absent or hidden. S f 0 0 =/Ã

LÃ‘Ã‡ for +G, D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 276, note, s -0

The bottom (of a well, etc.). i_^L part. act.

d A prefixed conjunction having lesa conjunctive power than;, and hence principally employed in connecting sentences ; the following is from Johnaon's Pers. Arab. and English Dictionary; d is a prefixed particle of inference and sequence, signifying And, then, for, therefore, so that, in order that, in that case, in consequence, afterwards, at least, lest, for fear that, truly; all or most of these significations may be found in the &or&n, but this particle

He or that which is abaent or hidden.-&Gl G ,v 00 VIII. To traduce the absent, as uw 3, 49

v. 12, " Neither traduce one another ;" aor. conditional.

f Â¥ J\S aor. i. To water by means of rain. Rain.

0 0

,1c aor. i. To provide for. 2 A difference, an other; This word, which sometimes does duty as an adverb, is then indeclinable, as> Not, besides, unless; when used as a preposition, and meaning Without or Except, i t becomes declinable, see &. Note. Much controversy exists as to the grammatical construction of this and similar words, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 153, note.-- 11. To alter, change. J-Â£ part.

s , " f act. One who changes.-f& see jG fo r ,~ .

-2 V. To bechaqed. . 0 j l i aor. i. To diminish, abate, be wanting, as

9 0 0 -0 r q l J u I; 13 v. 9, "What the wombs want (of their due time)."

?G aor. i. To incense, irritate (with ace. and <~i).

g n . a . Anger, fury. l&c part. act. onewho is angry.- n,a. V. f. A raging furiously.

occurs so frequently in almost every page that the choice must be left to the reader's judgment, see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 549 et sea., also T. 2, p. 396 ; I t is constantly to be found prefixed d other particles, as c5, y>, ;!, 'Ã£ etc. etc.

- 0 .. Sacr\s An opening or commencement, rt. ^Sq.v. f" Sf ~ l t "Then protect him ;" imperat. iv. f. of j\Ã q . ~ .

25 nor. a. To hurt any one in the heart. sg Plur. The heart.

Ã ˆ J LÃ see !J. L .. -2 a n' Ã & Then show me ;" imperat. iv. f. of &

q.v, with & prefixed. for$ or i j aor. o. and i. To split (the head}

with a snord. &J A band or party of men, army.

@ see *U for G. L/* ,C see u**5"3,

</c^ a -d/ \J aor. a. To break, cease, desist, as ^ytf @U .,1,'', + J 12 v. 85, " By God ! thou wilt (not)

cease to remember Joseph ; " for this ellipse of the negative see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 473; 3 is here put for 'a, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 97.

,<, ci aor. a. To open (with ace. or with ace. of thing and of pers.) ; to explain or reveal (with J of thing and & of pers.) ; To grant-a , mercy or a victory-(with ace. and J of pers.), as at 48 v. 1 ; to adjudicate in a cause (with 4- III I , I. ,-f ' /

d l ; V^J Tf'i 'Ã‘Â 'Â¥' jÃ 21v. 96, " Until Gog and Magog shall have had a way opened for them," alluding to the rampart mentioned a t 18 v. 93, which being broken down, an irruption of those barbarous tribes is to take place shortly before the last day ; the verb is here put in the feminine as having

. for subject the collective nouns and I v 5 iff

r^ l<, D. B. Gr. T. 8, p. 233. 01 Victory, a decision or judgment, the taking of a town, and especially of Mecca, which is sometimes

"S< 4 called JÃ§ I par excellence, an for example in the 48th chapter, which takes its name from that victory ; N.B. The victory foretold a t the close of the 27th verse is believed to be the

taking of Khaibar. gG part. act. One whc I / . .4 opens, one who gives judgment; *Lii 1 Name

9 -a, 4 of the opening chapter of the Korbn. y,U \ , - ,/ The Judge, an epithet of God. && (2nd declension) plur. of & or "\^ A key.-

tl- ' / s 6 : 9 2 11. To open (with J of pers.). / / '/ '

~ A A ^ part. pass. Opened.-+\ X. To ask aasistunce- of Clod,-against (with &); to ask for a judgment or decision-in a suit,-as a t 8 v. 19.

,,f

aor. o. and i. To be quiet ; to feel weak or faint, .. to desist. Ã - A cessation, or interval of time between two prophets.-> 11. To weaken,

L .- diminish-a punishment-(with ,s).

,, < (*-A To split, cleave asunder. $ aor, i. To twist (a rope). ,& A small skin in

the cleft of a date-stone, hence a thing of no value.

,,, ^J aor. i. To try, or prove-as gold in the fire- (with ace. and u or d,) ; to afflict, persecute . (by burning), which seems to be the meaning at 85 v. 10; to lead into temptation; to make an attempt upon, as at 4 v; 102; to seduce

-- f b t 3 4 - r -Â (with 2); ,,+ ,k I & 51 v. 13, " They shall be psoved, punished, or burnt in the fire." s ", n.a. A trial. >b part. act. One who

s leads into temptation. A temptation, trial, punishment, misfortune, discord, sedition or civil war, as at 8 v. 40 ; At 2 v. 187 it may be rendered " seduction from the truth," so

3 4 ."*I. also at 3 v. 5 ; .U l 4_i 29 v. 9, "A trial or calamity proceeding from men ; " At 8 v. 25 it is explained as meaning any crime common to the people a t large ; i t has been translated " sedition," but the commentators are at a loss

"..'t/ /",/'* -/ to fix the exact meaning; + LLig Y 10 v.

85 and 60 v. 5, Do not make US (the subject ,,,U / L , of) punishment ; l J BeidAwee says p; ey* ;

a similar ellipse occurs at 17 v. 62, alao at 37 v. 61 and at 74 v. 31, where it means "a cause of contention; " At 33 v. 14 it may be rendered I I desertion," and at 6 v. 23 it is said to mean i t an excuse or answer," and only to be called

because that excuse is a lie forged by s 9* Â the Idolators, j * part. pass. Distracted,

demented. LÃ aor. o. To be superior to another in generosity.

^J A young man, man-servant ; Dual 9G ; 5 ,.-

~lux- . (L>-? of few, and ZL-) of many. il-i Plur, 0.. +l

uyk Young women, maid-servants.-& IV. To advise, give an opinion or instruction in a matter of law or judgment (with ace. 01 pen. and &).-&\ X. To consult, ask opinion or advice, chiefly in legal matters (with ace. of pera. and J, also with 1 intmo-

^ 0 Ã ˆ L P L ^,L. /f ,/

gative); L\ w, + 5 18 v. 22j " Neither ask the opinion of any of them (tlic Jews or Christians) concerning them ; I' somt of their views on the important matter ir question are given in the preceding verse.

s ". 2 aor. o. To straddle. , n.a. Plur. k^f A broai way, especially between two mountains.

Â¥a aor, o. To cause water to pour forth (with ace and >); to go aside from the right way, t( act wickedly. 2 n.a. The dawn, day-break >ti part. act. Wicked ; Plur. 'if' and @ / n.a. ~ i c k e d n e s s . - - 11. To cause to flov (with ace. and >, or with double ace.) b . ? , # 4 ' 0 +_/^ \;[y 82 v. 3, "And when the seat

0 0

shall be made to flow (together)," so as t(

form but one sea. 2 n.a. The act o

causing (water) to flow.-* V. To flow u' -'I.

(with ,).-Â¥,i \ VII. To flow (with A1 ; at 2 v, 57 the verb is put in the fern., being (as me should say) governed by the nominative

'- '' - ,,'"a i+ L 1 , Twelve fountains," and the word 2 being of the fern. gender; for the construction of the numerals see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 420, and T. 2, p. 318.

2 aor. o. To open (a door). ty A clear open space, as between the sides of a cave.

9' To be sharn&Z or irtJamous. S-U' (2nd declension) Filthy, shameful, or dishonourable conduct, especially stinginess in the payment of tithes or other religious dues. &L Filthiness, uncleanness, a filthy report, a crime, fornication or adultery; Plur. &^y (2nd declension) Abominable crimes.

aor. a. To boast. J*=* Vain-glorious, a boaster. s.: S 9 ,, ,& Earthenware.--\Â n.a. VI. f. Mutual boasting.

_Si^ aor. i. To hansom .- (with ace. and (Ã‘>) qTJ , n.a. A ransom. 44 A ransom, that which is paid as ransom or to redeem a fault.- ,& 111. To ransom, redeem.-^S^J\ VIII. To ransom or redeem one's-self with (with <_->I, or from (with .<) ; thus at 5v.40, > 0 AJ ., lJA ..l dc "To redeem themselves with it from

0

the punishment," etc. $4 Bee &$. 9 ,'., <;, %^J see j J j *

2 aor. i. To flee, flee to (with \) ; fly from (with >). ;G ma. Flight, the act of fleeing away. s-" , 3,. A place of refuge.

--' 0: a /'t uj aor. o. To be nicked. <Ã‘* Sweet (water).

t_^i aor. i. aud o. To let out the contents-of a basket. t- J F<BCTE.

, ,< a i. To split, cleave asunder. ; >, Plur. V ' s , ! & An interstice, break, flaw, private parts; G> S T & 21 v. 91, "And he who preserved her chastity," viz. The Virgin Mary.

, - aor. a. To be glad, rejoice (with "). _* Joy- '/, ful; at 28 v, 76 it means one who exults (in riches).

., ,, 9 aor. o. To be separated, alone. $3, Plur. Si\J (2nd declension) Alone, without companions, or as at 21 v. 89, without offspring.

/ ,c-' S (Â¥<"L.

(_/w>^J To spread on the ground. ~ 2 2 comm. gend. Paradise; the original meaning of the word is a park or garden planted with fruit- trees; it is from the Plur. that we have the Greek word l7ap&Seicrov.

,, $j aor. o. To spread as a carpet on the ground.

i J n.a. Animals fit for slaughter. $\^ 5 *

generic noun, Moths. & n,a, Plur. $> A carpet used as a bed, a mattress, and meta-

q, phorically a wife; thus at 56 v. 33, ,ui A $Y- 'And damsels raised on lofty couches." , , , 2-i aor. i. To notch, ratify, appoint, fix (a time); to ordain, command an observance of, or obedience to (with ace. of thing and of pers.); to sanction ; to assign (with J of pere.); 750 be aged (a cow), whence comes $,lÃˆ~ old cow. &J An ordinance (especially of God), , a settled portion, dower or jointure ; &.I

s , s "I' see +,. ~ < / f c ~ part. pass. Appointed, deter- minate.

I?J aor. o. To precede, to be extravagantly reproach- ful or insolent (with &. In advance of; ^ is lk-2 xp , v. 27, A n d hiaaffair is in

advance of (the truth)," i.e. " He casts the truth behind his back;" the word in its most ordinary acceptation is applied to a horse who outstrips his competitors; it likewise means insolent or extravagant, an iniquity, that which goes beyond all bounds.- S> 11. To be negligent, omit, act negligently (with Â¥).- A- part. pass, IV. f. Made to hasten.

s 0: > aor. a. To mount up. e^> A branch or top of a tree. >> (2nd declension) Pharaoh,

, c./ ;> aor. a. and o. To empty, finish ; <- s-/ 94 L *

v. 7, "And when thou hast finished (thy preaching);" to bring a matter to an end, settle an account with any one (with J of

' + pers.). e^J part. act. Empty, void.-& I IV. To pour out (with BCC, and A').

,,, j,i aor. o. To split, divide, make a distinction (with

, k,, to send down from Heaven (as the

Koran) ; thus at 44 v. 3, where it may also be rendered " is distinctly decreed ;" as on the night there alluded to are settled all the affairs of this world for the ensuing year ; aor. a, To be afraid. sp n.a. The act of diatinguish- ing or separating; by lyJ$ul* 77 v. 4, "And by the Angels who separate (truth from falsehood) by a discrimination;" there are also other interpretations of the paasage. ,?$ A ~ p a r a t e part, heap, hillock. S,f A band of men. $3 A part, portion, some, a party or band of 'men. . SJ A distinction; The Law of Moses and the K d n are so called as distinguishing between truth and falsehood, see 2nd Epistle to Timothy ch. ii. v. 15;

/<->Â¥,I i_ib,d l C J ~ 8 v. 42, " On the day of distinction (of the true believers from the infidels)," viz.

The Battle of Bedr ; so also at 8 v. 29, where it is interpreted by some to mean a victory over the unbelievers.-i> 11. To make a division or distinction (with 2); to make a

S L-'

schism in (with ace.). & J n.a. Division, ,, ,

dissension.-dli 111. To quit, part from (with acc.). :$ n.a. The act of quitting, a separation ; at 18 v. 77 ;l> is antecedent to $; it must be borne in mind that 2 although general1 y rendered " between" is in reality a substantive meaning interval, or, as in this passage, a connexion ; at 75 v. 28 :$ meana a departure from this life.-&3 V. To be ,*^, divided among themselves (with &); <j,sa~ & 6 v. 154, " Yor fear lest ye be scattered away from" (with >), D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 245 ;

S-Â¥-/ f to be separated one from another. JI * part. act. Divers, different.

s -Â To be brisk, q\i part. act. One who ia clever, insolent or > aor. i. To cut. AJ New, strange, wonderful. -$\.vIII. To feign, forge, invent a lie(with

which they have forged between their hands and their feet ; I' this passage has by some been interpreted as referring to the illegitimate children which the women attempted to father

/Â¥ I s -9 I upon their husbands. for ~ _ y / u i ~ < part. *,k ,/Â¥* . / + , - act. A forger. d-fe, for +G.A, part. pass.

Feigned, pretended, forged. ,* aor. i. To flow as bhod from a w o u n d , - - \ X.

To remove, expel (with ace. and ^); to deceive, lend to destruction (with ace. of pera. and v). ,

'J aor. a. To be terrified, smitten with fear (with L.', S ,/

&. j n.a. Terror.- {J' 11. when wed , - 0 '

with 2 means To free from fear, as ej \^\ && 2 34 v. 22, " (Until) their hea r t shall have been freed from fear."

riÃ‘ aor. ft. To be spacious, to make room for a L , a ::

penon (with J of pers.).- -*' V. To make - room (with 2 of place). . , [AS see (is"'.

s ,/Â

LLÃ aor. o. To be corrupt. a L J n.a. The acting GI c- 0 .

corruptly, corruption, violence ; ,I (^A; .JU 9G 5 v. 35, "Without (that soul having slain - ,1,1 another) soul or (committed) violence."-&\ IV. To act corruptly, do violence (with 2) ; to corrupt, despoil (with ace.). AuJi part. act. One who acts corruptly or commits violence, a spoiler.

,, : J nor. i. and o. To d i s cove r . -3 n.a. 11. f. An

explanation or interpretation. ,,. **Ã aor. i. and o. To emerge from its husk (a date); to withdraw from the right way, disobey the commandment of God (with 3) ; to be impious, act wickedly. JL*; and (j? ns.a. Transgression, impiety, wickedness. part. act. A transgressor, one who is wicked.

& aor. a. To be meak, faint-hearted. ^Ai aor. o. To shorn itself (the dawn); and ' fa -

To be eloquent, speak with fluen y and correctness. ?\ (2nd declension) comp. form, More eloquent.

6 i G f J " Then draw them (towards thee)," imperat. of;L for;; q.v. aor. i. To dissect, depart; to make a distinction or division, or judge between (with ^J of pers. and 2 of thing). JnÃ ma. A distinc-

tion, separation, a means of distinguishing 4 , L,

good from evil, as at 86 v. 13 ; \ JÃ‘ 38 v. 19, see il)Uaa>. J part. act. One who judges between truth and falseliood. JLai Weaning. A family, relations.- (LSJ 11. To explain distinctly (with ace. and J of pers.). &+& n.a. A clear explanation, Â¥xposition ila<-Ã part. pass. Clearly explained, distinct.

/Â Â¥Â p o r i. To break.-;L&\ n.a. VII. f. The act of being broken ; 'Q iwi'2 7. 257, " It has no flaw or break in it."

6 - 1 $ nor. o, To break asunder. 4 Silver.-&\ VII. To be broken up, dispersed, separated (with >).

,, , 3: ,, > aor. a. To expose to shame ; Is 15 v, L ,

68, "And do not expose me to disgrace (by ill-treating my guests)." aor, 0, To renzczira oum and abozv. s i Excel. lence, merit, favour, a free gift, bounty, grace, munificence, indulgence.-& 11. To preferi favour, cause to excel, grant favours to one person in preference to another (with ace. and &, and with <-/ of thing). J- J n.a,

/Â / 6,)

Excellence, preference.-iLsA; V. To make one's-self superior (with &).

~i aor. o. To be r o o m y . - 9 IV. To go in unto,

1 a husband to a wife (with &).

,la* aor. o. and i. To split, create. part. act. A Creator. &&t for 'S& D, 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 276, note, A creation ; the word is found a t 30 v. 29, and may there be taken to mean Religion, or a religious frame of mind inspired by God; it is put in the ace. after $1 (I mean) understood; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 94.

A rent, flaw, or fissure.-p V. To be rent asunder.--qv11, To be cloven asunder. ;' C< n.a. The being cloven asunder, y"Ã part. act. Cloven or rent asunder.

'ss To force water out o f a n animal's stomach. 2 Harsh, severe.

5; am. a. To do, make, act, perform, accomplish. &Anaction, a doing. ^ M A ilecd. J^G part. act! One who does, etc. Jim.' adjective of intensity, D. S. Gr, T. 1, p. 322, Doing or effecting much; used substantively it means

s P",

a great or able worker. Jyifc* part. pass. Done, made, effected, performed, fulfilled ; at

, P L , , , , 8 vv. 43 and 46 the past part. $+. is put

' 9 1 in prophetic language for the future JJOU ^\ ; a similar instance occurs at 73 v. 18.

i.% aor. i. To seek f o r that which is lost, to lose.- AJL&; V. To make a n inquisition into; at 27 v. 20 it may be rendered " l i e reviewed ."

,/ , A) nor, o. and i. To dig, break the vertebra; and To be poor. 2 n.a. Poverty. Gl) A

calamity, properly that which breaks the ver tebr~ . 2 Plur. *$ (2nd declension) Poor, needy; when used with J as at 23 v. 24 &.. 1->> 'jl w^y \, i t may be rendered "In want of . , . . whatever thou mayest send down unto me;" a similar use of the word when employed with may be observed at 35 v. 16.

JLÃ aor. a. and o. To i e of a pure yellow colour. <_i;G part. act. comm. gend. Very yellow or red ; accor,ding to some this word is applied to any p i e colour.

\w " Then deliver us," see . AÃ To be superior in wisdom; and & am. a. To

be wise, understand, to be skilled or have

understanding in matters pertaining to Law and ~ivini t~.-&uu V. To be assiduous in instructing one's-self (with &).

& aor. b. To beah. n.a. The act of freeing s -0 >

(cap tives).-L,L^iÃ part. VII. f. Dislocated, one who vacillates (in his faith), as at 98 v. 1.

'fi To t ~ i i t . - . 11. To meditate; at 74 r. 18 i t means to meditate blasphemies against the ~ o r ~ n . - p V. To consider, meditate (with &).

4 , ftiCj To be very merry, @ A jester, one who makes game of others. %G part. act. One who is very joyful, rejoices greatly (with v or 2). &G Plur. &G (2nd declkision) Fruit.- 4! V. To wonder.

Jf A certain person. <^ Such an one, a certain person. , , , L,

To split.-$ IV. To prosper, be happy, attain one's desires. ff^ part. act. One who is prosperous or happy.

(Ã§1 aor. i. To split, cause to come forth. ,AÃ A fissure, Day-break, breaking forth (of the dawn) ; it is held by some to mean Creation in general, and especially of those things which are produced from others, as Fountains, plants, children, etc. /.J'J part. act. One who causes to put forth or break f o r t h . - a VII. To be split open, divided. a To be round (a breast). & comm, gend,

and number, Ships, a ship, shipping, The Ark. dl> The orbit of a celestial body. ^ see .Ã§;

9 0 f^^ J see il^ for ig, & for 1; &, ec I;.

2 To drive camels. 3 plur. of 3 A branch,

or of 3 A epecies; if the latter meaning be adopted we must understand the words

f6-Ã -" \i- Y \ , " Of trees," at 55 v. 48, where it 4 . occurs.

6 To dote.-5 11. To make a dotard of, regard as a dotard.

2 aor. i. To vanish. & for 3 part. act. f

Perishable, liable to decay. 2 To understand.-'9 11. To cause to understand

(with double acc.). Ã‘? aor. o. To pass away from, slip (an opportunity) ;

S 9 -"-- escape (with ace.). < ii n.a. Escape.-u,U; n.a. VI. f. A disparity, or want of proportion.

.I? aor. o. To diffuse a fragrant odour. Z A L

troop or company ; Plor. i\y". ,, P i Ã &,, ,la aor. o. To boil, boil up or boil over ; ,,A \,li

11 v. 42, " The oven boiled over ; " this oven is said to have originally belonged to Eve, and poured forth boiling water as a sign of the Deluge, the waters of which, according to Jewish fable, were boiling hot; see also 23

~6~ 0 6: Li

v. 27. ,y n.a. Haste; ,+y 0 3 v. 121, I I Immediately on their arrival, or before they had rested," see D. 8. Gr. T. 1; p. 526.

/ , jli aor. o. To get possession of, gain, receive salva-

tion, obtain one's desires. 3 n.a. Victory, felicity, safety, salvation. /iU part. act. One who enjoys felicity or receives salvation. \\A^

S^, ,, A place of safety or felicity. i,'& An escape, place of refuge.

2yÃ Not used in the primitive form, To submit a thing to the judgment of another (with ace. and ^\ of pers.).

, , j lÃ aor. o. To be superior in rank or excellence.

/o < jy n.a. is properly a noun expressive of superiority, which when used as an adverb ia

indeclinable; in the KO& it always appears as a preposition meaning over or above, and

119 " is then used in the ACCIIB. J * as .J.*y "Over you," or in the genitive after a preposition, as @$ fcT? 14 v. 31, " From above (or from the surface of) the earth ; " D. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 494 and 510 ; we also &. sl,* A delay, properly the space of time between two milk- i n g ~ , or of the opening and closing of the

>Â ,I hand in milking.-# IV. To come to one's-

. self, recover (after a swoon or illness). generic noun, Garlic ; no verbal root. . ^ Sf &li aor. o. To pronounce a word. p or 7 or with a complement 4, Gen. ,,* , Ace, ; Plur. s u l y l A mouth ; The word is formed from the regular noun by cutting off the two last radical letters, and substituting r ; see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 378 and 417 ; it is found in the Kodn only in the ace. sing. and in the plural.

<i a preposition meaning In, into, among, in com- L'

- j Name and initial letter of the 50th chapter, see 7. 3 To abhor; and i To he ugly, loathsome.

S 9^,0 tt_ _ÃJl part. pass. Abhorred or rendered loathsome ; at 28 v. 42 it may be taken in either sense.

,, , 'Â¥ A ,+ aor. o. and i. To bury. 2 n.a. Plur. i*

9 ,. ?,,li , grave. >\a^ (2nd declension) plur. of s+ A cemetery.-.?\ (V. To cause to be buried.

'""Â i fJ tior. i. To get a light from another, Lighted f u e l . - 9 ; VIII. To lake a light from another (with A).

0 'Â¥ ~pany with, an tÃ‘lai JJ & \ l.SÂ¡ T.

86, I' Enter ye in company with the nations which have already passed away;" It may sometimes be rendered On, of, to, with, 51 v. 29 ; for, 2 v. 173 ; by, against, concerning, according to, or in comparison with; an instance of the last meaning occurs at 13 v. 26 ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 487.

-, li aor. i. To return, go back (with Jl); to go from a TOW, as at 2 7.226.-~6f IV. To bring under the power or authority of any one (with

Ã*;-. ace, and & of pers.).-@ V, To turn itself about (as a shadow cast by the sun).

ill* aor. i. To be copious; to overflow (with >). , , - ~ d IV. To pour water over any one (with

ace. and &) ; to rush impetuously (with $1, as the pilgrims down Mount 'Ararat; to be diffuse; to dilate or amplify in speaking (with 2 ) ; to be immersed in any business (with L ^)-

jV* aor. i. To be weak-minded. j An elephant.

aor. i. To contract, take, eeize, draw in (its wings in flying), as a bird; thus at 67 v. 19,

a ',,.i. where we may understand the word -1.

Sl-' n.8. A contraction, & A handful. " t ' & Jn part. pass. Taken.

J<Ã aor. a; To accept (with ace. and 2 or >) ; to admit (with ace. and J of pers.) J part. act. One who accepts. '& properly,a noun meaning the forepart; but in the Koran used either as an adverb, and without a complement, in which case it is indeclinable, as

9t-n- 1- J-i Ã Before, formerly, or as a preposition 16

^ 0 /b/'

in the ace. as \ a> i\s Before this ; when preceded by the preposition it is put in the genitive, as , I J-Ã > Before that; it corre- sponds in its construction with q.v. , see also D. S . Gr. T. 2, p. 152. ,L' The forepart ; @ 6 v. I l l , " Before their eyes," or Ã In hosts," with which meaning may be regarded as the plur. of JÃ‘ q.v. & Power,

, a side or part; Towards, in the direction

t , / - f f /.'-

of, as jp.4 l &; 2 v. 172, "Towards the East;" f^ i& ., f 27 v. 37, "Against whom they ,

will have no power ;" ,& 57 v. 13, .- "Alongside it," & properly, Anything opposite; a Kibla, or the point in the direction of which, prayer must be made to be efficacious; see Daniel chap. vi. v. 10 ; Thus the Kibla of the Mohammedans is the Ka'ba at Mecca; at 10 v. 87 the word has been interpreted "A place of worship;'' The Jews in the days of Moses are supposed by the Commentators to have prayed towards the Ka'ba, it having been rebuilt by Abraham and Ishmael in place of the original house destroyed by the Flood. 22 A favourable reception. "LJ A surety, bail, sponsor; at 7 v. 26 it b..;

means a host (the ministers of Satan), &p (2nd declension) plur. of An Arab tribe. -s IV. To come, dra; near, approach (with > in the sense of with), thus at 12 v. 82 and 51 v. 29 ; to turn towards (with [c ,a of pers.) ; to rush upon (with &).-&JU V. To accept (with ace. and > or 2 of pers.); This verb is sometimes used with an ellipse ol the immediate complement, or as we should - 1.'6^/^ call it, the accusative; thus at 3 v. 31 (LICJ "Then accept from me (that which I have

/%^" , vowed"-A^& L) ; a similar passage is found

S -0 ? at 2 v. 121, D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 454. -J ib , part. act. VI. f. Opposite to, or facing one

'- L.06 Ã another.-& part. act. X. f. Proceeding , towards (with ace.).

Ã aor. o. and i. To be niggardly. 3 and Ã ,- Black dust, blackness. ;)-Ã Niggardly.- s :. ? j+ part. act. IV. f. To be in reduced circumstances.

1.1 0 1 ~ 1 . 'fn aor. o. To kill, slay ; +l $G 2 v. 51, t l Then slay yourselves ; " either figuratively, by mortifying your corrupt desires, or "one another;" the latter interpretation is in accordance with the account given in Exodus chap. xxxii. v. 27 ; In the Passive J-Ã is sometimes used as an imprecation, thus at 74 vv. 19 and 20, " May he be accursed;" the preterite being used for the optative; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 169 ; similar instances occur at 51 v. 10, 80 v. 16, and 85 v. 4. n.a. The act of putting to death, slaughter. (2nd declension) for & D. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 110 and 402, plur. of JÃ‘ One who is slain.- J i 11, To day, or cause to be slain, J-a? n.a. The act of slaughtering.-$^ 111. To

Ãˆ 4Ãˆ. 0

fight against (with ace. of pen.) ; dl Ã ,L-l 9 v. 30, " May God curse them," see $; At 3 v. 140 there seems to be an ellipse after Jg of the objective or immediate complement, cCi or some similar word being understood, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 454. ^ n.a. The* act of fighting, war.-J= i VIII. To contend among themselves.

lÃ‘j generic noun; Cucumbers; no verbal root. t aor. 0. To rush h~ad10ng.-?\ VIII. To under-

take an enterprise in a headlong or impetuous

I-' ( 115 ) J&

= a' manner. p u part. act. One who rushes or leaps headlong, found at 88 v. 59, where i t means " Rushing headlong (into Hell)."

3 A particle frequently prefixed to the preterite to give i t a past signification; where among several verbs in the preterite one has the particle 3 prefixed, such verb is to be taken in the Pluperfect tense; so also among several Pluperfect8 the one which follows 3 will have a signification anterior to the others; in all the above cases it may generally be rendered already, and may frequently be understood to imply that the matter in question, although past, is of recent date, or that i t was not un-

' # I d 0 0 - ^ 0 L 9 0 - 'a 0 '(0

expected; thus, ,.,s I. A) J i JK, 6 v. 119, "For he hath even now explained to you what he hath forbidden you;" another use of 3 is to add energy to an affirmation, and i t may then be rendered truly, of a

' 0 f ' P L Ã ˆ ^ - U 0 ^ certainty, or verily; Lhus, &Js ,SJ~ lÃ + iJu 24 v. 64, " He knows of a surety what ye are

/ I , ,,"Ã about ; I 1 SO also at 91 v. 9, lÃ g 81 J ' Verily he who hath purified i t is happy ;" Lastly, A> may sometimes be rendered frequently, as at 2 v. 139, <-J iJ) , I t We have frequently observed the turning of thy face ;" It is found in combination with ',, 600 (/,0

other particles as AJ,, &dl iW etc. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 533. ^ <w am. o. To rend. $4 plor. of JJ+ A party of men at variance among themselves;(^Is \& 72 v. 11, " We are (followers of) different ways."

, ,0 Â 0 ,

r Jij aor. a. To strike j re , n.a. The act of striking fire.

0 , * pi aor. o. and i. To be able, to be able to do, have power over, prevail against (with &); to

measure to an eract nicety (with ace. of thing and of pen.), aa at 89 v. 16 ; so alao in the Pass. at 65 v. 7 ; to estimate the value of

-0 9 0 "

(with double am), thus @ JÃ i l l hi** & 6 v. 91, "They have not made a just estimate of God ;I1 to be sparing (with J) . ; to determine, with which meaning i t is found in the

S '-" Pass. at 54 v. 12. )A* n.a. That which is determined or predestined of God, meaaure,

f c 0 - B ' -

value, power; ,ad l iJJ 97 v. 1, Tile night of , El Kadr, on which the Korftn was sent down from Heaven ; it may be rendered either '* the night of Power," or "the night of the predetermined decree," from a Mohammedan fable, that on this night are issued the Divine decrees ou all the affairs of the ensuing year ; i t is generally supposed to fall on the night

s-"" preceding the 24th of Ramadhn. n,a. The Divine decree, that which i i predestined, a definite quantity, a determi~ed measure; & f 9 0"

Ã , Â£->>-1T' v. 237, "Upon him who is in easy circumstances (shall be set) an amount according to his ability;" it is also read gz. !f 9 ' S tr ,pi plur. of ,,JJ comm. gend. A cauldron. ,j\s part. act. One who is able or has power over, one who determines beforehand. 51

s 'k. Able, potent. ÃˆA& part. pass. Determined. tl- A definite quantity, or determined measure, a space.--2 11. To make possible, dispose, prepare, to plan, devise, decree, determine, define; at 74 vv. 18, 19, and 20, i t means to lay plans or plots against the Koran; at 34 v. 17 it may be translated " We have facilitated;" $& 6 3 76 v. 16, "They shall determine the measure thereof (accord-

Â t..

ing to their desire)." AJ n.a. The act of

measuring or determining, a Divine decree.- Â - ' G 9 , iJi, part. act. VIII. f. Powerful, ible to pre-

I vail (with & -',. Â¥Â¥ f 9

IJM^S To be pure. ~ A Ã Purity, sanctity. P uÃ A<1\~he Holy Spirit, by which name the Mol.mmmedans designate the Angel Gabriel.

A f - 0

,,,,,dl The Holy One, an epithet of God.- Sf< Ã $3 11. To sanctify, bless (with J). IJMMI I

I 0

I part. pass. Sacred, holy. / ,Â¥

?A> aor. o. To precede; and $ aor. a. To betake 5 /-,

one'a-self, come to (with J). ,+A> Merit ; when of the fern. gend. it means A foot; Plur. -, , S T . s /- 9 ' L l j.kl. $Jd Old, ancient. Forefathers.

/-^ / -*A> 11. To bring upon (with ace. and J oj '. pers.) ; to do a thing before, prepare beforehand, send before (with J and with or with' , out ace.), as good works, which a man is saic to send before to bear witness for him at tht last day ; see 1st Epistle of S. Paul to Timothy chap. v. v. 24; to put forward (a threat)

1 0 f . 4 y Ls 'b , : threaten beforehand, as J^^ (^\ i s &-

50 v.27"Since we have already threatened yo1 beforehand ;" at 49 v. 1 there is an ellipse of thi

r - / ? /-

accus., the words \ye Y may probably meal 1 1 Do not put yourselves forward," or " do no obtrude your opinions ;" there are other read ings, but this seems best to accord with th context, which contains several hints on goo

,a ,, breeding and etiquette.-?JJu' V. To go before a t 74 v. 40 it means to go forward in the righ

, . . ' - xu

w a y . - p . L X. To desire to advance, wia '; ^,L- Â¥

to anticipate. part. act, One wh goea forward, or desires to advance.

\ s aor. o. To be a p e & i n taste and smell (food, -,A VIII. To imitate, copy (with u: L y s . 4 ' 1 . 4

a+\ imperat, for +I with the addition of

!,-' 4 -. called 41 \ *lÃ D. 8. Gr. T. I, p. 252. Jcl< 5 0k 9 for 6~ part. act. One who imitates (with

^->. ,J$ aor. i. To pelt, cast (with ace. and ,* or t >) ;

-, $7 & 34 v. 47, "He cu t8 his truth (over his servants);" a t 20 v. 90 we must understand the words ; to asperse,

0

pelt with abuse (with ace', and L+). 0

Ã aor. i. and a. To stand fast; remain quiet (with ^>), as at 33 v. 33, whew y/ is for a 2nd pers. fern. plur. of the imperative, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 229. Note. This word is frequently spelt 2, and is then to be derived in the usual way from the assimilated verb> q.v. ; to be cool, applied to the eyes, thus at 20 v. 41 Lfc-rfF 3 literally, "So that her eye might be coo1,"i.e. "That she might rejoice;" so also at 19 v. 26 & j>'J "And cool (or refresh) thy- self," literally, (' Be cool as to thine eye." Jp n.a. Stability, a fixed or secure place, reposi-

â. ' 0 !<it tory, place of abode. i,i Coolness ; (_Â 9 4 1 Delight,-literally, coolness-of the eye."

s -' t f &\ys (2nd declension) plur. of iJjJ\f A glass bottle ;" a t 27 v. 44 i t must be translated

- 1 6 . 0 0 Â¥ "Slabs of glass;" +y ^df 76 v. 16, "Glass bottles resembling silver," or it may be " Silver bottles re~embling glass."-y IV. To confirm, to cause to rest or remain (with

î//b >).--,Iu\, X. To remain firm (with ace. of Ãˆ,'

place). JSuM * part. act. That which remains firmly fixed or confirmed, abiding, lasting. .- ^^ 0 9 p- part, pass. Firmly fixed or establidied; as a noun of place it means a fixed abode; and 8 t 6 v. 06 " a fixed time ; " at 6 v. 93 there is an ellipse, to coniplete the sense we must read

*',, 4. I ,. 9 0 , jiwnn ,& ; the words may refer either to the loins of the Father, or a mansion upon earth.

1,. \J aor. a. and o. To read, rehearse to (with ace. and & of pers.). Period of a woman's

S 4 . J monthly courses. (JJ The Korftn, properly pronounced or-An.-^ IV. To cause to read or rehearse.

_/> To make a nigAtjourney; and aor. a. To approach, draw near to; Mf3 k 2 v. 183, "And do not go near (to transgress) them." r- *,Â¥ Proximity ; at 9 v. 100 it may be rendered "A means of drawing nigh." i. Plur. s Â¥Â -9 Pious works which draw men nigh unto

God. &.> comm. gend. Nigh, near, near at hand, either in place or time; yw) > Shortly after ; L^J as an adverb, Lately. ,_>' for 2; (2nd declension) D. 8. Or. T. 1, pp. 110 and 402, Affinity, relationship;

.4.. -0 ' s '>./ 1 ,d A relation. ^ b j n.a. A sacrifice,

or gift offered to God; see 8. Mark chap. vii. v. 11 ; a familiar acquaintance, the Entourage of a prince; a t 46 v. 27 it may perhaps be best translated I' as a means of access to God; " the false Deities there mentioned being supposed to be on familiar terms with God, and therefore likely to act as intercessors with him.

(2nd declension) comp. form, Closer, closest, nearer, nearest, more probable; at 16 v. 79 it means "In a shorter time," or "quicker." 0 90L, 0 . 4 .,,.. 1 Kinsfolk, kindred, those most nearly

^""'a, , related, ~ e l n t i o . n s h i ~ . - ~ . 11. To set before (with ace. and J1) ; to cause to draw nigh (with ace. and & or d) ; to offer (a

a 6' ' sacrifice); uJ part. pass. One who is made or permitted to approach, lionoiired.~i_^J1 VIII. To draw near.

a LC

.,* - aor. a. To mound. cj n.a. A wound. s >? aor. i. To colhct. i'S/* plur. of $ ~n ape.

3 1 aor. i. and o. To cut off. iJ Name of a noble Arab tribe descended from Ishmael, of which Mohammad's grandfather was Prince.

<,* aor. i. To cut; to turn away from (with ace. of pen. or thing). 3 n.a. A loan, especially one which is payable at the option of the

S , " St., borrower, and hence called dj ; according to some, however, the meaning of this expression is I' a loan at good interest."- $3 IT. To lend (with double acc.).

/-ly quadriliteral, To hit the mark. $% Plur. jiÃ‘fc (2nd declension) Paper.

$ am. o. To get the better o f another in drawing hit, to UrUn. ~ . I J Adversity, t int which strikes ; a name of the Day of Judgment.

$ aor. i. To VIII. To acquire, gain. S 0 ( , I

Â¥Ã‘ part. act. One who gains. 0 % ' 0 1 , - for d l fem. plur. imperat. of; q.v.

3 <-'Â¥ 2 aor. i. To join one thing to another. ..ly n.a. A <-<'-/ horn, a generation; Dual ^>, ol>l.ique w,

O^ tÃ‘ ! as + + I 1 ,J He of the two horns, Alexander S " the Great, see &; Plur. d. 2 Plur. ^v (2nd declension) An intimate companion.

I 9 . ^{f Korah, a proper name of foreign origin, and therefore of the 2nd declension, D. 8. Or.

S f I T. 1, p. 404.-,,,, part. pasa. 11. f. 1Wnd::-

s f c ' together.^^, part, act. IV. f. One who is Â¥ <: I

able to do a thing (with J of thing?.- , c * part. act. VIII. f. One who is associatcil with another, or follows in procession.

5 .."--: Sf nor. i. To entertain a pe s t . +J A city, town, -/L.,.-t

village ; Dual q b j 1 Tlie two cities i l e c c a and Et-'FA-if; Plur. 4.

- $ 20 think mil. &+ A Christian Priest. .'>Â .uf To compel any one to do a thing against his

a.,. will. PowerJuZ, a lion. kuJ nor, i. To swerve from justice ; also aor. i. and

o. To be just. G, n.a. Justice, equity ; at 21 v. 48 we have an instance of the noun of action used as an adjective, and remaining in the singular, although qualifying a noun in the plural ; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 280. &li part. act. One who acts unjustly or unrighteously. la} (2nd declension) comp, form, More just. - -Sl IV. To be just (with > or J'p. part. act. One who observes justice.

&G A balance; this word is said to be of Greek . origin.

0,; y aor. i. To divide into parts; to portion out ,- s 05 (with ace. and 2). y An oath. -2; A partition, a dividing, an apportionment.

IG, S-.I ?yJLÃ part. pass. Divided, distinct.-*Ã‡Ãˆ

-'

part. act. 11. f. Oue who apportions.-' '\s r 111. To swear unto (with ace. of pers.).- Â¥ ',.* + 1V. To swear (with ace. of oath and t_>, ' or with a verb preceded by J) ; at 7 v. 47 and elsewhere the substance of the oath immediately follows the verb, without the inter-

Ãˆ<,'-a vention of any particle, thus & yy^ \ 4: l4 30 v. 54, "The wicked will swear (that) . they have not tarried;" a t 75 v. 1 the words *-*J\ > are generally rendered "Verily I swear," i being held to be intensive ; so also at 56 v. 74 and other passages; according to some however the words may mean " I will not swear ; " the matter being too palpable to require the confirmation of an oath, see k- 8.0,

?lt; VI. To swear one to another (with v). .

= ^ * -*tÃ§3~ part. act. VIII. f. One wlio divides.- . - 'Â¥ ', ?\ X. To draw lota or divine by means of headless arrows.

3 aor. o. To be hard. iyv) n.a. Hardness. yiifi for &G D. 0. (3r.T. 1, p. 380, part. act. nard;

lift 1 ^ for the construction of the phrase e& J- l 39 v. 23 see D. 8. Or. T. 2, pp. 197 and 278 ; at the commencement of this verse there is a remarkable hiatus ; BeidAwge contents himself

5 'G0 'Â 0>0. by saying i^s,~s^ &f*- "The predicate of 'Â ' p is suppressed," but the sense may be

gathered from the concluding portion ; i t may be supplied somewhat as follows : " Shall he then whose breast God hath opened, etc. (be like unto one whose heart is hardened ?) ; Woe then unto those who are hard of heart;" D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 475.

a' 41, ^J A cucumber. JI^[ IV. f. quadriliteral, To become rough or creep with terror-the skin- (with >).

9 -. aor. o. To cut, lop, to follow, declare ; to narrate or relate, to make mention of (with ace. and &of pera.). $ n.a. A narrative, atory, history, the act of following ; La 18 v. 63, " Following their footsteps." $l.$ Retalia- tion.

\.as aor. i. To intend, to be moderate, steer a middle S 'Â¥ course. 1~01 The right way, the middle path,

t 6 Le juste milieu." &li part. act. Easy or s ^ I moderate (journey).-+& part. act. VIII. f.

One who keeps to the right path, a man of good intentions ; alao one who halts between two opinions.

2 To be short; aor. o. To diminish, cut short, as s 'Â¥ prayers (with ,I. ,.a n.a. Plur. A

palace, castle. Ã§< part. act. One who keeps

J G f ^ ^ in restraint. JF F 'art. pass. Confined, kept

3-Â¥ 9 at home (a woman).-? part. act. 11. f. One who cuts short ( h i s h a i r ) . - - IV. To desist.

nor. i. To dash in pieces ( a ship), -6 A heavy gale of wind. nor. i. To break in pieces, demolish utterly.

L<u nor. o. To he distant. Distant. i<-a for^ D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 105, Fern. i_?s (2nd declension) comp. form, More remote,

,^ iL*^? ' / i- further; ^ - S \ +Ã‘ 17 v. 1, "The further mosque," the Uoly House a t Jerusalem, on the site of which now stands the mosque of El Alisa.

2 %or. o. Yo ioi-i;.-,-;!.;y\ VII. To threaten to fall down.

, ,< + &or. i. To cut off. n.a. Trefoil or clover. ,. aor. i. To decree, create, accomplish, bring to an end, complete ; to fulfil (as a term or vow); to determine (with ace. and of pers.) ; to pass a sentence (with ace. and & of p e w ) ; i'JÃ 2 28 v. 14, " He slew him," or "made , .. an end of him ; I 9 to command (with :1); to make known or reveal (with ace. and & of pers.) ; to judge (with u) ; to judge between (with 2 ofpersons and + orcj). part. , act. One who decrees, determines, judges, etc.; JÃ‘GT'.-J~ .. , tf 69 v. 27, " Oh! would to God that i t (death) had made an end of me."

part. pass. Decreed, D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 330.

\as anr. o. To cut. & A judge's sentence. 'ju aor. o. To drop. 3 Molten brass. Ju plur,

of , i A side, a tract o f e a r t h or heaven< GG Liquid pitch.

& aor. a. To cut asunder, cut down (a tree), cut 1

off; to pass or traverse as at 9 v , 122 ; i,ÃJÃ & . A 2 9 v. 28, "Ye infest the highway," or 6 I commit highway robbery ;" a t 22 v. 15 it is understood by some to mean " Let liiin hang himself," or " let him 11aiig himself, and then cut (the rope) ;" the passage is rather cbscure, but the idea seems to be, Let him resort to any means however extravagant. A part ; accordinp to some the first watch of the night. f"; A part of thc night, the darkness of the night towards morning; also plur. of k& A pal' or portion. &G part,. act. One who decides, as at 27 v. 32. " LÃ‡Ã‘Â£ f " ' pa1 t . pass.

, - Cut off.-$ 11. TO cut off, cut in pieces,

'9 -- / I t ,I - ,< f *

divide, disperse separately; +L. \+, 47 v . 24, "And would ye sever the tics of relationship?" to cut out (clothes),as at22v,20.-'& V. To be cut up into piece's, divided asunder ; ' 9-" , /Â ,/Â JL-' Ã -la* 6 v. 94, "A schism has been made between you," or " y e have been cut off from one another; " For the impersonal use of verbs eee D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 245.

" % aor, i. Togather the ci?t&age. plur. of & A bunch of grapes. 2; The thin skin which envelops a date-done.

& aor. o. To sit, sit upon, sit still, remain quiet a t home; it is sometimes used in a manner similar to those verbs which are styled by

./ Â¥ 9 .Â¥Â¥ grammarians 3 u\+\ and may then be rendered to become; instances occur a t 17 vv. 23 and 3 1 ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 121, note; to beset (with <Ã‘Â¥ as a t 7 v. 84; to set snares

, , , i - P . *, , Y L l /

for(with J); thus at7v.15, LA^; *^AM H / I , f 4. &J \ "Verily I will set snares-or lie '

ambush-for them (in) thy straight way ; thi word &I> is here put in the accus. as being a f)a or adverbial expression embodying thi idea of place ; it stands for 2 or &O\> &c

D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 393, note; a similar passagt is found at 9 v. 5. i$ n.a. The act of sitting etill, see &6. 9 comm. gend. and number, Sitting. Plur. ^>$ part. act. One who sits still or remains at home; Fern. Plur. &\y (2nd declension) Foundations, women

s *k 0 who are past child-bearing. ~ x a ^ n.a. Plur. &liL* (2nd declension) The act of sitting still or remaining at home, a seat or place of sitting down, a station, encampment, as at 3 v. 117.

S , 9 9 aor. a. To descend.-? part. act. VII. f. That which is torn up by the roots.

3 aor. i. and o. To return from a journey. JG? plur. of JM A lock.

I** &or. o. To follow.-3 11. To cause to follow or succeed (with + of pera. and &). , 3 aor. i. To be few, to be little. a Few, little, small. (MI (2nd declension) coup, form, Fewer, poorer.-$ 11. To make few, cause to appear few, as at 8 v. 46.-j^ IV. To bear, carry. aor. i. To turn, return (with d). 3 n . a .

Plur. il>$ A heart.-(Â¥J 11. To cause to 9 w0f turn, turn upside down, upset; <.2S b_ >Uu, 18

0

v. 40, " He turned his hands upside down," or with the backs to his belly, a sign of grief; to

Â¥Â¥ -00 0c/Â -0 4 t -0 P turn about ; Jv JJi 1 <LlH t_^Ju, 24 v. 44, "God maketh the night and the day to take turns, or succeed each other in turns."- i_^i; V. To be turned about, changed. = n.a. The act of turning about, a vicissitude of fortune, whether good or bad; at 16 v. 48 i t

means employment in business, and at 26 v. 219 it may either be translated behaviour or going to and fro, or it may refer to the various postures assumed by the Moslems when at

S 6" 9

prayers. & Time or place where any one is busily employed, as in journeying to and fro, e t c . - P I VII. To be turned about, troubled, to turn one's-self or return back (with or without ^\I; to be overthrown or turned back, as a t 3 v. 122 ; to be turned from the true faith, in which sense it may be taken a t 2 v. 138, as well as in other places, where

" t a * the words & occur ; i ^A. \ > ,',& 26 v. 228, " What turn their affairs shall take," meaning "what shall be their future state;" Literally, " By what kind of a ,

return they shall return (to God)." a' . / s 0^ 9 part. act. One who returns. & part,

pass. That which is exchanged; a t 26 v. 228 i t must be considered as a noun of time and place, D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 305.

5 aor. i. To collect (water, etc.). 4% (2nd declension) plur. off$ An ornament of the neck, wreath or garland. qOdÃ (2nd declension) plur. of s& A key.

3 nor. a. To remove, extract.-fS^ IV. To desist. aor. i. To pare M e mill, etc.). Plur. ;,6!

A pen ; a headless arrow used in casting lots. aor, i. To fry; to hate. j l S part. act. One ^ who abhors (with J).

2 To raise the head and refuse to drink (a camel). S-t, 9 -c part. paw. IV. f. One whose head if

forced up so that he cannot see. $ aor. o. and i. To game witA dice; and2 aor. a.

To be white. 9 n.a. The moon (especially from the 3rd to the 26th day).

Â*J> aor. i. and o. To canter or bound. iJaf*f A shirt; Fr. Chemise.

^ /Â L-' \a quadriliteral, To tie up the neck of a leather bottle. J',& Calamitous (day).

,ÂJ aor. a. To goad (an elephant) c on the head. &^ (2nd declension) plur. of A mace.

,j& To he lousy. & generic noun, Lice. i j aor. o. To be devout, obedient to God (with J).

&,G part. act. One who is obedient to God, devout, constant in prayer.

â-Ã To hinder; and l$ aor. a. To -despair (with Â¥ 9 / fJ^

>). fcyJ n.a. Despair. , part. act. One who despairs.

3 quadriliteral, To lease the country and inhabit a town. J@ ~lur.>.U (2nd declension) A

S f G , 9

talent, 1200 ounces of gold. Jâ part. pass. . / 4,

Counted by talents; the expression ALÃ§ / , O , f -^ jw 1 3 v, 12 is equivalent to '' i1eaPs oi

talents." $ aor. a. To beg ; and ^y aor. a. To be content.

f^\i part. act. One who asks humbly, also one S 6 9 who is content.-* part. act. IV. f. One

who lifts up the head. ly aor. o. To get, acquire, 3 plur. of A

cluster of dates. *s ^J aor. i. To acquire.->\ IV. To cause to

acquire, to make contented. 9 '4,L-C 2 aor. a. To overcome, oppress. l J \ The Omni-

potent, the Victorious God. >l< part. act. Ã --4 One who subdues (used with &) ; # \ The

Conqueror, a name of God. ,0 $ plur. imperat. of 2, q.v.

iÃ§/ lor. o. To dig. i_Ãˆ A space, distance. &G aor. o. To nourish. hi>\ pliir. of &ti

s 9 Nourishment.-iÃ§_Ã§i part, act. IV. f. Watch- ful, a guardian.

t * . / G 0 &\J aor. o. To compare by measurement. s L{ oblique dual of ~9 coinm. gend. A bow.

5, iG aor, o, To cover ( a female). clÃ Plur. A+ A level plain.

j6 aor. o. To say, speak (with J ) ; instances not unfrequently occurwhere this word is altogether omitted; for example at 39 v. 4, where I&

L f 9 <G.-

is understood before the words .->i+i ; and again at the commencement of the 1 5 t h verse of the 25th chapter, where we must under-

& ; this ellipse is generally in- stand '-{ j ' * ' 1 dicated by the conjunction ,\, D. S. Gr. T. 1,

p. 568, and T. 2, p. 468 ; see also J. J; n.a. A saying, speech, that which is pronounced, a sentence, a word; Plur. JG?, Plur. of Plur. (2nd declension). J A word, saying, pronouncing, speech, discourse, con- venation ; at 43 v. 88 if we read ,&; " And the saying (of the prophet)," it must be considered as the complement to the antecedent

in the 85th verse. 3% part. act. A speaker, see also ~ l i for &.- J% V. To fabricate falsely, counterfeit (with ace. and & of pers.).

pG aor. o. To stand, stand fast or firm, stand still, atand up-to prayer (with ^\ and 2, or &

0 t-.

of place") to come (with & of place) ; ,A$ 4 9 4-1 ^y 14 v. 42, "On the day when their

account shall stand good, or when the reckon- ing shall come ; '* to stand before (with J) ; qq i/aT'i&, 57 v. 25, "That men should

' 0

be righteous in their dealings," used also with 5 6 : J of pers., as at 4 v. 126. ry n.a. A people.

s-; s',, *Ã‡ or **Ã Right, true; at 98 v. 4 we may understand the word &xtf Religion, before , -#4 5 -,

\. 9 part. act. Standing, firm, upright, 16

certain to come, ns at 18 v. 34. rl2 Right, equity. plur. of ' S t a n d i n g upright, ^ erect; ,Ã is also a noun of action, a t 4 v. 4 it m a y b e rendered a means of support, and

Â¥ s-- at 5 v. 98 an asylum. Ãˆ\ One who has a high standing, superior to, firm, upright, as 4 qG !&$G LÃ‘ l;& 4 ~.134,"0bserve strict integrity when bearing witness before

P i ' 4 God." lyJl The Self-~ubsisting (God). k ~ r ~ h e Resurrection. <$ (2nd declension) conip. form, More or most right; a t 17 v. 9 there is an ellipse, the sentence if com-

G - 0 ' pleted would stand thus ^=J l AJU$ d$

4 9 4 . , $1 L+; for the syntax of aGectives of this form see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 301 et seq.; & $7 Lit. "More correct in pron~nciation,~' or " more suitable for distinct pronunciation." s ,, ?liLÃ Time or place of standing, stationary abode ; state or dignity, in which sense i t may be applied a t 55 v. 46, and elsewhere; i t may

/ 9 , / Â ¥ also mean God's tribunal; bbl* 5 v. 106, i t s 6, In their p l a ~ e . " - ~ y n.a. 11. f. Symmetry.

/ ft -&I IV. To cause to stand upright; to .a 4, -

observe or continue in (with ace.), as i,Ld 1 tM 2 v. 172, " IIe is constant a t prayer;" To set straight, institute or appoint (with ace. and J) ; . 1% '-, y. ' . p H 9 ,. J ; li 18 v. 105, "And we ^Â¥( will allow them (their works) no weight on the

,a 4 9

day of resur~ection." ,q ;.)>,..A\ 65 v. 2, " And offer straightforward evidence be-

s -' fore God." ?S\ for 26[ D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 294, n.a. The act of being constant (in prayer); & ;q f f _ 16 v. 82, " On the day of your

s .. halting, or pitching your tents." ,.+\a and % , , 9 ^ A ^ L Time or place of abode, station; ,la - ' / f 4

Ã ‡ L Ã 35 v. 32, "The mansion of eternal abode." s+ part. act. One who observes religious rites, constant, lasting, permanent ;

, --Â / A /Â ,.-& JÃ‘- lyib 15 v. 76, And verily they /Â 6 ' / Â

serve to confirm men in the right way ; "' the construction of the passage is rather involved,

9 -0

but the meaning seems pretty clear ; & \ ~iy^T " Those who are constant in prayer ; " for the construction see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 183. , .- /"

-*UÃ‘i X. To act uprightly (with of pers.) ; walk uprightly in the paths of religion

5 / ^ Ã (with &I, .. . part. act. Right, righteous, upright, well constituted. To excel in strength ; and ^Sys aor. a. To be

2 . 9 6 ' 9

strong, Plur. 4 Power, strength, vigour, resolution, firmness, force, determination to

: 9 observe a law. ,_f; Strong, powerful.-+ s u / 4

for I_?ÃˆA part. act. IV. f. One who inhabits a , desert.

3 aor. i. To break the shell ( a c h i c k e n ) . - 3 11. To prepare or destine for any one (with ace. and J of pers.).

JG aor. i. To t a k e a siesta at noon. 3'5 part. act. One who sleeps a t mid-day. J<A.< Place of repose a t noon.

d d

d Fern. &affixed pronoun of the second person I and prepositions, and thy when affixed f . I singular, meaning thee when affixed to verbs 1 nouns.-CS is also a particle prefixed

nouns, and to other particles, and meaning as, like ; it is considered as a preposition, and governs nouns in the genitive ; when prefised

5 , , to the noun ,k Ã the latter is redundant ; .. 2 , S a m p l e , >. &.5 2 v. 203, " Like the rosi!ml~lance of a grain," D. 3. Gr. T. 1, p. 473,

'-Â I ' t'ein. A cup ; no verbal root. 1 - 1 ,

^-,li How many (",;A .,-*) ; this word is re- piirileil by grammarians as tin inileclinnble noun; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 454. aor. o. To invert, throw face downwards (wi th ;).-a: part. act. I V . f. Grovelling (with 6. JÃ of face). aor. i. To throw prostrate, expose to ignominy.

i3u>s nor. i. and o. To injure any one in the liver. Trouble, misery.

2' aor. o. To be older than another; 2 nor. a. To be aged; and 2 aor. o. To be ; to bi; a reiglity or grievous matter (with 3 or of pcrs.); L.h > 40 v, 37, " I t is grievously odious;" the subject of the verb is here said to be meaning J!J~-^TÂ¡~ÃˆS , , J Ã ; <-(S 18 v. 4, " H ~ W odious I word ;" iÃ‘), is here used as a verb of blame, D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 225, note; &,J-> ^j !-> 17 v . 53, " Created matter of that kind which in your opinions i t is most hard (to raise to life) ; To attain majority. 3 Greatness, pride ; 3 24 v. 11, " He who hath taken in hand to magnify it." ,-( o.a. of -;' Old age. 3 Plur. f\3 (2nd declen- . . sion) Great, grand, large, aged, grievous; 9 9 " Pfii % 20 v. 74, "Verily he is your chief, or-your master ;" PfÃ‘ "The biggest or the eldest of them." Jg (2nd declension) plur.

9, s Ãˆ

i f i,Ã‘ A grievous sin. ,LS Of great mapi- tude. ~ 1 u r . P (2nd declension) comp. form, Greater, more grievous, etc., greatest ; Fern. 3 (2nd declension), Fern. ~ l u r . 2 ; , * 4 , L ^ 5, ^& \ q] 74 v. 38, "Verily i t is one of

b / / ^ 4

the greatest (calamities);" L&J l plur. of & being understood. 3%: (2nd declension) Greatness, glory.-> 11. To magnify (God)

a 6.

hy saying -.$I d~^, ,A n.a. The act of nngnifj-ing God by saying:JI X--I IT. To e x t o l . - . V. To act insolently (with J

:I-,/, of place). + part. act. One who is haug11ty

?-, / 9 -.= and arrogant. +! 1 The Self-exalting, a

name of ~ o d . - 7 . X. To be puffed up with pride, to be^--- vilh insolence (with & of

LA -1,Ã . ',L, L--

place); at 38 v. 76 is for _;,-!--.IT 1). 8. Or. T. 1, p. 71 ; to reject wit" insolence

pa1 t. act. One who is proud and haughty. t_..S To throw down headlong(with .if, rt. 9

q.v. aor. o. To wHe, write down, transcribe; to

prescribe, command, ordain or decree in writ-

"And we wrote for them therein a command that, etc. ;I' to inscribe (with ace. and d) ; a t 52 v. 41, and 68 v. 47 the sense requires that we understand the words. " from the preserved table of God's decrees." &$ part. act. A writer or scribe. Gg n.a. Plur. >_2 A book, writing, Scripture, written revelation, decree, letter; at 2 v. 236 i t may be translated I t s ' s

the prescribed period ;'I fÃ‘^ ia a name given to the preserved tablet of God's decrees,

from which the Koran is said to have been copied ; these words are generally found without the definite article, in order to enhance by a certain vagueness our ideas of its rnagnifi- cence-" Omne ignotum pro magnifico ! " _)l .)I The Holy Scriptures, the Kodo, also

I the book in which a record is kept of all men's t actions, and an extract from which, each one I shall have placed in his hand at the last day,

17v. 14; 4$TÂ¡& The Jews and Christians. tf, - , s f-, +b$ for &&, see Ã .JL& "_!-,part. , , ,, pass. Written down.-+ 111. To give a slave' a contract of freedom on payment of a certain sum (with ace.).-i_^l VIII. To cause to be written.

0 ,, , f^S aor. o. To conceal, hide (with double ace.) ; tc

keep back (evidence). aor. o. and i. To collect into one place.

A heap of sand. Â¥ To be superior to in point o f numbers ; a n d 3

s. aor. o. To be much, many, numerous. IJ^ Multitude, abundance. 3 Abundance, and especially of good th in0 ; name of a river i n Paradise; this word is variously expounded,

Much, many, numerous. 31 (2nd declension) comp. form, More, most, more abundant, the greater number.-- 11. Tc . 6'l.l- multiply.--1 IV. To multiply, as .-ySli k& 11 v. 34, "And thou hast multiplied dispute@ with us."-~^; n.a. VI. f. The acl

,,c,L, of mul t ip ly ing . - - \ X. To wish for much, make great uae of (with & of thing). . 4.

Jf aor. a. To study or labour after anything. c 5 -

c J>S n.a. The act of labouring after anything. +\S part. act. One who labours after (with c0 Ã ). I l - fb

a00 0, ,t-

,>AS aor. o. To be muddy.- \ V I I . To shoot downwards (the stare).

J aor. a. (apparently for u) To be hard; and dJkS aor. i. To be niggard&.-,fS^ IV. To be niggard1 y.

0 ,

->i aor. i . To lie, lie to, falsely invent (with ace.); to tell lies about or a g u u t (with &). 1,)'$ pass. " They were the victims of falsehood." 9 n.8. A lie; used also ae an adjective, lying, false, as >-J$ & 12 v. 18, "With

^ s * 0

false blood," D. S. Qr. T. 2, p. 280. uf i ?/ . - part. act. Lying, a liar ; a l56 v. 2 <iu& agrees

3 with $ understood. <_>I. One given to lying, a great liar. iL\ n.a. A falsehood.

<Â¥ I t - ^ "Â # *I-,

+,jkL* part. pass. Belied; (Ã‘ &, In- . - a - ^

fallible.-+& 11. To aoouse of falsehood or imposture, falsely deny (with ace. or with +); frequently used without any object being ex- premed; thus at 6 v. 149 where we may

- H , -0 understand &.I as the complement of the verb, D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 454 ; $3 L& for

I* ' &id 23 v. 26, " In respect of their having accused me of falsehood," D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 497 ; At chapter 55 the word J^iS " Do ye both falsely deny," which occurs so frequently, is addressed to men and genii, the two species of rational beings who are mentioned in the 13th and 14th verses. &.& n.a. The act -., of imputing falsehood. (Ã‘ Ac, part. act. One who falsely denies, or accuses of falsehood or imposture.

7 aor. a. To return. $ A return, a turn of luck ; 2' 67 v, 4, Two other times, twice again.

->} To tms t a rope, grim.. 43 n.t. Grief, dietress.

v% A shed or stable for goats; no verbal root. .,} A throne. 9' aor. o. To be superior to another in generosity.

3 Plur. 3 Honourable, noble, generous, kind, beneficent, gracious, munificent, agreeable, as a t 56 v. 43 ; % 25 v. 72, " Cour-

f -<- teously." $7 (2nd declension) comp. form, Most beneficent, ria$ honourable,-;y I I. To

S Ã ‡ t honour. ?,L part. pass. ~ o n o ~ e d . - ~ f IV.

s , To honour, make honourable. i*g\ n.a, Honour. JL* part. act. One who honours. SÂ¥'I f part. pass. Honoured.

8 ^ J^S aor. a. To detest, dislike, be averse from (with S^n"

' ace.). *,S and ns.8. Repugnance, a trouble, some thiag disagreeable ; k a i n s t one'e will; 63 46 v. 14, "With pain and grief,' 5 " u,\ part. act. One who dislikes or is averse -, Â f

from any thing. a,& part, paas. Abominated, hateful.-it 11. To render hateful (with ace.

/.%

and ^J\ of.pere.).-$ IV. To compel one to do a thing against his will (with ace. of pers. and $ of thing, also with ace. of pers. and

5 ,b .<-ÃˆÂ¥ n.a. Compulsion. -

(J-miS aor, i. To gain, acquire, seek after, gather (riches) ; in the Koran it is frequently used in reference to the provision which a man has laid up against a future life, be it good or bad; in this sense it may often be translated to do or commit; 3 L< 2 V. 225, Lit.

I "What your hearts have gained," meaning i t what your hearts have assented to."- - VIII. To seek after, eeek to gain ; +,here seems to be but little difference in the KoAn between the 1st and the 8th forms; the

* ,, latter like Ãˆ_Ã‘ may occasionally require to * ^ ^ 4 4

be rendered to deserve; \dl L-A) 33 v. , *

58, "Without their having been guilty of anything to deserve such treatment."

il aor. o, Tb fail in jinding customers. $u n .a. A want of purchasers; the act of remaining unsold.

aor. i, To cut up (cloth). 4 A segment, a piece cut off. J plur. of a A piece or segment$ adverbially, In pieces. S -L, /Â I

JH aor. a. To be lazy. Ju plur. of SÃ‘ Lazy, , sluggish. I

aor. o. To clothe (with double ace,). Sy Clothing.

u' To remove, take off-a cover. &% aor. i. To uncover, lay bare, remove, take off 1

Â¥ t- -/ f , L Ã ,' (with ace. and 2) ; JL 4, f-y. 68 v. 42, "On a certain day a leg shall be made , hare ;" a phrase expressive of very great calamity; it ie left vague and indeterminate to increase the feeling of awe ; the idea is taken from a woman who tucks up her gar- e n in f l i t & n.8, The act of remov- ing, eb. &g part. act. One who removes, takes off, or reveals ; at 58 v, 53 & & u l ~ agrees

t f ^ I ' " Ã‘

with 3 and at 39 v. 39 with _,J,I understood.

AS aor. i. To abstain from chewing the cud (a came!'). &'i part. act. One who restraint, obstructs or chokes, Grieving inwardly and in silence. 'fw part. pass. Oppressed with silent sorrow.

_^Ã aor. o. and i. To have swelling breasts (a giro. ,L. 1-1

9 LxiJ I dual of t J*S The ankle-joint. A^Ã§ A die, a building in form of a Cube, and hence the Ka'ba or square temple at Mecca. L&^ (2nd declension) plur. of 3 part. act. A damsel with swelling breasts; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 343, note.

aor. o. To hem a garment, to withhold, restrain, 3 ,

keep back (with ace. and ic). d5 n.a. fern. A hand. ZK The whole; A S Altogether,

u 9 m v

wholly, entirely, universally; \&\J 3g 9 V. 36, " War with the idolaters throughout the whole of them."

\Â aor. a. To turn back (transitive). Like, equal.

iJLJ& aor. i. To gather together. tÃ‘'l& A place where tliings are gathered together.

aor. i. To cover; aor. o. To deny-the Grace or the existence of God,-to be ungrateful, impious or an unbeliever, to disbelieve (with +I.

and;$ m a . Infidelity, disbelief, inpat i - tude. aJ>S n.a. Denial. >IS part. act. One who denies or is ungrateful for benefits received, an b e l i e v e r , infidel ; Plurals :sf.!< 3 and S,," ifS, ; a t 57 v. 19 JOG? may be translated " Husbandmen," as those who cover over the seed ; Fern. Plur. 3 (2nd declension). 2 An ungrateful, disbelieving person.

S ' , ,

Very ungrateful or unbelieving. 5% An atonement, an expiation, or that which is given

s t * as an expiation. camphor . - - 11. To cover over, expiate (with ace. of crime, and 0 , of pers.) .-- IV. To make one an un. believer.

3 aor. o. To nourish, take care of, bring up foi another (with ace. and J). A portion

I, 4 * ' a like part ; @ I ,.i Dhtl-kefl, a mum assigned by commentators to a variety o individuals, as Elijah, Joshua, Zachariah, etc According to some the name was given t( Elijah on account of his long-continued fast. ing, that being one of the meanings of the vert (LÃ‡ ; or because he is said to have maintainec

a number of his countrymen who fled to him for protection ; a tradition probably founded upon the story of Obadiah in the Old Testa- ment. @ A sponsor, surety, bail.-$ 11. same as s,-sI IV. To make one answer- able, as L&$l 38 v. 22, " Mate me respon- sible for her, or commit her into my care."

J& am. i. To be enough, to suffice; aa iJ 2 \$ 13 v. 43, "God is sufficient as a witness," see + ; for the substitution of the preposition and genitive for the nominative case, see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 55; & is also used with

, t - P - ^ > ? - a & ,,, a double accusative, as (Â¥.r"^*@ dl dy ~ @ 3 3 v. 25, "AndGod was a sufficient (protector) to the true believers in battle ;" similar instances are found at 2 v. 131 and 15 v. 9 5 ; another usage is with fc~> and i 1 , thus & Â¥) 27 & 41 7.53, " 1; it not enough that thy

, , Lord is, etc.;" or with ace. and ,I, as 3 t,t ' < / I " J ,Ã ASJ 3 v. 120, " Is i t not enough for you that, etc." i_*g for 3 part. act. One who

f ,t, , 9 0 4 -'c/% is sufficient for; i_^ dJi l 4 1 3 9 v. 37, , ' l a not God a sufficient (protector of) his servant?" for the construction see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 182.

1 aor. i. To be weary. 3 n.a. A heavy burthen, also a domestic servant who is maintained by his master. 1$ By no means; known by grammarians as a particle of reprimand or repulsion, in the latter sense i t may be rendered "Out upon him or them," and although by some i t has been interpreted occasionally to mean certainly or assuredly, others have in these instances supposed an ellipse ; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 534, note. $ a noun subatantiva meaning totality or universality; it is always

used with a complement either expressed or understood, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 145, and is then to be translated All, the whole, eacli, every one; when the complement is understood i t takes the tanween and governs alike the sing.

6 , 5 and plur., thus LJ*-z &JsS> ^a? JS 13 v. 2,

< - , /

"Each (one) runs to an appointed goal ;" again /&- ;, ?#, ^Â¥ 9 \ 'IS JS, for 8 v. 56, "And they were all (of them) unrighteous." tÃ I As often as, how often soever; for its employ- inent with the Preterite see D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 185, and with the Aorist T. 2, p. 33. masc, and bJ fern. Both, each of the two; these words are never used without a deter- minate complement, as &!$ 17 v. 24, " Both of then) ;" and >r'& 18 v. 31, " Each of the two gardens," D, 8. Or. T. 2, pp. 155 and 243. (LAS Kindred, a distant relative.

1" IS aor. a. To krep safe. Ãˆ_- nor. o. To sew a leathern thong into a b a g ,

and aor. i. To imitate the liarkhy o f dogs t_-J A dog-,-^s.; One who trains dogs 01

oilier animals to hunt. N.11. Tlic verb is no1 found in t h e ii. f.

2 aur. n. 7'topt.t on a sour or austere look. \S. L.

part. act. One who grins and shows his teeth 4 nor, a, XI be mgrosstd by an object.-& 11

To compel a person to do anything difficult or above his strength (with double ace.); 11 tlio Koran we invariably find this verb used with 1 and f$ a t 4 v. SO, if we read ^Lf 1 we must understand '3 as the nominative, " Ni) soul shall be compelled (to fight) except thine own soul," but there are other readings.

5 - - ' -4 part. act.V. f, A troublesome meddler, or a specious pretender.

s ," , , IS' aor. i . To wound. *U A word ; 7 v. ,

141, " By m y speaking to thee." & Plur. < / a'., . 1

l>L& and *lf A word, a decree; (_ AS! I 4 39 v. 20, " The sentence of punishment ;" a t

- ^ / t., . 3 v. 57 the words sly- ~$3 Jl may be translated "To a like or equal determination ;" The Word of God, Jesus Christ, who is said , by the Moslems to be so named, because he was conceived from the word of God alone without Father ; at 3 5 v. 11 and elsewhere i s used in the sing. as though it were a collec-

9 -J) - 0 9 . 4 ? / G - ' 0 ,

live noun, thus l Jfl\ 1\)~^_>. ,+', "TO ,s /

him ascends the good word." "f \i 11. To speak 1 to or with (with ace.). J-L' n.a. The act of

,>,, speaking to.- .It.; V. T o utter a word, speak of (with u). ji impera;. fern. of 3 q.v. L'

3 interrogative conjunctive particle, Horn much, , how many, followed by > with t^ie genitive; How long a time, followed by the verb, or the

-' Â¥/, 0 9 L , verb and the acc, as a& . , . . + 23 v. 114, " What number of years have y e remained 7''

3 affixed masc. pronoun of the 2nd pers, plur. You, o r Dual a'. Note. Each of the Aruh pronouns is considered an indeclinable noun ; D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 455. 7 aor, o. TO cover. J*L*^ plur. of 2 he. s~u-at11 or pat he in which the flowers of the Date- Palm are enveloped, a bud. aor. o. To be whole, perfect. ,>Ã‡ part. act. Whole, complete.-J-Ã§ IV. To perfect (with ace. of thiug and J of pera.) ; to fulfil, complete. aor. a. To be blind from birth. s^S\ (2nd declension) D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 403, Blind from birth.

s .L 3 To cover. y ~ l and 3 plum. of 3 A cover- i ing of any kind, as a veil, shelter, etc. ,

s '", is also the plur. of J Idem. &A part. pass. Covered over, hidden, close kept.-37 IV. To hide (with ace. and J).

3 To cut, to be ungrateful. n.a. cornm. gender, Ungrateful.

3 aor. i . To bury (a treasure) beneath the earth; to treasure up (with ace. and J). 7 n.a. Plur. J$ A treasure.

,

aor. i. To lie in a covert (a deer). $;g part. 1 act. That d i c h tides itself, Plur. 3 A 1 I name applied to the stars, and especially to I tlwse planets which, from their proximity to

the sun, occasionally hide themselves in his rays.

Ã§_ A cave, cavern ; no verbal root. & To be of mature age, from 30 to 50. $$ One

of full age, from30 to 50 years old. 3 aor. a. and o. To prophesy, to be a soothsayer.

&G part. act. A soothsayer. &M see sIA for G.

l^Ã‘ Initial letters of the 19th chapter, see FT. 2 plur. of 3, see 3. . .

Gg aor. o. To drink out of a fÃ‘'& &$ Plur. 497 A goblet without spout or handle, a cup.

a for J)Â aor. a ; &4 or I J4 2nd pera. sing. 0 L - ' Â pret. for WJ+; D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 242, To

! I impede; to be just on the point of, to want

I but little of, m p;GJ iJr& 2 v.

1 19, "The lightning all but took away their I eight ;" when used with a negative, the nega-

I tion applies to the verb which follows sg, thus

I )3i '& I;)' 2 v. 66, "And they wanted but I > Ã ? --0 Â¥- little of not doing it ; " aVJ, Ã 43 v. 62,

Lit. "And he wants but little of not articulat-

ing," or " he can hardly articulate clearly ; " D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 213.

0 ^ )lS aor. o. To twist up a turban,-;> 11. To cause

to intertwine, or make one thing lap over another (with ace. ana &); this seems to be the literal meaning of the word at 39 v. 7; at 81 v. 1 it may be translated " I t ia folded up," as a garment that is laid away; a parallel passage is found in St. Paul's Epistle to the Hebrews ch. 1 v. 12, where the Apostle in translating the 102nd Psalm uses the word Al&t?, " Thou shalt roll or fold them up." i/& n.a. The act of folding up.

>)S TO shine brilliantly (iron). Plur. (2nd declension) A star.

,, aor. o. To be, become, happen, exist; for its influence on the formation of various tenses see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 160 et seq. 3 governs

%I t - s i - 0 , . its attribute in the ace., Ex. <fcÃ§ wLJ \ J5 2 v. 209, " Mankind were one people

or sect ;" with the preposition J it signifies 5- 0. 0 0 ' ,

to have, mihi est, possess ; SJ\ +J $ JJ 3 v. 11, "Ye have already had a miracle;" to have in one's power, as \a,&.$,J . J Ji LÃ 2 v. 108, "They cannot enter them ;" also to be fit and proper, as 9, 'Ji 3 v. 73, " I t is not fitting for a man that;" 3 3rd pas. plur. fern. pret. for 3 ; a, &, &, and

^ 9" &, for etc. aorist conditional ; bÃ§iJ 12 L /Â .,Â¥

v. 32 for J&, energetic form of aorist, "And s >'-' </> --Â 0. verily he shall be." J , A place; AIL, 10

v. 29, "(Remain in) your places; " Beidtiwee explains the ace. in this place by an ellipse of the verb $2~ " Remain in," which governa the ace. ; another explanation is given by De

5 . 0

Sacy, Gr. T. 1, p. 502. dlL< A place, pur-

pose, inten tion ; PIL. $ 6 T. 135, " AC- , 0,'

cording to your ability."-&~il X. To f --, '.-

humiliate one's-self; L ) U 3 v. 140 is thought by some to be the viii. f. of q.v. and with the above meaning, the \ being due to a poetic license known as PGl or Saturation ; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 497.

^f^ aor. i. To cauterize. 3 So that. Lest. -J So that not; particles

governing the subjunctive, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 202. ,' am. i. To contrive a stratagem for (with J of , peis.) ; to plot against (with ace. of pers. or

J a prefixed affirmative particle, Verily, surely, certainly ; when prefixed to the article JY the

Â¥Â ''-' latter loses its I, thus +!J 21; for ~ Ã § " 2 v. 144, "Verily it is the truth." For the divers applications of j and the names it bears in consequence see D. S. Qr. T. 1, p. 504, see also 4.

J a prefixed preposition which denotes both the genitive and dative cases, meaning To, for, unto, on account of, in order to, belonging to, see .$ ; As & expresses the condition of a debtor, so docs J that of a creditor, thus J, , & He owes me; thus also 3 2 v, . .. 276, "What is past shall be credited to him,"

f' 9A.Ã i.e. he shall be pardoned ; *I>,, see 8. v. 39 ; when prefixed to the aorist conditional it gives

,,./, '/',Â¥Â it the force of an Imperative, as &+ -+, 0 9- ,, Ã 4 , ,.,+}=Ã*1 12 v. 67, " And on him let those who

with J); &for ^J-f 7 T. 194, " Devise , a plot against me," D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 497. For &A$ 17 v. 76 and 37 v. 54 see for 24 n.a. A plot, stratagem, fraud, trick, cunning, contrivance. &part. pass. Plotted against.

iÃ‘Ã aor. i. To cut. a How? in what way? D. S. Or. T. 1, pp. 185 and 205, and T. 2, p. 33.

$ aor. i. To measure, measure out to any one (with ace. of pers.). 3 n.a. A measuring

, .G, out, a measure or quantity ; fi J-S 12 v. 65, "A camel's load." Jl-L< he veasel in which things are measured.- J'Gl VIII. To receive by measure from (with ^& of pera.).

trust repose their confidence." Note. When immediately following ; and d J is generally , written with a jezm j, and with a fatha J when preceding any of the affixed pronouns, as i_ sJ, u, 2, etc., the affix of the first person singular is an exception to this rule, J being written with a kesra ; Like J when preceding the article it causes the latter to drop its 1, as a for " To the Lord ; " It is fre- , , ,

quently used as a conjunction with an ellipse of } and then means so that. in order that; D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 477.

1 Not, no ; when followed by the aorist con- I

i ditional it serves as a negative Imperative, thus 'e@y 2 v. 286, " Do not punish us; "

i When used to deny the existence of a thing

I

(equivalent to i t generally governs the accus. which then loses its tanweun, as in the

17

Â ¥ 4, words dl a\ "There is no Deity but God ;" for the exceptions to this rule see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p.63 et seq.; 1 is sometimes redundant or pleonastic ; see 35 v. 20; so also when comn~encing a form of oath ; Examples of this occur at 56 v. 74 and at 75 vv. 1 and 2, where

/ L the words s\ Y must be translated "I swear;" f- on the other l m d an ellipse of the negative is to be observed at 12 v. 85, see Li and fi for ,-1 ,.I\; D.. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 167 and 516, also T.2, pp. 413, 482, 490, and 563. fi Neither, nor, Â¥L- see &.

L . V / . L ? Â ¥ ' , +I see G+C.

LsiJ To send; this verb is not found in the primi. 2, --.

tive form. (JL i* spelt also i_J L<, Plur. <ij L An angel, see fils0 ZL.

1,L 2 9 i, It To glitter, shine. JÃ generic noun, Pearls

large pearls. s A1 3 aor. o. To r m a i n in a place. +JU \ plur. o

,J The heart, understanding, intellect. i- J aor. a. To delay, tarry, sojourn (with > 01

' with 3 of following verb). &i part. act , a ,, One who tarries.-L.& V, To tarry, remail

in a place (with u). " '' AJ aor. o. To remain inaplace. Much (wealth) 9 plur. of ÃˆA That which is close packet like a lion's mane, and hence A dense crowd.

itÃ - aor. i. To cover, cloak, obscure (with ace. an, u) ; to mystify (with double ace.) ; to rende a thing obscure and confused to another (will ace. of thing and & of pers.) ;. this appear to be the true meaning of the word a t 6 v. 9 4 f w , 0 I- ' ,0"" 4 L 4 LtJJ, " And we would certain? e.; , have obscured for them that which they them selves rendered obscure or confused," viz. Th

Angelic Glory, or the Heavenly Mission. 3 n.a. Confusion. & aor. a. To wear,

Â £ put on, be c lo thd in. A garment,

f " 0 , ' clothing; $ l & 16 v. 113, "Theextreme

of hunger ;" a hunger which closes them in on every side like 4 vestnre. ( $ A coat of mail.

2 aor. i. and o. To eat much; and 3 , To abound n milk. ..,'j n.a. Milk.

aor. a. and i , To be obstinately litigious, to per- - s i t obstinately , - (with Jf. 3 A great body of water. ^J Vast and deep b e d .

2 aor. a. To flee to. 'a* *.a. A place of refuge. aor. a. To make a receptacle f o r a corpse in the side o f a tomb.-^i IV. To deviate from that which is lawful and right, to put to a perverted use, act profanely towards (with 2) ; at 16 v. 105 it may be rendered '"They wickedly incline towards" (with ,\).

S,-'t- 9

L a . Profanity.-& noun of place VIII. f. A place of refuge ; D. S. Qr. T. 1, p. 305.

-As! aor. a. To cover with a cloak.-Ãˆ_*d n.8. IV. f. Importunity.

2 aor. a. To overtake, reach, attain unto (with , , j ) . - < ^ - U f IV. To join to or unite with an-

other (with ace. and u of pers.). 3 aor. o. To establish fir&; and aor. a. To feed

h e s . 2 n.a. Plur. ,$ Fleih. 3 aor. a. To incline towards any one. 2' n.a. A vicious pronunciation. , 2 aor. a. D. S. Qr. T. 1, p. 250, To bark a tree. ^' 1. Ls! The beard.

3 aor. o. To hold an altercation with any one. 3 plur. of fl for ^3l (2nd declension) Very contentious, fond of quarrelling.

iz Tb be soft and tender. 3 although properly 1 a noun, is always employed as a preposition,

t - 9 ^ fc At, near, with ; ^JJ From before, from the presence of, from ; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 154. and <3 Prepositions said by De Sacy to be only different forms of 2 q.v. ; their meaning is the same, but whereas 2 i n the Korfin is always found preceded by with 13 and i<3 this is not the case.

a . jJ aor. a. To find agreeable, take pleasure in.

st , id Pleasure, delight.

. > aor. o. To stick closely. &-i art. act. -2 I 111. f. Death, the day of Judgment, as ensuing of necessity ; at 20 v. 129, and at 25 v. 77,

Adhesive. $ aor. a. To be assiduous, stick close t o . - t G n.a.

we have instances of the noun of action used adjectirely for q, D. 8. Or. T. 2, p.

i.

280 ; I t may also be translated an abiding pun iehmen t . -~~ IV. To affix firmly (with double ace.) ; to compel one to do a thing, aa ly*i-ÃJ 11 v. 30, " Do we compel you to (accept) i t ? "

2 am. o. To seize one by the tongue. zu comm, gend. Plur. Qi A tongue, language, speech ; Of +& iq 19 v. 61, f i t . "A lolly tongue of truth," i e . " High and truthful praise ; " a similar expression is found at 26 v. 84. I

iÃ‘ftlo aor. o. To dram near; and Ã§_Ã§l aor. o. To be thin, Jne. d& Qracioub, kind, sharp- sighted, acute, one who understands mysteries; W ~ A name of QO~.-&' V. TO act with courtesy and gentleness ; at 18 v. 18 it

Hell-fire; This word appears to be of the second declension as being a proper name and of the feminine gender, otherwise the ,cbeing radical i t would have been written 3, indeed the noun of action of the verb is so written, see D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 404 ; or it may be, that coming at the end of a verse at 70 v. 15 it is put by

would seem to mean With cleverness, see ^w.

poetic license for $-# V. To blaze fiercely.

L:

_^ aor. a. To slaver, as an infant; and & f a o r . a. To play, sport, trifle (with >). i^-iÃ§ n.a.

S ' Playing, play, port. k^cY part. act. Sport- ing, one who jests.

LÃ Perhaps, one of those particles which are said 6 1 by grammarians to resemble verbs ; like > it

governs the noun following in the accus. ; it is

, ij aor. a. To iim. $ fem. (2nd declension)

frequently used with the affixed pronouns, as

3' i-aa Perhaps I, perhaps thou, etc. 6 see L-. 9 a y . a. To drive away, curse. a) n.a. and - .5 a A curse. 29 part. act. One who curses.

s - 0

Ã<Ã part. pass. Accursed. ~i 00 , . pl see i.

B 3 am. a, and o. To be greatly fatigued. ^>$ n.a. Weariness.

i) aor, o. To speak; and 3 aor. a. To use vain 5 w words. uÃ§ n.a. Vain discourse, a trifling word

s or inconsiderate language. i$ Vain or obscene (discourse).

3 aor. o. To be thick and entangled (trees). Trees thickly planted and with inter-

lwing boughs, & A mingled crowd.- Jfclj VIII. To be joined-one thing to another (with u).

Ã‘Ã nor. 1. To id, turn aside (with ace. and G).-ka-i3~ VIII. To tarn or look (back).

aor. a. To burn, scorch. ^ aor. i. To cast forth, utter. To diminish.-J\ IV. To find.

k -Jil Plur. A nickname ; no verbal root in the primitive form.

^J To impregnate (the female Palm-tree). @ (2nd declension) plur. of zi part, act. Thai which renders pregnant or fecundates; an epithet applied to the winds, as by their in- strumentality the clouds aresaid to be rendered pregnant with rain, and the female Palm-tree is impregnated with pollen from the male. Shakspeare puts the idea in a somewhat dif- fercn t form.

l1 When we have laughed to scc the sails conceive, And grow big-bcllicd with the wanton wind."

Midwmmer Night's Drsmm. La To VIII. To happen on, light

upon, also to pick up. nor. a. To catch up hurriedly; in the KO&

it may be translated to swallow up quickly. .a' aor. o. To obstruct (apath). i a ( 2 n d declen-

sion) LokmAn, an Arab mge, to whom the origin of iEmp's fables is ascribed.-^ VIII. To swallow a mouthful.

,-ftJ aor. a. To meet, meet with, see; to suffer from, experience (with ace. and i?). $9 n.a. w iii. f. j) for 2s part. act. One who

^ Ã‘

meets with. ^\&L ma. A meeting; Â¥- To- wards ; & & & 10 v. 16, " Of my own accord."-& I I. To cast upon, shed over (with

~ t f * -0 fi' double ace.); yl,dl &I 27 v. 6, "Verily thou art gifted with the Kodn,'' or "it is shed upon thee from above ; " D. 8. Qr, T. 2, p. 124; a somewhat similar rendering is required - 1'' at $5 v. 75 and in other places; Lbh I*; 41

v. 35, "And no one shall be granted it," viz. such a disposition; Beidhwee supplies the ellipse by the words il^~'&->) 111. To meet with. fkj n.a.of both 1st and 3rd forms, A meeting, an occurring; the words

-* I,

dliJ 32 v. 23 are variously understood; 0-

they may refer to the giving of the Law to Moses, the giving the Kodn to Mohammad, or to the meeting between Moses and Mobammad, fabled to have taken place on the occasion of the famous night journey to the 6th Heaven.

v , jl< for &L part. act. One who meets; 0 ' * b Ã ˆ \ t^ 1 2 v. 43, l1 That they are about h.99 w to meet their Lord;" $c i~ here put for 0 f Â y+ as being the antecedent to* , D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 416.-$ IV. To throw, cut , throw down, send down, shed (with ace. and +, VJ", j , or IJ', or with acc. and J'l of '. pers.); to cast forth, utter, throw out a suggestion, as at 22 v. 51 ; to offer, make an offer, as (.ur& JS\ , 4 v. 98, "To him who offers you the salutation ; " used also with ^\ of pers. and + of thing, as at 60 v. 1 ; ,,3

'+a -0 &I I 60 v. 86, " Or who give8 ear ; &ifi 27 v. 28, "And throw it," for .&c D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 460; The d u d a t 50 v. 23 is probably addreaaed to "the driver and the * 9 0 0

witness" spoken of at v. 20 ; &J 0 I@ JJ 2 v. 191, " Neither make your own

handa accessory to your destruction;" &&\ in the passage hasthe meaning of 'FEY, the

is superfluous; D. S. Gr. T; 2, p. 55. *

a b t y3 for ^a) part. act. One wh9 throw or sends down.-$ V. To meet; to receive or ' L b" \ lea- (with ace. and >); &-& f s ill

y.,^ for <nitfll>u 24 v. 14, "When ye receive i t with your tongues (one from another)" by asking questions about i t ; there are a variety of

0 0 / t 4 <Â¥" different readings; qF l & 4 50 v. 16, Lit. "When the two learners learn ;" the meaning is said to be, When the two guardian angels note down a man's words or thoughts, I (God) am aware of them beforehand. ^_,GJX^

St. /- dual part. act. v. auprd-jllf a for dl; ma. VI. f. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. Ill, k meeting one with

05 -tf^ld0

another; at 40 v. 15 gUl f . "The day of Â¥ M^0W Judgment," is for I /-$, the final 4 not

being pronounced before the IÃ‘OJ at the end of the verse, is omitted; D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 496. --,Je)l VIII. To meet, meet one another.

yd aor. a. To p a k bad Arabic. (3 and '(i But, still, nevertheless, *j in the same way as *[ and '7 takes the affixed pronouns after it, as ^J 'g Bat I, but he, etc.; in like manner also it governs the accus. pf the noun following; for the exceptions to this rule see D, S. Gr. T. 2, p. 62. ' \'\S see &\;f, it. a for t-;;!. v^s 7 Not, and C*l Not yet, when prefixed to the aorist,

govern it in the conditional, and generally give it a past signification ; De Sacy says they give to the aorist the same value in point of time, as the preterite would have had if the proposition had been affirmative ; 1*1 Not yet

, seems to be frequently used indifferently for 4*-' J ; i t i8 evidently composed of 7 andG, the latter being redundant ; For 23, PI, {2},

I etc. r e 1; for When v. F. 7 nor. a. To memile, wllect, to be near. i an adverb meaning When or after - that, would appear to be the noun of action in an adverbial 7

form, i t is used when speaking of past events; according to some commentators it is occasionally found in the sense of ?1 Except, un- leu, thus QlÃ 4 3 a 86 v. 4, where if ,'it held to be for 3 and the I; of 1*1 to be redundant, the sense will be "Verily every soul has of a surety a Guardian over it ;" with thia reading 1 1 would appear to stand for 6 J or rather & 3 ; according to others, as above mentioned, the construction is the same as if the words were JS 3 &lÃ 4, the particle having liere a negative meaning, see & ; in the above and in several other instances, such as 11 v. 113, 36 v. 32, and 43 v. 34, i t is undecided whether l J should be spelt with or without the teshdeed, see LÃ ; it is frequently followed by J. U' Altogether, entirely. 7 a.8. That which is near; hence Small faults, as being those which are near being sins, without being quite BO ; the word in this mse may be regarded as a generic noun.

<*' aor, a. To ybe a glance with the eye. n.8. - The twinkling of an eye.

9 aor, o. and i. To wink, defame, i, A alandem. aor. o. and i. To feel with the hand, pry into

0 10 the secrets of.-+ 111. To touch, have in- tercourse with, as at 4 v. 4 6 . - 9 1 VIII. To seek for. 2 Not, by no means, governs the aorist in the subjunctive and with a future signification. 2 aor. a. To blaze, Flaming fire. y\

k_^J Aboo Lahab, an uncle of Moliammad. . /. _^J aor. a. To hang out the tongue (a dog). 7 nor. a. TO gulp ~ o r c n f o o d . - Y IV . TO inspire

one with (with double ace.).

aor. o. Toplay. >.a. A plaything, toy, sport, , 4,', amusement; +. \ ,,,I 31 v. 5, "The amus-

ing story," i.e. a certain amusing story, or the amusing story (with which thouartacquainted). $Y f i r ',Ãˆ D. 8. Or. T. I , p. 330, part. act.

"Y 't :/ , One who sports or jests; A* 21 v. 3, 11 Jesting in their hearts ; " for the construction see D. S. Or. T, 2,'pp. 79, 197, and 270.-

/Â¥L &I1 IV. To occupy, amuse ; to divert from (with ace. and vf-).-J^ V. To be unmindful of, or careless of (with 2).

2 I f ; for the difference between 2 and ;\ see ^\; when immediately followed by a noun the particle 'J is in terposed as at 7 v. 94, D. 8. Gr. T. I, pp. 161 and 561; with? at the head of a sentence we have sometimes an ellipse of the correlative proposition called by

' a 4 / / ^ grammarians b,&J 1 dys-, an instance occurs at 21 v. 40, where the sense may be well rendered in English by a similar ellipse, " If they did but know the time," etc. 7; ~ l t h o ~ ~ h .

.1.,/-Â / >', /<-, Unlei, as 6- i_a.Ã Y,J 11 v. 93, " Had it not (been for) thy family surely we had stoned thee;" in this as in numerous other instances the predicate is understood, indeed this ellipse is customary in all cases where no confusion is likely to arise in cou- sequence ; sometimes also there is an ellipse of the correlative proposition, as for example at 24 v. 10, where we may understand the word

"Verily he would have exposed your wickedness ; " another instance may be found at 48 v. 25, we 3;.

y*J is also used as a particle of instigation or reprimand, being followed in the former case by a verb in the aorist, and in the

latter by the preterite ; in this sense it is usually translated Will ye not? or have they ' , Lf c . , ru,Â¥" $ - not? etc. Ex. I - ' ~ -

27 v. 47, " Will ye not ask pardon of God, perhaps ye might be graciously accepted." This and many similar passages could be easily explained by an ellipse, still retaining for 9 its original meaning of unless; but the grammarians and commentators prefer the analysis above given, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 529.

3 aor. o. To give a reply which was not called for. <_->i I t is not; grammarians are not agreed on the subject of this word, according to some i t is an indeclinable verb, whilst othiirs consider it as a kind of feminine form of the adverb I"; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 262.-&L^ (2nd declension) All&, a female Idol of the Pagan Arabs.

11 aor. o. To appear ( a star) ; to cause one to - changecolour. 3 Plur. n.a. A broad table

or plank, l'.p verbal adjective of intensity, D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 322, Darkening the colour (with J of pers.).

>i aor. o. TO seek ,,the protection of . il*~ n.a. The act of flying for shelter.

, , 11 aor. o. and i. To be jvud in the afectwm. f j

Lot; proper name. 3'f A pearl, me it aor. o. To blame a person for anything (with

acc. of pen. and _* of thing). * Ã § Blame, reproof. part. act. One who finds fault. $3 adjective of intensity, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 822, One who is constantly blaming others,

,- Â¥< 4 or accusing himself; the words el# 1 d l at 75 v. 2 are among other interfietations re-

s t - ferred to the soul of Adam. ?+ D. 0. Or.

T. 1, p. 329, part. pass. Blamed, reprehensible. -y .. . part. act. IV. f. Deserving of blame.- fti^i VI. To blame one another.

;filur. Colour, external form, species ; no verbal root ; 291 16 v. 13, " Of different colours;" D. S. Gr. T. 2, pp. 79, 197, and 270.

/tiaor. i. To twist, pervert, turn back (with ace. ' ',/,/ Lf- - 9 -Ã and*ÃˆÃˆor& . <Ã‘Ãˆ & 3v. 72, .

" They pervert the Scripture with their tongues ; " this word is by some spelt or / ,',. s.

i_^ n.a, The act of twisting or pervert- ing.--$ 11. To turn aside.

iÃ‘> tor. i. To h i n d e r . 4 or fcÃ‘Ã $ is culled by grammarians a particle of desire, and may be rendered I wish, would that, or would to God! it is one of those particles which, like :I, re- -

quire the noun following to be in the accus.; it takes the affixed pronouns as ,,Ã‘ etc.; i t seems probable that this word is of Hebrew origin ; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 536, note.

,Â for L< q.v. conjunctive pronoun, That which, which, that,

what, whatsoever, as, in such a manner as, w 9 9 much as, as far as; L_^Ã‡ L< 5 v. 117, "An

long as I remained ;" I* J&Ã 2 v. 24, "A parable of any kind whatsoever;" I* does not as a rule refer to reasonable beings, but instances to the contrary sometimes occur,

'f. . ? '4"' thus Ã‡ 1.; \&U 4 v. 3, "Then marry such (women) as may be agreeable to you ;" it is used in the formula of admiration, IÃ

^kJ for A I t was not, is not ; f t negative verb , used' only in the preterite, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 262; is one of those verbs known as .-" f . 0 $ UI+~ or eisters of ,G, which govern the attribute in the accusative ; D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 60.

comm. gend. generic noun, Night, also the civil day from sunset to sunset; Plur. nom. and gen. JU' for 1,g and &u, ace. ^Jg By night; D. 8. Or, T. 1, pp. 402 and 410;

, s eee also . G, rt, &. a noun of unity, A Â¥S night.

Lest, for > 3 J ; at 57 v. 29 the 1 of is said to be redundant, 'p must therefore be translated "That they may know;" D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 490, note.

0 ,>1 aor. i. To be or become soft ; to be mild towards (with J). *-0 A kind of Palm-tree. 3 Sort, gentle.-ill IV. To soften (with J)',

fl for Q\ 3 1 v. 10, "We renderedsofk."

' " ~ 2 v. 170, "How great will be their ( sufferings;" it is one of those particles which in conditional propositions govern the verb in the conditional mood ; when affixed to >I, >!, and such like particles, it destroys the effect which they have of putting the noun following them in the accusative ; it is frequently a mere expletive, see 6, when placed between a preposition and its complement it is in-

. ,"'If. 0 . variably so, Ex. $T'.'rf +.. 3 v. 153, "For by the mercy of God;'" When used

interrogatively after a prefixed preposition tht \ is generally omitted, thus 2 for 5, foi

6 0 a 0 ~l 'lÃ d, + or !& for L . y etc.; For ai I .- "a - 6 0 instance of what is known as f J ~ LÃ aef

; For its influence on the temporal valm of verbs see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 180 et seq., set also p. 537 et seq.

is also a negative adverb, Not ; in genera' it denies a circumstance either present, or i: past, but little remote from the present ; like 5 it govern the attribute in the accus. thus

^00 " 'I,+ I & L< 12 v. 31, "This is not a man;' for the exceptions to the above rule see D. 8, Gr. T. 2, p. 413.

*I* see fl* for Jfct. 8 -0-

"LÃ see 4 1 for 4. 9 9 .

@ L (2nd declension) Magog, a tribe of barbarians from the borders of the Caspian Sea ; see Rev. ch. xx. v. 8.

9 --. / -* v, L see u,I.

0

&,'IÃ (2nd declension) Mitroot, name of a rebellious angel, who for his disobedience is said to be suspended by the heels at Babel.

0 9 0 0 . 0

i.i+ see e. ." 0 >AL SM J}. sit & aor. a. To extend. ZL or & for fl A

hundred. * . 0 : 9 see'& for%.

0 s-I. 9 . .

.Ã> see IÃ‘fj s Â¥'. -, &Ll part. act. vi. f, of 3 q.v.

0 . 0 . s - 0 -< tor. a. To 68 advanced (the day). srÃ House-

hold stuff, utensils, goods, chattels, provision, X 0 ' 0 4 . convenience; Plur. +1.-, 11. To suffer

to live; to permit one to enjoy (with ace. of pcrs. and <Ã‘> ; to bestow freely (with double

0

, 6 0 0 act.).-@ V. To enjoy, delight one's-self, pass one's time agreeably (with v or J) ;

^ ^ # - 6 ^ f i / . I- 0 , 0

j Ã‡JÃ b p.6 _^Ã§ 2 v. 192, "And he who passes 0

his time in the delights of visiting the temple 0 0 L 0 L

of M e c c a . " - ~ 4 X. To enjoy, derive pleasure or advantage from (with v).

Â£ see 1s;. 0

9 0 S 0 To be strong, robust. ..+J Strong, powerful. . 0 2 aor. o. To move quickly. 3 interrogative particle, When ?

s - 0 , > '. lÃ -'JÃ see Ã‡Ã‡ . 0 0 ' -i L < ^ Ã see 2.

aor. o. To be like. & Similitude, likeness, like, similar, equal, as much as, the same as;

Ll Ã‡" L_Si Ji-? In like manner; + 3 v. 11, Lit. "Two equivalents of them ;" the meaning is that the Idolaters thought the number of their enemies to be twofold that of their own men ; SO also at v. 159, where refers to the advantage obtained by the true believers a t Bedr being equal to double their lose at Ohod. & Plur. Jff.1 Like, a likenem, equivalent, similitude, comparison, parable, figure of speech ; an example ad at 43 v. 56 ; &r&r<]; SO V. 26, "And His is the most exalted similitude," i.e. He is above all

0 . 0 comparison; L L 2 v. 24, "Any kind of parable ;" D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 539. Ji. Fern. & (2nd declension) Most distinguished, thus p @ , $ 8 0 v. 66, "Your most dii- t inphhed nobility," twe &$. fe; A punishment to be taken as an example. AJ^S (2nd declension) plur. of J\ / An image, statue.- . V. To seem like to any one (with ace. and J of pers.).

Ã ˆ A P A , . i\f^ for D. 0. Or. T. 1, p. 118, see J}.

s A* aor. o. To excel in glory. 4 Glorious, 0

glorified. Ã I " wys* (2nd declension) collective noun of Persian origin, Magi or fire-worshippers.

Â¥yss aor. a. To run swiftly (a deer).-&I.% 11. To prove, try.

(jifc^ aor. a. To destroy utterly, deprive of blessing, as at 2 v. 277.

\sÂ£ To inform, against any one before the Kt~9. je n.a. Fraud, power. Jt- for & see js:.

0 ,00 i_if aor. a. To strike.- .Ã§L. VIII. To try ; to S ^<I,'

dispose (with ace. and J). part. pass. , One who is tried or examined.

\aÂ£ aor. o. and a. To obliterate, blot out, totally abolish.

see -. ^JalfS* see & for &.

5 4 G Ã ~lÃˆs? see J\Ã for J- ..

, 0 0 + aor. a. To plough the moves. J y (2nd declension) plur. of *, G fern. part. act. That which ploughs the waves with a dashing noise. * 0 - jas aor. a. i. and o. To chum. @k collective noun, The pains of child-birth.

aor. o. To stretch forth, extend, stretch, draw out (with ace. or i^> and J of pers. or ^\ of

0 , place); to cause to increase or abound (with

5 . ace. of pen. and &$, aa at 2 v. 14. A< n.a. P I 05 d I 0 O f t 0 0 The act of extending, etc. ; il Â¥i

&> 19 v. 76, "To him let the Merciful grant s 0 0 an extension (of days)." JJ^Ã An additional

h e , anxiliary. 34 Ink. ?3 A space of s I 0 0 time, an allotted period. J,J part. pass.

S G 0 I Extended, extensive.-JJ^. part. pass. 11. f. Widely extended.-Si.1 IT. To bedow, amid, cause to abound (with ace. of pers. and u or

5 Ã 0

>I. ~-*rf part. act. One who assists. 5.Ã f ,+ see 32. ., 0

= Ãˆ,- ' 9~ To remain in a place. && Plur. &\A^

s 0 0

(2nd declension) A city, Medina. , AÃ Fern. ?o / / Of or belonging to Medina, revealed at

Ã ˆ 0 0 Medina. &^Ã (2nd declension) Midian, name of a city and tribe of IJejtb.

S 0 i . I +J * part. xi. f. of 2; q.v. s . 0 0 0 0 &J see ( a for ,^Ãˆ

b . 1 un". o. To paas by (with & or +J) ; paw on,

go (with L+). n.a. The act of passingaway. 50 0t Ã§ One time, turn; J,T At first, the first

n time ; > 8 v. 58, On every occa- 0.6 0

tion ;" $ adverbially, Once ; &p or & 4 0 Ã ˆ - Ã Twice, Ã LP JÃ I 2 v. 229, " Divorce (it

?6 permitted you) twice." xwÃ Gall, under- - standing, as at 53 v. 6. 2 (2nd declension)

Â 0i. Ã

comp. form, More b i t t e r . - - part. act. X. f. That which is transient, also powerful; either interpretation may be hployed at 54 v. 2 ; at v. 19 it is by some rendered bitter, by others grave or heavy (misfortune).

l., p tor. a. To be wholesome (/tforf). 5 n.a. A man. 5; Ey o f digestion, wholesome,

' - 0 < 0

salutary ; Bf, Q, or With easy digee- f Ã 0 tion. Qen. & L A ~ C . \:;\, D. 8. Gr.

tfÃ 0

T. I ,'p. 398, A man. iyl A woman, a wife; both this and the preceding word are written with Wegla when not commencing a sentence.

S 0'.P 6 ^ "\3ff see "t; for -2. ' 40

r P - am. o. To send (cattle) to pasture, to let loose. 18

Fire free ^ s ^ from smoke. a< Confused, a\^-- Small pearls; or it may be coral.

, , s ,, aor. a. To be joyful, elated. Ã ‘ Insolence ; c- *,, l>Ã‘ In a saucy, insolent manner.

,, , JY aor. o. To moisten (bread) in order to softer,

it; to be obstinate (with &). 5 art. act, J P One who is obstinately rebellious. &I $6, 9 Obstinate in rebellion.-i ? part. pass. 11. f,

Rendered smooth. i_^* To be ill. (_/BY n.a. Illness, sickness, dis.

s , Â¥ -' ease, infirmity. &.r Plur. , sf Sick, ill. , - s<- , generic noun, Flint-stones. Sf El Marwa,

name of a mountain near Mecca. , , .. -i- l.

i_yp aor. i. To press the teats in milking. ( o ~ f , , A doubt.-^LÃ 111. To dispute with one concerning a thing (with ace. of pers. and & or 2 of thing). $5 n.a. The act of disputing, a disputation.-^s-~ VI. To doubt concerning a thing (with <_;).-4 VIII. To

, xt- 9 doubt of (with 2 or u of thing). a for

s / L f . -i

d~ part. act. One who doubts. 9 ^ ^ , -" (2nd declension) Mary. ,,. 9 aor. a. To mix. ;IJ-< That which ia mixed

with wine. , G 9

Ã ˆ U > - see \fi. S 6 - 9 / , G < _^a^Ã part. act. of Ã‘/>- q.v. , S , XG 9 , , , ,+? part. pass. viii. f. of3 q.v. ,, 0 ,a , j2 aor. i. To teareÃ‘J, 11. To scatter, disperse,

$ a Â ¥ 9 tear in pieces. d ; ~ Time or place of scat- tering, etc.

3y we J.J. 0 , 0 T C * iyÃ To go in the same direction as another. u3

Cloud. c - s 0

nu f aor. a. and o. To touch, befall, n.a. A

touch.->& n.a. 111. f. Mutual contact; &LL< 120 v. 97, "Touch me not," D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 63.-(J VI. To touch one another.

&2 .. , pirt, act. x. f. ofJG for..I;. s / - O / - C / 9 , ,, ~JF part. pass. x. f. of y, q.v.

Ã aor. a. To wipe, pass the hand over anything L

in order to wipe it (with u of thing); to smite with a sword. gÃ‘ i . a . ~ h Ã 'act of smiting with a sword. ^w^\ The Messiah,

L- ' Lit. The Anointed.

. ,, -', L.9 , G -' .. ,P aor. a. To change, transform ; & ?LsÃ‘* ^ G -,, .+L 36 v. 67, "Verily we could have trans-

formed them in their places;" so that they Â¥shoul have remained without powerof motion.

s , , \*^Ã eor. o. To twist ( a rope) strongly. ~ > w

Twisted fibres of the Palm-tree, coir. To take hold o f , L_?i -Ã‡ comm. gend.

~usk.-L-$wÃ 11. To hold fast (with ").- -- , 'Z , &I IV. To hold, take, catch hold of, hold fast, withhold, keep back, hold up, retain. LÃˆ?L-Ã n.a. The act of retaining, etc. &

, , ,., '. part. act. One who withholds, etc.-&\ X. To take hold on, hold fast (with u).

part. act. One who holds fast. ' aor. o. To wive out the uterus o f a camel, to come in the even ing . -ST IV. To be or do

<Â v G 9 ./

anything in the evening, as ^y* ,_^>- 30 v. . , 16, "At eventide." Note. L Ã or , is one of those verbs known as ,IS ilf\&f., D. S. Or. T. 2, p. 60.

see&. ,, 5 - I,* To mingle. <-'Â¥"& plur. of *-< Mingled. - s i'lLit/. see Gi. \

& aor. i. To walk, go, proceed (with or >

of place). &n.a. The act of walking, walk 3-& One who goes about with lying slanders - -

,0, aor. o. To milk with the tips o f the fingers 9 0

a,* (1st and 2nd declension) comm. gend. A large city, Egypt, D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 405.

&Z for see&. Â ,, % 0 9 a . ,LM plur. of "JLM, rt. /e q.v.

r * 0, "Ãˆ 0 9 Ã§_JI aor. a. and o. To chero. A morsel 01 flesh.

8 , ,gOM ao: i. To pass by, pass away, go away. ^Ã§9 n.a. The act of going away.

/in aor. 0. To rain upon. ^Ã n.a. ~ a i n . - - 1 . -> I. 0,- /</ 0 0 0 IV. To cause to =in ; \ n ,.,+ b/ Â¥' 7 v. . ,

82, " And we rained down upon them a ahowel (of stones) ; I' see also 11 v. 84. *kÃ§ part, act. That which causes or brings rain. b.09 03'0 + ieo +, rt. 3. aor. o. To travel at a quick V. T o walk in a haughty, conceited manner.

0 0 properly an indeclinable noun used as a preposition, With, together or in company with. ,

iilfcÃ we till for Jg.

,0 , p aor. o. To separate the goats from the aheep. jm* generic noun, Qoate.

0 0 0 s 9 0 JH aor. a. To trowel feat and far. & House- hold atuff, whatever is of common and necessary use, also alms.

8 b 0 _Ã comm. gend. Plur, 3 - L l Inteetines ; no

verbal root.

0 96 9 0 9 'C -*Ã plur. of + aee +. 99, v u~ see &.

0 0 0 S 0. i-,JL. To hate. k_-A< n.a. Hatred, anger; at 4 v.

26 it means an odious and abominable thine;. - = I,' jSn for +a<, see 6. && see &^J for G$. 3 To suck dry.' & (2nd declendon) Mecca.

, Ã Fern, <liLÃ Of or belonging to Mecca, revealed at Mecca.

aor. o. To delay, tarry, abide, remain (with I,*). JJ-^ n.a. The act of tarrying, etc. ; & & 17 v. 107, " Slowly and delibe- rately." part. act. One who"tarries or remains.

X< nor. o. To contrive a plot; to plot against (with t_>) ; to act deceitfully. A plot, a deceitful trick, contrivance. %G part. act. One who lays plots.

s0. ,L< To hold high rank or authority, ,L see & .. . Firmly fixed, one whose rank is

firmly established.-$ 11. To eslalili~h firmly, strengthen, give authority to any one (with ace. or J of pen. and J, of place, or

*

with ace. of thing and J of pers.); at 18 v. 94 JL is for &D. 8. Or. T, 1, p. 468, n o t e . - 3 IV. To give power, aa &% b 9 b ( ~ ^ i 8 v. 72, "And he hath given thee power over them ;" D. 0. Or. T. 2, p. 454.

<m aor. o. To whistle. 3-L' n.a. Whistling. 1< To baste a garment, concert. A religion,

form of worship-J^ IV. To dictate. aor. a. To fill, as *1C.'>'7 T. 17, "Verily I will 611"

(with ace. and>). &for&, D. 8.Gr.T. 1, p. 62, A quantity that fills any thing, M $&

"n"8 v. 85, "The Earth full." fc A band, ^

company, assembly ; also chief men, princes, .'.S-o ..0

the nobility; Js Y l @ 38 v. 69, " The e i - alted Chiefs," i e . the Angels; for the changes which this word undergoes when followed by an affixed pronoun see D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 95 and 117. 21; for k; D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 97, part. act. One who fills.-'gl VIII. to be full.

&part. act, iii, f. of ij q.v.

L~x; see u?rt for &. aor. a. and i. To s a t . 8 fern. Salt.

& To mipe o u t . - i g \ n.a. IV. f. Poverty, want. (Â¥JX nor. i. To possess, have power or dominion

over; to be capable of, able to obtain (wit11 ... 0 0 / acc. of thing and J of pem.), as &" & @ W& 'ft 48'v. 11, "For who hath an j power to prevail for you with God ? " i_ L< n.a. That which is in any one's power; \& 20 v. 90, "As far as lay in our power." iÃ J Dominion, power, kingdom. il L< sing. and plur. An angel, angels; see also &I foi

- &. &< One who pkmesses, a king ; Plur (Â¥J& hJ^n part. act. One who is lord over a possessor; MAlec, name of the angel wh(

S f f ^ has charge over Hell. + Dominion kingdom. iÃ‘jJi A 5 9 6 -" monarch. LC'+ part pass. Possessed, owned.

aor. o. To run violently. $ For a considerabli time.-$ IV. To prolong one's life, gran a respite (with J of pers.); at 47 v. 27 thi word may be rendered "he has continued t< buoy them up with false hopes ; l1 to dictati (with acc. of thing and & of pem.).

rÃ and lÃ§ for G_^. &G see &G,

, - ' U P 0 . +I Oblique plur. part. act. viii. f. of+ q.v.

an indeclinable conjunctive pronoun meaning He she or they who, one who, some who, whosoever ; also interrogatively Who ? In conditional propositions it governs the aorist in the conditional mood, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 32; for its influence on the temporal value of verbs see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 185, et seq.; although generally used to designate reasonable beings, instances may occasionally be noted to the contrary, as for example a t 24 v. 44, but in these cases the irrational creatures are to some extent, by a figure of speech, assimilated to reasonable beings; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 356. L S * 0 a I ,Â¥ - ' 0 0 0

dl and *< for 8 and 0. & a preposition signifying origin, coin-

position, explanation, commencen~ent, or aepa- ration ; in its ordinary acceptation it ia equivalent to of, from, or out of; or, when following a comparative, than ; but it may occasionally be rendered on, by, by reason of, some or a portion of, of the same kind as, after the manner of, etc. It is frequently employed in negative propositions with the sense of any, as 9 a 4 <JI I ?i (J! & 1.; 8 v. 55, " Nor is there any Deity but God," or i t may be regarded as an expletive, " There is no Deity," D. 8. Gr. 'I!. 1, p. 490; & 28 v. 5, "At their hands," i .e. "At the hands of the Children of Israel;'' L y 0 filf vft 3 T; 121, "Of a sudden," or "on

St." their arrival," see ^Ã G& ^f 5 V. 37,

L.9 w 0 0

" On opposite sides ;" em 65 v. 6, 6 6 According to your means;" I t is found

&-G eee *s, 0 0 .

Ã‡_Ã aor. a. To refuse; to prohibit, hinder, forbid, prevent (with ace. and 3 or followed by a verb); to defend as at 21 v. 44 and a t 4 v.

Pi*, 4 a .- Ã 140 (with ; &I I L, ;_ 12v. 63, "The measurement (of any corn) is forbidden us."

S 9 . v\n part. act. That which defends. <*-< One who holds back (his hand), niggardly,

occasionally with the meaning of 2, thus at 'r L -0 0 4 -0 0 9 9 v. 38, &ir& Q.ii l $,& 4 1 "Are

0

ye content with this present life in preference to that which if to come?" $r& 3 ',-. & 3 v. 27, "He hag nothing to look to from (the ffienbhip ofl God," D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 492, note.

6 - br< aor. o. To fatigue; to be gracious towards

(with & of pers.) ; to reproach (with & of pers.), as at 49 v. 17; to be liberal, as).

. t - O t- / I d C ,JÃ‘ 74 v. 6, "And be not liberal in

the hope of receiving more ; " at 26 v. 21 it is uwd transitively, to bestow-t favour-on any One (with of thing and & of per'.). 5: n.a. The act of reproaching, and especially by reminding any one of benefitt conferred ;

? ! - / + # also liberality, as at 47 v. 5, A)U ILÃ ClÃ h :is C.1; "And either (>how) liberality aHer-

wards1 or (exact) a r a ~ ~ o m . " 31 9 9 . - t0 -0 0 t -0 Time ; u4 l t _ ^ ~ 52 v. 30, "Adverse

0

fortune," by some interpreted to mean Death. 5 P > - 0

1 - > ~ part. pma. Diminished, broken off; PC,e 91,f 41 v. 7, "An uninterrupted reward."

.7 0 0 @L- see Gli for (JO;. ,.>- 9 " see d.

p i 'G, 1 a couch. z& A couch, a place of wide extent.-$ 11. To make (things) emooth and agreeable. Â¥A- -* n.a. The act of making

0

smooth. iJy* To do a thing quietly and gently. J* Fused

brass, the dregs of oil.-& 11. To grant a delay, bear with for a time.-&I IV. To act quietly and gently towards. i-fl... see a,

.t- 0' f * One who hinden or obstrocta; friG 50 0

v. 24, " One who hinders men from following S 9^-' the right path." cy>4Ã part- Pass* Forbidden.

3; see &. & see 2.

_; tv, ; (2nd declension) M&nAt, an idol worshipped by the Pagan Arabs, & Spenna genitale. Plur. >LI (2nd declmion) A wish, desire ; e>& f ^\ I\ i_'Â£fli' v. 73, "They know not the Scripture, but according to their own vain imaginations or desires ; 1~ see next verse,

a 0 verse IQS,_& 11. T~ create desires in any one (with acc. of pers.), thus at 4 v. 118, -Ã1 ,* "And verily I will excite in them vain d e s i r e a , , , ~ ~ l IV, o emit (seed).- > V. To desire, read ; at 22 v. 61 a p a w n occurs w]iere this word is by nome rendered according to the former of these meanings, while others have followed the latter ; see Sale's Koran, vol. 2, p. 168, note; to long for,

/ La 0: .- ~ 6 . ~ - Covet i at 3 V. 137 uJ-" is for u)->-i D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 221.

0 , .- 9 0 t - < Ã ˆ > A ~ Ã aor. a. To spread open a bed ; 4% / .

80 v. 43, " Verily they shall spread for them- s t - / selves a couch (in Paradise)." 9 n.a. A

bed, cradle. 1&G part. act. One who spreads

Iky Whatsoever or whensoever, see D. S. Gr.

/ , , T. 1, p. 194.

. f f

m e aor. a. and o. To serve; and To be de- S 0 spicable. i_m^ Despicable, contemptible ; it

0 4 , #Irf /Â 4 0 j,$ ace. plur. of Jy, rt. J q.v. - - . see J;>.

0 , , 4 , UL for aor. o. To die; this is the usual , form, but others are mentioned "by lexico-

. 0 . / 0 ,, graphers, as >Ã‘?,- or iÃ§ aor. a. and L+

0 0

aor. i. ; instances of the preterite with the first letter kesrated are found in most copies of the

L -i. vortn, u p-, 23 v. 37, and l L, 83 v. 84 ; so also we have JL-Ã in the 19th and & in the 21st chapter; see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, pp. 114 and

Â¥iIn

242. and i_?l^ Death. ÃˆÃ‘Â¥ Plur. l a

S Â¥ , f.. . ^t/ /

I &\y^ Dead. v. i Plurs. Ã £ , and Jy 0 5'

Dead, mortal, about to die. noun of ,- unity, One single death. & A dead body, that which is dead or dies of itself.-&l^ IV.

W k - 0 0 e 0 2

To cause to die ; ^^\ L\ 40 v. 11, "Thou hast'cansed us to die twice," in allusion to the second death which the body is said to undergo after its examination in the sepulchre by the two angels Munkar and Nakeer. a*; see

s: aor. o. To be agitated rcith waves (the sea); to press tumultuously like waves (with ,& S ^ f

?r n.a. A wave, the surge; used also as a collective noun, J ~ ^ S . / y> 2, 11 v. 44

Ã

like mountains." .

S- f & aor. o. To be moved to and fro. ,y* n.a. Agitation, fluctuation.

S-t i-i$y see ;;. /Â 9 (2nd declension) Mosea. ^ - Â ¥ . S "1 i b m see ~ u p l . se>- , <, ~ y y ~ see L_-^.

3 , . f lu , , . <, iapn see .u,.

jl; aor. o. To be rich, especially in cattle. JLÃ Plur. J'y! Richeg, wealth, substance, posses- sions, and especially flocks and herds; g,L* 6 . 28, for & " My wealth ;" the k is affixed because followed by a pause, and is

(/Â¥ -0 -. hence named + \ *\s> D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 459.

ip see J. st, / 1 &y* see ^y\.

ÃL aor. a. o. and i. To be full o f water (a welt). if* lor Ã Water, liquor. Note. The hamza when followed by an affixed pronoun and moveable by Damma is changed into J , as 9 j - , 6 9 - 0 , L f o r + s L D. 8. Gr. T. 1 ,p . 118.

0 ~ I r f 0 '1 see J^.

** - '&' jk-? see ~i?. ' ' ""h6 v. 15, Jl< aor. i. To be moved ; J-w ,_,

" Lest i t should move with you ; " for the S , - /

ellipse of the negative see 3. +LÃ A table, properly, when set out with food.

;l< aor. i. To provide food for. JLÃ aor. i, To separate, discriminate, distinguish

(with ace. and &I.-% V. TO bunt, M i,. 4. Ãˆs0 9 . 0 \a^\ if^ & 67 v. 8, " I t will almoat

- 4 '

bun t with fury" (forj.-t-i).-jl^l VIII. To be separated ; $&T 36 v. 59, " And be ya separated" (from the righteous).

r f c . ,e

seeiuJ,. JL& see AÂ£( <Ã‘Ã see G.

j& (2nd declension) Michael the Archangel. JlÃ aor. i. To incline, turn away from, turn aside

Initial letter of the 68th chapter, see 7. l> an indeclinable affixed pronoun meaning Our

when following nouns, and Us when following verbs or prepositions; when affixed to the - - particles $\ or '} and written el or \3\, l!1 or GI, although representing an accusative, i t must be rendered We, as >2\ GT; 2,4Ã 5 v. Ill, "And bear thou wi&en that we are Moslems," or " resigned unto thee."

L .-Â¥ WJU 3rd pers. sing. fern. of i_^G iii. f. of q.v. aor. a. To retire, m %& & 17 v. 85, "And

0 0

he goen aside ;" to go far away (with 2). ^ am. a. To he exalted, to announce. \n Plur. sIJ) News, anannouncement, message, account or atory, a prophecy, as at 6 v. 66. >'A

* < prophet, Plum. i a , and (2nd decien- don). @ ~ r o ~ h e c ~ . - z II. To announce, to make acquainted with, declare or relate a circumstance to another (with (Ã‘ of thing, or . with ace. of pen. and +, 2, or 2, also with anc. of pore. and ,',<).lw IV. To make one acquainted with, to inform (with double Ã§tc or with acc. and L ).-Gi X. TO nek

. information from (with me. of pen. mi 1). aor. o. To gsnm'note, to produce~u a tree-

from the right my (with n.a. in ace. 1; to turn against (with &). J-< n.a, The act of turning aside. & noun of unity, A single ". /-',I., act of turning, as i+ + 4 v. 103, " A t once," und vice.

back to them their covenant; " for the ellipse of the accusative or immediate objective complement me D. B.G~. T. 3, p.4f4.-J i VIII. To go aside (with &I.

2 nor, j. Tb d&m.- G TI. To call one another. names (with +J).

3 Ã§or i. and o. ?!> gwh out.-- .&Mi X. To elicit or diacover (the troth) in matters of difficulty.

S tL.0 $wa.a,i.w~o. Tofwhforth, y.~i~~lnr.&& , (2nd declension) A fountain, opring of water.

(with <Ã‘>) &@ n.a. The germinating or , springing up of plants; when used collectively, Plants, that which is produced from the ground; at 3 v. 32 it is figuratively applied to the 1 6 fruit of the ~ o r n b . " - ~ ~ -'? IV. To produce,

put forth, to cause to grow or spring up (with acc. and J, i^>, > or >. ,

+i aor. i. To throw (with ace. and <Ã‘ or > of place); to reject; q s 20 v. 96, "And 1 threw it (into the mouth of the calf)," which thereupon became alive ; The handful of dust to which this miraculous power is attributed was supposed to have been taken from the footsteps of the horse ridden by the angel

G I / t- Gabriel ; at 8 v. 60 aiter we mint . t . > - Â ¥ I .

understand the accna. ,k*~^e, "Then throw I

8 . 8

(.y aor. o. To shake. ,, / S ", 'Â

aor. o. and i. To disperse. ^>-Ã part. pass. scattered.-";\ VIII. To be scattered.

3 aor. o. TO overcome. n.a. An open highway ; a t 90 v. 10 it is to be understood of the two highways of good and evil.

s., (Ã§> aor. a. To be dirty and impure. + n.a. Filth, uncleanness.

& aor, i. To throw. & i ~ ( c o m m o n gender) ' >

The Gospel, from the Greek e 6 a y y h o u . .Â¥' s <- < ,, # '

aor. o. To appear. AS." Pliir. ~ ; s r A star, or collectively, Stars, as at 16 v. IS and 53 v. 1 ; a plant growing close to tin' car111 wi th little or no stalk, as grass.

aor. o.To escape, go free (with ^Ã§) _L part. 5 ,, I-

act. One who escapes. irkA n.a. Salvation. s /Â * , 3 A secret; Privately. y * n.a.

*. . (2nd declension) for ;,+- D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 105 and 402, A private conference, clandestine discourse ; at 17 v. 50 it appears to be used

0 I- ,I- , I-^ adverbially 6 5 IJ> ^\ " And when they

confer in private ; " but BeidAwee inclines to the opinion that this word both here and at

s"

58 v. 8 is a plural of ,,3 with the sense of . 0 9 - 9 ,t3-LÃÃ viz. "Those who confer privately

together.*'-$ 11. To deliver, set free (with b ^ ace. and d, J, or u) ; to raise up, as a t 10

0

S - Â ¥ ' * / Ã , I - : # Y. 9 & for & P l ~ r . ~ p forU<Ã§ecvÃ s , 0

D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 113, part. act. One who delivers.-,tÃˆ- 111. To hold a discourse with any one in private (with ace. of pers.).- 3 1 IT. To deliver (with am. and ,) ; 4 3 70 v. 14, " Then (he wishes that this) .-.

0 b 4 might deliver him ; " the nominative 841 1

"This ransom" being understood.-$G VI. To hold a private discourse one with another (with u of matter). , , . 0 s ^ < A aor. 0. To vow. n.a. A vow, m 3 9 Â¥"I 0 + 33 v. 23, "He has fulfilled his vow" by offering up his life for the Faith.

aor. i. and o. To scrape, carve, prepare by scraping (with double ace. or with ace. and >). aor. a. To injure the jugular vein, to sacrifice by cutting the jugular vein.

-',^ + aor. a. To vex; and yu.2 To be unlucky. 5 L < i/- Bad luck. Unlucky. &

Smoke without flame, also molten brass, both of which meanings have been assigned at 55 v. 35. aor. a. To make one a present; and @ nor. a. 2b be thin. lz comm. gend. generic noun,

s Bees. i& A free gift, especially one given as dowry.

Ã ^ Â ¥

,d personal pronoun of comm. gender used both in the dual and plur. We.

2 aor. a. To be morn full o f holes. 3 Worn, rotten (a bone).

\a To sift. Ja comm. gend. ~ l u r . J-s generic noun, A date-palm; or collectively, Palm- .- :, &. , trees. <LLic noun of unity, A (single) Palm- tree.

aor. i. To fie, run away. 5 Plur. Sl Ji Like, equal, a match, an image or idol.

;d aor. a. To be repentant, repent. fi& part. s' ,.

act. One who repents, a penitent. <LÃ‡\J n.a. Repentance.

2 aor. o. To call. $6 for &li A council. ^J A council.-& 111. To call to, call upon, invoke, cry aloud ; to make a proclamation (with &); to call, or invite (with j\ or J), ,

u jprjl ,.".'"hi 6 v. 63, "And w h ~ 'ye call to prayer ;" (also with A), as \Ã -

0 , (r 0 9 4 JL a, &U \ 50 v. 40, " The criel

0 4

shall call from a near place ;" said to bt from Mount Moriah at Jerusalem, whence tht angel Gabriel is to make a proclamation to al' flesh to come to judgment; the meaning ii that it shall be a proclamation to be heard by

. ( r 0 .I all ; see also 41 v. 44, where the words i_ykA-;

0 0 (r Asft ,.JL @ are interpreted " They shdl b< (like) those who are called to from afar," i.8,

They ehall not hear. for 34 n.a. A cry, act of calling. & for s;>G put. act One who makes a proclamation, a crier, i preacher.-i_y~~ VI. To call one to another.

S H f . jliJ for 3 for ~ J U J , D. 0. Gr. T. 1, p. Ill, n.a. The act of calling one to another; jL^li'

@ 4 4 40 v. 34 is for d+Lsi \ the being omitted by poetic license at the end of the verse tc preserve the rhyme.

0

nor. o. and i. To VOW, devote (with ace. and J), s-< s ' 9 s.fS.{# JAÃ Plur. J , ~ n.a. A vow. JAÃ or ,A< A

8 ' 9 menacing, or warning; ,& is also plur. of "; A warner or preacher.--A^ IV. To warn,

Ã admonish, preach to (with ace. of pen. and u, or with 1 ; to threaten with, give

s . l . 9 of (with double ace.). J* part. act. A preacher, One who warns, admonishes, or

a s 0 < - 9 threatens. ,L part. pass. Warned. . Ã .w 49 1st pew. plur. nor. viii. f. of 55 for q.v.

0 0: fji aor. i. To pluck out, bring out, snatch away, oxtract, withdraw, or draw out somewhat sharply (with uc . and h) ; to #trip of (wiih ace. and 3). f part. act. One who plucks out, u c-Ãˆ\-j^l 79 v. 1, "By (the

angels) who tear out (the souls of the wicked) S a 0 with violuce." f\ adjective of intemity,

Plucking forcibly or continuously, D. 0. Gr. 0 T. 1, p. 822.-e,li 111. To dispute with any

0 , ,0

one (with am.).-ulJ VI. To dispute one with another (with & of matter, or with ace. and . ( r 0

J) ; at 62 v. 23 it is used with ace. of thing and .<* of place, and is there to be interpreted "They shall present to one another."

Â¥. nor. a. 70 slander, BOW dissensions (with 2;); to incite to evil, aÃ at 7 v. 199. 3 n.a. An evil suggestion, incitement to evil.

if tor. i. To ahmtt (a vIR ; in the Paw. it means to be exhausted or inebriated from drink (with 2).

1-i tor. i. To descend (with into, or , from, a place), j/' That which is prepared for a

s guest, entertainment, an abode, a gift. noun of unity, Literally, One descent; 3-f

5, / -0 Once, M JA\ >IJ 63 v. 13, "He saw him once again." JjL (2nd declension) plur. of > A rnansiok atation, as of the moon at 10 v. 5 and 30 v. 39.-& 11. To e m u to descend, send down, especially from Heaven (with acc. and &, A, ,, ad 4 @ , n.a. A sending down (from Heaven), a divine revelation, aname given to the & o r b M having - been mot down from Heaven. < Ã‘ put. act. One who sen& down. J/Ã‘ part. paw. Sent down.-Jjl IV. To cause to descend, send down, make to come down (with ace. and &, > ', &, Ã) and J p&. act. One who causes to descend, a receiver of gueato, one who provides hospitality, j$ part. p ~ . BÃ§n down ; At 28 v. 30 f$ may

10

be considered as the noun of time or place of *I-, , coming down ; it is also written 124 v. supra;

in the former case it may be rendered " Cause my descent to be blessed;" in the latter, 11 Make me to inhabit a blessed abode.''- J J V. To descend gently and gradually (with &).

"s. /, LJ aor. a. To chide (camels). 3 Tlie putting

off a sacred month till a later month, Ã A staff.

aor. o. and i . To make mention of any one's S ,>,% lineage. Plur. uLJ l n.a. Consan-

Â¥ , ,, p i n i t y ; at 25 v. 56 the words \, y I+ must bc taken adverbially as though the phrase were ', , ,,

~ 4 , +A \i "Capable of consanguinity and * e

affinity ; l1 meaning perhaps male and female. ./ 4

"J aor. a. To abolish, destroy, abrogate, nullify; L > O!

to transcribe or copy. isf A copy or exemplar ,(_,--I,

(of a book).-'('Ã‘-' X. To trarscribe or copy out. . ,<

M-J nor. o. and i. To remove, tear with the beak. s y n.a. An eagle or vulture; Nasr, name of an idol worshipped by the Pagans both before and after the Flood.

-i aor. i. To desthoy from the foundations, up- root, reduce to powder and scatter abroad, to winnow as chaf. L% n.a. The act of re- ducing to powder and winnowing, etc.

&' aor. o. To lead a religious life, to sacrifice. A'? n.,i. Religious service, a victim for sacrifice. &.& part. act. One who is devoted to religious observances. A cere- monial. &L (2nd declension) plur. of t_JLt< Places for sacrifice, rites and ceremonies.

J-* aor. o. To beget or bring forth (an animal) ;

aor. i. and o. To hasten (with A). J n.a. Progeny, stock ; a t 2 v. 201 i t would seem to be understood of the young of flocks and other domestic animals.

, , & aor. a. To forget, neglect. ^wJ A forgotten thing. 2 Forgetful, ;&and i \uJ ,~omen; The sing. of these words is wanting, but instead .- of it the word iyl is employed, see yÃ Â¥ I,, part. pass. Forgotten, neglected, D. 0. Or. T. 1, p. 108.-$1 IV. To cause to forget (with double ace.) ; at 2 v. 100 may be taken to signify "We cause i t to be forgotten ; " there are also other readings. . , aor. a. To grow, increase, to be raised up. .- &G The first hour or early portion of the day or night ; various interpretations, i r e given of 73 v. 6 where this word occurs; according to one it is the part. act. and agrecs with understood, " The person who rises by night (to prayer) ; I 1 others hold i t to be a form of the noun of action, and translate i t " To rise by night." ;*& ~roduction.-(2; 11. To bring up, educate (with ace. and >).-*GI IV. To produce, raise, create (with ace. and y Ã or J) . 3-u l ma. Production, creation; - in , ,'* f LS) & i_iq 56 v. 34, "Verily we have created them by a (novel or peculiar) creation." s ^ . i ;= &A part. act. One who produces.

3 -,^^ T l / ' Ã Plur. u L for u\ h Having lofty sails, or i t may be the part. pass. Raised on high (by the waves).

-&J aor. o. To unfold, spread abroad (with ace. and = K ' J ). n.a. A spreading abroad. ,,A n.a. ,

A bringing to life, resurrection, resuscitation (from sleep), Ã a t 25 v. 49. >C part. act. One who spreads abroad; the worda ~ Ã ‘ ^ ~ Q T

It; 77 v. 3 may refer either to the Angeli who spread abroad God's decrees, or to tht winds which spread rain over the earth ; some again have understood the passage to refer tc

S 9 b - ' the verses of the I$or&n, etc. +A part. pass, S6 * 9 Spread open.-+ part. pass. 11. f. Unfolded;

expanded.--7 IV. To resuscitate (with acc. W I . 9 and >--;I ; to raise the dead. ,Â£u part. pass. .

Raised from the d e a d . - - 1 VIII. To be spread abroad, disperse themselves (with ,-Ã 5 -0 9 part. act. That which spreads itsell abroad.

,-' f j ~ , aor. o. and i. To rise up, to behave ill-a woman towards her husband, or a husband toward*

tÃ 9 9 his wife. j+ n.a. Ill-conduct or perverse- ness on the part of a husband or wife towards one another.-91 IV. To raise, aor. i. To go out from a place, draw up a

' bucket at me pull. JL^ n.a. The act of drawing up quickly and easily. L&g part. act. One who draws up easily ; the words <Ã‘>@Q lIaL' which occur a t 79 v. 2 are by some referred to the Angels who draw forth the souls of the blessed in a smooth and gentle manner; but as with the commencement of the 77th chapter, the explanations of the whole passage vary greatly, see >li.

aor. o. To place, fix, erect, afflict; and nor. a. To uw diligence, M at 94 v. 7, \^ u .Iftf, -" b.0 > w U ~ 4 . j "And when thou hast 6niehed (thy relaxation) be instant (in prayer, or in thanks to God)." J w n.a. Calamity. s ., n.a. Labour, fatigue. i_<ai Plur.

>I>Gh standard, as at 70 v. 43; a stone mod by the Pagan Arabs on which they made sacrifice!, asat 5 v. 4; an idol, image, or statue,

s .'Â¥ A part, portion. as at 5 v. 92. && part. act. Labouring, weary.

, ,, & aor. i. To be silent.- " IV. Idem. , -'^ ,P aor. a. To admonish, counsel, give good advice, b

be sincere and faithful (with J of peri.). 2 n.a. Counsel, advice, >v part. act. One who counsels or advises, one who acts as a sincere

a 9. friend to (with 4). & True and sincere (repentance).

Â¥', p aor.0. To aid, assist, succour, protect; to deliver fyf^ b -' 9 , f G,,,

(with acc. and &) ; l .i, , m, 22 v. 41, "And verily God will succour those who aid him," i.e. his religion; to grant a victory to (with ace. and i\ thus at 0 v. 14, C C. .Â¥ b Ã ',f\f^, ( JA (S>* "And he will give you thevictory . - s b. over them." -A) n.a. Aid, assistance, victory. ^ 25 part. act. Plum. &>t and '01 One who

' ' P l u r . ' G U aids, etc., a protector. ,Ã - 9 . b S - 4

helper, defender, protector; the name,LaJ Y \ "The helpers or allies," was given as an honorary distinction to those of the inhabitantfl of Medina who were the first to take part with Mohammad. (2nd declension) plur. of S "G- ' 9 -"I.^ A Christian, so called from Jy Naza-

s / b . S P I , . reth. ^\^ Christian. part. pass. , , .-'

Aided, assisted.-,& VI. To aid one another; -' 9, ,.-

at 37 v. 25 2% is for ^ , \ - a D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 221 . -A VIII. To avenge one's-

b

self, take vengeance (with of pera.); to s - 9 defend one's-self, deliver one's-elf. +

part. act. One who ia able to defend himself. --I X. To ask assistance of any one (wit) ace. of pen.).

aor. o. To reach the middle, or take hc of anything, 4 The half.

\uv aor. o. To uize by the forelock. Plur, &ff (2nd declension) A forelock.

0

aor. a. To be ripe, done enough in cooking. ,. ' a' aor. a. To sprinkle with water. $% Pouring forth copiously and continuoualy.

/ ,0

J.& aor. i. To spread (carpets) one over another, S f ^ " Piled one over another. a+ part.

pass. Spread over one another, piled up in order; $ -, 8 56 v. 28, " And the acacia

overspread with piles of flowers." 0 00 v&i aor. o. 7'o endm with brilliant y and beauty, tc

shine. *,-Â Brightness, refulgence. >c part. act. Shining. SOT. a. To butt at with the & Thai which is gored to death. Note. The Ã is corn- monly added to adjectives when changed intc

Â¥V 4 nouns substantive by what ie called JaJh D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 279, note.

laJh? aor. o. and i. To drop. 5^u Sperma genitale. & aor. i. To speak articulately and clearly, tc

Spak (with & 8nd w), & 0 . . 45 v. 28, " I t ipeoki concerning you wit1 truth;" JT'G J - G; 53 v. 3, " Neithe~ doth he speak of his own will." i J* n.a Speech, language, aa,&lTjl d 27 v

0

16, "We have been taught the language 01

birds."-&I IV. To cause to utter articulah sounda.

B >or. o. To look, behold (with Jl or &) ; h look on, look at (with ace.) ; to look for, expeci (with am. or with ><), c at 2 v.206,88v. 14 etc.; to see, consider (sometima with J), ak<

83 v. 23, " Seated upon couche* they shal contemplate (objecta of delight) ; " to wait foi

0 9 .. (with ace,), as at 57 v. 13 ; to regard, as <A], 0 9 , 0 9 u,+. 2 v. 157, "They shall not be regarded," or it may be l1 Neither shall they be waited for," i.e. time shall not be given them for repentance, n.8. A look. > part. act. One who looks at, beholds, observes, or waita for, a spectator. $ A single glance. & A respite.-- IV. To grant one a respite ;

9 L V 00

to put off, u & ii Poetic* for 0

7 v. 194, "And do not put me off (by any 5 < 0 ' delay)." jm part. paw. R e ~ ~ i t . e d . - ~ l

Till. To expect, wait, await. 'la_ part. act.

' 0 0 One who waits or expects.

<"Â¥ aor. a. and o. To go quickly (a camel) ; aor. o. S'^f -

To be very white. + Plur. ;$ An ewe sheep.

.'/" p~ aor. a. To be weak, somnolent. UÃ \ n.a. Drowsineas, sleepiness.

..0 pj aor. a. and i. To call alodd to (with u); pro- . perly, To call sheep, croak as a raven.

J<J acr. a, To give shoes to any one. fern. A shoe.

2 aor. a. o. and i. To et&y the comforts and con- ' wnkcct of Hfe, to bejoyfitt. Yea; For

the difference between and ^LJ see &. - '&. am, an irregular verb found in the Korfin only

in the maec. 3rd pen. sing., it is called by \, 4 Ã ‡ grammarians \ JM or verb of praise, its ' 0 k 0 4 0 0

meaning in To be excellent, thus J41 @ 8 v. 41, " He 31 an excellent master ; " i t may generally be rendered How excellent I as

9 'A 4.0 *\fd\ <Â¥ 18 v. 30, l1 How excellent a reward I " I t is need alike with both sing. and plur., thus 2l. lTj .y 61 v. 48, fit. " How

.re* 00

excdlent (m we) who i p r f d i t out;" .Ã§ & m 3 7 i. 73, "Verily how excellent-

or gracious,-were thorn who answered," i.6. "We returned a gracious answer." for

t,Ã 9 0 cÃ<u or GfM,, as y JJa^ & 4 v. 61, "How excellent is the admonition which he gives you;" it is alao written @. 7 Plur. 5 Â¥" +\ Cattle. +IS part. act. Rejoioing, joyful. % Comfort and mnvenience of life. %0 Plur. 7 Grace, kindness, favour, bene-

s /Ã‡. ficence ; this word is sometimes spelt u- w,

see D. 0. Or. T. I, p. 276, -OK. 2 Happi- ma&, delight, pleasure. *-= (2nd declension)

0s: Grace, favour.-yu 11. To provide good thinga for m y one (with tec. of peiB.).-*<S1 IT. To be gracious towards (with & of pen.) ; to confer (benefits) upon (with ace. and ,$ of pere.).

Ju tor. o. and i. TO i ~ e - t h e w.-,,Â£. IT. To wag the head at any one-(with ace. of ~5 and Jfi of pen.).

* Q- iJ^Ju aor. i. and o. To blow. i^Lu One who blows, *f^ t ( Ã ‡ Ã ‡ aa JJuh & u l Ã ˆ l 113 v. 4, " The women

who blow on knots," a kind of incantation. > nor. a. TO difuse an o h w , to ~ o r n (ills mid. S'"f

iUt^1 One single breath. 2 nor. 0. To blow with the mouth, breathe (with S -"y 2). W A single blaat.

& aor. a. To vanish, fail, to be exhausted. i u n,a. A failure, failing.

1<J aor. o. To penetrate (as an arrow), to pau beyond or out of (with 2).

,00 JU tor. o. and 1. To run away tkroughfright, to go forth to any business, as to war, at 0 v. 123 (with ^f), "JU People, a company of men not exceeding ten nor l eu than three. ;*JU n.a. The act of running away, or being a fugitive; in the KO& it means the act of

flying from the truth. 3 A company or number of men taking part with any one, as

5 *^I-? in war.-+ part. act. X. f. One who takes to flight, fugitive. 9 To injure by casting an evil eye upon any one. J fern. ~ iu r . 3 1 and &,L' A sod, a living soul or person ; as in Arabic there are no reflective personal pronouns, their place is

5Ln" 5tÃ‡

partly supplied by the word* &, M, etc., see D. 0. Or. T. 2, p. 286, et sea,; in this e $ 9 1 and the rest must be L la-

l/0 In"

lated himself, itaelf, themselves, etc. ; i^AJ ,& ^ - " * 6 Y. 35, "Without (his having slain) a soul,"- unless in case of retaliation or as a punishment for murder; a when used adverbially, as at 4 v. 3, means willingly, see ',,y , rt. <Ã‘ for , ,* 1,; ^ . Â £ ~ ^ l o v . G , " o myown accord, at my own p l w u r e . " - 3 V. To

L i -A- shine (the Aim) ; JX' \$ I ,81 r. 18, ' By the dawn when it cleanaway the dark-

/, *0

nesa by its breath."-&& VI. To long for, s .0 Ã aspire after. &,La part. act. One who longs

or aapirea after. 3 aor. o. To pick or tease wool; to stray for food

5 tm by night (with .<Ã) n-+ put . p m . Teased, carded.

LA) aor. a. To be u d u l to, to profit ; to avail (with b G). *@ n.a. Cue, utility, u~fulneÃ§! proat.

?*Â¥'< -Â & . (2nd decleniion) plnr. of *Ã§Ã§ An advantage, that which is useful or profitable.

$ To he saIeabIe; mr. a. and o. To corn6 out of iff hole (ajerboa). $ n.a. A hole, properly, in a place from whence there ia another exit ; the word occurs at 6 Y. 35, and the meaning of the passage is aa follows, " If thou art able to seek out for thyaelf a hole, so that thou

mayest enter into the bowels of the earth, etc., and bring them a sign (then do so);" the

9 . / - ^ correlative proposition known as the v \ Ã ˆ s Ã‡-X 4 &!I or answer to tlic condition being under-

stood ; D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 611. n&L' Expendi- ture, that which any one expends.-(*AG 111. To enter into its hole, to which there aregene- rally ten or a dozen entrances (a jerboa), and hence, as it is said, to be a hypocrite :n religion, professing to believe first one thing and then another. n.a. Hypocrisy. &L-* part. act. One who is a hypocrite in religion.- ./ /Â¥^

(~ ju ! IV. To spend, expend one's substance (with ace. and J, or A, also with & of pcrs.); this word is frequently used in the KO& to signify to expend one's substance in alms or other good works, and in this sense the accus. is occasionally understood, as a t 2 T. 2. & part. act. One who expends his substance in almsgiving and other good works. zq n,a. The act of spending.

,JZ TO .. g'ue booty, JJU ~ l u r . Jl* ~ o o t y , spoils. &b' A gift, a work of supererogation, as prayers over and above what are commanded, or a gift over and above what is asked.

& aor. o. To remove, expel (with >). h" aor. o. To dig through (a wall). +JU *.a.

The act of digging through. &$ A captain or leader.-- 11. To pass or wander through, to search out (with J ) .

b To ~ k r a t e . - a IV. To set free, deliver (with './C.-'l, ace. and &I, L\ X. To seek to deliver

(with ace. and ,.. ). A) nor. o. To ~ t d e e ; ~ a s s . 3 To be blown (a

trumpet). 2 The groove in a date-stone; s '.. -^ \'su In the smallest matter. ^\ A trumpet.

2 aor. o. To be deficient, to diminish, lessen ; to cause a loss or deficiency as a t 50 v. 4, C 9 C 9 L l - O P&,.b. >,,I! i Ã§- "What part of them the earth consumes," viz. their bodies ; to fall short, fail or be wanting in anything (with

sy double ace.), as at 9 v. 4. n.a. Loss, S 0 diminution. d~ part. pass. Diminished.

xi&i nor. o. and i. To make a crashing noise, to break or violate (a treaty), to untwist, as a t 16 v. 94. ^aSJ n.a. The act of violating (a covenant).-i/aS? IV. To wring, as a load from getting loose on the back.

$ aor. a. To soak, raise a sound. "& n.a. Duet k

rising and floating in the air. iji} To devour; aor. i. To dislike, disapprove;

/Â¥ Â ¥ < Ã ,1 6 1 ' d I ?LiI ,_,I \fÂ 9 v. 75, "And their only reason for disliking (the plot to destroy Mohammad) was that God had enriched them, etc. ; to reject, take vengeance on (with ^y of pers.).-'"" 4 VIII. To take vengeance on

S . / C (with of pcrs.). ,A+\ ma. Vengeance. S .../L ' *KÃ‡ part. act. One who takes vengeance, an avenger.

0 -'. tn /- 4 aor. o. To turn aside (with ,c). part. act. One who turns aside. aG (2nd declension) plur. of i.., - A shoulder, a tract of country.

(J-L 1st pera. plur. aor. cond. viii. f. of J\S for J q.v.

J^iJ aor. o. and i. To untwist (a rope), break (a covenant), violate an oath; used both with and without an accusative. a; Plur. &El

././ The untwisted strands of a rope.

<!"Â¥Â aor. a. and i. To perforate to marry a husband h

or wife. gk, n.a. M . t r r i B g e . - ~ IV. To give in marriage (with ace. of pera. given, as

at 24 v. 32, also of pers. to whom given, as "^t-^'1-

at 2 v. 2201.-/Ã‘ X. To wish to marry. 3 aor. o. To croak nith all his might (a raven) ;

and J J aor. a. To be wretched and miserable (life). J> J Niggardly.

3 aor. a. To be ignorant of, to ignore, disawm, to feel a repugnance towards. and Iniquitous, horrible, unknown, unheard of, as at 18 v. 86. 3 Denial, reprobation, chaflge; ,.$ 3 a 22 v. 43, "How great was the 0

change which I made in their condition;" ^SJ is here put Poetic6 for 4 D. 8. Or, T. 2, p. 497. 'Â£ (2nd declksion) comp. form, Most disagreeable.-.L' 11. To tram- form (a thing) SO that it cannot be recognized (with aec. and J of p e r a . ) . - ~ IV. To bt ignorant of, deny. *?< part. act. One whc knows not, disavows, or denies. part pose. Unknown, disallowed, unwarrantable

Sf\/

unlawful, the opposite to up., see 3 v. 100 denial, as at 22 v. 71.

y i aor. o. To turn down or upside down, as 'w,$ $21 v. 66, Lit, "They were turnei upside down upon their heads," meaning the they relapsed into idolatry. f uSc part. act One who bends down.-& 11. To cause on to bend or bow down. 9 aor. i. To fall back, retreat, as,& & &

8 v. 50, Lit. "He retreated upon his twt heels."

ÃÃ‘ aor. o. To endure a shower of rain to the end, .'"',,I. to wipe tears from of the face.-d$Ll X

To ditdain (with 3 or 3). 0,0 JL aor. o. and i. To retire; and J To tak

example. Jii Plnr. JiSI A fetter. JiL' AI example, a punishment.-JJ^; ma. 11. f. Th act of punishing or making an example.

* .- aor. o. and i. To spread calumnies. /n i Calumny, slander.

/ 00 (JI,\-V (2nd declension) plur. of A cushion, 0

prop, a pad placed upon a saddle ; no verbal root.

j-*J aor. o. To malign. J generic noun, Ants. iS- i noun of unity, A single ant. (2nd

5 Ã +Ã declension) plur. of &I The tips of the fingers.

0 , -0 s 01- & nor. a. To point out the way, A clew . and open way.

0, < -n> aor. a. To cause (a stream) to flow, to repulse, reproach. xf plur. o f 2 A river. 2 A river, 'y A day from dawn or from sunrise till sunset as opposed to night.

_f/ aor. a. D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 260, To forbid, inter- dict, prohibit, hinder (with ace. or with ace. and 'iff) ; also 2 aor. o. To be intelligent;

4'6 4 ,0 4 I & 79 v. 40, " He restrained his soul; " I. 091-l 1-s / J is also used with J, u J i_. J,\

6 v. 56, " I am forbidden to worehip," (see LT). ^J Understanding. Ã \ for fc\; part. act. One who forbids.-,Ãˆ VI. To forbid one another

-

(with >).-A\ VIII. To refrain one'xelf, to abstain, desist (used occadonally with 2).

,U 9 .f^t uoun of time or place, A fixed term, a ~ " 1 - 9 o '.t* terminua or limit; 1 Ã ;A- 53 v. 14,

' The Lote-tree beyond which there is no paw s." 0" 9 A- ~ ' 6 9 ing," see J,+. fs^ for ^_y^^ 0 part. act. . t'^f -Â Ã 0,.# One who desists; PIur. ^yr^ for ^y-yiv* D.8 .Or .T . 1,p. 113.

Ãˆ aor. o. To rise with diÂ¥fficulty to weigh down- a load (with u of pen.).

'41' lur. of &-Ã l rt. La; q.v. ,P

4 6 tor. o. To supply the place of a n o t h e r . - a IV. To repent and turn to God (with J'i).

S f part. act. One who turns with repent- , ../

ance to God. 0 0 s' -\ nor. o. To lament. c+ proper name, Noah.

\w),! 3rd pera. plur. pret. pass. of & iii. f. ol \Ai q.v.

# 0 ,\ aor. o. To shine, 3 fem. Fire. 2 Light.- S f part. act. IV. f. He or that which gives light, enlightening.

0 ' n-l nor. o. To be shaken to and fro (anything

hanying). 2 Sot dc\ Men, people; a s .<- collective noun regarded as the plur. of &1

A man, human being, rt. J q.~. I t is said to embrace also the Genii and evil spirits, but I can recall no passage in the Kodn where i t is so employed. . . a 9 00 $1 nor. o. To take, &e,-Jn^ n.a. VI. f. The act of taking or receiving, reception; J j

'9 ^a Ã‡oÃ - & .,184 v..51, " And how should they receive (the faith) from a far die- tant place ?" i.e. beyond the grave.

# 0 fl\/ aor. o. To retreat, remain behind,jly. $U- Time or place of retreat.

0 0

jl aor. o. To clean the flesh from fat. & * she-camel.

$ aor. o. To bestow ; and a0r.a. for & D. 8. Or. T. I, p. 242, to grant <with ace. i f pers. and t _ ~ of thing), see Jl for &. . 0 . S y ?U nor. o. To win a sleeping match, ?; n:a. Sleep. s ,-0 pb part. act. One who deeps. *L/Ã Time or place of sleeping, a dream.

2 Th idler , a Hah ; 4 ~ : The Lord of the Fish, name of the Prophet Jonah.

& aor. i. To intend. & Intention, a date-atone. $ aor. i. and a. D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 243, To obtain,

get (with &; to attain, reach, be acceptable to (with ace. of pers.), as at 22 v. 38; it may occasionally be rendered by the Passive I t

0 t.?9 - ' I . H 0 0 is given, as 4 1 . ^_y & 7 Y. 35, " Their portion (of the good things of this life) shall be given them from (that which is written in) the Book of God's decrees." n.a. That which any one gets or receives; at 9 Y. 121, the only place where it occurs, i t must be taken in a bad sense, meaning death, imprioon- ment, or other injury.

* and when preceded by kesra or by Ã either quiescent after kesra or jazmated after fatha, s, an indeclinable affixed personal or possessive pronoun of 3rd pen. sing. maac. ; when affixed to a verb or preposition as a personal pronoun it means him or it, and when to a noun as a po88esaive, his or its ; This particle must not be confounded with which is occasionally found at the end of words in case of pause,

and hence called Â¥^Qf or +,L T'1Ã see instances in the 69th chapter, at the 19th and some following verses.

Uk indeclinable affixed personal or possessive pronoun of 3rd pen. sing. fern. Her, it, its, see ;.

'J& is likewise an interjection, Lo ! behold ! ; it is occasionally prefixed to other words, as llfti* written also Here, l& or more commonly Id This, and other words, without

apparently adding much to their signification ; 01-- D. S. Gr. T. 1, pp. 441 and 536. ^Lo Take

6 9 0

ye ! for Ã‡Sb the d b e i n g changed into hamza; 6 when t,hus followed by the affixed pronoun i'S his the sense of J^ Take! the word occurs at 69 v. 19; see D. 8. Gr. T. 1, p. 579.

$6 Bring! produce I Some doubt exists as to the derivation of this word ; according to De Sncy it stands for the Plur. Imperat. ol the iii. f. of 21 To come, but it bears a meaning more in conformity with the iv. f. of that verb q.v. See also D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 256. 0: 0 fl b oblique fern. dual of \JJ& q.v.

9r^ u,,b (2nd declension) HAroot, name of a re- 9Ã 0 bellious angel, see (_-iJJL.

01-Ã p 1. see It. LJ& aor. i. and o. To fall down, descend, come down

(with ^ÃˆÃ ; to go down into (with ace.), as at 2 v. 68.

L& aor. o. To be raised so as to float in the air (dust). 3-6 Dust floating in the air.

# 0 4

To sleep, w a t c h . - 4 V . To watch (with t->).

2 aor. o. To separate one's-self from, break of1 an acquaintance with, leave off, abstain from, quit, leave alone; to rave deliriously, to talk nonsense. _^c6 n.a. The act of separating

a ? one's-self from another. J)SV* part. pass. Spoken in a wild and delirious manner.-

111. To migrate (with A, also with >); to fly one's country, emigrate, become a refugee (with ..), 9 T . j \,',-lt & X i 6 T. 43,

4 -0 -, i e. AjJ l ( Ã < "Those who have fled their country in pursuance of their duty to God, or

0 0 Ã 0 . for his sake," so also &bT'& jt & s ~ ' 4 f. 101, " He who flies his'co'untrT (Ã‡alking

in the path of God's religion." >G part. act. One who flies from his country, a refugee ; 4 9 'I- \ Those who fled from Mecca to avoid .

persecution on account of their religion. aor. a. To sleep.

b

Uk aor. o. To beak, demolish. k n.a. Demoli- tion; 1% In utter ruin.

- 4 - Ã ˆ J J nor. i. To ~ver turn . -~ .u 11. To demolish.

S I G Ã &JJk To coo (as a d m ) . .X&U A Hoopoe. & aor. i. To lead in the right way, direct aright

(with double acc. or with ace. and J or Jl); to follow a right course; \^Jb 6 v. 80, " He , has directed me," for >.a D. 8. Qr. T. 1,

s " p. 118, and T. 2, p. 497. 6.u n.a. A victim f t for sacrifice, &n offering. ~ A A n.a. comm.

gend. A direction, that which indicates the So 0 right way. <u+ A gift, offering. $6 part.

act. One who directs, a director, guide. &I (2nd declension) comp. form, One who is a better guide, or who follows a better direction. -&\ VIII. To be directed aright (with J

Ã

or Jl,). f^f* part. act. having like the verb a pass. signification, Guided aright, led into the right way.

0 , I& or IAÃ Fern. &I ; Dual $6 Fern. qG and 00,

oblique Fern. or 2 6 ; Plur. 6% This, these; a compound word consisting of the particle lb Lo ! behold ! and the demonstrative pronoun \i. Note. According to the system of the Arab grammarians all the above words are considered indeclinable nouns, and totally , independent of each other, see G.

0 00

9 aor. o. Tofly, run arcay. &> n.a. Flight. ;,Ã To fvalk with quick and trembling gait.-

20

-^A, fJ IV. To make to go hastily (with or &). &Jb (2nd declension) Aaron.

& aor. o. To move, shake (with of pers. and+, as at 19 v. 2 5 ) . - . l VIII. To stir one's-self, to be stirred or set in motion.

t> - f . " 12 nor. a. To break; and +ya aor. a. To mock, Â s,,

ridicule. ,;a n.a. A mockery, derision, ridi- I/Â¥< , I-

cule, jest, laughing-stock.-\v^\ X. To mock, scoff, ridicule, laugh any one to scorn (with

i '-", /

+), d-e part. act. One who scoffs. JJÃ air. o. T; be thin ; and JJS, aor. a. To johe.

J$ n.a. A joke. ,

00. ~2 aor. i. To squeeze with the hand, to put to S K - - ' flight. ?>M(-Ã part. pass. Routed, put to flight.

& aor. o. and i. To beat down leaves from a tree, as J ' 1,1 20 v. 19, " By means , of it I beat down the leaves (as food) for my cattle." J Jb aor. i. To break, especially anything dry or hollow. $4 Dry sticks or stubble.

0 00 pm aor. i, To break, injure, withhold that which is due; and aor. a. To be thin and graceful.

n.a. '.'he withholding of that which ii s dm, 4 Thin and smooth, as the spathe

of the Palm when distended with flowers. & nor. a. To run forward with the eyea fixed in honw.-f^y part. act. IV. f. One who hastens with fixed gaze or extended neck. \a Thui, a word compounded of the particles l> Behold, i_( As, and 1; Tbii.

ilft particle of interrogation, Whether? Is there? Does he? etc.

JÃ TO appear. &I plur. of J& A new moon, or according to some the moon during the first

and last two or three nights ; at other times the moon is called 3.-3 IV. To invoke the name of God upon an animal in slaughtering it, aa &l'>, $ &! lÃ 2 v. 168, Lit. " That on which invocation has been made to any other than God;" since the only flesh that can be lawfully used for food is that on which at the time of slaughter the words - a 4 b 4 <Uil I b have been pronounced. r; S I . J i - To be very impatient. @ Very impatient. -

l JiA aor. a. and i. To perish, die, fall; i t is some- - Ã ˆ 0 I. , times found with 2, aa &LA &@I

a/--' b 0

<~Ã‘ 8 v. 44, " That he who perishes may in spite of clear evidence ;" > t_f^Uk

G u 69 v. 29, " My power has fallen away from me." a.6 part. act. One who perishes. @ Perdition. i-J3 Time or place of destruction.-&I IV. To destroy, waste,

5 I - *

cause to perish (with ace. and +I. G&A . . part. act. One who destroys. % part. pass. Destroyed.

>lb Come! bring! an anomalous verb, D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 546; i t is found in the Kodn only

X Ã ˆ . 0 0

in the above fornl; as >- p 33 v. 18, G P -.. 0 .Ã Â¥ .

" Come to us; '* \ +I a> 6 v. 151, Bring forward your witnesses." '

A or after kesra, etc. 2, see Ã an indeclinable pro- Â p noun of 3rd pera. maac. plur.; Fern. 8 or ^ft They; Dual l*Ã or They two; when

used as an affix after a verb or preposition I. f p etc. must be rendered Them, and when after a noun, Their. All the above words are properly speaking distinct and indeclinable; D. 8. Qr. T. 1, p. 455.

Â¥f aor. o. To ponder anything in the mind, to meditate, think about, design, to be anxious

about (wi@&tl.c with w); to plot tgainst, I. 6^.' as 3 ~_ÃˆÃ 40 v. 5, " And ever}

nation has laid plots against their prophet."- a* IV. To make anxious,

I*J& or IÃ‡A see *A. aor. o. To be extinguished, lifeless. &6 part. act. Barren aodiif'.!':?.

5 ' I . ' 3 wr. i. and o. 3h impel, pour f o r t h , - - part. act. VII. f. Pouring forth. /. -r > aor. i. and o. To squeeze &a the hand, to bite, J *Ã eomrn. @. A tack-biter. jG A

6 'f

slanderer, ~ \ i ^ * &il suggestions of the Devil.

l Ã§ 5% b r d , wr& a22 night without halting, JuASb n.8. (baffling sound, properly, 01

camels' feet. , *A no primitive fprm, To put anything in the

girdle called il<Ãˆ^> i',tÃ (2nd declension) proper name, Haman.

3 or & They, thew, their ; an indeclinable pro- 0 # I noun of the 3rd pers. fern. plur., see r ,. *A* tuft wr. a. 0. f t ~ d i, To anoint a camel with pitch,

to be ifiMuMM. & May i t be wholesorno or profitable, much good may it do you ; the accusative or adverbial form of ',-* Whole-

\ / 1 . ,I" some, digestible, as + LÃ J s+ 4 v. 3, Literally, "Then eat it with easy digestion and wholesomeness," a figurative expression meaning "Take it and make use of it to your profit and advantage."

&,G ~here , i n that place, composed of llb ere, with the affix &/, in the same way as from the pronoun \i is formed the word &,; or a$, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 513.

(Â¥ for Here, composed of 6 Behold I and LÃ Here, in this place.

0 9 ,A He, it, an indeclinable personal pron6un of the

third pers. sing. masc. , 4 . ;lA aor. o. To return to one's duty (with A); to

become a Jew. 5; Hood, name of a prophet said to have been sent to the tribe'of 'Ad; the Jews, generic noun, same as q.v.

0 0 ,IA am. o. To fall to ruin. J\S> Weak, infirm, tottering.-;gi VII. To fall in ruin, tumble to pieces (with u).

*$ These; an indeclinable pronounused as the plural of I&, and composed of \A and *'<I q.v.

& aor. o. To be light, vile, despicable, quiet. s i"- s # up n.a. Meekness, quietness, modesty.

Â¥; /

n.a. Contempt, ignominy. (_ .A Light, easy. 9 .. l ypl (2nd declension) comp. form, More or

0 /I most easy.- lsi IV. To despise, render con- ^ , temptible. part. act. That which renders

s 0 , contemptible, ignominious, shameful. ..lL,,. part. pass. Despised, rendered contemptible.

s^> aor. i. To fall, to stoop as a bird to its prey, also to rise; aor. a. To love, desire;

' t,f 4," I4 * L) 1, 53 v. 1, by aome interpreted " By the stars when they set," and by others n 6 4, '',.ÃˆL u, b-3 -

when they rise; " ?L-H fl A'&\ J-'-Ã

ft^'i JG 14 v. 40, "Make th; hearts of some men to be well inclined towards them ;" to blow away as the wind (with +), see 22 v. 32. dji Plur. Vita! Desire, will, lust, inclination. r\'f> Void. Â£, The Ioivest pit

,G, '. of IIell.-&1 IV. To o r t r t h r o ~ . - ~ ~ l b X. To infatuate.

,ft She, it, an indeclinable personal pronoun of the 3rd pera. fern. sing.

s 1& aor. a. aud i. To be prepared. Form,

I S ^ figure.-Uk 11. To dispose aright (with ace. and J of pers.).

0

an anomalous verb used with the preposition J, as & .A 12 v. 23, " Come!" I t is spelt in a variety of ways, as a, &a,

4, etc., D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 546. Ã‡ -'Â

s l m aor. i. 70 be raised or excited, as dust, anger, etc., to wither.

JlÃ aor. i. Topour out. (5-y* Poured out. FlÃ aor. i. To be captivated by love, to wander

abroad like one distracted (with &). plur. of $-% A female camel raging with thirst from disease.

; an inseparable prefixed conjunction, And, also, but, whilst; when meaning together with it is said to govern the accus., thus i t is that

..at/Â 4 ./ -r C-r, , ', t. ?',a

some at 2 v. 33 read &! \ >jJ iÃ‘- &l "Do thou inhabit the garden together with

/- 9 C0.

thy wife;" however the nominative &,jy both here and in similar passages would seem to be preferred ; ; is also used in forms of oaths, and then governs the genitive, as <y "if ;Ã!H"5 v. 23, "Thm by the Lord ^ s

of heaven and earth." For the difference between; and d see D, S. Or. T. 1, p. 555. , 2, - /,* \. Beep\ . . * ..lC 0 A, aor. TO bury d o e . ; J , ~ fem. part. pass,

-

(A damsel) buried alive. JI; aor. i. Tofly for refuge. J Ã A refuge. ., 0 A aor. i. To stand still; and% To h a ~ e much hair

s -Ã . 0

or itml. ,by\ plur. of;; Soft camel's-hair or felt.

d.0 9 0 . , f.b. St,^

JÃ aor. J;^; and J Ãor j ^ ~ To perish. J^Y . , .

-' ,0.

;/*;**q uadriliteral verb, To say Amen / to keep Â¥ I-0 f anything safe. ^_y^* part. act. That which

^ 0. / preserves anything safe (with &I, as <iLlc 5 v. 52, " Preserving i t (the Scripture) safe from change or corruption ;" s r The Guardian, a name of God.

0 0 6 ,

[Ã‘- an anomalous verb used like & with the preposition J, as &iif *Ã‘Ã 23 v. 38, "Away with that which ye are threatened with;" it is equivalent to A)Ur, the Preterite being used for the Optative, D. 0. Gr. T. 1, p. 545, but there are sundry ways of spelling it.

A place of destruction.-J^l IV. To destroy, cause to perish.

3; aor. (J.J To pursue eagerly, paw forth rain in large drops ; and JJ; &or. o. To be heavy and unwholesome, as air, food, etc. 45 A beavy shower of rain. &; Gravity, g r i e roumo , heinousness. J**; A heavy blow, diutise- ment.

3) aor. Ay T@ driw in a stake. SlJ*l plur. of S& A stake ; ,j~ff'i> Â¥Ã£ ss v. 11, ~ b Ã § r Ã § lord of the stake*," either because his kingdom was firmly established, Ã ft tent when secured by stake* and pega, or because he was in the habit of fastening the hands and feet of big victims to picketo driven into the ground.

,:, 2, aor. 2 To hate, defraud way one of a thing (with double ace.). "J* a,*. Single ; for the meaning of tin w o l d t > v . ^ i T ; . 89 V. 2, WI =pi.

S ' 'Jiy aor, -> To i r y w c any one in the or aorta, the large artery which r m a from the upper part of the heart.

,. , 5 f 6 , aor. 24 To confide or trust in any one. ~jli:

A bond, that with which anything ia tied or qt-1

bound. fem. of cotnp. form, Very ^ A firm. ^y* A compact, bond. ,,

covenant, treaty .-a; 111. To enter into a compact or treaty with any one (with ace. of pers. and ").-a IV. To bind, draw tight.

s <Â¥ T ,' Plur. ,u ~n idol; the verbal root is not found in the primitive form.

, ," , aor. L_->aE To be necessary, to fall down ' / , dead, as ^ys- Ã‘w' U! 22 v. 37, "And when they-Lit. their sides-have fallen dead."

,,, +, tior. is.? To find, perceive. -y^ n,a. Corn- t.' ' - ' &

petence, means, as +^v-) 65 v. 6, " Ac- cording to your means."

-/ , -/ _ is-, To entertain fear,-&? IV. To conceive

, , L ,

in the mind (with ace. and ,-Ã§) as i-^ bPI- - .Ã£ 11 v. 73, " And he conceived a fear of them."

&; nor. 4 To be agitated, &$ part. act. < , L

~ a l ~ i t a t i n ; . - ~ J IV. TO make a hone 01

camel move briskly with a bounding pace. 9 ,I-, & aor. Js-$ To fear. J Afraid, smitten

, , with fear.

,*, Ã>- aor. To strike in the face. & Plur.

S 99 , -

ayr, A face, countenance, favour, honour, - 4 I-,

sake, as ,dl A?'J 76 v. 9, " For the sake of Â¥' 4 , t i - r

God ; " a beginning, as ,v I &, 3 v. 65, , "In the early part of the day ;" intention, ae

^ 5 4 t*', t- l ,.; - ~ i j~wk , \f\ J 5 V. 107, "Thai they should bear testimony in accordance with its true meaning or intention ; " essence, being,

P 7x7 substance, as, hf \i J,l* ~2 3 28 v. 88, " Every thing hall perish except himself," Lit. his essence; see D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 404 ;

v / I- / .-.-'-Ã >- , so tlso at 2 v. 106, ,a, w, +l @ "He ,. , / / b

who submits himself to God ;I' L : +.hi\ I f ,& 22 v. 11, He becomes a p ~ v e r t , J ' Lit.

"He is turned upon himself; I' ,,L "8s

also be rendered " according to hie manner or .- way." i,Ã‘- A tract. &; Honourable, held

- 0 0 in high repute.-+, 11. To turn, direct (with .- a ^

ace. and J).-to-9 V. To proceed (with sTG and name of place).

T O , +< aor. Yo be one, alone, unique. JO-J n.a. t , 'd /-

Alone; a h , He or him alone, by himself; This word 'A; when followed by an affixed pronoun is to be regarded as an adverbial expression and indeclinable, D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 512, and T. 2, p. 291, note. &s One, single. -} lone.-^%& n.a. 11. f. The worship of one God, belief in the Unity of the Godhead.

, 0 . +. aor. && 70 throw away (arms, etc.) in S " S l..

flight, fs , plur. of iJa -. Wild beasts, , . S b 0 5, aor. To indicate, reveal. s, ma. A

I- '--Â¥ , /t- revelation, &;, kt , 11 v. 39, '' Under our , , inspection, and according to our revelation." -

8 t-1 -&,1 IV. To reveal (with ace. and J, 4, or &, also with J and ;I); to make signs (with of pers. and y>, thu. at 19 v. 12,

9 w , <- I- I-, l* ,_,I .yli &l> "And he made s i p to , them (as though he would say) praise God ;'I

see '.,I ; to inspire, speak by inspiration or revelation (with ^\ and 3); to suggest (with ace. and Jl), as a t 6 v. 112 ; also with ^J\ of pers. and J with subjunctive, as a t 6 v. 121. ,

*' 2, aor. a. To love, desire, wish (with ace. or with

6. L Ã a 1 L/ 2, 9, or J, or ,I 9). 2, n.a. Wadd, name of an Idol worshipped originally by the ante- diluvians, and subsequently by the Pagan

s, Arabs, hi, n.a. Love. :,$ Loving. ;yy ;.a. Love, affection, friendship.-$ 111. To

, love. , ^ ^ f /"' aor. &+ To place, leave, uaed only in the aor.

and imperat. ; imperat. 5 Leave alone, per- / * - / mit, take no notice 11. To leave.-

S , L 0 0 / chi* noun of time and place X. f. A place of deposit, as the womb or the grave.

,^^ f /' s^^ JJ; aor. j~t> To drop rain, (JJ) n.a. Rain. >) aor. i_sk To pay a fine as expiation for man-

slaughter, & for ><\;, and with the article i J g ' T ~ o e t i c 6 for .. ' , see D. S. Gr. T. 2, p. 497; Plur, A valley, channel of a

s river, a river. 4 9 A fine to be paid for man-

Â£. , , :/ . slaughter, as &.-. +.i 4 v. 94, "Then let a fine be given."

9 . X ;J>; aor. J~ To j a i l upon, wound; aor.;G not used , in the preterite; 1mperat.;J To leave, let, forsake, let go (with ace. and & or or with ace. and J followed by the aorist sub- , ,

4 t,,, 0 .

junctive) ; i t is also used with, as ^J &J 0 / 6 0 , I&, \ J^>- 74 v. 11, " Let me alone with

f 9 " - him whom I have created;" a,,& 12 v. 47, " Leave it."

A,, aor. & To be heir to any one (with ace. of s /"

pen. o r & ; to inherit. <Ã§Â 1 Plur. A-S;; J3 ;* ^9

part. act. One who inherits, an heir. L_>L( and &I/M inheritance.-&. IV. To constitute one heir of anything, to give for an inheritance (with double ace.).

iJii aor. & To be present, arrive at, properly, at 0

water, to drink thereof; to go down into. s L 9 A place of descent, an approach, especially to water for the purpose of drinking, thus

# G 9 - C 9 f- '" ' '5 Jl cT?/ I A-J, 19 v. 89, "And we will drive the wicked into Hell, as cattle are driven to water." $,$ part. act. One who goes down (with J); , one who goes before a caravan to draw water, one who is present at. v / 6, kJ fern. of ss A rose, rosy. &^y The

5 ,b /

jugular vein. 'part. pass. Descended into, arrived at.-GI IV. To lead one into (with double ace.).

-, , 9 /Â 5 -, j,) aor. J ~ J 7b put forth leaves. jJ, collective

s 0

noun, Leaves. 4,; A single leaf. j4 Money. . , _^y aor. ,& To eat away the interior of the body

(matter). $7;; That which is &kind. f\;\ Behind, before, beyond, beside or except is never found in the Koran without a complement either expressed or understood, see D, S. Gr. T . 2, p. 152; 'JJ.) 1; 4 v, 28, "What- ever is beside this," or " all with this excep-

t, ,-0, <- tion ; " J] 45 v. 9, may be rendered either " Before them," or "behind them."- . , &,b 111. To hide (with ace, and 2-JS

.f/ 9 IV. To strike fire. & ? y ~ fern. part. act. One 0 ,,

who strikes fire.-dJly VI. To be hidden, hide one's-sel f (with <Ã‘ or ^Ã§ ; a t 38 v. 31

L 0 0 , the word uJ\y is used with an ellipse of the

9 G a 4 nominative, (m l\ being understood ; D. 8. Or. T. 2, p. 451.

/', s t , j j j aor. ;j To bear, carry (a burthen). j j J Plur.

s 0 6 Ã ,\,j\ n,a. A burthen, heavy weight, load; a t 47 v. 5 it means "Arms, or other burthens

s-"' imposed by war." , jj An inaccessible mountain, and hence a place of refuge. >$ part.

act. One who bean a burthen. >, A coun- sellor or minister who bears theburthen of state, commonly spelt and pronounced Vizier.

0 0 0 9 - " Â ¥ tjj aor. SJ To keep back, keep (men) in their ranks while marching.-<nf IV. To incite, put into the mind, instigate, inspire (with ace. and 31).

0 / 0 9 0 1.j) aor. 4, Imperat. ij TO weigh (with u) ; to

weigh out for any one (with ace. o f pers.). S IÃ A 9 b * 1.j) n.a. A weighing, weight. UJjjy part. paw. Evenly and equally balanced, that which baa its weights evenly adjusted. Plar. ^j\f, (2nd declension) A balance; a t 101 W. 5 and 6 &}\y^ may be rendered " The measure of his good works."

4 aor. LÃ§* 750 be in the midst, penetrate into the f , & The middle, middle; L, i-\

2 Y, If^m~st, accordihg to the commentators, Tw~eflderrf "A nation who have hit the golden m Ã § w J M t ~ m i l i e u . iL}fFern.&;comp.

, the more worthy, aa at 68 l ^ ~ , " , , 5 ~ . 9 1 , " 0 f

dinary kind of food which ye provide for your families." . .

f ~ f *or. f- To bÃ ample, to take in, embrace, S l i t comprehend. p~, Means, ability to perform

a thing. ';_\; One who or that which is -10, extensive, one who comprehends; as ifn attribute of God it means the Omnipresent w Omniacicnt, He whose mercy is over all his

s Ã bwka. 1Ã n.a. Plenty, opulence.-^-yÃ , part. net. tV> St One who enlarges, or makes of

1- mW%, tme who i8 in circumstances. M lor. & To gather togÃ§tlie (in one herd).-

si VIU. 90 be oomplete or in perfect order, aa t h e m at the full.

&^ Devout, reiigious. L; Close proximity; no verbal root in the primitive form.

. 0 0 s." 9 i J aor. 'p: To brand (with ace. and &).-?ja

part. act. V. f. One who knows a thing by its outward signs, intelligent.

0 / 9 0 t-0 s, _ ,y aor. ,J-)$ To be buried in sleep. A--> Sleep,

slumber, drowsiness. 0 0 t - , 9 609

^ys) quadriliteral; aor. ->$ To whisper evil, make evil suggestions (with J, Jl, or <_Ã of

9 0 l i - Â ¥ Â pere. or with &. UH\Ã -.Ji The Tempter, Satan.

/ 0 a

2, aor. & To paint cloth. i& An admixture of colour (in an animal) ; thus & &$ 'J2 v. 66 means " She is of a whole colour."

f 0 s - -; aor. To be perpetual. -1) part* act. Lasting; w; For ever.

J i aor. J^ To weave. J kl ; A threshold. 0 , 0 9 0 .% i,, A, aor. 4- To describe, aaeert. &, n.a.

Description, act of attributing or ascribing. J > aor. J To join ; to come to, arrive at, reach,

attain unto (with J). 4-y Wapela, a she camel or ewe, concerning which the Pagan Arabs were wont to observe certain superstitions in honour of their idols; see Sale's Kor&n, Preliminary Discourse, p. 172. -$; 11. To cause to reach (with ace. and J ofpere.).

0. :a 0 ' -ay tor. &: To join together. J-. A mandate, command, testament, legacy ; the accusative &; at 2 v. 241 and 4v. 16 mart be regarded , as an elliptical expression equivalent to I& ^-a L& " This is a Law; " D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 83 ;

f .a 0 i,. li , &< t - j ++ iy.. 4 ~ . 1% " Afh (the payment of) any legacy which he may have be-

a -Â

q ~ e a t h e d . " - ~ 11. To enjoin, command (with ace. of pen. and u, or with ace. and

m5- ', I). ey; n.a. A testamentary disposition-

-Â¥I.

of property.-, IV. To order, command (with arc. of pers. and <Ã‘ or &) ; to bequeath

9 ' s ' (with +I. qp for dy, part. act. A testator:-& VI. To give one another a command, to enjoin or recommend to one another (with u).

, ., , - -' , +, nor. Ã§. To put, place, lay down, lay aside, fix, bring forth a child; to put off, remove (with ace. and 2); to appoint (with J) ; , , -0, *, a\ e,, 18 v. 47, "And the Book (of the account of each man'a actions) shall be put (into his hands) ;" at 39 v. 69 these words would aeem rather to refer to the Book of God's decrees, which "shaV be laid open" on the day of Judgment. (2nd declension)

I. 0 ,

plur. of + i A place ; a t 4 v. 48 & may be rendered " The true meanings (of words)." S f^n. Â¥^ part. pass. placed.-'$7 IV. To drive

# A^ ,

(a camel) quicMy, as pi+ \F,Y, Ã v. 47, "And they would have driven about your camels,"-worrying them by constantly passing in and out among them.

, . &, aor. 2 To plait or fold a thing with one s p. par t over another. ,.py part. pass. Inter-

woven (with gold and precious stones).

3; aor. ^k> To tread, trample on, aa at 48 v. 25 ; on referring to this passage the reader will observe a notable instance of the ellipse of the

I.$ m 9 correlative proposition or , \ L++ afâ‚¬ if, D. 0. Gr, T. 2, p. 420 ; the h i a t r is Â¥up

^*. c, piled by Beidiwge aa follows, fi.4 S 'ft,. (T-B, me v. 24. Â£ n.t. properly, T b act of

L , * . trampling on ; a t 73 v. 6 the word* b, A-I may perhaps be translated " More capable of, or fitted for earnest devotion," or "for keeping

down all impure and unbecoming thoughts." 3 ',- ,,& A step.-^o\'f 111. To make to agree, or render equal-in number, etc.

i) A thing necessary to be done; no verbal root. .JÃ aor. ,& To remain in a place. >'y* (2nd

declension) plnr. of ',; A battle-field. ) aor. ,& To predict, promise, threaten (witb

double ace. or with ace. of pers, and J to?- lowed by energetic aorist, also with ace. of

1.1 pera. and J); to make any-,one a promiw (with acc, of pers.). g; n.a^ A promise, threat,

6 - 0 - u - prediction ; k @ l M, 4 v. 121, The elli(lÃ§

9 .Y

is thus explained by Beidioet, j&f 8 9

&-&,iJÃˆ-- see D. 0. Qr. f . & P.M. 5 , s b ?, L.a AG, Threatening, a threat. i* ,, *J^P#: $\n , A promise; time or placa of.iljlw ment of a prediction, prorob, or 4Ã‘l

Sf!.< ' . appointment for a meeting. Predicted, p r o r n i a e d . - ~ XI?. -4 fixed time or place for any one (with w- ace.) ; to plight faith to way one (with we. of , . ., perso)-. .; VI. To make a ma tad appointment.

&. aor. IMJ', Imperat. & To wtn, ftdmoniah (with tec. of pen. and + of thing, o i with $1 waning Leak or that &) ; to kdviae < a h RCC. of pen., (Ã‘* of thing, and thati. 6^J part. . 5 - act. One who warns. A rnniiw, cm admonition. ,. icy aor. & To collect, retain in the memory.

s'r 5 Plur. LC,~ A locker, box, vessel or bag, 5 where mything is stowed away. +$ fern.

part. pt, That which retains in the memory. IV. To be miwrly, to aecrete or hoard

-properly, i n Ã tie, ; at 84 T. 23 it meana to . " secrete in the breast."

la; aor. $ To come, as an ambkwador into th presence o f a king. 3; n.a. The act of cominj into the presence of Royalty.

-'<, St^/ j, a 0 r . S To be plentiful. JY~Ã part. pase. Ful]

ample. 3; aor. & To nm.-JS} IT. To hasten (wid

Jp. /a; aor. & To$nd a thing to bejitting.-,^ I1

To cause an agreement or reconciliation be s ^ tween two parties (with 2). +j$ n.a. Re

conciliation, success; prosperity, accomplish ment of one's wishes.-& n.8. 111. f. Thi act of suiting, becoming ; (~h, 78 v. 26 for -G I: "A fitting reward." ( -? 2; aor. Ju To perform a promise. J for ,' comp. form, Most complete or perfect, mort stlrict in the performance of a covenant.- & 11. To fulfil an engagement, pay or repaj (a debt) in full (with double ace.) ; to recom~ penae fully for anything (with & of pert. KC

ace. of thing, or with double ace.) ; thus 6 9 , 0c -' -', .,#-a/-.,*./ p a / 4 eJ.I 6 k \, 11 v. 118, " And indeed unto every one thy Lord will surely give the full reward of his works;" there are several ways of explaining the pleo- nasms with which this sentence appears to be encumbered; according to one should be spelt 3 meaning ^Ã§f see G, see also D. 8.

s-/> Or. T. 1, p. 640, note. for & part. act. one who pays in fu11.Ã‘j~ IT. TO fulfil or perform-a covenant-Ã‘(wit acc. or with <Ã‘/) to give full measure (with ace. and J of

SI pen.)- 4; for > . part. act. one who'ful- fils (hit co~enant).-JJ V. TO receive or tÃ§h to one's-ttlf aa God miyetit $he sod of

one who dies; to take the life of any one (with ace.) ; In the Passive, To be received ..,, , by God, an euphemism for to die. dp for 5 -00 l Ã ^_~p part. act. He who receives the soul, or takes away the life.-yy^ X. To take full measure, demand full payment.

t ij am. bf&; To enter, to overspread,-as darkness,-to be eclipsed (the moon).

JL To appoint a fixed time. 3; n.a. Time ; G'i, 7 v. 186, "To define its fixed time."

Plur. (teSAJ;lg (2nd declension) A fixed or stated time or period, time or place of

S Iif' appointment, Â ¥ ~ y part. pass. That of which the time is defined.

5 I' S, aor. 4 TO him. 9 ~uel.-SJ IT. TO ~ e t fire to, kindle (with ace. and J or A); also

0 - G00,1 9 9 Â¥ # with& thus3$. . .$lr> b,

Ãˆl< <U&Ã 13 v. 18, "And from that (ore) which they ignite in the fire . . . there comes a scum

S f f like unto it," i.e. like froth. A+ part. pass. . . / L, Kindled.-& X. To light (a fire). ,' 0

12, aor. & To r i d e violently, beat to death. ? &I.' ay~vt part. pass. Killed by a blow from a club.

.,a

,i, a 0 r . X To k g A dmn, mahe ded; to sit quiet (with>) ; 2 Bit quiet I fem. plur. imperat. ;

a; S\f see j. j, n.a. Deafness. A heavy s 0,

burthen. iLi, Kindness and long-suffering.- ')' 11. TO revere.

4 - nor. fc" To fdl, befall, fall upon'(with & and >) ; to be incumbent upon (with &) ; to come to pass, to be confirmed, aa at 7 v. 115 ; to fall down into (with 4). y\, part. act. Falling upon (with ty> or J of pen.); that

'0 02 which comes to pass; +1Ã§ I That which will surely come to paas, the inevitable Day of

a1

Judgment. k) noun of unity, A coming to s ..<'-

pass. &\y* (2nd declension) plur. of Ã ˆ J The time or place of falling.-% part. act. 111. f. One who falls into (with acc.).-,S'} IV. To bring about, excite-enmity-(with /I, ',

,,, CP^ f ' Ã‘Ã aor. -,, Imperat. 4 To stand, make to

stand, as Ã6yU 37 v. 24, "And make them to stand (before the Judgment seat of God) ; " SO

S Pi- /Â

a with & at 6 v. 30. >Ã‘Ã part. pass. Made to stand (with 'G).

</ J, nor. &., Imperat. - To keep, preserve; to L? defend, keep one safe from (with double ace.). 4' for ^J part. act. One who keeps safe, n ^ , ,

&fender, protector. Ã£& Devout, see &. ill; Fear, and "3 (2nd declension) Fear of God, reverence, piety, are irregular nouns of action (D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 293) thought by

, , some to be derived from the viii. f., see JU ;

^ 9 / L - - i- 9 ,-, the words *&w pbl, 47 v. 19 are by some explained, "And he shall show them what to fear or avoid ;" by others, " He will give them (the reward of) their piety."-$\ VIII. To take heed to one's-self, to fear; also to fear God, to be devout. ,& is found in som

6, copies for A&y at 24 v. 51, bat this must be

^ 6 - regarded as a license; some read ->AÃ‘>. D. 8. 9 3 4 ,

Gr. T. 1, p. 252 ; ysu LJ 2 v. 38 before a pause, for y t-* " Fear me I " D. S. Or. T. 2, p.

6 9 S -11 Â¥ f i t 497. +. for *-Plur. yy-Ã part. act. ' One who fears God, devout.

I., , li, To take up a burthen.-Vy V. To lean (with &).-El VIII. To recline (with &). $ part. act. Reclining (with > and &). A / Ul^ A place where any one reclines, a day couch or "Triclinium," and hence a banquet.

i, aor. ^J To stand s t i ~ l . - ~ G i n.a. 11. f. Con- firmation, ratification.

3; a 0 r . X To strike with the fist. 3, aor. J<i To commit anything into another's

keeping, ^y One who takes care of anything for another, the guardian of one's interests, a patron, administrator, disposer of afairs, the witness to a bargain; 9;

4 v. 83, " And God is all ~ufficient aa a guardian," see u-3' , 11. To appoint one keeper or guardian over, or entrnst one with the care of anything (with ace. of pers. and -f . of thing).-J?i; V. To put trust in any one,

s '"'f and especially in God (with, &). JSÃ , part. act. One who puts his trust in another. aor. J. i To diminish, defraud one of anything (with ace. of pers. and thing). 2; aor. 8 To enter (with dl. An ultimate friend.-@ IT. To cause to enter [with acc. and 2. Y, 3; aor. J>L To bring forth, or s" beget offspring; Pass. AJ' To be born, J. sing. and plur. Isme, offspring, a child, a son; Plur. Children. ^\y part. act. One who begets, a parent, a father, and ~ J J G A mother; Dual ~ & g i " T h e parents, father and mother ; ,&@l14 v. 42, l 1 And to both my parent8 ;" D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 459. 9; Bur . a A

S - 0 child, youth. iy* part. pass. One who is 9S^,

born, a child; d & One to whom a child is born, a father.

J; aor. To be very near to any one, either as kindred or neighbours (with ace.). 45 for 3 part. act. One who guards over the public

-Ã 6%

safety. f. Plms .'U,l (2nd dwleiuiod

Near, a friend, patron, benefactor, helper, protector; at 2 v. 283 q; would seem to have nearly the same meaning as '& q.v. ; at 27 v. 50 i t refers to the avenger of blood, who, as mentioned a t 17 v. 35, is to be the heir or next of kin; at 19 v. 5 @< may be rendered i t Heir apparent," or " next of kin," 60 also at 8 v. 73 ; the passage at 17 v. I l l is explained

S f

under the word JJ q.v. *I) n.a. Help, the act of taking as a friend, or appointing as

I,. u t, - ' -Â¥- ' *

heir, aa t , fl @I, fl 'A' I; 8 7. 73, where the meaning would seem to be, " I t is in no wise right for you to appoint them as your heirs." $ for "J (2nd declension) ; Dual y^-J^ comp, form, Nearer, more or most near of kin, more worthy, more proper, nearest (with IT- and J) ; 1.1 j?, see IT. f. & Plur. >\yf (2nd declension) A lord, corn- p i o n , protector, a patron or client; a mÃ‘te or servant; at 44 v. 41 i t is found with both them meanings, or i t may in both instances be rendered partner; one newly related by blood, as at 4 v. 37, or a

( f? 'I,-Â 0

nephew, u at 19 v. 6; ^y 57 v. 14, "It ia the proper place for you," or " a place nigh unto you," JG being here considered u a noun of place, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 302.-

11. To nilreat, turn the back (with J'l or 2, or with the w o r d s ; ~ T o r f t ! &I; it is nometimes found with a double ace., thus U P 9 8 0 - b w f b 0 - ^yvJi f yj, &, 8 T, 16, " And lie who tarÃ hia back Ã§nt them on that day ; l1 to eaase to turn towards (with double ace.); to turn away (with ace. and 2) ; to turn-one's face-towards (with double ace.) ; to set one over, or give me authority over (with double

tcc.); If & 4 v. 115, "We will put i t into his power to follow the bont of his in-

G -, ? dination." Jf for & part. act. IIe. who causes one to turn towards a thing; thus, q G 3 2 v. 143, " I t is He-God-who turns

.-.1 a ? (them) towards i t ; l1 the other ace. A,! J I I Every nation," being understood.-<;> IV.

/ . ,'-l To cause to draw nigh; L-^J 75 v. 34, "Woe unto thee! " Lk " May He-God- cause (evil) todraw nigh unto thee," or "May it-evil-draw sigh unto thee," the preterite being here fw the optative; D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 16%-22 V. To turn back, turn one's back; to Mire (with d:); to turn away (with c / d) ; to adopt or choose any one-as a friend -(with ace. of pers.), as at 5 v. 61 ; to take upon one's-self, as 'i,i 2; $T, 2-1 v. 11, "And lie who hath taken upon himself to aggravate i t ; " to be put in authority, as a t 47 v. 24 ; Instances are not uncommon in which the il of the second person aorist is omitted, as \Tg for g$ 11 v. 3, see D. S. Gr. T. 1, p. 221.

.f^"^ k+J, And verily he shall be, see i , G . 00 ei) aor. ^_ To be slack or negligent (with 2).

f ..- 2; aor, -4, Imprat . & To gin?, bestow; to restore, as at 38 v. 42 (witli ace. and J).

a 5 -- &; A free aiul liberal giver; + ' a ~ An epithet of the Deity.

Ã A< aor. A? To burn. :6; Brightly hn i ing . .-Â

L' -' t- pl aor. & To be weak, faint,, infirm, languid,

s Ã‡.

rcnlisa (with J). y Weakness, faintness ; w LÃ 31 v. 13, "With weakness upon ^ c-

weakness." L,:J (2nd declension) coinp. form, 5 9

Weakest.-&* part. act. IV. f. One who makes weak.

20 0 J'; aor, > To b8 tomi A' Ft". LJ', part. act. 0

Torn, rent. 1st an interjection regarded by some M an abbrevia-

tion of & q.v. ; i t take* the affix &'of the second person, and may then be translated Woe unto theel In some copies we find>U^> as one word, in which case i t may be considered as composed of the interjection i Ã Oh ! or Ah l and'% As if; according to mine I^J; is equivalent to 8 Know, an interpretation

itOaffix, of the first person singular, Me, my, frequently spelt and pronounced A; when affixed to a verb it is written ,& it is not unfrequently omitted u >_,; for $, 0 ya # for ^2\ eto., D. 8. Q ~ . T . 1, p. 457 et nq.

$ 0 ! a vocative particle governing the nominative and accus. cases, D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 89. it me $1 viii. f. ofl1.

9 f 0 _,& (2nd declension) Qog, name of a tribe of 9 9 . barbarians near the Caspian Sea, v. Ã‘ t*.

0 b 0

U-i aor. (Ã& D, 8. Gr. T. 1, p, 240, To deepair (with &); at 13 v. 30 it is used with 3, and is there generally understood to mean to know. Despairing, desperate.-&=l X. To reject all hope, despair (with }.

&& collective noun, Rubies; a word of Persian origin. & aor. cond. of J q.v.

e 0 0

yrt &> s - dy. *. D~JWU, dry. y^b part. act. That which is dry or withered.

' Ã ‡ . / ii&u act. viii. f. of q.7.

which it may well bear at 28 v. 82, where it occura; see D. S. Or. T. 1, p. 580.

3; A great misfortune, woe ; no verbal root ; this word is commonly employed as an interjection with J, as 7 2 v. 73, "Then woe to them," or with an affixed pronoun as >i 46 v. 16, " (They say) Alaa for thee !

^Â¥^Â¥t 0

Believe." g; Shame, as &,, li. (for &) 11 v. 75, "Alas my shame!" D. 8. Gr. T. 2, p. 90, note.

a000 -* wr. cond. v. f. of \An q.v. l G w * aor. v. f. of Â¥ for q.v.

and fti SOT. '6 To be an orphan. Plot. & (2nd dedouion) An orphan. . I ^ Â - 0 uH - &*

$5 (2nd declen~ion) Yathreb, the origin*! n-8 . of Medina.

r ? I," , . , Black smoke, said to be derived from q.v. s- 0 . ~ k i see 0%. PGÃ ^ .0 ^

-;A[ aor. v. f. of,+ q.v. 0 t^ && 3rd pen. fern. plur. aor. iv. f. of cG q.v.

i<>u To touch or irij'we in the hand. for >% n.a. feminine, A Lund; Dual &, oblique

t s 0 0

@ A>, and when in oonnexion with a complement \A and ; Plur. iff for - ' b e %I D. 0. Or. T. 1, p. Ill; the phrase n, 9 T. 29 admits of divers interpretations; according to one it means that payment should be made by the hand of the parties themselves without the intervention of a third person ; or it may

mean willingly, or by a ready money payment u 0 - / ' 0 I-/

or in token of subjection; <I>+ ^J Before him in his presence ; Lit. between his two hands ,@Ti &~T'IJ! 38 v. 45, " Men of powel

5 and prudence," Lit. "Gifted with hands am eyes;" ji. \nl 7 v. 148, an idiomatic expression meaning " They repented bitterly; ' the idea seems to be that they bit their finger1 in grief and contrition, but i t is rather hintec at than expressed ; see c.

9:" , / ., J+ aor. of,+ q.v. < aor. cond. iv. f. of ill, q.v. , &

ti^^ Yd seen, initial letters of the 36th chapter, set

. ,, 77. / I," fi, a 0 r . e . To play at dice, to be easy. ,* n.a Facility, ease, that which is easy. Small

Â¥ /-

easy; 33 v. 14, A little while. 6 -

(2nd declension) Prosperity; it may also bt {,he fern. of the comp. form, More or most easy

' 9Ãˆ,P ;!pH i-S,Ã‘i 87 v. 8, "And we will facilitatti . for thee-or prepare thee for-the easiest (waj in matters of faith)," or " the way of happi-

s <-. S n." nrss." J Ã ˆ ~ Drawing lots. J~ part. pass, 9 6 , ^U / - Facilitated; \iw I f 17 v. 30, "A kind

m " / -"" word." <'- A time of ease or convenience,

-/a, - - 11. To facilitate, make easy (with ace, and J or u, or with double ace.) ; to second any one or help one forward (with ace. of pers,

^ "L.'Â¥I and J I . - ~ V. To be e a s y . - - \ X. To be easy.

9 0 , / -'.o-ff , (2nd declension) and with the article Ã‡-Ã 1

Elisha. 0 f - ' u*. 3rd pers. masc. plur. aor, of L& q,v,

Bee 2, 9 9 . ve, (2nd declension) Jacob.

9 9" ~ x ; (2nd declension) Ya'ook, name of an Idol

worshipped originally before the Flood, and afterwards by the Pagan Arabs.

<- .<-.-Â /Â¥ ,. . see (_>iff for 4. Ã‘> Yaghooth, name of an Idol of the Pagan

9 9. Arabs, see J~JJ. 0 ^ 9

i yy see 4. && A gourd, probably derived from & To

inhabit. ' 4 ;A> aor. a. ; also && To be vigilant. plur. of

f& Watchful, awake. . s --Â , aor. a. To be certain, & Certain, a certainty, that which is certain, as death at 15 v. 99, and 74 v. 48 ; L.&J Surely, of a certainty.- / <+'.* IV. aor. , >i To know for certain, firmly believe, feel a certainty about (with v) ; to . form a right judgment. & part. act. One who believes 'firmly, or forms a right judg-

Â¥' ,L,b s ,.I,"- / merit,-+\ X. To believe firmly. ,,y+~ part. act. One who is firmly assured.

& see 3 ' u x o r &e ^Â

, / pass. for ,,, ; no active voice, To be thrown into r" 2" the sea. *> A sea, flood ; a river, as at 20 v. ,fi". ' 39.- Ã - V. To aim at getting for one's-self,

choose for one's-self. , .

Â¥Ã‡ aor. t*; To place (a corpse) on its right side S -l.l in the p a w . ^-/w Plur. ..,&I fem. The right

hand, an oath, power; Ã£,-*-!< 37 v, 28, Lit. "From the right hand," meaning with a good omen, or with force, or with an oath, etc. .. ..-- -" L . gj (2nd declension) The right (hand). & The right hand. -

s 91, Â¥- , "/- * Â£ plur. of ey-i A fountain, rt. Ã‡Ã q.v$ f

0 P, 9 4. -; nor. To be ripe, Ã§Â¥ n.a. Ripeness, the act of coming to maturity.

5; generic nocn, Jews. &; Of the Jewish nation.

& aor. iv. f. of 21 q.v. 9 1 0 .iy aor. of id for J)! q.v.

'1 ^ffi aor. conditional ii. f. of &dl q.v. 0 <- :'l, d,dfi, 3rd pers. fern. plur. aor. paaa. iv. f. of

q.v. S1. 0 t 0

L/"^ see U** "' , -a"a*> (2nd declension) Joseph.

. Ã ˆ y,cy. 3rd pera. plur. aor. iv. f. of $ q.v.

. 9 f , , u& 3rd pers. plur. aor. iv. f. of & q.v.

# /It0 tg aor. 6% To be or exkt for a day. Plur. s a rbl A day, the civil day of 24 hours; a day of battle, thus at 45 v. 13, where the words

mean thoae days when i t might please God to bestow victory on the Moslems ; 0<J0 , -a ,+JJ On that day, on a certain day; ,+$I To- . * TI-"

day, on this day. Then, on that day, a ^ word composed of ;f and ^\ or a\, D. 8. Or. T. 1, p. 521.

ÃJ (2nd declension) Jonah.

FINIS.

E R R A T A . --

r ~ o i eat. LINE

9 2 23/i &]Tread i<cT 13 1 24 read, . 23 2 19./or d'i read dl. 25 1 6 lines from bottom for teschdeed read

teshdeed. 28 2 12 for & red&. 70 2 21 for Schechinah read Shechinah.

?AOi COL, U N Z

91 2 5 lines from bottomjor Those who purify, etc., read One who purifies himself, or is clean, pure.

107 1 7 for o. and i. read a. US 1 last line but one *>J ahould come after

JGp.113. f. -"

139 1 8 for plur. of fiLi-, rt. read part., act. iii. f. of.

NINETYNINE NAMES OF ALLAH By: Muhammad Iqbal Siddiqui

We all praise and solicit His blessings. Allah is the only One God. "Allah" is a proper noun par excellence in a consolidated from. No plural can be formed out of it nor any derivation is possible. It connotes the attributes of Perfection and Beauty. Allah is the name of the Divine One, as distinguished from all other attributive names called Asma-ul-Husna, the most excellent names. His ninety-nine attributes are not only individually complete but perfect in their harmony. They blend as the hue of the rainbow. Brief notes on Asma-ul-Husna given in this book are aimed at explaining to the faithful the meaning and significance of individual attributes. This book on the subject is indeed a remarkable work in English.

&my 8 ~ 0 PP. 178 IInd Edition 1991 Rs. 60.00

THE FAMILY LAWS OF ISLAM M . I. Siddiqui

I Islam it a complete code of life which aims at the spiritual, political, economic and social development of the human society as a whole. This book is not merely a book on the Islamic Law of Marriage but also deals with other allied subjects such as Dower, Dowry, Divorce etc. The subject of marital rights and obligations has been dealt with in the light of the Holy Qur'an and the Sunnah. Demy 8vo PP VII + 278 Rs. 68.00

ISLAM FORBIDS FREE MIXING OF MEN AND WOMEN M .I. Siddiqui

In this book an attempt has been made to present the true position of the sexes in islam and their mutual relationship and role in society. The concept of sex equality, the significance of I

purdah; The woman's role in the family; the modren woman's freedom movements and the 1 problems created by promiscuous sex relations are fully treated in the light of the holy Qur'an

and authentic traditions.

Dem y 8vo XI1 + 164 IInd Edition 1991 Rs. 60.00

WOMEN IN ISLAM M .Mazheruddin. Siddiqui

The position of women under Islam has been the subject of repeated controversy among educated Muslims ever since they came under the impact of Western civilisation. In this book the author has ably tried to show how Islamic injunction in regard to the regula- tion of sex and family life can be adapted to modern conditions without departing from the principles underlying them. Dem y 8vo PP VIII + 160 IIIrd Edition 1990 Rs. 50.00

INTRODUCTION TO QUR'AN Dr. Muhammad Adil, M.A., LL.B., Ph.D.

This is an introduction to the Holy Book-A1 Qur'an in a simple language specially meant for young generation. Its basic teachings and commandments have been presented with convinc- ing arguments. Text of some selected suras with transliteration, translation and simple commentary has been given. A useful book for students.

Demy 8vo PP VIII + 140 IInd Edition 1990 Rs. 50.00

THE LIFE OF SALADIN Beha-Ad-Din

The author is known by his surname. He was professor at the College Menazil-e-lzz at Old Cairo When he visited Sultan he appointed him Kadi-el- Askar and Hakim of Jerusalem.

He accompanied the Sultan on Many important cornpaigns and watched him at close quarters. So this is the most authentic history on the life of Sultan Salah-ud-Din Ajyyoobi.

Demy 8vo PP XX + 420 IInd Edition in India Reprirt India 1991 Rs. 300.00

STUDIES IN ISLAMIC HISTORY AND CULTURE Prof. S.M. Yusuf

The book throws light on the motives prompting the early Wars of Islam and the strategy and the art of war of the muslim commanders. It also gives an account of the dealings of Muslim conquerors and administrators with the followers of other religious. There is a remarkable discussion of the social and Economic change which over took the Muslim Society during the reign of caliph 'Uthman'. The book contains a detailed account of the activities of Arab mariners and merchents. It fully brings out the part played by the muslims in International Commerce and the Position enjoyed by them in the eyes of the local rulers in the region.

Demy 8vo PP VIII + 244 IInd Edition Rs. 125.00

Adam Publishers & Distributors Shandar Market Chitli Qabar Delhi-110006

penrice-1873

Documents

j o h n p e n r i c

n wages

o n e w h o

fixed term

word u

grammatical root

appointed term

p bccub